SF9 5x5 5x3 Series (SM)

IE-02192-01
RISO SF9/5x5/5x3
TECHNICAL MANUAL
REVISION 1.0
October 2016
Copyright: 2016 RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION

All Rights Reserved. This Technical Manual was prepared and written for the
exclusive use of RISO International Group Certified Dealers. Reproduction and/or
transmittal of this material in any form or by any means, including photocopying
or recording of the information is strictly prohibited without the consent of RISO
KAGAKU CORPORATION.
RISO Inc. Technical Operations US.RISO.COM

RISO Digital Duplicator
SF9 Series
SF5*5 Series
SF5*3 Series
CHAPTER 1 : Maintenance Notes
CHAPTER 2 : Structural Overview
CHAPTER 3 : Main Drive Section
CHAPTER 4 : First Paper Feed Section
CHAPTER 5 : - - - - - - - - - - -
CHAPTER 6 : Second Paper Feed Section
CHAPTER 7 : Press Section
CHAPTER 8 : Paper Ejection Section
CHAPTER 9 : Print Drum Section
CHAPTER 10 : Clamp Unit Section
CHAPTER 11 : Master Removal Section
CHAPTER 12 : FB Scanning Section
CHAPTER 13 : AF Scanning Section
CHAPTER 14 : - - - - - - - - - - -
CHAPTER 15 : - - - - - - - - - - -
CHAPTER 16 : Master Making Section
CHAPTER 17 : Panel Messages
CHAPTER 18 : Test Modes
CHAPTER 19 : Other Precautions
CHAPTER 20 : Wiring Diagrams
CHAPTER 21 : Electric Components

CHAPTER 1: Maintenance Notes
Contents
1. Work Precautions..................................................................................5
1-1. General Notes on the Work..........................................................5
1-2. Notes on other inspection and maintenance work........................5
1-3. Sensors Being Used.....................................................................6
2. Tools.......................................................................................................7
3. JIGs.........................................................................................................8
4. Exterior Cover Removal........................................................................9
5. Opening the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB Assembly and the Power Supply
Unit Assembly......................................................................................14
6. Installation Procedure.........................................................................15
6-1. Machine......................................................................................16
6-2. Auto Document Feeder AF-VII....................................................19
6-3. Card Feed Kit..............................................................................28
6-4. Envelope Feed Kit.......................................................................39
6-5. RISO IS300 Controller................................................................40
6-6. Wide Stacking Tray.....................................................................42
6-7. RISO Stand N Type III................................................................44
6-8. RISO Stand D Type III................................................................46
6-9. RISO DRUM STORAGE STAND S III........................................49
6-10. IC CARD READER ACTIVATION KIT RG..................................51
6-11. Job Separator IV : NIII................................................................59
6-12. Key/Card Counter IV...................................................................83
6-13. RISO NETWORK KIT S10..........................................................96
1-1
Preface
This manual provides Technical Service Information for the digital duplicator Model SF series.
This manual provides procedures for removing and installing major components. Following these procedures
will minimize machine malfunctions. The information given in this book will enhance the technical knowledge
of the technical representatives and lead to the end-user-satisfaction.
1-2
CAUTION
[Handling of Lithium Battery]
- Never fail to follow the following instructions when you discard the used
lithium battery.
1. Never let the battery short-circuited.

If the (+) and (-) terminals contact each other or metal materials, the battery will
be short-circuited. If the batteries are collected and stored inorderly or one upon
another, the above-mentioned case will occur.
- DANGER -
If the battery is short-circuited, it will heat up and may in some cases explode into
fire.
2. Never heat up the battery.
- DANGER -
If you heat the battery up to more than 100 degrees Celsius or put it into the fire, it
may burn dangerously or explode.
3. Never disassemble the battery or press it into deformation.
- DANGER -
If you disassemble the battery, the gas pouring out of the inside may hurt your
throat or the negative lithium may heat up into fire.
If the battery is pressed into deformation, the liquid inside may leak out of the
sealed part or the battery may be short-circuited inside an explode.
4. Never fail to keep the battery out of reach of children.
If you put the battery within reach of children, they may swallow it down.
Should they swallow the battery, immediately consult the doctor.
[Replacement of the Lithium Battery]

1. The lithium battery must be replaced by a trained and authorized service
technician.
2. The battery must be replaced only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
3. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
[Remplacement de la batterie au lithium] < French >

1. La batterie au lithium doit être remplacée par un technicien de maintenance
formé et agréé.
2. La batterie de rechange doit être d’un type identique ou équivalent à celui
recommandé par le fabricant.
3. Éliminez les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
[Battery Directive 2006/66/EC]

When you remove batteries from this product and dispose them, discard
them in accordance with the domestic law concerning disposal.
Take appropriate action on waste batteries because the collection systems in
the EU on waste batteries are regulated.
Refer to this Technical Manual (Chapter: 19-4-1) for how to remove batteries
in a safe manner.
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply,
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
This product may contain certain substances which are restricted when disposed.
Therefore, be sure to consult your contracted service dealer.
1-3
Warning
!! WARNING !!
Important Safety Precautions
1. Always disconnect electrical supply before placing hands in the machine.
I. To avoid injuries:
Be sure to disconnect the electrical power before disassembling, assembling, or when
making adjustments on the machine.
II. Protection of the machine:

Make sure to turn OFF the power to the machine before plugging or unplugging the electrical
connectors, or when connecting a Meter.

2. Always connect electrical connectors firmly.
I. To avoid electrical failure:

The connectors must be connected firmly together and onto the PCBs.
Press on the ends of the connectors and then on the middle to ensure a firm fit.
II. Protection of the electrical components:

The electrical components may be damaged due to short circuits caused by a loose
connector.
Wire harness connector
FIRST
Press the ends.
THEN
Press the center, firmly.
1-4
1. Work Precautions
1-1. General Notes on the Work
 Always unplug the power plug before conducting maintenance work.

 Do the work with care so as not to get tie, clothes, long hair, etc. be caught in the machine.

In case the work is conducted unavoidably while the power is turned on, perform with the extreme
care.
 Work while operating the machine is not allowed.
 Be careful to avoid injury caused by springs or the sharp edges of sheet metal.
 Remove your watch or rings when they obstruct the work.
1-2. Notes on other inspection and maintenance work
Inspection
If you discover any defects or problems during an inspection, fix the problems or if necessary, take steps
for such as replacing a part.
Removal
Check the problem area. At the same time, examine the cause of the problem and determine whether
the part needs to be removed or disassembled. Then, proceed according to the procedures presented
in the Technical Manual. In cases where, for example, it is necessary to disassemble areas with large
numbers of parts, parts which are similar to each other, or parts which are the same on the left and right,
sort the parts so that you do not mix them up during reassembly.
(1) Carefully sort the removed parts.
(2) Distinguish between parts which are to be replaced and those which will be reused.
(3) When replacing screws, etc., be sure to use the specified sizes.
Assembly and Installation

Unless specified otherwise, perform the removal procedures in reverse during assembly and installation.
In cases where protrusions or holes are provided to assist in positioning parts, use them for accurate
positioning and securing.
Half-pierced section
(Protrusions and holes for positioning parts Half pierced section)
1-5
Note
The machine is comprised of many gears. When inspecting or replacing parts, apply grease to the gears.
If they are not properly greased, the gears may make abnormal sounds, and malfunctions or mechanical
problems may occur.
Electrical system work Wiring bundle bands (bar lock ties)

> Always unplug the power plug before the conducting
maintenance work.
> After removing wire bundles, fasten the wires with
wire bundle bands (bar lock ties) during reinstallation
so that they will not sag.
> When installing parts, be careful to avoid pinching or
damaging the wire bundles. If a fuse blows, always
replace it with one with the specified capacity.
> Using a fuse with a larger capacity can not only
damage parts, but may cause fires.
> Be careful not to drop image scanners, thermal print
heads, and other sensors as they can be easily
damaged.
1-3. Sensors Being Used
• Always turn off the power before plugging or unplugging sensor connectors.
Photoelectric sensor types

• Photoelectric sensors may be broadly divided into the following five types: interrupt types (U-shaped),
actuator types, reflective types, transmitting types and reflective (prism) types.
Interrupt types Actuator types
Sender
Sender
Receiver
Receiver
Reflective types Reflective (prism) types
Transmitting types
Sender Sender
Receiver Sender
Receiver Receiver Prism Lens
1-6
Switch types
• Micro-switches may be divided between normally open (N.O.) types and normally closed (N.C.) types.
• With an (N.O.) connection, an internal contact is connected when the switch actuator is pressed.
• With an (N.C.) connection, an internal contact is disconnected when the switch actuator is pressed.
N.C. N.C.
N.O. N.O.
COM COM
2. Tools
Using tools other than those specified can lead to injury or damage to screws and parts. Have all the tools
necessary for the work available.
[ Standard Tool List ]

Type Tip size Shaft length, etc. Type Remarks
No. 2 (250 mm) Steel scale 150 mm
No. 2 (100 mm–150 mm) Feeler gauge

Phillips screwdriver
No. 2 (stubby type) Radial cutting pliers
No. 1 (75 mm–100 mm) Pliers
6 mm (100 mm–150 mm) Nipper
Standard screwdriver 3 mm (100 mm–150 mm) Small flashlight

1.8 mm (precision type) Multimeter
Nut driver 8 mm (100 mm–150 mm) Soldering iron 20 W–30 W
(box driver) 7 mm (100 mm–150 mm) File Flat, round
High frequency driver 2.5 mm
5 mm 5.5 mm 7 mm
Spanners 8 mm 10 mm 13 mm
Monkey
5.0 mm 4.0 mm 3.0 mm

Hex wrenches 2.5 mm 2.0 mm 1.5 mm
(For 3.0mm, 2 pieces required )
1-7
3. JIGs
021-16007-005 Screen Spring (2 pieces required) Cut the

ring end to make into hook, as shown on the photograph, and
attach wire tie bar on the other end.
Jig: 8mm (diameter) x 160mm (length) Jig: 4 mm (diameter) x 120 mm (length)

(2 pieces required) 024-75064-006
016-16141-003
* Parts number are those of June 2016. The number may be subject to change without notice.
1-8
4. Exterior Cover Removal
Front cover
Remove the Front cover together with the Front door by removing screws (M4×8screw; 4pcs,
M4×10screw; 2pcs, Shoulder screw; 3pcs).
Caution in mounting the Front cover back on the machine:
Mount the screws in the order from [1] to [9], as indicated on the sketch below. Reduce stress on the
front cover to prevent breakage.
Master making unit front cover

a Pull out the Master making unit and turn OFF the machine power.
b Remove screws (M4×8screw; 4pcs) from the Master making unit front cover to remove it.
Master making unit front cover
Front door e
Round hole d
Round hole c
Round hole
(Shoulder screw) (Shoulder screw) (Shoulder screw)
b
Elongated hole
(M4×8screw)
i
Elongated hole
(M4×8screw)
a
Round hole
h
Round hole (M4×8screw)
(M4×8screw)
Front cover
f
Elongated hole g
Elongated hole
(M4×10 screw) (M4×10 screw)
1-9
Stage cover
• Remove by the following procedure.
a Open the Stage cover and pull it up until the hinge get caught.
b Lay it down toward the rear side.
c Pull it out in the upward direction, keeping it laid down.
Side cover (paper ejection)

• Remove screws (M4×8screw; 2pcs), and remove the Side cover (paper ejection).
Cover (rear right)

a Remove the following covers.
- Rear cover
- Scanner cover (rear)
- Scanner cover (paper ejection)
b Remove screws (M4×8screw; 2pcs), and remove the Cover (rear right).
Scanner cover (paper ejection)
Stage cover Side cover (paper ejection)
Cover
(rear right)
1 - 10
Rear cover
• Remove screws (M4×8screw; 4pcs), and remove the Rear cover.
Side cover (paper feed)

a Remove the Scanner cover (paper feed).
b Remove screws (M4×8screw; 2pcs), and remove the Side cover (paper feed).
Cover (rear left)

a Remove the following covers.
- Rear cover
- Stage cover
- Scanner cover (rear)
- Scanner cover (paper feed)
b Remove screws (M4×8screw; 2pcs), and remove the Cover (rear left).
Operation panel Scanner cover (paper feed)
Scanner cover (rear)
Rear cover
1 - 11
* The illustration is the appearance of SF5*5 series

Side cover (paper ejection)
Stage cover
Cover (rear right)
Rear cover: SF5*5 series/SF5*3 series Cover (rear left)
1 - 12
Around the Scanner

• Remove mounting screws (M4×8screw; 2pcs), and remove the Scanner cover (rear).
Scanner cover (paper feed)

a Remove the Scanner cover (rear).
b Remove mounting screws (M4×8screw; 2pcs), and remove the Scanner cover (paper feed).
Scanner cover (paper ejection)

a Remove the Scanner cover (rear).
b Remove mounting screws (M4×8screw; 4pcs), and remove the Scanner cover (paper ejection).
Operation panel
a Remove mounting screws (M4×8screw; 3pcs).
b Slide the Operation panel to the front and then lift it up, unplug the connector and remove the
Operation panel from the machine.
1 - 13
5. Opening the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB Assembly and the Power Supply Unit Assembly
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB Assembly
a Switch OFF the power, and remove the Rear cover.
b Remove mounting screws (M4×8screw; 4pcs), and slowly swing open the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB
Assembly.
Power Supply Unit Assembly

a Switch OFF the power,
b Remove mounting screws (M4×8screw; 4pcs), and slowly swing open the Power Supply Unit
Assembly.
Power Supply Unit Assembly MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB Assembly
1 - 14
6. Installation Procedure
List of installation procedure

Compatible models
No. Installation procedure Installation procedure no.
SF9 series SF5*5 series SF5*3 series
1 Auto Document Feeder AF-VII A A A 059-36013
2 Card Feed Kit J I H 046-36114
3 Envelope Feed Kit A A A 046-36029
4 RISO IS300 Controller A - - 101-36025
5 Wide Stacking Tray A*1 A*1 A*1 030-06046
6 RISO Stand N Type III A A A 059-36036
7 RISO Stand D Type III A A A 059-36037
8 RISO DRUM STORAGE STAND S III A A A 059-36038
9 IC CARD READER ACTIVATION KIT RG A A A 059-36042
10 Job Separator IV : NIII H H H 113-36006
11 Key/Card Counter IV E E E 112-36004
12 RISO NETWORK KIT S10 Standard Standard A 059-36015
*1: The service parts of “Wide stacking tray arm F” and “Wide stacking tray arm R” are required separately.
How to use the installation procedure

1) Confirm the machine model and optional accessory you want to install.
2) Find the symbol in the crossed field of compatible model and optional accessory from above “List of
installation procedure”.
3) Read the installation procedure, and perform the work corresponding to the symbol in the crossed
field.
[Example]
• Objective: Install the “Card Feed Kit” to SF9 series.
• Confirm the crossed field of SF9 series and “Card Feed Kit” from above “List of installation procedure”.
The symbol in the crossed field is “J”, then perform the work corresponding to the “J” model in the
installation procedure.
1 - 15
6-1. Machine
1 - 16
1 - 17
1 - 18
6-2. Auto Document Feeder AF-VII
Auto Document Feeder AF-VII

Installation Procedure
Installation has to be done by an authorized technical expert.
Please read "TECHNICAL MANUAL" of the applicable model about work precautions.
Types of Applicable Printers Packing List

For details, refer to "The Table of Applicable This package contains the following items.
Printers". 1. Auto Document Feeder AF-VII.................1 pc.
2. ADF sheet (monochrome sheet) ................1 pc.
3. Glass blind plate........................................1 pc.
4. Screw cap................................................5 pcs.
5. AF retaining screw ....................................1 pc.
6. Reuse band................................................1 pc.
7. Original presser sheet ................................1 pc.
8. Installation Procedure (this document) .. 1 copy
9. The Table of Applicable Printers ........... 1 copy
10. Declaration of conformity (for eu only) .. 1 copy
11. Specified Substances List (for China) ... 1 copy
1. Turn off the main power switch of the

Platen cover printer and unplug the power cord.
Important: Be sure to turn off the
printer and perform work
while power is not supplied
(1) to the printer. (Not just the
switch, but pull out the plug
as well.)
2. Remove the Platen cover using the

following procedure.
(1) Pull up until the hinges are caught.
(2) Tilt to the rear side.
(3) While tilted, pull out upward.
NOTE: The removed cover is not reused.
(3)
(2)
1
1 - 19
3. Remove the Scanner cover; rear.

(2 screws)
4. Cut off the part shown in the

illustration on the left.
Cut off
Scanner cover; rear
5. Remove the Rear cover.

(4 screws)
Rear cover
6. Attach the AF unit.

AF unit
7. Fasten the AF retaining screw to the

right hinge. (1 screw)
2
1 - 20
8. Attach a Reuse band 200 ± 10 mm

from the base of the wire harness.
200 ± 10 mm
Reuse band
9. Secure the wire harness with the two

existing wire saddles and the Reuse
Wire saddle band.
NOTE: Insert the Reuse band into part
(A).
(A) Reuse band
10. Lead the wire harness as illustrated

Wire saddle on the left and connect it to CN3 and
CN35 of the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB.
11. Secure the wire harness with the six

existing wire saddles and the edge
saddle.
Edge saddle
CN3
CN35
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB
3
1 - 21
12. Replace the Scanner cover; rear to the

Be careful of caught wires printer. (2 screws)
Important: Lead the wire harness of
the ADF unit through the
hole cut out in step 4 while
making sure the wire har-
ness does not get caught.
13. Replace the Rear cover.
(4 screws)
Scanner cover; rear
4
1 - 22
14. Attach the screw caps. (5 pcs.)

15. Affix the ADF sheet (monochrome
sheet).
Screw cap Important: • Clean with alcohol before
affixing the ADF sheet
(monochrome sheet).
• Affix the ADF sheet
(monochrome sheet)
using the standard below.
= Affixing standard =
źHorizontal direction
• With the black part of the ADF sheet
ADF sheet (monochrome sheet) on the left side, push and affix in the
direction of the arrow.
• The gap with the edge should be 0.5 mm
or less.
źFront/rear direction
• Do not affix over the raised surfaces.
Rear side
Do not affix over
raised surface
Front side
ADF sheet
(monochrome sheet)
Do not affix over

raised surface
0.5 mm or less
ADF sheet (monochrome sheet)
Push and affix in the

direction of the arrow
5
1 - 23
16. Affix the Glass blind plate.

Important: • Clean with alcohol before
affixing the glass blind
plate.
• Affix the glass blind plate
using the orientation and
position below.
= Affixing standard =
• Push and affix in the direction of the
arrow.
Glass blind plate źFront/rear direction
• Make sure the glass is not visible through
the gap when looking from the front side
and from the top.
• A distance of 3 to 4 mm from the edge of
the scanner unit.
Glass blind plate Scanner unit Panel unit
źOK
źNG
Glass blind plate
Push and affix in the

direction of the arrow
Scanner unit
3 to 4 mm
Panel unit
6
1 - 24
= Adjustment of Scanning Parameters =

If printed images are of a different size and/or by far offset when originals are scanned in the ADF unit,
compared with when scanned on the Glass platen, adjust the scanning parameters as follows.
1. Adjustment of scanning position (Compensation for printing position in

horizontal direction)
1) Start up the test mode of the printer and input the
Ɣ The printed image following test code.
scanned on the • Input the test code "3072".
Glass platen Bottom Top
2) Input a required value with print quantity keys to
compensate the vertical scanning start position.
The horizontal scanning position can be changed
by 0.5 mm. Be sure to input a multiple of "5
Ɣ The printed image
(five)". (ex. To shift the scanning position to the
scanned on the Left
left by 1mm, input "10".)
ADF unit
To shift the position to the right by 1mm, on the
Right other hand, input * before inputting "10".
3) Press the Start key to confirm the input value,
and press the Reset key more than one second to
quit the test mode.
4) Check if the vertical image size is the same as
when the original is scanned on the Glass platen.
Repeat the procedure in the above steps 1) to 4) until
obtaining an identical vertical image size.
2. Adjustment of scanning position (Compensation for starting position in

vertical direction)
Ɣ The printed image 1) Start up the test mode of the printer and input the
scanned on the following test code.
Glass platen Bottom Top • Input the test code "3073".
2) Input a required value with print quantity keys to
compensate the vertical scanning start position.
Print position difference The position is shifted 0.1mm per one step.
Ɣ The printed image (ex. To shift the scanning start position by 1mm
scanned on the upward, input "10".)
ADF unit To shift the position by 1mm downward, on the
Bottom Top
other hand, input * before inputting "10".
quit the test mode.
4) Check if the vertical image size is the same as
when the original is scanned on the Glass platen.
obtaining an identical vertical image size.
7
1 - 25
3. Adjustment of scanning speed (Compensation for printed image size in

vertical direction)
Ɣ The printed image 1) Start up the test mode of the printer and input the
scanned on the following test code.
Glass platen Bottom Top • Input the test code "3074".
2) Input a required value with print quantity keys
to compensate the scanning speed for vertical
Image size difference image size. The vertical image size is changed
Ɣ The printed image 0.1% per one step. (ex. To extend 300mm-long
scanned on the images by 3mm (1%), input "10".)
ADF unit To shorten them by 3mm, on the other hand,
Bottom Top
input * before inputting "10".
quit the test mode.
4) Check if the vertical printing position is the same
as when the original is scanned on the Glass
platen.
obtaining an identical horizontal print position.
4. Compensation for slanted printed images

1) Remove the Rear cover of the ADF unit. (5 screws)
2) Loosen the two screws on the slant adjuster.
3) Finely tune the degree of parallelism of the ADF
unit.
(Use the white resin and scale as guidelines.)
Move the ADF unit towards direction
(A) if printed images are slanted as
illustrated on the left.
Bottom Top
Move the ADF unit towards direction

(B) if printed images are slanted as
Rear cover illustrated on the left.
Bottom Top
4) Tighten the screws in step 2).

5) Check if printed images are squared in the same
way as when the original was scanned on the
Glass platen.
Resin squared printed images are obtained.
(A)
6) Replace the Rear cover of the ADF unit. (5 screws)
(B) Screw
8
1 - 26
= Work After Adjustment of Scanning Parameters =

17. Place the original presser sheet on the
Original presser sheet
Glass platen.
NOTE: • Place the sheet so that the sponge
side faces upward and the two
circular dents on the long side of
the sheet are at the front.
• To keep the original presser
sheet from adhering to the Glass
platen, place paper (Ledger or
A3 size) on the Glass platen in
advance.
Sponge = Standard =
• Push against the original stopper.
źFront/rear direction
• A distance of 2 to 3 mm from the printed
Circular dents
edge of the scanner glass.
18. Close the ADF unit gently and press it

down on the original presser sheet.
19. Gently open the ADF unit and check
that the original presser sheet is
Two circular dents at the front side secured.
Horizontal direction
Original stopper Original presser sheet
Front/rear direction
Push against the

original stopper
2 to 3 mm
Printed edge of the

Scanner glass scanner glass
9
1 - 27
6-3. Card Feed Kit
Card Feed Kit Installation Procedure

The following printer models are the intended basic This package contains the following items.
units for installing the Card Feed Kit. 1. Card Feed Unit ..................................... 1 pc.
RISO MZ7/9, MV76 series 2. Reverse Prevention ASSY *1 ................ 1 pc.
RZ9, RV96 series 3. High Torque Clutch *1 .......................... 1 pc.
For other models, refer to “The Table of Applicable 4. Clutch Bracket *1 .................................. 1 pc.
Printers”. 5. Detection Sensor *2 ............................... 1 pc.
6. Star Gear *1 ........................................... 1 set
7. Card Feed Unit Junction Wire Harness *3 .1 pc.
Nobody but Riso-authorized ser vice 8. Wire band *2 ......................................... 4 pcs.
representatives is allowed to install this unit. 9. Wire clamper *1 .................................... 1 pc.
*1 These parts are used for the Groups [A], [B], [C], 10. NK Clamper *4 ..................................... 1 pc.
[H], [I] models only.
11. Bearing Metal *1 ................................... 1 pc.
*2 These parts are not used for the Groups [A], [B],
[D], [H], [I] 12. Screws *2 .............................................. 1 set
and MZ7/9, MV76, RZ9, RV96 series models. 13. User’s Guide .......................................... 1 copy
*3 This part is used for the Group [G] models only.
*4 This part is used for the Groups [E], [G] models 14. Installation Guide (This manual) ........... 1 copy
only. 15. Declaration of conformity (For EU only).1 copy
= For the Groups [A], [B], [C], [H], [I], [J] models =
1. Turn the power off and unplug the power cord.
Important: Be sure to turn the power off and
unplug the power cord.
2. Remove the Rear Cover. (4 screws)
Rear Cover
3. Open the MECHA-CTL-PCB Bracket. (4 screws)
MECHA-CTL-PCB Bracket
4. Unplug the connector of the Paper Feed Clutch.

5. Remove the Paper Feed Clutch and the Clutch
Connector Bracket. (2 screws) (Bearing Metal 1 pc.)
Paper Feed Clutch
NOTE: The screws and the Bearing Metal are reused
Bearing Metal
later.
1
1 - 28
6. Assemble the High Torque Clutch and the Clutch

Bearing Metal
Bracket. (Bearing Metal 1 pc.)
Important: Reuse the Bearing Metal used at
procedure 5.
High Torque Clutch

Clutch Bracket
Connector 7. Secure the High Torque Clutch and the Clutch

Bracket with two screws removed at procedure 5.
8. Plug the connector of the High Torque Clutch.
High Torque Clutch
9. Attach the Star Gear to the axis of the High

One-way Clutch Torque Clutch.
Connector Important: Be sure that the One-way Clutch faces

to the Bearing Metal.
Rear Front 10. At tach t he Bea r ing metal to t he Reverse

Prevention ASSY.
Star Gerar 11. Secure the Reverse Prevention ASSY.

(Double-washered screw M4x8, 2 pcs.)
Bearing Metal
Reverse Prevention ASSY 12. Plug the connector of the Reverse Prevention
ASSY.
13. Secure the wire harness of the High Torque
Wire clamper Clutch with the wire band.
Important: Be sure to fasten the wire harness not
to loosen.
Wire band 14. Secure the wire harness with the wire clamper.
15. Replace the MECHA-CTL-PCB Bracket. (4
screws)
16. Replace the Rear Cover. (4 screws)
Reverse Prevention ASSY
If using the Groups [A], [B], [H], [I] models,

installation is now completed.
2
1 - 29
17. Remove the Flat Wire Harness Cover. (1 screw)

18. Remove the Connector Cover. (1 screw)
Flat Wire Harness Cover

Connector Cover
E-ring 19. Unplug the connector.

20. Remove the E-ring.
Connector
21. Remove the E-ring.

Paper Feed Tray
22. Remove the Hinge Cover. (1 screw)
E-ring 23. Remove the Paper Feed Tray.
Hinge Cover
3
1 - 30
Paper Feed Cover 24. Slide the lock nob down and unlock the Stripper
Unit.
25. Push the lever of the Stripper Unit and remove the
Stripper Unit.
26. Remove the Paper Feed Cover. (2 screws)
Lever
Lock nob
Stripper Unit
27. Remove the Paper Feed Roller ASSY.

(Cap screw WS 4x8, 1 pc.)
Paper Feed Roller ASSY
28. Remove the G-Roller Cover. (2 screws)

G-Roller Cover
29. Remove the E-Reinforcement Plate. (2 screws)
E-Reinforcement Plate
4
1 - 31
30. Open the Front Cover.

31. Pull out the Print Drum.
Print Drum
32. Remove the snap ring.
Guide Roller 33. Remove the Guide Roller.
Snap ring
34. Remove the Upper Guide Plate. (2 screws)

NOTE: Remove the wire harness of paper senser
together.
Upper Guide Plate
35. Remove the Lower Guide Plate. (6 screws)

Lower Guide Plate
NOTE: - Remove the wire harness of paper senser
together.
- For the Group [H] models, remove the

remaining wire harness together.
5
1 - 32
Lower Guide Plate 36. Secure the Detection Sensor.

(Binding screw M4x8, 2 pcs.)
37. Secure the wire harness of the Detection Sensor
with the wire clamper at two points.
Detection Sensot Wire clamper
38. Secure the Lower Guide Plate. (6 screws)

Replace the wire harness that was removed at
procedure 35.
Connector
39. Lead the wire harness of the Detection Sensor as
instructed in the illustration.
40. Plug the connector.
41. Secure the Upper Guide Plate. (2 screws)

Replace the wire harness that was removed at
procedure 34.
Upper Guide Plate
42. Secure the Guide Roller.

43. Attach the snap ring.
Guide Roller
44. Replace the Print Drum.
45. Close the Front Cover.
Snap ring
6
1 - 33
46. Secure the E-Reinforcement Plate. (2 screws)
E-Reinforcement Plate
G-Roller Cover 47. Secure the G-Roller Cover. (2 screws)

Important: Lead the wire harness of the Detection
Sensor through the upper left space of
the G-Roller Cover.
48. Secure the Paper Feed Roller ASSY.

(Cap screw WS 4x8, 1 pc.)
Paper Feed Roller ASSY
49. Secure the Paper Feed Cover. (2 screws)

Paper Feed Cover
50. Install the Card Feed Unit.
51. Slide the lock nob up to lock the Card Feed
Unit.
Lock nob
Card Feed Unit
7
1 - 34
52. Secure the Paper Feed Tray.

53. Secure the Hinge Cover. (1 screw)
E-ring
54. Secure the E-ring.
Hinge Cover
55. Secure the E-ring.

E-ring
56. Plug the connector.
Connector
57. Secure the Flat Wire Harness Cover. (1 screw)

58. Secure the Connector Cover. (1 screw)
Flat Wire Harness Cover Connecot Cover
Checking the Card Feed Unit

1. Plug the power cord to the outlet and turn it on.
2. After installing the Card Feed Unit, check that the
Paper icon on the Touch Display changes to either
of the followings.
- A circle is added on the Paper icon.
Circle - Black and white of the Paper icon is reversed.
8
1 - 35
《Card Feed Unit Setup Procedure》

For the Groups [A], [B], [H], [I] models
● For the Group [I] models
1. Turn the printer on in the test mode.
2. Set the Paper-Feed-Clutch ON/OFF angle.
(1) Input the test item code “741” and set the value to “0”.
3. Set the High Torque Clutch.
(1) Input the test item code “8071” and set the value to “1”
4. Skip to “Setting the Paper Finish“ at procedure 2.
● Setting the Paper Finish

The following test item codes are examples when registering to User1.
Refer to the Technical Manual for the test item codes when registering to another user.
2. Set the Elevator Upper Limit position selection(paper type1). (For the Groups [B], [I] models only)
(1) Input the test item code “763” and set the value to “0”(HIGH).
3. Set the Paper-Feed-Clutch ON angle.
(1) Input the test item code “761” and set the value to “-50”
4. Set the Paper-Feed-Clutch OFF angle.
(1) Input the test item code “762” and set the value to “+50”
5. Turn the printer off and turn it on again.

Important: The value of the Paper-Feed-Clutch ON Timing and the Paper-Feed-Clutch OFF
Timing depends on paper that your customers use. The adjustment may be required.
● Setting the Card Feed Unit

Explain to users how to set up for the Card Feed Unit and replace it to the Stripper Unit.
・ Installing the Card Feed Unit → Set the registered User (Example: User1) in the
Custom Setting Mode (No.13: Paper Finish).
・ Installing the Stripper Unit → Reset the setting to “standard” in the Custom
Setting Mode (No.13: Paper Finish).
Refer to the User’s Guide for details.
24
1 - 36
《Card Feed Unit Setup Procedure》

For the Group [C], [J] models
Explain to users about functions below and tell them how to set up if necessary.
● For the Group [J] models

2. Set the Paper-Feed-Clutch ON/OFF angle.
3. Set the High Torque Clutch.
(1) Input the test item code “8071” and set the value to “1”
4. Skip to “Setting the Special Paper Ctrl Enable Control“ at procedure 2.
● Setting the Special Paper Ctrl Enable Control

1. Turn on the printer in the test mode.
2. Input the test code “153” (Special Paper Ctrl Enable Control) and
press the Start key.
3. Set the value to “1”.
4. Turn the printer off and turn it on again in the normal mode.
● Registering the Special Paper Ctrl

1. Select [Special Paper Ctrl] in [Functions] tab.
2. Select [Paper Feed Adj.] and set the values.
(1) Select [Manual].

(2) Set [S-tray Upper Limit] to “+1”.
6HOHFW>6SHFL¿F@
(4) Set [Clutch ON Timing] to ”-5”.
(5) Set [Clutch OFF Timing] to “+5” and touch [OK].
(6) Touch [OK] on [Special Paper Ctrl].
Important: The value of the Paper-Feed-Clutch ON Timing and

the Paper-Feed-Clutch OFF Timing depends on paper
that your customers use. The adjustment may be
required.
25
1 - 37
3. Select the [Entry/Call] and register the values.
(1) Select the button that you want to register (Example: A-1)
and touch [OK].
(2) Select [Rename].
(3) Select the button you registered at (1).
(4) Enter a name and touch [OK]. (Example: Card)
(5) Touch [OK] and return to the default.
4. Select [Special Paper Ctrl] in [Admin.] tab, and check that the registered button appears.
● Setting the Card Feed Unit

Explain to users how to set up for the Card Feed Unit and replace it to the Stripper Unit.
・Installing the Card Feed Unit → Turn the registered button ON.
・Installing the Stripper Unit → Turn the registered button OFF.
Refer to the User’s Guide for details.
26
1 - 38
6-4. Envelope Feed Kit
Envelope Feed Kit Installation Procedure

The following printer models are the intended This package contains the following items.
basic units for installing the Envelope Feed 1. Envelope Feed ...............................................1 pc.
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION Models 2. Adapter ........................................................ 2 pcs.
RISO MZ7/9 series 3. Installation guide (This manual) .......................1 copy
RZ2/3/5/9 series
RV2/3/5/96 series
Nobody but Riso-author ized ser vice
For other models, refer to "The Table of Applicable representatives is allowed to install
Printers". this unit.
For the printer models in which holizontal print positions are adjusted on the control panel,
the following procedure is required.
Rear 1. Remove the Guide from No.1 and secure it to No.2

Guide
on the Envelope Feed. (Slotted screw 1pc.)
NOTE: The pri nt er models i n which t he

holizontal print position is adjusted with
the Dial on the Standard Feed Tray, the
modification is not required.
Envelope feed
1 - 39
6-5. RISO IS300 Controller
IS300 Installation Procedures

Applicable Models Packing list
This document describes procedures f or the This package contains the following items:
following models: 1. IS300 Controller .............................................1 unit
2. USB cable .....................................................1 pc.
RISO MZ7/9 series
3. USB dongle...................................................1 pc.
RZ7/9 series
For other models, refer to "The Table of Applicable 4. IS300 CD-ROM .............................................1 pc.
5. FCC Declaration of Conformity .....................1 copy
Printers".
6. Declaration of Conformity (for EU only) ..........1 copy
7. End user license agreement.............................1 copy
8. User’s manual (Setup Guide) ...........................1 copy
9. User’s manual (Printer Driver Guide) ..............1 copy
10. User’s manual (Utility Guide) .........................1 copy
11. Installation guide (this manual).......................1 copy
Installation has to be done by an authorized The Power cord is required. (It is not included in
technical expert. this package.)
1. Remove the cover of the IS300 Controller.
IS300 Controller
Cover
2. Loosen the screws on the Dongle securing plate.
3. Remove the Dongle securing plate.
4. Connect the USB dongle to the either of USB

connectors in the IS300 Controller.
Dongle Impor tant: Be sure to obtain the consent from
securing plate
the user before opening the USB dongle
package.
5. Replace the Dongle securing plate.

USB dongle
6. Replace the cover of the IS300 Controller.
1 - 40 1
7. Connect the IS300 Controller and the printer with the

given USB cable.
Power code
8. Connect the Power cable to the IS300 Controller.
USB cable
9. Install the IS300 Controller as shown in illustration.
2
1 - 41
6-6. Wide Stacking Tray
Wide Stacking Tray Installation Procedure

basic units for installing the Wide Stacking Tray.
1. Wide stacking tray.........................................1 unit
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION Models 2. Wide stacking tray arm F...............................1 pc.
RISO MZ7/9, MV76 series
RZ9, RV96 series 3. Wide stacking tray arm R ..............................1 pc.
For other models, refer to "The Table of Applicable 4. Magnet catcher bracket; Wide stackng tray......1 pc.
Printers". 5. Magnet catch; SM-50P....................................1 pc.
When installing on the Group [A] and MZ7/9, 6. Wide stacking tray adaptor F..........................1 pc.
MV76, RZ9, RV96 series models, following items 7. Wide stacking tray adaptor R .........................1 pc.
are additionally required;
•Wide stacking tray support; Front (045-22551) 8. Tray catcher plate ..........................................1 pc.
•Wide stacking tray support; Rear (045-22552) 9. Stacking tray arm spacer ................................2 pcs.
The Paper Ejection Attachment and Option PCB 10. Screws ..........................................................1 set
are required to install this option to the Group [B] 11. Explanation label ..........................................1 pc.
models. 12. Instruction label (2 types) ...............................1 pc. each
The Paper Ejection Attachment and Option PCB II 13. Installation guide (This manual) ......................1 copy
are required to install this option to the Group [C]
models.
Nobody but Riso-author ized ser vice
The FW Paper Ejection Attachment is required to
install this option to the Group [D] models. representatives is allowed to install this unit.
= For the Group [A] and MZ7/9, MV76, RZ9, RV96 series models =
Standard paper stacking tray supports 1. Turn of f the power switch of the printer and
2. Remove both the standard Paper stacking tray and
the Stacking tray supports.
NOTE: For the Dual-color models, remove the
Cover; P-Ejection in advance.
3. Secure the Stacking tray arm spacers to the tray

Wide stacking tray arm R
with the embossed sides facing up.
(Binding screw M4x10, 2 pcs.)
4. Secure the Wide stacking tray arm F and R to the
Wide stacking tray. (Binding screw M4x10, 4 pcs.)
Wide stacking tray arm F Stacking tray arm spacer
1
1 - 42
Insert the joint from above

5. Secure the Wide stacking tray support; Front and
and gently lower the other Rear with the screws removed in the step 2.
end. NOTE: For t he Dual-color models, secu re
the Cover; P-E jection to the original
position.
6. Fit the Wide stacking tray in the Wide stacking

tray supports f rom above.
7. Stick the Instruction labels on the Paper receiving
Wide stacking tray support; tray and the Paper stop respectively so that each
Front Wide stacking tray support; label covers the previously affixed ones.
Rear
2
1 - 43
6-7. RISO Stand N Type III
RISO 架台 N タイプⅢ設置手順書
RISO Stand N Type Ⅲ Installation Procedure
適合機種 Types of Applicable Printers 内容物リスト Packing List
詳細は「適合機種一覧」を参照してください。 1. 天板 Top board ..........................1 pc.
For details, refer to "The Table of Applicable 2. 側板 Side panel ........................ 2 pcs.
Printers". 3. 背板 Rear panel .........................1 pc.
4. 底板 Bottom board ....................1 pc.
本機の設置は、必ず専門の技術者が行って 5. 補助足 Stand support .................... 2 pcs.
ください。 6. ガイドピン Guide pin .......................... 2 pcs.
Nobody but Riso-authorized representatives 7. 取付ネジ Screws ................................1 set
is allowed to install this unit.
● 天板上面に傷や汚れをつけないように、下敷きをして組み立ててください。
Lay a soft sheet under the Top board to protect it against scratches and smudges while assembling.
1. 天板裏面を上にして置き、側板と背板を同梱の
側板短いネジで取り付ける。
Side panel
側板 Place the Top board with the bottom side facing up.
Side panel
Then put the Rear and Side panels on the Top board
and secure them with short screws.
天板背板
Top board Rear panel
2. 底板を、同梱の長いネジで取り付ける。
底板 Place the Bottom board on the panel frames and
Bottom board secure it with long screws.
3. 架台を起こす。
Turn over the assembled stand.
4. 天板の正面側のくぼみに、同梱のガイドピンを取り
ガイドピン付ける。
Guide pin
Insert the guide pins into the holes in the front side
dents of the Stand top board.
5. 印刷機を架台に載せる。（印刷機のゴム足を、架
台天面のくぼみにあわせる。）
Place the printer on the stand fitting its rubber feet
in the dents on the Stand top board.
059-36036-009 1
1 - 44
6. 補助足を、同梱のネジで架台に取り付ける。
（2 ケ所）
重要 : 転倒防止の為、必ず取り付けてください。
Secure the Stand supports to each base corner of the

stand with screws.
Important: Be sure to attach the Stand supports
to prevent the Stand and Printer from falling.
補助足
Stand support
2
1 - 45
6-8. RISO Stand D Type III
RISO 架台 D タイプⅢ設置手順書
RISO Stand D Type Ⅲ Installation Procedure
詳細は「適合機種一覧」を参照してください。 1. 天板 Top board.....................1 pc.
For details, refer to "The Table of Applicable 2. 側板 L Side panel L ................1 pc.
Printers". 3. 側板 R Side panel R ................1 pc.
4. 背板 Rear panel ...................1 pc.
5. 底板 Bottom board ..............1 pc.
本機の設置は、必ず専門の技術者が行って 6. 補助足 Stand support .............. 2 pcs.
ください。 7. ガイドピン Guide pin ..................... 2 pcs.
Nobody but Riso-authorized representatives 8. 扉 Door ............................. 2 pcs.
9. 取付ネジ Screws ..........................1 set
● 天板上面に傷や汚れをつけないように、下敷きをして組み立ててください。
Lay a soft sheet under the Top board to protect it against scratches and smudges while assembling.
1. 天板裏面を上にして置き、側板と背板を同梱の
側板 R
側板 L Side panel R 短いネジで取り付ける。（左図のように、縁に丸穴が
Side panel L ある方に背板を取り付ける。）
Place the Top board with the bottom side facing up.
Then put the Rear and Side panels on the Top board
and secure them with short screws.
NOTE : Be sure to secure the Rear panel to the
天板
Top board Top board on the side with two round
背板
Rear panel holes.
2. 底板を、同梱の長いネジで取り付ける。
底板 Place the Bottom board on the panel frames and
Bottom board
secure it with long screws.
3. 架台を起こす。
Turn over the assembled stand.
059-36037-005 1
1 - 46
4. 側板を底板、天板にバインドネジで固定する。
ガイドピン
Guide pin Secure the Side panels to the Bottom and Top Boards
with binding screws.
5. 天板の正面側の穴に、同梱のガイドピンを取り付
ける。
手前の穴
Front hole
6. 印刷機を架台に載せる。（印刷機のゴム足を、架
台天面のくぼみとガイドピンに合わせる。）
Place the printer on the stand fitting its rubber feet in
the dents and guide pins on the Stand top board.
（2 ケ所）
重要：転倒防止の為、必ず取り付けてください。

補助足 stand with screws.
Stand support
Impor tant: Be sure to attach the Stand suppor ts
to prevent the Stand and Printer from falling.
2
1 - 47
8. 扉を側板にバインドネジで取り付ける。
重要：左右の扉に段差が出ないように調整してから
ネジを固定してください。

（１）一番上と一番下のネジ（２本）を仮止めして
扉を閉める。

（２）左右の扉に段差がないか、隙間が歪んでい
ないかを確認し調整する。

（３）残りのネジをはめて固定する。
Secure the Doors to each Side panel with binding

screws.
Impor tant: Secure the Doors so that both of
them become even.
(1) Close the Doors after securing the top
and bottom screws temporarily.
(2) Confirm whether there is not a bump or
a gap between the Doors.
(3) Secure the Doors with the rest of
screws.
隙間の間隔が一定か
The clearance of the gap
must be equal.
段差がなくきちんと揃っているか
The Doors must be secured without a bump.
3
1 - 48
6-9. RISO DRUM STORAGE STAND S III
RISO ドラム収納架台 S Ⅲ設置手順書

RISO DRUM STORAGE STAND S III Installation Procedure
詳細は「適合機種一覧」を参照してください。 1. 架台　　 Stand .........................................1 pc.
For details, refer to "The Table of Applicable 2. 補助足　 Stand support ...........................2 pcs.
Printers". 3. ガイドピン Guide pin .................................2 pcs.
4. 取付ネジ Screws ........................................1 set
本機の設置は、必ず専門の技術者が行って 5. スポンジ Sponge .......................................2 pcs.
ください。
Nobody but Riso-authorized representatives
1. 天板の正面側の穴に、同梱のガイドピンを取り付
ガイドピン
Guide pin ける。
手前の穴 Front hole
2. 架台扉を開け、ドラム収納部を引き出し、右角に
沿わせてスポンジを貼り付ける。
（左右各 1 ケ所）
Open the door of the stand and pull out the drum
rack. Affix a sponge on the right corner of the drum
rack. (Perform on both of 2 racks.)
スポンジ
Sponge
059-36038-001 1
1 - 49
（2 ケ所）
重要：転倒防止の為、必ず取り付けてください。

stand with screws.
Important: Be sure to attach the Stand supports to
prevent the Stand and Printer from falling.
補助足
Stand support
2
1 - 50
6-10. IC CARD READER ACTIVATION KIT RG
IC CARD READER ACTIVATION KIT RG

Installation Procedure

Printers". 1. SUB-SYSTEM-PCB (I) .............................. 1 pc.
2. SUB-SYSTEM Control wire harness 2 ....... 1 pc.
3. PCB screw .................................................. 1 pc.
4. Velcro..........................................................1 set.
The IC card reader is not included in this 5. Cable sticker (KS-12) ................................ 2 pcs.
package. Prepare a commercially available IC 6. Installation Procedure (this document) .....1 copy
card reader in advance. 7. The Table of Applicable Printers ..............1 copy
8. Notification Sheet ....................................1 copy
When installing the "RISO NETWORK KIT
S10" at the same time, install the "IC CARD 9. Declaration of conformity (for EU only) ...1 copy
READER ACTIVATION KIT RG" first. 10. Specified Substances List (for China) ......1 copy
= Common procedure =
1. Turn off the main power switch of the printer and
Important: Be sure to turn off the printer and
Scanner cover; rear
perform work while power is not
supplied to the printer. (Not just the
switch, but pull out the plug as well.)
2. Remove the Scanner cover; rear. (2 screws)
3. Remove the Scanner cover; left. (2 screws)
Scanner cover; left
4. Remove the Side cover; left. (2 screws)
Side cover; left
059-36042-009 1
1 - 51
5. Remove the Rear cover. (4 screws)
Rear cover
6. Make a U-shape opening on the Scanner cover;

Scanner cover; left
left as shown in the illustration.
If RISO NETWORK KIT S10 is not installed

................................................................. Go to P.3
If RISO NETWORK KIT S10 is installed
................................................................. Go to P.4
Cut off
2
1 - 52
= If RISO NETWORK KIT S10 is not installed =
MAINSUB 1. Remove the MAINSUB wire harness from

wire harness CN6 CN6 on the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB and
CN1 on the SUB-SYSTEM-PCB.
(The removed MAINSUB wire harness will not
be used.)
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB
2. Attach the SUB-SYSTEM-PCB (I) at the
position illustrated on the left.
(Binding screw M3x6, 1pc.)
CN1
SUB-SYSTEM-
PCB
SUB-SYSTEM-PCB (I)
3. Connect the SUB-SYSTEM Control wire harness

CN6 2 to CN6 on the MAIN-SYSTEM -PCB.
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB
4. Connect the branch of the SUB-SYSTEM
Control wire harness 2, that is with a blue band,
to CN1 on the SUB-SYSTEM-PCB (I).
Important: Be careful not to mistake
Wire saddle CN1 on the SUB-SYSTEM-PCB for
CN1 on the SUB-SYSTEM-PCB (I).
SUB-SYSTM Control
wire harness 2
5. Connect the remaining branches of the SUB-
SYSTEM Control wire harness 2 to CN1 and
CN2 on the SUB-SYSTM-PCB.
6. Secure the SUB-SYSTEM Control wire harness

2 with three existing wire saddles.
CN1
SUB-
SYSTEM-
PCB
CN2
SUB- the branch with Go to P.6.
SYSTEM- a blue band
PCB (I)
CN1
3
1 - 53
= If RISO NETWORK KIT S10 is installed =

1. Remove the MAINSUB wire harness from
MAINSUB
wire harness CN6 CN6 on the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB and
CN1 on the SUB-SYSTEM-PCB.
(The removed MAINSUB wire harness will not
be used.)
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB
SUB-SYSTEM-
PCB CN1
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB 2. Attach the SUB-SYSTEM-PCB (I) at the

position illustrated on the left.
(Binding screw M3x6, 1pc.)
SUB-SYSTEM Control
wire harness 1
3. Replace the SUB-SYSTEM Control wire harness 1
from CN2 on the SUB-SYSTEM-PCB to
SUB-SYSTEM-PCB CN2 on the SUB-SYSTEM-PCB (I).
CN2 CN2
SUB-SYSTEM-PCB (I)
4
1 - 54
4. Connect the SUB-SYSTEM Control wire harness

2 to CN6 on the MAIN-SYSTEM -PCB.
CN6
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB 5. Connect the branch of the SUB-SYSTEM

Control wire harness 2, that is with a blue band,
to CN1 on the SUB-SYSTEM-PCB (I).
Important: Be careful not to mistake
Wire saddle CN1 on the SUB-SYSTEM-PCB for
CN1 on the SUB-SYSTEM-PCB (I).
6. Connect the remaining branches of the SUB-

SUB-SYSTM Control
wire harness 2 SYSTEM Control wire harness 2 to CN1 and
CN2 on the SUB-SYSTM-PCB.
7. Secure the SUB-SYSTEM Control wire harness

2 with three existing wire saddles.
CN1
SUB-
SYSTEM-
PCB CN2
the branch with
Go to P.6.
SUB- a blue band
SYSTEM-
PCB (I) CN1
5
1 - 55
Back side of the IC card reader

Prepare a commercially available IC card reader
in advance. The following step 1 and 2 vary
depending on the size and shape of the IC card
reader.
Velcro
1. Stick a set of Velcro to the IC card reader.
Important: The set of Velcro is fastened togeth-
Control panel of the printer er. While keep them together, peel
one side of the release paper and
stick the set of Velcro to the IC card
reader.
2. Peel the remaining release paper on the back

side of the IC card reader, and place the IC card
reader on the printer as shown in the illustration.
IC card reader
3. Lead the cable of the IC card reader through

the square bush, and secure the cable with two
existing wire saddles.
IC card reader
Cable of the IC card reader
Wire saddle
Square bush
6
1 - 56
4. Lead the cable of the IC card reader as shown in

Wire saddle
the illustration, and connect it to CN27 on the
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB.
Important: Connect the cable to the outer side
of CN27 as shown in the illustration.
5. Secure the cable with the existing 10 wire

MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB saddles depending on the length of the cable.
CN27:
Connect the cable to this side
of two sockets.
Wire saddle
6. Replace the Rear cover. (4 screws)
Rear cover
7
1 - 57
7. Replace the Side cover; left. (2 screws)
Side cover; left
8. Replace the Scanner cover; left. (2 screws)

Important: Lead the cable of the IC card reader
Scanner cover; left
through the U-shape opening of the
Scanner cover; left.
Make sure that the cable does not
get caught in the cover.
Cable of the 9. Put the cable stickers (KS-12) on the side of the
IC card reader printer as shown in the illustration and secure the
Cable sticker (KS-12)
cable with them.
U-shape opening (Be careful not to catch the cable)
10. Replace the Scanner cover; rear. (2 screws)
11. Start up the printer in the test mode, perform the

test code “7051” (IC Card Reader Get Info.).
(This test code makes the IC card reader
available on the printer.)
Scanner cover; rear

12. Restart the printer in the normal mode and make
sure that the error B30-910 is not displayed.
Important: If the error is displayed, check if the
wire harnesses are connected cor-
rectly.
8
1 - 58
6-11. Job Separator IV : NIII
Job Separator IV : NIII Installation Procedure

The following printer model is the intended basic This package contains the following items.
unit for installing the Job Separator IV:NIII. 1. Job separator IV:NIII unit .............................1 unit
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION Model 2. JS positioning bracket; II *1..........................1 pc.
RISO MZ7/9, MV76 series 3. JS base bracket; II *1.....................................1 pc.
RZ2/3/5/9 series 4. JS IV wire harness .......................................1 pc.
RV2/3/5/96 series 5. DKN-10 NK clamper *2 ...............................1 pc.
For other models, refer to“The Table of 6. Screws .........................................................1 set
Applicable Printers”. 7. JS paper size indication label *1 ...................1 pc.
- For Non-stop mode, the Paper guide II; R 8. Instruction label(J/E/PICT) *1 ........................1 pc.each
(047-22007) (only for the Groups [A], [B], [C], 9. Paper tape roll ..............................................1 roll
[D] models) or the Paper guide II; R (059-21011) 10. Mylar Sheet; JS *3........................................1 pc.
(only for the Groups [H] models) is required 11. Installation guide(This Manual)....................1 copy
separately.
12. User’s guide .................................................1 copy
- For the Group [E] models, the JS bracket (042- 13. Declaration of Conformity(for EU only) ........1 copy
22001) and the JS IV wire harness [short] (113-
97000) are required.
*1 For the Groups [E], [F], [G] models, these parts
- For the Groups [F], [G] models, the JS bracket are not required.
(042-22001) is required. *2 For the Groups [A], [B], [C], [E], [F], [G], [H]
Nobody but Riso-author ized ser vice models, this part is not required.
representatives is allowed to install this unit. *3 This is not used for Non-stop mode.
= Preparation for all printer models =

[Normal mode] Available for all printer models Important: ・When installing the Job separator
IV: NIII on the Groups [A], [B], [C],
[D], [H] models, users have a choice
between Non-stop mode and Normal
JS base bracket; II mode. Ask users which mode they
select before installation.Only when the
standard stacking tray is mounted on
the printer, Non-stop mode is available.
・For the printer models except the

Groups [A], [B], [C], [D], [H] models,
install the Job separator IV; NIII for
Normal mode.
JS positioning bracket; II
[Non-stop mode] Groups [A], [B], [C], [D], [H] 1. Place the JS positioning bracket; II on the
models JS base bracket; II and secure them with two
stepped screws.
JS positioning
bracket; II Important: Be careful that the screw positions
JS base bracket; II
vary according to the mode (series).
1 - 59 1
2. Loosen two mounting screws on the bottom of

the Job separator IV:NIII.
JS positioning bracket; II
Job separator IV: NIII
Important: Do not loosen the center screw on
the bottom of the Job separator IV:NIII.
3. Insert the JS base bracket; II into the gap
between the Job separator and the loosen screws
and secure the screws firmly.
Important: The positions securing screws differ

depending on the mode or the position
of the stacking tray.
Normal mode -> B

Non-stop mode / The stacking tray is
mount in the standerd position -> A-1
Non-stop mode / The stacking tray is
mount in the horizontal position -> A-2
Slide the mounting screws into the slits Note: When installing for Non-stop mode,
and tighten them.
exchanging the Paper guide (P.22) and change of
the test mode setting (P.23) are required.
4. Turn off the main power and unplug the power

cord from the printer.
The following procedures differ according to the

printer model.
・ Groups [A], [B] models → P.3
・ RZ2/3/5, RV2/3/5 series models → P.5
・ RZ9, RV96 series models → P.6
・ Group [C] models → P.7
・ MZ7/9, MV76 series models → P.9
・ Group [D] models → P.12
・ Group [E] models → P.15
・ Groups [F], [G] models → P.17
・ Groups [H] models → P.20
2
1 - 60
= For the Groups [A], [B] models =

Platen cover 1. Open the Platen cover and remove the securing
screws on the hinges.
2. Dismount the Platen cover.
Scanner P-Feed Cover 3. Remove the Scanner rear cover.

Scanner Rear Cover
4. Remove the Scanner P-Feed cover.
Rear cover
6. Remove the Rear side cover.

7. Cut off the part illustrated in the left from the
Rear side cover.
8. Remove the screws of the Power supply PCB
mount plate and open it.
Cut off
Power supply PCB mount plate

Rear side cover
3
1 - 61
Edge saddle Edge saddle 9. Lead the JS IV wire harness through the square
hole at the Rear side frame to the MECHA-CTL-
Rear side frame PCB as instructed in the illustration.
NOTE: Secure the remainder of the JS IV wire
Ground wire harness with two wire saddles that are at the
CN1 upper right of MECHA-CTL-PCB.
10. Insert the two tabs of the metal bushing on the
MECHA-CTL-PCB wire harness into the square hole and secure
the metal bushing there with a screw. (Binding
screw, M3 x 6)
11. Connect the connector of JS IV wire harness to
CN1 on the MECHA-CTL-PCB.
12. Remove one of the mounting screws of the
MECHA-CTL-PCB near the CN1 and secure the
ground wire coming from the JS IV wire harness
to the MECHA-CTL-PCB with removed screw.
JS paper size indication label
13. Secure the JS IV wire harness with existing two
edge saddles and eleven wire saddles.
14. Replace the Power supply PCB mount plate and
secure it with the screws.
15. Replace the Rear side cover.
16. Secure the Job separator IV:NIII with two
Instruction label screws. (Binding screw, M4 x 8)
JS IV wire harness 17. Lead the JS IV wire harness and connect the
connector of it to the bottom of the Job separator
IV:NIII as illustrated.
18. Stick the JS paper size indication label and
a Instruction label on the Job Separator as
illustrated.
19. Replace the Rear cover to the printer.
20. Replace the Scanner P-Feed cover.
21. Replace the Scanner rear cover.
22. Replace the Platen cover.
23. Plug the power cord to the printer and turn on the
main power.
24. Put the Paper tape roll into the Job separator
IV:NIII and check that the Job separator IV:NIII
functions correctly.
When installing for Normal mode Skip to P.22
When installing for Non-stop mode Skip to P.23
4
1 - 62
= For RZ2/3/5, RV2/3/5 series models =

1. Remove the Rear cover from the printer.
Rear side cover.
4. Remove the screws of the PCB mount plate.
5. Attach the NK clamper onto the PCB mount
plate as illustrated.
Important: ・The right side of the NK clamper

is attached according to the end on the
right side of PCB mount plate.
・The left side of the NK clamper is
inserted underneath the Mechanical
PCB mount plate
Cut off control PCB.
Rear side cover
6. Open the PCB mount plate and lead the JS IV
wire harness through the square hole at the rear
PCB mount plate side frame to the Mechanical control PCB as
Attachment 7. Insert the two tabs of the metal bushing on the
angle wire harness into the square hole and secure
Mechanical the metal bushing there with a screw. (Binding
control PCB screw, M3 x 6)
Attachment 8. Connect the connector of JS IV wire harness to
position CN30 on the Mechanical control PCB.
NK clamper
Wire saddle 9. Remove one of the mounting screws of the
Ground wire Mechanical control PCB near the CN30 and
secure the ground wire coming from the JS IV
wire harness to the Mechanical control PCB with
removed screw.
10. Secure the JS IV wire harness with existing wire
saddles at thirteen points and the NK clamper.
CN30 11. Replace the PCB mount plate and secure it with
the screws.
screws. (Binding screw, M4 x 8)
Wire saddle 14. Lead the JS IV wire harness and connect the
Wire saddle connector of it to the bottom of the Job separator
JS paper size indication label a Instruction label on the Job Separator as
illustrated.
main power.
JS IV wire harness
Instruction label
Skip to P.22 [Sticking the Mylar Sheet; JS]
5
1 - 63
= For RZ9, RV96 series models =

Rear side cover.
5. Attach the NK clamper onto the PCB mount
Important: The right side of the NK clamper is

attached according to the end on the
PCB mount plate
Cut off
Rear side cover 6. Open the PCB mount plate and lead the JS IV
wire harness through the square hole at the rear
side frame to the Mechanical control PCB as
Attachment position
PCB mount plate 7. Insert the two tabs of the metal bushing on the
wire harness into the square hole and secure
screw, M3 x 6)
Mechanical CN10 on the Mechanical control PCB.
control PCB
NK
Mechanical control PCB near the CN10 and
Wire saddle secure the ground wire coming from the JS IV
Ground wire clamper
wire harness to the Mechanical control PCB with
removed screw.
saddles at fifteen points and the NK clamper.
CN10
11. Replace the PCB mount plate and secure it with
Wire the screws.
saddle

screws. (Binding screw, M4 x 8)
14. Lead the JS IV wire harness and connect the
Wire saddle connector of it to the bottom of the Job separator
Wire saddle IV:NIII as illustrated.
illustrated.
main power.
JS IV wire harness functions correctly.
Instruction label
6
1 - 64
= For the Group [C] models =

2. Remove the Rear side cover from the printer.
Rear side cover.
mount plate.
Cut off
Power supply
PCB mount plate
Rear side cover
5. Lead the JS IV wire harness through the square

hole at the rear side frame to the Power supply
PCB mount plate as instructed in the illustration.
screw, M3 x 6)
JS IV wire harness
7. Lead the JS IV wire harness onto Rear bottom

plate as illustrated, and secure it with the wire
saddle.
JS IV wire harness
Wire saddle
7
1 - 65
8. Lead the JS IV wire harness onto PCB mount

Ground wire CN1 plate as illustrated.
Important: Make sure the JS IV wire harness

should not slacken.
Wire saddle CN1 on the MECHA-CONTROL-PCB.
MECHA-CONTROL-PCB near the CN1 and
wire harness to the MECHA-CONTROL-PCB
with removed screw.
11. Secure the JS IV wire harness with nine wire
saddles.
Wire saddle Wire saddle
13. Replace the Rear side cover and the Rear cover.
14. Secure the Job separator IV:NII to the side plate

JS paper size
indication label of the printer with two screws. (Binding screw,
M4 x 8)
connector of JS IV wire harness to the bottom of
the Job separator IV:NII.
Instruction label illustrated.
main power.
JS IV wire harness
IV:NII and check that the Job separator IV:NII
8
1 - 66
= For MZ7/9, MV76 series models =

1. Remove the Rear cover R from the printer.
Rear cover R.
Cut off
Rear cover R
PCB mount plate
4. Open the PCB mount plate and attach the NK

Attachment position
clamper onto the back side of PCB mount plate.
Important: The right side of the NK clamper is

attached according to the end on the
NK clamper
9
1 - 67

hole at the rear side frame to the Mechanical
control PCB as instructed in the illustration.
screw, M3 x 6)
JS IV wire harness
7. Secure the JS IV wire harness with the NK

clamper.
Important: Make sure the JS IV wire harness is

secured with the NK clamper, avoiding
NK clamper
contact with the parts in action.
Wire clamper 8. Secure the JS IV wire harness with the wire

JS IV wire harness
clamper.

Wire saddle Important: Make sure the JS IV wire harness

should not slacken.
CN17 on the Mechanical control PCB.
Mechanical
control PCB 11. Remove one of the mounting screws of the
Wire saddle
CN17 Mechanical control PCB near the CN17 and
Ground
wire wire harness to the Mechanical control PCB with
removed screw.
saddles at eleven points.
13. Replace the PCB mount plate and secure it with
Wire saddle
the screws.
14. Replace the Rear cover R.
10
1 - 68
15. Secure the Job separator IV:NIII to the side plate

of the printer with two screws. (Binding screw,
M4 x 8)
illustrated.
Instruction label 18. Plug the power cord to the printer and turn on the
main power.
JS IV wire harness 19. Put the Paper tape roll into the Job separator
11
1 - 69
= For the Group [D] models =

Rear cover L 1. Remove the Rear cover R from the printer.
2. Remove the Rear cover L from the printer.
Rear cover R.
Cut
off
Rear cover R

mount plate.
Power supply
PCB mount plate
5. Open the Power supply PCB mount plate and

attach the NK clamper on the Bottom plate as
illustrated.
Important: Attach the NK clamper as its corner

meets to the corner of the hinge.
NK clamper
Hinge
Corner meets
12
1 - 70

hole at the rear side frame to the Power supply
PCB mount plate as instructed in the illustration.
screw, M3 x 6)
JS IV wire harness
8. Secure the JS IV wire harness with the NK

clamper.
JS IV wire harness
Important: Make sure the JS IV wire harness is
secured with the NK clamper, avoiding
contact with the parts in action.
9. Secure the JS IV wire harness with the wire
saddle.
Wire saddle NK clamper

Ground wire CN1
should not slacken.
CN1 on the Mechanical control PCB.
Wire saddle 12. Remove one of the mounting screws of the
MECHA-CONTROL-PCB near the CN1 and
wire harness to the MECHA-CONTROL-PCB
with removed screw.
13. Secure the JS IV wire harness with 11 wire
saddles.
Wire saddle Wire saddle secure it with the screws.
15. Replace the Rear cover R and the Rear cover L.
13
1 - 71

M4 x 8)
illustrated.
Instruction label 19. Plug the power cord to the printer and turn on the
main power.
JS IV wire harness 20. Put the Paper tape roll into the Job separator
14
1 - 72
= For the Group [E] models =

Job separator IV:NIII

2. Slide the mounting screws on the bottom of the
Job separator IV:NIII into the slits of the JS
bracket as far as they will go. Then tighten the
mounting screws.
JS bracket
Slide the mounting screws into the slits

and tighten them.

4. Remove the Cover from the main body.
Cover.
Cover
Cut off
6. Remove the screws and open the Power supply

PCB mount plate.
7. Insert the JS IV wire harness [short] into the
square hole.
8. Secure the metal bushing with a screw. (Binding
screw, M3 x 6)
JS IV wire harness [short]
15
1 - 73
9. Lead the JS IV wire harness onto the PCB mount

10. Secure the JS IV wire harness [short] with a wire

saddle.
Important: Keep the JS IV wire harness [short]

Wire saddle tight to prevent it from touching the
moving parts.
JS IV wire harness [short]
Main PCB
11. Close the Power supply PCB mount plate and
lead the JS IV wire harness [short] as illustrated.
12 Secure the JS IV wire harness [short] with two
wire saddles.
CN3 Important: Make sure the JS IV wire harness

[short] should not slacken.
Ground wire
13. Connect the connector of JS IV wire harness
JS IV wire harness [short] to CN3 on the Main PCB.
[short]
Wire saddle 14. Remove one of the mounting screws of the Main
PCB near the CN3 and secure the ground wire
coming from the JS IV wire harness [short] to
the Main PCB with removed screw.
16. Replace the Cover.

M4 x 8)
18. Connect the connector of JS IV wire harness
[short] to the bottom of the Job separator IV:NIII.
main power.
Connector 20. Put the Paper tape roll into the Job separator
16
1 - 74
= For the Groups [F], [G] models =

Job separator IV:NIII

2. Slide the mounting screws on the bottom of the
Job separator IV:NIII into the slits of the JS
bracket as far as they will go. Then tighten the
mounting screws.
JS bracket
Slide the mounting screws into the slits

and tighten them.

4. Remove the Cover from the main body.
Cover.
Cover
Cut off
6. Remove the screws and open the Power supply

PCB mount plate.
7. Insert the JS IV wire harness into the square
hole.
8. Secure the metal bushing with a screw. (Binding
screw, M3 x 6)
JS IV wire harness
17
1 - 75
9. Lead the JS IV wire harness onto the PCB mount

10. Secure the JS IV wire harness with a wire saddle.
Important: Keep the JS IV wire harness tight

to prevent it from touching the moving
parts.
Wire saddle
For the Group [G] models, skip to procedure 16.
JS IV wire harness
= For the Group [F] models = = For the Group [F] models =
Wire saddle
lead the JS IV wire harness as illustrated.
12 Secure the JS IV wire harness with eight wire
CN3 saddles.
Ground wire
should not slacken.
JS IV wire harness Main PCB
CN3 on the Main PCB.
14. Remove one of the mounting screws of the Main
Wire saddle coming from the JS IV wire harness to the Main
PCB with removed screw.
For the Group [F] models, skip to procedure 21.
18
1 - 76
= For the Group [G] models = = For the Group [G] models =
Ground wire
Wire saddle
lead the JS IV wire harness as illustrated.
17. Secure the JS IV wire harness with nine wire
saddles.
CN6
JS IV wire harness Important: Make sure the JS IV wire harness
Main should not slacken.
PCB
CN6 on the Main PCB.
19. Remove one of the mounting screws of the Main
coming from the JS IV wire harness to the Main
Wire saddle PCB with removed screw.
21. Replace the Cover.

M4 x 8)
main power.
Connector 25. Put the Paper tape roll into the Job separator
Skip to step P.22 [Proceed to the following steps.]
19
1 - 77
= For the Groups [H] models =

1. Remove the Scanner rear cover.
Scanner right cover Scanner rear cover
2. Remove the Scanner right cover.
Rear cover

Rear side cover.
Power supply PCB mount plate mount plate and open it.
Cut off
Rear side cover
20
1 - 78
Edge saddle Edge saddle 7. Lead the JS IV wire harness through the square
hole at the Rear side frame to the MAIN-
Rear side frame SYSTEM-PCB as instructed in the illustration.
NOTE: Secure the remainder of the JS IV wire
harness with three wire saddles that are at the
upper left of MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB.
screw, M3 x 6)
CN5
CN5 on the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB.
Ground wire
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB near the CN5 and secure
the ground wire coming from the JS IV wire
harness to the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB with
JS paper size indication label removed screw.
11. Secure the JS IV wire harness with existing two
edge saddles and twelve wire saddles.
Instruction label 14. Secure the Job separator IV:NIII with two
JS IV wire harness screws. (Binding screw, M4 x 8)
illustrated.
18. Replace the Scanner right cover.
19. Replace the Scanner rear cover.
main power.
21
1 - 79
= Procedure for Nomal mode = Sticking the Mylar Sheet; JS

Mylar Sheet; JS
1. Stick the Mylar Sheet; JS on the tape ejecting
section.
Important: Do not stick the Mylar Sheet; JS

when using Non-stop mode.
Meet the corners of the Mylar Sheet; JS and the tape

ejecting section as illustrated.
22
1 - 80
= Procedure for Non-stop mode = Exchanging the Paper guide

1. Remove the Paper receiving Tray form the
Paper receiving Tray
Paper guide printer.
2. Remove the four screws on the Slide rail; Paper
guide.
3. Remove the Slide rail; Paper guide and the Paper
guide from the Paper receiving tray.
Slide rail; Paper guide
Slide rail; Paper guide 4. Remove the Slide rail; Paper guide and the shaft
E-ring from the Paper guide. (E-ring 1pc.)
Shaft
Paper guide
5. Remove the Lever from the Paper guide.

Paper arrangers (2 screws)
6. Remove the Paper arrangers (2 pcs.) from the
Paper guide. (1 screw each)
Lever
7. Secure the Paper arrangers (2 pcs.) on the Paper

Paper guide II; R
guide II; R. (1 screw each)
Paper arrangers
8. Secure the shaft on the Paper guide II; R.
(2 screws)
Lever
23
1 - 81
9. Secure the Slide rail; Paper guide and the shaft

E-ring on the Paper guide II; R. (E-ring 1pc.)
Important: Insert the shaft in the direction of the

left illustration.
Shaft
Paper guide
10. Secure 4 screws on the Slide rail; Paper guide

Paper receiving Tray Paper guide II; R
and secure the Paper guide on the Paper receiving
tray. (4 screws)
11. Replace the Paper receiving tray on the printer.
Important: When the paper receiving tray has

corrugators, attach them again.
= Procedure for Non-stop mode = Test mode setting

Before starting the test mode, confirm the program version of the printer.
Group [A] models : ROM Ver. 3.10 or later
Group [B] models : ROM Ver. 4.20 or later
Group [D] models : ROM Ver. 1.42 or later
NOTE: In case of the Group [C] models, the confirmation of the program version is unnecessary.
1. Start up the test mode of the printer.
2. Input “9874” using print quantity keys and press the Start key.
3. Input the test mode code “1247” and set the value from 0 to 1.
4. Check the operation after setting Non-stop mode.
NOTE: If the tape is not inserted properly, carry out the following adjustment steps.
24
1 - 82
6-12. Key/Card Counter IV
Key/Card Counter IV Installation Procedure

Type of Connectable Printer Packing List
basic units for connection to the Key/card counter 1. Key/card counter unit................................. 1 unit
IV. 2. Counter main wire harness III ................... 1 pc.
RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION Models 3. Counter extension wire harness A (long)... 1 pc.
RISO MZ7/9 series
4. Counter conversion wire harness B (short) 1 pc.
MV76 series
5. Counter extension ground wire .................. 1 pc.
RZ2/3/5/9 series
6. Bracket MH; Counter IV ........................... 1 pc.
RV2/3/5/96 series
Fo r o t h e r m o d e l s , r e f e r t o “ T h e Ta b l e o f 7. Counter bracket; RZ .................................. 1 pc.
Applicable Printers”. 8. Lithium battery (CR-2032) ........................ 1 pc.
9. Battery expiration date label ...................... 1 pc.
When installing on the Group [D] and MZ7/9, 10. Ferrite core ................................................. 1 pc.
MV96 series models, the Key/card counter IV
11. NK clamper ................................................ 2 pcs.
Attachment Kit:2C is additionally required.
12. Wire clamper.............................................. 5 pcs.
13. Screwed clamper ........................................ 2 pcs.
When installing on the Group [E], the PLATE;
14. Wire harness protection tape...................... 1 pc.
CARD COUNTER;SU(059-75005) is additionally
required. 15. Screws ........................................................ 1 set
16. Installation guide (This manual) ................ 1 copy
17. User's guide................................................ 1 copy
18. Control card ............................................... 1 pc.
19. Operator card ............................................. 30 pcs.
N o b o d y bu t R i s o - a u t h o r i ze d s e r v i c e
20. Cleaning card ............................................. 1 pc.
representatives is allowed to install this unit.
21. Declaration of Conformity
(for EU only)............................................. 1 copy
1 - 83
RISO Inc. Technical Operations US.RISO.COM 1
= For RZ2/3/5, RV2/3/5 series models =

1. Turn off the power switch of the printer and
Side cover unplug the power cord.
Rear cover 3. Open the Paper receiving tray and remove the
Side cover from the printer.
Counter extension Wire saddle 4. Lead the smaller connector of the Counter main
ground wire wire harness III through the hole located around
the upper left corner of the rear side frame from
the inside of the printer and connect it to CN31
on the Main control PCB.
5. Connect the connector of the Counter extension
ground wire to the counterpart at the end of
the wire coming out of the Counter main wire
CN31 harness III.
6. Remove a securing screw at the upper left
corner of the Main control PCB and secure it
again together with the terminal of the Counter
extension ground wire.
7. Secure the Counter main wire harness III with
the existing wire saddles at 4 points as illustrated.
Lithium battery
8. Remove the case cover from the Key/card

counter unit and put a lithium battery into the
battery holder.
NOTE : Be sure to put the battery with the + side
facing upward.
9. Replace the case cover on the Key/card counter
unit.
Counter
10. Secure the Counter bracket; RZ on the Key/card
bracket; RZ counter unit. (Washered-screw M3x8, 4 pcs.)
Key/card counter unit
2
1 - 84
11. Remove one of the securing screws on the

Wire saddle
Key/card counter unit Scanner right side cover and secure the top part
of the Counter bracket; RZ (with the Key/card
Binding screw counter unit) on the Scanner right side cover
M4×16 by putting a packed-in screw (Binding screw
M4x16) into the opened screw hole in place of
the removed one.
Binding screw NOTE: The removed screw will not be reused.
M4×8
Counter main 12. Secure the bottom part of the Counter bracket;
wire harness III
RZ on the front side frame of the printer with
another packed-in screw (Binding screw M4x8).
13. Connect the Counter main wire harness III to
the Key/card counter unit and secure the wire
harness on the inner upper right side frame of the
Battery expiration
printer with the existing wire saddle.
date label
14. Write the date of two years later on the Battery
Cut off expiration date label and stick the label on the
Side cover side of the Key/card counter unit.
15. Make a U-shape cutting on the Upper right side
cover. To cut the cover in a U-shape, twist off the
part to be removed with a pliers and smoothen
the edge of the opening with the cutter knife for
a fine finish.
16. Replace the Side cover, leading the Counter main
wire harness III through the U-shape opening of
the Side cover, on the printer.
17. Replace the Rear cover on the printer.
Proceed to the section "Operation Check" on page 13.
< Special note in installing the Key/card counter unit on a RISO RZ2 series models >
You are required to change the initial setting of the data printout function in the Key/card counter after
installing the Key/card counter unit on a RISO RZ2 series models, to avoid the problem of mirror image
output in the said function. To change the setting, take the following steps.
1. Turn on the power switch of the printer and insert the "CONTROL CARD" into the Key/card counter.
2. Hold down the [ 8 ] key on the Key/card counter control panel for more than 1 second. "NORMAL"
appears in the Key/card counter display.
3. Press the [SET] key on the Key/card counter control panel and confirm that the display is changed to
"REVERSE".
4. Remove the "CONTROL CARD" from the Key/card counter and turn off the power switch of the printer.
3
1 - 85
= For the Groups [A], [B] models =

Side cover 1. Turn off the power switch of the printer and
3. Open the Paper receiving tray and remove the
Rear cover
Counter main wire harness III 4. Lead the smaller connector of the Counter main
wire harness III through the hole located around
the paper ejecting side.
Wire saddle
the wire saddles at three points.
Counter extension wire harness A 6. Connect the Counter extension wire harness A
Ground wire and the Counter main wire harness III.
7. Connect the Counter extension wire harness A to
the CN7 on the MECHA-CTL-PCB.
8. Remove the PCB securing screw near the CN7
CN7 and secure it again with the terminal of ground
wire coming out of the Counter extension wire
harness A.
Counter main wire harness III Wire saddle 9. Secure the Counter extension wire harness A
with the wire saddles at five points.

battery holder.
Lithium battery
facing upward.
unit.
4
1 - 86

《For the Group [A] models》 counter unit. (Washered-screw M3x8, 4 pcs.)
Important: When installing on Group [B] models,

Counter a Bracket MH; Counter IV is required.
bracket ;RZ
《For the Group [B] models》

Bracket MH; Counter IV
Scanner right side cover and secure the top part
counter unit) on the Scanner right side cover
by putting a packed-in screw (Binding screw
the removed one.
NOTE: The removed screw will not be reused.
14. Secure the bottom part of the Counter bracket;
Wire saddle
Key/card counter unit 15. Connect the Counter main wire harness III to
Bindng screw
M4×16

Bindng screw
expiration date label and stick the label on the
M4×8 side of the Key/card counter unit.
Counter main
wire harness III 17. Make a U-shape cutting on the Upper right side
a fine finish.
18. Replace the Side cover, leading to counter main
Batterry expiration
date label wire harness III through the U-shape opening of
Cut off 19. Replace the Rear cover on the printer.

Side cover
5
1 - 87
= For RZ9, RV96 series models =

Side cover; P-Ejection
2. Remove the Rear cover; ML from the printer.
Rear cover 3. Open the Paper receiving tray and remove the
Upper right side cover from the printer.
Wire saddle
the wire saddles at three points.
Counter extension Wire clamper CN6 6. Connect the Counter extension wire harness A
wire harness A (long) and the Counter main wire harness III.
the CN6 of the SH4F-PCB.
8. Remove the PCB securing screw next to the CN6
and securing it again with the terminal of ground
Counter main wire coming out of the Counter extension wire
wire harness III harness A.
Wire saddle
9. Secure the Counter extension wire harness A
10. Bind up the Counter extension wire harness A
with a wire clamper as illustrated.
Lithium battery 11. Remove the case cover from the Key/card
battery holder.
facing upward.
unit.
6
1 - 88

《For the Standard Paper Stacking Tray》 counter unit. (Washered-screw M3x8, 4 pcs.)
Important: If the Auto-control Stacking Tray is

Counter installed, a Bracket MH; Counter IV is
bracket; RZ required.

《For the Auto-control Stacking Tray》 Scanner right side cover and secure the top part
of the Counter bracket RZ (with the Key/card
the removed one.
16. Connect the Counter main wire harness III to
Wire saddle harness on the inner upper right side frame of the
Binding screw
M4×16 17. Write the date of two years later on the Battery
side of the Key/card counter unit.
Binding screw 18. Make a U-shape cutting on the Upper right side
M4×8 cover. To cut the cover in a U-shape, twist off the
Counter main
wire harness III part to be removed with a pliers and smoothen
a fine finish.
19. Replace the Side cover; P-Ejection, leading
the Counter main wire harness III through the
Battery expiration U-shape opening of the Side cover; P-Ejection,
date label on the printer.
20. Replace the Rear cover; ML on the printer.
Cut off
Side cover;
P-Ejection
7
1 - 89
= For the Group [C] models =

Side cover
Stage cover 3. Open the Stage cover and remove the securing
screws on the hinges. The removed screws
should be kept by turning them into the adjoining
holes on the hinges.
4. Dismount the Stage cover.
5. Remove the Gauge cover, when it is attached to

the printer.
Gauge cover
Rear uppercover 6. Remove the Rear upper cover from the printer.
Rear cover
8
1 - 90
Wire saddle
the wire saddles at four points.
Ground wire and the Counter main wire harness III.
the CN7 on the MECHA-CTL-PCB.
12. Remove the PCB securing screw near the CN7
CN7 and secure it again with the terminal of ground
wire coming out of the Counter extension wire
harness A.
Wire saddle 13. Secure the Counter extension wire harness A

Counter main wire harness III

battery holder.
Lithium battery
facing upward.
unit.
9
1 - 91
16. Secure the Bracket MH; Counter IV on the Key/

card counter unit. (Washered-screw M3x8, 4
pcs.)

Scanner right side cover and secure the top part
Key/card counter unit Wire saddle
Bindng screw the removed one.
M4×16
Ferrite core
Bindng screw Counter main
M4×8 wire harness III 19. Connect the Counter main wire harness III to
Batterry expiration
date label
printer with wire saddles at two points.
20. Put the Ferrite core on the Counter main wire
harness III as illustrated.

Cut off expiration date label and stick the label on the
Side cover
a fine finish.
24. Replace all covers on the printer.
NOTE: When working on the printer with
Gauge cover models, replace the Gauge cover.
10
1 - 92
= For the Groups [E] models =

Scanner right cover Scanner rear cover
4. Remove the Scanner rear cover.
Rear cover 5. Remove the Scanner right cover.

(The two removed side screws will not be reused.)
Side cover
Wire saddle
the wire saddles at four points and the edge
saddles at one point.
Edge saddle
Edge saddle and the Counter main wire harness III.
the CN24 on the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB.
10. Remove the PCB securing screw at the upper
Ground right corner of the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB and
wire
secure it again with the terminal of ground
CN24 wire coming out of the Counter extension wire
harness A.
Counter main wire harness III Wire saddle
11. Secure the Counter extension wire harness A
with the wire saddles at five points and the edge
saddle at one point.
Lithium battery counter unit and put a lithium battery into the
battery holder.
facing upward.
unit.
11
1 - 93
14. Secure the PLATE; CARD COUNTER on the

PLATE; CARD COUNTER Key/card counter unit. (Washered-screw M3x8, 4
pcs.)
15. Secure the upper side of the Scanner right cover

with two screws.
Scanner right cover
16. Secure with two wire saddles. (Depending on the
model, no wire saddle exists.)
Wire saddle
Counter main wire harness III

Cut off a fine finish.
Side cover
19. Tighten the Scanner right cover and PLATE;

Battery expiration date label Key/card counter unit CARD COUNTER together with the included
Binding screw M4x18.
20. Connect the Counter main wire harness III to the
Key/card counter unit.
Binding screw M4×18
22. Replace the Scanner rear cover on the printer.
23. Replace the Rear cover on the printer.
12
1 - 94
Operation check
1. Pressing both "0" and "C" keys on the Key/ on copies.
card counter control panel together, turn on No. MSTR PRINTS
the main power switch on the printer. 1 1 5
2. After confirming that the indication ALL 1 5
"FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF" appears in the display 6. To clear the above data, follow the procedures
on the Key/card counter control panel, press below.
the "1", "9", "5" and "3" keys orderly.
1) Press the "1" key more than a second leaving
NOTE : If no indication appears when the the "CONTROL CARD" in the Key/card counter.
printer is turned on, return to the step 1.
2) After the indication "TTL- 1- 5" appears
3. After the display message changes to on the display, press the "C" and "SET" keys
"INSERT CARD", insert the "OPERATOR orderly. The panel indication is changed to
CARD No. 1" into the Key/card counter and "TTL- 0 -0" and the data are all cleared.
print 5 copies with a newly made master.
4. Insert the "CONTROL CARD" into the Key/
card counter and press the "1" key more than
a second. Then press the "PRINT" and "SET"
keys orderly to print out the data of master
count and print count.
5. Check that the following data are printed out
Battery replacement
The used battery (normally after two years'
operation) can be replaced by the following
procedures.
1. Turn on the main power of the printer and
remove the case cover of the Key/card counter
unit by removing the securing screws on the
bottom of the unit.
Important: Always replace the used battery

with the power of the printer turned ON.
Otherwise, all memories in the Key/card
counter will be cleared out.
2. Pick off the used battery from the battery holder
Battery expiration date label and put a new one (CR-2032) there.
unit.
Lithium battery
(CR-2032) 4. Write the date of two years later on the Battery
expiration date label on the side of the Key/card
counter unit.
13
1 - 95
6-13. RISO NETWORK KIT S10
RISO NETWORK KIT S10 Installation Procedure


Printers". 1. SUB-SYSTEM-PCB (L) ...........................1 pc.
2. SUB-SYSTEM Control wire harness 1 .....1 pc.
3. PCB screw ................................................1 pc.
4. RISO COPY COUNT VIEWER CD-ROM ...1 pc.
5. RISO COPY COUNT VIEWER
When installing the "IC CARD READER installation guide................................... 1 copy
6. Installation Procedure (this document) .. 1 copy
ACTIVATION KIT RG" at the same time,
7. The Table of Applicable Printers ........... 1 copy
install the "IC CARD READER ACTIVATION
8. Declaration of conformity (for eu only) ... 1 copy
KIT RG" first.
9. Specified Substances List (for China) ... 1 copy
1. Turn off the main power switch of the
printer and unplug the power cord.
Important: Be sure to turn off the
printer and perform work
while power is not supplied
to the printer. (Not just the
Cover; LAN switch, but pull out the plug
as well.)
2. Remove the Cover; LAN.

NOTE: The removed cover is not reused.
3. Remove the Rear cover. (4 screws)
If IC CARD READER ACTIVATION

KIT RG is not installed .............Go to P.2
If IC CARD READER ACTIVATION
Rear cover
KIT RG is installed ...................Go to P.3
059-36015-001 1
1 - 96
= If IC CARD READER ACTIVATION KIT RG is not installed =

1. Attach the SUB-SYSTEM-PCB (L) at
the position illustrated on the left.
(Binding screw M3x6, 1 pc.)
2. Connect SUB-SYSTEM Control wire

harness 1 to CN2 on SUB-SYSTEM-
PCB and CN1 on SUB-SYSTEM-PCB
(L).
3. Secure SUB-SYSTEM Control wire

harness 1 with the Wire saddle.

Wire saddle SUB-SYSTEM Control wire (4 screws)
harness 1
CN1
CN2
SUB-SYSTEM-PCB SUB-SYSTEM-PCB (L)
5. Connect your computer and the printer

with the LAN cable.
6. Turn on the printer, and check that the

LAN connector LED is flashing in
green.
LAN cable
LED
For Group [A] models ............Go to P.4
For Group [B] models .............Go to P.5
2
1 - 97
= If IC CARD READER ACTIVATION KIT RG is installed =

1. Attach the SUB-SYSTEM-PCB (L) at
the position illustrated on the left.
(Binding screw M3x6, 1 pc.)
2. Connect SUB-SYSTEM Control wire

harness 1 to CN2 on SUB-SYSTEM-
PCB and CN1 on SUB-SYSTEM-PCB
(L).
3. Secure SUB-SYSTEM Control wire

harness 1 with the Wire saddle.

Wire saddle SUB-SYSTEM Control wire (4 screws)
harness 1
CN1
CN2
SUB-SYSTEM-PCB (I) SUB-SYSTEM-PCB (L)
5. Connect your computer and the printer

with the LAN cable.
6. Turn on the printer, and check that the

LAN connector LED is flashing in
green.
LAN cable
LED
For Group [A] models ............Go to P.4
For Group [B] models .............Go to P.5
3
1 - 98
= For the Group [A] models =
1. Press the [CUSTOM] button.
2. Press the [+] key to scroll, and check if IP

address setting screens (numbers in the 70s)
are displayed.
NOTE: If they are not displayed, check the
connection of the wire harness.
● Numbers in the 70s are displayed when

connected properly.
4
1 - 99
= For the Group [B] models =

1. Tap [Admin.]. 4. Tap [Network Settings (IPv4)].
2. Tap [OK]. 5. Check that the [Network Set. (IPv4)] screen

is displayed.
NOTE: If it is not displayed, check the connec-
tion of the wire harness.
● The screen below is displayed when connected
properly.
3. Tap [System].
5
1 - 100
CHAPTER 2: Structural Overview
Contents
1. Main Body Specification.......................................................................2

2. Cross-Sectional Diagram....................................................................11
3. Operation Outline................................................................................12
4. Outline of Paper Feeding, Printing and Paper Ejection
Operations............................................................................................13
5. Outline of Master removal, Master making and Master Loading
Operations............................................................................................14
2-1
Chapter 12 Appendix 169
1. Main Body Specification

Specifications
SF9 series
Model SF9450 SF9350 SF9250
Master Making High-speed digital master-making
Methods
Master Making Time 1 - Approx. 19 seconds - Approx. 20 seconds - Approx. 20 seconds
(When [Quick Master (Letter paper, (A4 paper, (A4 paper,
Making] is OFF) short edge feed) short edge feed) short edge feed)
- Approx. 17 seconds - Approx. 16 seconds
(Letter paper, (A4 paper,
long edge feed) long edge feed)
Master Making Time 1 - Approx. 17 seconds - Approx. 18 seconds - Approx. 18 seconds
(When [Quick Master (Letter Size paper, (A4 paper, (A4 paper,
Making] is ON) short edge feed) short edge feed) short edge feed)
- Approx. 15 seconds - Approx. 14 seconds
(Letter paper, (A4 paper,
long edge feed) long edge feed)
Printing Method Fully automatic printing
Scanning Resolution 600 dpi × 600 dpi
Printing Resolution 600 dpi × 600 dpi
When [Quick Master Making] is set: 600 dpi × 400 dpi
Original Type Book (10 kg [22 lb] or less) or sheet
Original Paper Weight When auto document feeder is used:
50 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 (13-lb bond to 34-lb bond) (normal paper)
Original Size When glass platen is used:
50 mm × 90 mm to 310 mm × 432 mm
(1 31/32 inches × 3 17/32 inches to 12 7/32 inches × 17 inches)
When auto document feeder is used:
100 mm × 148 mm to 300 mm × 432 mm
Maximum Scanning 297 mm × 432 mm (11 11/16 inches × 17 inches)
Area
Print Paper Weight 46 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 (12-lb bond to 116-lb index)
Print Paper Size 2 100 mm × 148 mm to 310 mm × 432 mm
Maximum Printing 291 mm × 425 mm 291 mm × 413 mm 251 mm × 357 mm
Area (11 15/32 inches × (11 15/32 inches × (9 7/8 inches ×
16 23/32 inches) 16 1/4 inches) 14 1/16 inches)
12
Paper Feed Tray 1000 sheets 3 (stacking height of 110 mm [4 11/32 inches] or lower)
Stacking Capacity
Paper Receiving Tray 1000 sheets 3 (stacking height of 110 mm [4 11/32 inches] or lower)
Stacking Capacity
Print Speed 6 levels: 60, 80, 100, 120, 130, and 150 (high speed 4) sheets per minute
Print Position Horizontal: ±15 mm (±19/32 inches)
Adjustment Vertical: ±10 mm (±13/32 inches)
Image Processing Line, Photo (Standard / Portrait), Duo (Standard / Line / Photo), Pencil (Darker / Lighter)
Mode
2-2
170 Chapter 12 Appendix
Print Reproduction Type: mm

Ratio Zoom (50% to 200%), Free, 100% reduction ratio, Margin+ (90% to 99 %),
4 levels of enlargement (163%, 141%, 122%, 116%), 4 levels of reduction (87%, 82%,
71%, 61%)
Type: inch
Zoom (50% to 200%), Free, 100% reduction ratio, Margin+ (90% to 99 %),
4 levels of enlargement (200%, 154%, 129%, 121%), 4 levels of reduction (78%, 65%,
61%, 50%)
User Interface Color touch panel
Functions Image, Contrast, Size, Paper Size Detection, Dot Process, Contrast Adj, Tone Curve,
Multi-Up Print, Book Shadow, Top Margin Adj., Binding Margin Adj., Max. Scan, Ink
Saving, Quick Master Making, Preview, ADF Semi-Auto 5, Storage, Overlay, Print
Speed Adjustment, Print Density Adjustment, Print Position Adjustment, Interval,
Renew Page, Auto Page Renewal, Rotate, Special Paper Ctrl, Program, Job Separa-
tion 6, Job Memory, Reservation, Editor, Idling Action, Confidential, My Direct Access,
Meter Display, ID Counter Report, Proof Copy, Direct Printing, USB Job List, Scanning
Mode, Admin., Auto Sleep, Auto Power-OFF, Power-OFF Schedule, ECO mode, Pro-
tect, RISO iQuality System
Color Change Print drum (cylinder) replacement method
Ink Supply Full automatic (1000 ml/cartridge)
Master Supply / Full automatic Full automatic Full automatic
Disposal (approx. 215 sheets per (approx. 220 sheets per (approx. 250 sheets per
roll) roll) roll)
Master Disposal Box type (compatible with vertical disposable type)
Method
Power Source AC 100-240 V, SF9350E • For Korea:
50-60 Hz <3.4-1.6 A> AC 220-240 V, AC 220 V,
50-60 Hz <1.6 A> 60 Hz <1.6 A>
SF9350A • For other countries:
• For Korea: AC 100-240 V,
AC 220 V, 50-60 Hz <3.4-1.6 A>
60 Hz <1.6 A>
• For other countries:
AC 100-240 V,
50-60 Hz <3.4-1.6 A>
Power Consumption When optional accessories are not connected: Max. 300W
(Ready: 20 W or lower, Sleep: 5 W or lower, Power-OFF: 0.5 W or lower)
When optional accessories are connected 7: Max. 315W
Dimensions When in use: 1415 mm × 670 mm 8 × 1065 mm 9
(W×D×H) (55 23/32 inches × 26 3/8 inches 8 × 41 15/16 inches 9)
When in storage: 780 mm × 670 mm 8 × 1065 mm 9
(30 23/32 inches × 26 3/8 inches 8 × 41 15/16 inches 9)
Required Space 1415 mm × 1240 mm × 1515 mm 9
(W×D×H) (55 23/32 inches × 48 13/16 inches × 59 21/32 inches 9)
Weight 102 kg (225 lb) 10
Safety Standard IEC-60950-1 compliant, indoor, pollution degree 2 11, at altitudes of 2000 m or lower
Optional Accessories Auto Document Feeder AF-VII, Color Print Drum (Cylinder), Wide Stacking Tray, Key/
Card Counter IV;N, IC Card Reader Activation kit RG, Job Separator IV;NII / NIII, Card
Feed Kit, Envelope Feed Kit, RISO Controller IS300, RISO Printer Driver for Macintosh
1
Measurement value when set to 100% reproduction ratio.
2
When the optional Wide Stacking Tray is installed, you can use paper up to a size of 310 mm × 555 mm
(12 7/32 inches × 21 27/32 inches) by setting [Custom Paper Entry]. Depending on the paper type and paper size,
papers may not be aligned properly.
3
When using the following weight of paper; 64g/m2 to 80g/m2 (17-lb bond to 21-lb bond)
2-3
4 If the temperature of the inside of the print drum (cylinder) is less than 15°C (59°F), [High Speed] is not usable.
5 Usable when the optional auto document feeder is installed.
6 Usable when the optional Job Separator is installed.
7 When all the following optional accessories are installed.
–Auto Document Feeder
– Job Separator
– Key/Card Counter or IC Card Reader
8 The depth does not include the stabilizers for the dedicated rack.
9 The height includes the dedicated rack.
10 The weight does not include the ink, master roll, and rack.
11 The pollution degree of the usage environment due to dirt and dust in the air. Degree “2” corresponds to a general indoor
environment.
Notes
• The specifications and type of the product are subject to change without prior notice.
• Please note that due to improvements and changes to this machine, some images and explanations in this guide
may not correspond to your machine.
12
2-4

Specifications
■ SF5450/5350/5250/5050
SF5*5 series
Model SF5450 SF5350 SF5250 SF5050
Methods
Master Making- Approx. 19 seconds Approx. 20 seconds Approx. 20 seconds Approx. 22 seconds
Time 1 (Letter paper, (A4 paper, (A4 paper, (A4 paper,
(When [Quick short edge feed) short edge feed) short edge feed) short edge feed)
Master Making] is
OFF)
Master Making- Approx. 17 seconds Approx. 18 seconds Approx. 18 seconds Approx. 20 seconds
Time 1 (Letter Size paper, (A4 paper, (A4 paper, (A4 paper,
(When [Quick short edge feed) short edge feed) short edge feed) short edge feed)
Master Making] is
ON)
Scanning Resolu- 600 dpi × 600 dpi
tion
Printing Resolu- 300 dpi × 600 dpi (perforation on the master 2: 600 dpi × 600 dpi)
tion When [Quick Master Making] is set:
300 dpi × 400 dpi (perforation on the master 2: 600 dpi × 400 dpi)
Original Paper When auto document feeder is used:
Weight 50 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 (13-lb bond to 34-lb bond) (normal paper)
50 mm × 90 mm to 310 mm × 432 mm
100 mm × 148 mm to 300 mm × 432 mm
Maximum Scan- 297 mm × 432 mm (11 11/16 inches × 17 inches)
ning Area
Print Paper 46 g/m2 to 210 g/m2 (12-lb bond to 116-lb index)
Weight
100 mm × 148 mm to 310 mm × 432 mm
Print Paper Size
11
Maximum Print- 291 mm × 425 mm 291 mm × 413 mm 251 mm × 357 mm 210 mm × 290 mm
ing Area (11 15/32 inches × (11 15/32 inches × (9 7/8 inches × (8 1/4 inches ×
16 23/32 inches) 16 1/4 inches) 14 1/16 inches) 11 13/32 inches)
Stacking Capacity
Paper Receiving 1000 sheets 3 (stacking height of 110 mm [4 11/32 inches] or lower)
Tray Stacking
Capacity
Print Speed 6 levels: 60, 80, 100, 120, 130, and 150 (high speed 4) sheets per minute
Image Process- Line, Photo, Duo, Pencil
ing Mode
2-5
Print Reproduc- Type: mm

tion Ratio Zoom (50% to 200%), 100% reproduction ratio,
3 levels of enlargement (141%, 122%, 116%), 4 levels of reduction (94%, 87%, 82%, 71%)
Type: inch
Zoom (50% to 200%), 100% reproduction ratio,
User Interface LCD panel
Functions Original Scanning Mode, Scanning Level, Enlargement/Reproduction, Dot Process, 2-Up,
Book, Ink Saving, Quick Master Making, ADF Semi-Auto 5, Speed, Density, Print Position,
Program A/B, Job Separation 6, Idling, Confidential, Meter Display, Count Report Output,
Proof, Direct Printing, USB Flash-via-Printing, Auto Sleep Setting, Auto Power-OFF Setting,
ECO Mode, RISO iQuality System
Master Supply / Full automatic Full automatic Full automatic Full automatic
Disposal (approx. 215 sheets (approx. 220 sheets (approx. 250 sheets (approx. 295 sheets
per roll) per roll) per roll) per roll)
Method
Power Source AC 100-240 V, SF5350E • For Korea: AC 220-240 V
50-60 Hz <3.4-1.6 A> AC 220-240 V, AC 100-240 V 50-60 Hz <1.6 A>
50-60 Hz <1.6 A> 50-60 Hz <3.4-1.6 A>
SF5350A • For other countries:
• For Korea: AC 220 V
AC 100-240 V, 60 Hz <1.6 A>
50-60 Hz <3.4-1.6 A>
• For other countries:
AC 220 V,
60 Hz <1.6 A>
Power Consump- When optional accessories are not connected: Max. 300W
tion (Ready: 20 W or lower, Sleep: 5 W or lower, Power-OFF: 0.5 W or lower)
When optional accessories are connected 7:Max. 315W
Safety Standard IEC-60950-1 compliant, indoor, pollution degree 2, 11 at altitudes of 2000 m or lower
Optional Acces- Auto Document Feeder AF-VII, Color Print Drum (Cylinder), Wide Stacking Tray, Key/Card
sories Counter IV;N, IC Card Reader Activation kit RG, Job Separator IV;NII / NIII, Card Feed Kit,
Envelope Feed Kit, RISO Printer Driver for Macintosh
1 Measurement value when set to 100% reproduction ratio.
2 The perforation on the master refers to the number of holes made on a master of one-inch square.
3 When using the following weight of paper; 64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 (17-lb bond to 21-lb bond)
4 If the temperature of the inside of the print drum (cylinder) is less than 15°C (59°F), [High Speed] is not usable.
– Job Separator
2-6
11 The pollution degree of the usage environment due to dirt and dust in the air. Degree “2” corresponds to a general indoor envi-
ronment.
11
2-7
■ SF5430/5330/5230/5130/5030
SF5*3 series
Model SF5430 SF5330 SF5230 SF5130 SF5030
Methods
Master Making- Approx. 19 sec- Approx. 20 sec- Approx. 20 sec- Approx. 19 sec- Approx. 22 sec-
Time 1 onds onds onds onds onds
(When [Quick (Letter paper, (A4 paper, (A4 paper, (Letter paper, (A4 paper,
Master Making] is short edge feed) short edge feed) short edge feed) short edge feed) short edge feed)
OFF)
Master Making- Approx. 17 sec- Approx. 18 sec- Approx. 18 sec- Approx. 17 sec- Approx. 20 sec-
Time 1 onds onds onds onds onds
(When [Quick (Letter Size (A4 paper, (A4 paper, (Letter Size (A4 paper,
Master Making] is paper, short edge feed) short edge feed) paper, short edge feed)
ON) short edge feed) short edge feed)
Scanning Resolu- 600 dpi × 600 dpi
tion
Printing Resolu- 300 dpi × 600 dpi (perforation on the master 2: 600 dpi × 600 dpi)
tion When [Quick Master Making] is set:
300 dpi × 400 dpi (perforation on the master 2: 600 dpi × 400 dpi)
Original Paper When auto document feeder is used:
Weight 50 g/m2 to 128 g/m2 (13-lb bond to 34-lb bond) (normal paper)
50 mm × 90 mm to 310 mm × 432 mm
100 mm × 148 mm to 300 mm × 432 mm
Maximum Scan- 297 mm × 432 mm (11 11/16 inches × 17 inches)
ning Area
Print Paper 46 g/m2 to 157 g/m2 (12-lb bond to 42-lb bond)
Weight
Print Paper Size 100 mm × 148 mm to 310 mm × 432 mm
Maximum Print- 291 mm × 425 mm 291 mm × 413 mm 251 mm × 357 mm 210 mm × 357 mm 210 mm × 290 mm
ing Area (11 15/32 inches × (11 15/32 inches × (9 7/8 inches × (8 1/4 inches × (8 1/4 inches ×
16 23/32 inches) 16 1/4 inches) 14 1/16 inches) 14 1/16 inches) 11 13/32 inches)
Stacking Capacity
Paper Receiving 1000 sheets 3 (stacking height of 110 mm [4 11/32 inches] or lower)
Tray Stacking
Capacity
Print Speed 5 levels: 60, 80, 100, 120, and 130 sheets per minute
Image Process- Line, Photo, Duo, Pencil
ing Mode
2-8
Print Reproduc- Type: mm

tion Ratio Zoom (50% to 200%), 100% reproduction ratio,
Type: inch
Zoom (50% to 200%), 100% reproduction ratio,
User Interface LCD panel
Functions Original Scanning Mode, Scanning Level, Enlargement/Reproduction, Dot Process, 2-Up,
Book, Ink Saving, Quick Master Making, ADF Semi-Auto 4, Speed, Density, Print Position,
Program A/B, Job Separation 5, Idling, Confidential, Meter Display, Count Report Output,
Proof, Direct Printing, USB Flash-via-Printing, Auto Sleep Setting, Auto Power-OFF Setting,
ECO Mode, RISO iQuality System
Master Supply / Full automatic Full automatic Full automatic Full automatic Full automatic
Disposal (approx. 215 (approx. 220 (approx. 250 (approx. 295 (approx. 295
sheets per roll) sheets per roll) sheets per roll) sheets per roll) sheets per roll)
Method
Power Source 6 AC 100-120 V/ • For Korea: SF5230U SF5130U AC 220-240 V,
AC 220-240 V AC 220 V AC 100-120 V/ AC 100-120 V/ 50-60 Hz <1.6 A>
50-60 Hz 60 Hz <1.6 A> AC 220-240 V, AC 220-240 V,
<3.4-1.6 A> • For Taiwan 50-60 Hz 50-60 Hz
AC 110 V <3.4-1.6 A> <3.4-1.6 A>
60 Hz <3.4 A> SF5230E SF5130A
• For other coun- AC 220-240 V, AC 220-240 V,
tries: 50-60 Hz <1.6 A> 50-60 Hz <1.6 A>
AC 220-240 V SF5230A
50-60 Hz • For Korea:
<1.6 A> AC 220 V
60 Hz <1.6 A>
• For Taiwan
AC 110 V
60 Hz <3.4 A>
• For other coun-
tries:
AC 220-240 V
50-60 Hz
<1.6 A>
Power Consump- When optional accessories are not connected: Max. 300W 11
tion (Ready: 20 W or lower, Sleep: 5 W or lower, Power-OFF: 0.5 W or lower)
When optional accessories are connected 7:Max. 315W
Safety Standard IEC-60950-1 compliant, indoor, pollution degree 2, 11 at altitudes of 2000 m or lower
Optional Acces- Auto Document Feeder AF-VII, Color Print Drum (Cylinder), Wide Stacking Tray, Key/Card
sories Counter IV;N, IC Card Reader Activation kit RG, Job Separator IV;NII / NIII, RISO Network
Kit S10, Card Feed Kit, Envelope Feed Kit, RISO Printer Driver for Macintosh
2-9
1 Measurement value when set to 100% reproduction ratio.

2 The perforation on the master refers to the number of holes made on a master of one-inch square.
3 When using the following weight of paper; 64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 (17-lb bond to 21-lb bond)
6 To switch between 100-120 V and 220-240 V, contact your dealer or authorized representative.

– Job Separator
11 The pollution degree of the usage environment due to dirt and dust in the air. Degree “2” corresponds to a general indoor envi-
ronment.
Notes
• The specifications and type of the product are subject to change without prior notice.
• Please note that due to improvements and changes to this machine, some images and explanations in this guide
may not correspond to your machine.
2 - 10
2. Cross-Sectional Diagram
Scanner
Cutter
Compression plate
h Thermal print head
Master disposal box

g f
Pickup roller
i Write roller
Scraper roller
e
b
a
d
c
Paper feed tray
Guide roller
Timing roller
Paper receiving tray
Suction unit
Pressure roller
The descriptions correspond to the numbers in the figure.
a First paper feed area: Sends paper from the Paper feed tray one sheet at a time.
b Second paper feed area: Stops the paper sent from the first paper-feed stage, and accurately feeds
it to the Print drum and pressure section.
c Press section: The Pressure roller presses the paper firmly against the Print drum for
printing.
d Paper ejection section: Removes the printed paper from the Print drum using the Separator, and
sends it to the Paper receiving tray.
e Print drum: Supplies ink from the Ink cartridge to the surface of the Print drum for
printing.
f Clamp unit: Open and closes the Clamp plate of Print drum to nip the tip of the Master
material.
g Master removal section: Peels the Master from the Print drum after use, and discharges it into the
Master disposal box.
h Flatbed section: The Lamp carriage and Mirror carriage move, and the CCD unit reads the
original on the Scanner table.
i Master-making section: Transports and creates a Master using the Thermal print head, then
sends the produced Master to the Print drum, and cuts the Master
material.
2 - 11
3. Operation Outline
Set an original, and press the Start key
Master removal operation Master making operation
Removes the used master from The original is scanned by the image
the print drum, and sends it to the sensor, and the image is transferred
master disposal box. onto a master by the thermal print head.
Master loading operation
The produced master is wound

around the print drum and cut.
The proof-print is printed.
Printing operation
Paper is fed from the paper-feed tray one sheet

at a time for printing. The printed paper is
ejected out onto the paper-receiving tray.
2 - 12
4. Outline of Paper Feeding, Printing and Paper Ejection Operations
Scraper roller
Pickup roller
a The Print drum, Scraper roller and Pickup roller

are rotated. Only one sheet of paper is fed to
the second paper feed section by the action of
Stripper pad.
Stripper pad
Guide roller b The paper sent from the first paper feed area
contacts the Timing roller and Guide roller, and
stops temporarily. This causes slight buckling of
the paper.
Timing roller
c The Timing roller and Guide roller are rotated,

and the paper is sent to the pressure section.
(This is referred to as the second paper feed.
Idle running is performed by the Scraper roller
Pressure roller and Pickup roller to avoid the back tension of
paper.)
d When the paper is fed further in from the

second paper feed area, the Pressure roller
rises and the paper is caught between the Drum
and Pressure roller at the start of the printing
Separation fan operation.
e The printed paper is removed from the Print

drum by the Separator and Separation fan.
When the Pressure roller rises, the Guide roller
also moves up to prevent tension from being
Separator
added on the tailing end of the paper.
Suction belt
f Then, the Suction fan pulls in the air to keep

the paper firmly on the Transfer belts while the
paper is carried to the Paper receiving tray.
g The next sheet of paper is sent to the first paper

feed area, and the Guide roller comes down to
nip with the Timing roller.
2 - 13
5. Outline of Master removal, Master making and Master Loading Operations
Master release bar

Clamp plate
Master removal operation
a The Clamp plate holding the leading edge

of the Master opens and the Master release
bar rises to lift the Master out from under
the Clamp plate.
Master material
Master removal rollers
b The Master removal rollers and Print drum

rotate, thereby separating the Master from
the print drum and sending it to the Master
disposal box.
Master disposal box
Compression plate
c The motion of the compression plate

starts, pressing the Master into the Master
disposal box.
Master making operation

Thermal print head
a The CCD reads the original, and the
Thermal print head burns the image onto a
Master material.
Master loading operation
a The Master is sent to the Clamp plate on

the Print drum and the leading edge of the
Master material is clamped.
b The Print drum rotates to wind the Master

Cutter around it.
c The cutter cuts the Master material.
2 - 14
MEMO
2 - 15
MEMO
2 - 16
CHAPTER 3: Main Drive Section
Contents
1. Mechanism.............................................................................................2
1-1. Main Drive Mechanism.................................................................2
1-2. Print Drum Angle Detection..........................................................3
1-3. Set Switch Mechanism..................................................................4
1-4. Separation Pump Mechanism.......................................................5
2. Disassembly...........................................................................................7
2-1. Removing the Pressure Spring.....................................................9
2-2. Removing the Main Belt..............................................................10
2-3. Removing the Main Drive Assembly...........................................12
2-4. Removing the Separation Pump Unit..........................................13
2-5. Removing the Pressure Solenoid...............................................15
2-6. Removing the Piston Assembly on the Separation Pump Unit...16
2-7. Removing the Main Motor Assembly..........................................19
2-8. Removing the Rear Cover Set Switch........................................20
3. Adjustment...........................................................................................21
3-1. Print Drum <Position-B> Stop Position Adjustment....................21
3-1
1. Mechanism
1-1. Main Drive Mechanism

• Main motor drives the print drum, the first paper feed, the second paper feed and the separation pump.
• Main motor FG sensor detects the speed and the angle position of the print drum.
• When the main motor is turned on, the rotation is transmitted to the Motor pulley, Main belt, Main
pulley, and then the Print drum.
* Print drum can be rotated free by switch 2 (DRUM FREE) on the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB.
* After turning the rear cover set switch ON, print drum can be rotated at 10rpm by running test
mode No.896 (print drum free rotation).
Main pulley
Main belt
Main motor
(Main motor FG built-in sensor)
Separation pump Motor pulley
FG is an abbreviation of frequency
generator. The pulse signal corresponding
to the rotation is generated, and used for
rotation control.
3-2
1-2. Print Drum Angle Detection
On the basis of the position-B, the print position control or the sensor detection timing control is
performed. Position-B is a center location of the Position-B actuator plate on the Position-B sensor and
the pressure cam. This is also the position where the print drum is removed or inserted.
The rotation angle is decided by the pulse count of the main motor FG sensor on the basis of the
Position-B. In addition, the position that is rotated 40° from the Position-B is defined as Position-A, and
the Print drum angle is displayed the Position-A as 0°.
Position-B sensor Position-B actuator plate
Position-B
3-3
1-3. Set Switch Mechanism
Objective of the set switches are the safety of the work performed by users.
Set switch; 5 locations

Rear cover set switches (2 locations; each on the paper feed side and ejection side)
Master disposal box set switch
Master making unit set switch
Print drum set switch
The above switches prevent the following parts from operating when each section is not set properly.
• Main motor
• Clamp motor
• Master compression motor
• Master removal motor
• Separation fan
* Stripper set switch corresponds to the elevator motor.
Master disposal box set switch (front side) Rear cover set switches
Master making unit set switch
3-4
1-4. Separation Pump Mechanism
Separation pump is a mechanism to produce the compressed air required for paper separation from
Print drum. The Main motor rotation makes the reciprocating motion of the Piston. When the Piston
compresses, the compressed air is produced within the Cylinder. When the Piston intakes the air, the
air is inhaled from the Intake valve. The compressed air travels through the hose and ejects out from the
hole on the tip of the separator to peel and separates the paper from the Print drum. The timing of the
Separation pump movement is controlled by the mounting position of the Timing plate.
Main motor
Main belt
Cylinder Pump base separation

Separation pump gear
Timing plate
Separation pump
Arm Piston
Piston assembly
Intake valve
3-5
Air blow ON/OFF
Spring Pump base

Pressure control valve
Lower limit pressure control plate
Lower limit pressure control plate position Uncompress the spring ← → Compress the spring
[Air blow OFF] [Air blow ON]
[Air blow ON]

1) Slide the Lower limit pressure control plate to the position in which the spring is compressed.
2) The air does not leak out from the Pressure control valve when the pressure in the Cylinder builds
up.
3) The compressed air therefore is pushed through the hose and ejected out from the tip of the
separator.
[Air blow OFF]

1) Slide the Lower limit pressure control plate to the position in which the spring is uncompressed.
2) The compressed air leaks out from the Pressure control valve when the pressure in the Cylinder
builds up.
3) The compressed air is emptied from the Cylinder and therefore the air is not supplied to the
separator.
It should always be set to

[Air blow ON] for normal printing operation.
Q . When is the [Air blow OFF] setting necessary ?
A.
• Used when the image quality is affected due to the paper separating from the Print drum at unequal
timing i.e. center of the paper versus side ends of the paper.
• Used when the air expelled out from the tip of the separator is found to be the cause for paper jams.
3-6
2. Disassembly
<Precautions to work safely on the drive area >
Working on the Main Drive area and Press Section with the Pressure spring attached on the
machine may cause the moving parts, such as the Gears and Cams, to move suddenly and cause
injuries.
Make sure to follow the instructions below before working on the Main Drive and Press Section.
The following three points must be followed when working on the drive area for SAFETY reasons.
1) When performing maintenance on the main drive section and press section, remove the Pressure
spring at the start of the disassembly, and attach it only at the end of the reassembly. (Refer to the
2-1, for the spring removal procedure.)
Pressure spring
2) Activate Test Mode No. 892 <Machine Position-B Stop> to stop the machine at Position-B.
3) Set the vertical print position to the home position, and insert 8 mm diameter x 160 mm long JIG
shaft into the Position-B phase alignment hole, located on the paper feed timing area, to prevent the
drive area from moving. <Turn OFF the machine power just before inserting the JIG shaft.>
* The jig shaft holes on the Outer and Inner vertical positioning gears meet once at every 5 turns of
the Inner vertical positioning gear. (Repeat Test Mode No. 892 explained on above step-2 until the
jig shaft holes on the two gears meet.)
<CAUTION: Power to the machine should NEVER be applied when the JIG shaft is inserted in the
machine.>
3-7
Phase matching hole

Inner vertical of paper feed drive
positioning gear mechanism
Outer vertical
positioning gear
3-8
2-1. Removing the Pressure Spring
1) Make confidential master on the Print drum. (Prevention of ink adhesion on the pressure roller.)
2) Run test mode No.908 (pressure control maintenance position moves), and then switch OFF the
power.
3) Remove the rear cover and open the power supply assembly and MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB assembly.
(Refer to Chapter 1.)
4) Slightly rotate the Pressure lever in the clockwise direction (arrow A on photo) and separate the
Solenoid lever from Pressure lever (arrow B on photo), return the Pressure lever to its original
position.
5) After removing the Pressure spring from Print pressure control plate (arrow C on photo), remove it
from the Pressure lever.
Pressure lever
Solenoid lever
Pressure lever
Pressure spring
Print pressure control plate
3-9
2-2. Removing the Main Belt
* When removing the main cover assembly, pay attention not to let the main drive assembly fall off from the
machine.
1) Remove the pressure spring. (Refer to 2-1.)

2) Run test mode No.892 “machine Position B stop” until the phase alignment holes on the inner vertical
positioning gear and outer vertical positioning gear of the paper feed mechanism align in order to
insert the 8mm(diameter) x 160mm jig shaft through the two alignment holes.
(Refer to page 3-7 of this Chapter: Precautions to work safely on the drive area.)
3) Remove the Print drum and switch OFF the power.
4) Disconnect the Position B sensor connector and remove Reuse band (1 pc) from main cover
assembly.
5) Loosen the securing screws of tension lever (M4×8 screw; 2 pcs) (arrow D on photo) and loosen the
tension of the main belt.
Reuse band Position-B sensor

Main drive assembly
Main cover assembly

D
Main motor bearing
plate
Tension lever
Stationary plate; rear
lower
6) Remove the Stationary plate; rear lower (round tip IT3C4×8; 1 pc).
7) Remove the Main motor bearing plate (M4 x 8 screw; 3 pcs).
8) Remove the Main cover assembly (M4 x 8 screw; 5 pcs).
3 - 10
9) Remove the pressure cam (M4 x 10 screw; 3 pcs)

* In order to assemble the Pressure cam back in the correct mounting position, insert the 4mm
diameter jig in the positioning hole on the Pressure cam through the Main drive assembly, when
mounting the Pressure cam back on the printer.
10) Remove the main belt.
Main drive assembly

Pressure cam Insert the 4mm diameter jig (during assembly)
Main belt
Timing plate
Insert the 4mm diameter jig in the hole during assembly
< Precautions in assembly >

• In mounting the Main cover assembly back on the printer, tighten the screw on the upper right the first,
while pushing the Main drive assembly firmly against the printer.
• Insert the 4mm diameter jigs in both the Main drive assembly and Timing plate to synchronize the drive
phase.
• After all the components are assembled back on the printer, lastly tighten the tensioner screw on the
tension lever while applying tension on the timing belt by pushing on the tensioner lever against the
timing belt.
3 - 11
2-3. Removing the Main Drive Assembly

2) Remove the main belt. (Refer to 2-2.)
3) Remove the separation spring and follower spring.
4) Remove the main drive assembly.
Main drive assembly Insert the 8mm diameter jig
Separation spring Follower spring
«Important: Installation precautions»

In attaching the Main shaft assembly back on the machine, first insert the 8 mm diameter x 160 mm JIG
shaft in the paper feed drive area to fix the gears at Position-B, and then mount the Main drive
assembly back on the machine while aligning the markings between the Main gear and the Inner vertical
positioning gear.
Inner vertical positioning gear Outer vertical positioning gear
Main gear
Marking
3 - 12
2-4. Removing the Separation Pump Unit

2) Insert the 8mm diameter jig from outside of the main cover assembly through pressure cam in
position-B. (Anti-rotation of drive mechanism.)
3) Remove the separation pump unit. (M4 x 8 screw; 5 pcs)
4) Pinch and slide the power band, and unplug the air hose from the separation pump unit.
Insert the 8mm

diameter jig
Main cover assembly
Separation pump unit
Power band
Air hose
3 - 13

1) With the Main drive mechanism locked at Position-B by inserting 8mm diameter jig as done per
previous page, mount the Separation pump unit back on the printer while inserting a 4mm diameter
jig through the hole on the Timing plate, penetrating into the side frame of the printer to synchronize
the Separation pump unit drive to the Position-B of the printer.
Insert the 4mm diameter jig to the mark of separation pump unit.
«Separation
pump unit»
2) Fix the position of the Separation pump unit by sliding it towards the right, its gear engaging against
the Main motor pulley gear with proper amount of backlash between the two gears.
3) The maximum misalignment allowed for the Position-B mounting position of the Timing plate is 1
tooth off.
4) The finger grip on the power band on the air tube should be facing away, clear from the Pressure
control valve.
3 - 14
2-5. Removing the Pressure Solenoid
1) Remove the Pressure spring. (Refer to 2-1.)

2) Remove the Separation spring.
3) Remove the Pressure solenoid base. (round tip IT3C4×8 screw; 2 pcs)(arrow E on photo)
E
E
Pressure solenoid
Pressure solenoid base
4) Remove the Pressure solenoid. (M3×6 screw; 2 pcs)
3 - 15
2-6. Removing the Piston Assembly on the Separation Pump Unit
* Piston assembly on the Separation pump unit can be removed with the Pump unit attached on the
machine.
1) Switch OFF the power, remove the rear cover and open Power supply assembly and MAIN-
SYSTEM-PCB assembly. (Refer to Chapter 1.)
2) Remove E-ring (4mm; 1 pc) and draw the arm from the shaft of Separation pump gear assembly.
3) Rotate the piston assembly 90 degrees and pull the Piston to the edge of the Cylinder.
4) Remove E-ring (6mm; 1 pc) and pull the Separation pump gear assembly out forward.
5) Pull the Piston assembly out from the cylinder.
Pump base
E-ring; 6mm
E-ring; 4mm
Cylinder Arm Separation pump gear assembly
Arm
«Piston Assembly»
3 - 16
< Precaution in assembly >

• The concave side of the groove on the Arm of the Piston should face out when the Piston is inserted
into the Cylinder.
• Air pump gear assembly should be mounted on the unit with the Main drive section of the machine
in Position-B, and the Positioning marking (elongated hole) on the Separation pump unit gear should
meet with the marking on the Separation pump unit bracket. (Refer to 2-4.)
Cylinder
6) Remove mounting screws (M4 x 8 screw; 5 pcs) and remove the Pump base.
7) Remove mounting screws (M4 x 8 screw; 4 pcs) and remove the Cylinder.
Caution:
Air release valve and Spring will come loose from the Cylinder. Pay caution not to lose these items.
Spring Pump base

Pressure control valve Lower limit pressure control plate
O-ring
8) Remove the O-ring from the Piston assembly.
O-ring
Piston assembly
Grease-up

• Apply white grease onto the O-ring for lubrication. (Shin-Etsu silicone:G-501)
3 - 17
Piston
9) Remove E-ring (4mm; 1 pc), draw the Arm shaft, and remove the Piston.
Piston
Arm
E-ring Arm shaft

• Apply white grease for lubrication. (Shin-Etsu silicone:G-501) Refer to “Removing O-ring”.
• The concave side of the groove on the Arm (the side of Bearing metal and press fitting) should face
toward the Air intake hole on the Piston.
Arm Piston
Concave side of the groove Air intake hole on the Piston
3 - 18
2-7. Removing the Main Motor Assembly
1) Remove the Pressure spring. (Refer to 2-1.)

2) Remove the Main belt. (Refer to 2-2.)
3) Remove the Main motor assembly. (round tip IT3C4×8 screw; 4 pcs)
Main motor assembly
3 - 19
2-8. Removing the Rear Cover Set Switch
1) Switch OFF the power, remove the rear cover and Scanner cover (rear). (Refer to Chapter 1.)
2) Disconnect the connectors from the Rear cover set switches.
3) Remove the fixing screw (round tip IT3C4×8 screw; 1 pc) and the Rear cover set switch assembly.
4) Remove the spring and E-ring (4mm; 1 pc), and then remove the Rear cover set switch together with
the bracket.
5) Remove the Rear cover set switch. (M3×14 screw; 2 pcs)
Connector
Rear cover set switch
E-ring (4mm; 1 pc) Spring
«Rear cover set switch assembly»
3 - 20
3. Adjustment
3-1. Print Drum <Position-B> Stop Position Adjustment
Checks and adjustment

1) Open the Front door and press the green colored Print drum release button.
2) Confirm that the Print drum slides out of the machine smoothly when pulled out by hand.
3) If the Print drum does not come out smoothly, run Test Mode No. 942 (Print drum Position-B
Adjustment) to adjust the Print drum <Position-B> stop position.
Test Mode No. 942

Set range: ±4.0° from standard angle. (Overrun by +)
Input: -40 ~ +40
Set unit: 5 (0.5°)
SF9/6 default: -15 (-1.5°)
SF5 default: 0 (0°)
4) Run test mode No.892 (machine Position-B stop) (the drawing position of Print drum).
Repeat from above step-(2) until the Print drum can be smoothly pulled out.
3 - 21
MEMO
3 - 22
MEMO
3 - 23
MEMO
3 - 24
CHAPTER 4: First Paper Feed Section
Contents
1. Mechanism.............................................................................................2
1-1. Paper Feed Tray Mechanism........................................................2
1-2. Paper Feed Tray Elevation Mechanism........................................3
1-3. Paper Feed Tray Upper Limit Position Control.............................4
1-4. Paper Feed Tray Elevation Set Mechanism.................................6
1-5. Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Mechanism.............................7
1-6. First Paper Feed Operation..........................................................8
1-7. Paper Feed Adjustment Function.................................................9
1-8. Paper Stripping Mechanism........................................................10
2. Disassembly.........................................................................................12
2-1. Removing the Paper Feed Tray Unit..........................................12
2-2. Removing the Paper Detection Sensor/Paper Size Detection
Sensor/Paper Width Potentiometer............................................14
2-3. Removing the Scraper Roller/Pickup Roller................................16
2-4. Removing the Paper Feed Roller Assembly...............................18
2-5. Removing the Paper Feed Tray Upper Limit Set Switch............19
2-6. Removing the Paper Feed Tray Upper Limit Sensor and
Paper Feed Pressure Sensor.....................................................21
2-7. Removing the Paper Feed Clutch...............................................22
2-8. Removing the Elevator Motor.....................................................23
2-9. Removing the Paper Feed Lower Limit Sensor and
Paper Feed Tray Lower Limit Set Switch....................................24
2-10. Removing the Stripper Unit.........................................................25
2-11. Removing the Stripper Pad Assembly........................................26
2-12. Removing the Elevator Shaft Assembly......................................27
3. Adjustment...........................................................................................29
3-1. Upper Limit Sensor Position Adjustment....................................29
3-2. Stripper Pad Adjustment.............................................................30
3-3. Paper Feed Clutch ON Angle Adjustment..................................31
3-4. Paper Feed Clutch OFF Angle Adjustment.................................31
3-5. Paper Width Potentiometer Adjustment......................................32
4-1
1. Mechanism
1-1. Paper Feed Tray Mechanism
Paper feed tray has the following sensors.

• Paper detection sensor: Detects whether there is any paper or not.
• Paper width potentiometer: Detects paper width.
• Paper size detection sensor: Detects the length (vertical or horizontal orientation) of paper.
Printing position adjustment of horizontal orientation.

• Turn the Adjusting dial of paper feed tray by hand and change the position of paper (paper feed tray)
in horizontal orientation to adjust printing position.
Paper width potentiometer
Paper detection sensor
Paper size detection sensor
Adjusting dial
4-2
1-2. Paper Feed Tray Elevation Mechanism
Paper feed tray horizontally holds loaded paper of approximately 8kg max. (1000 sheets of A3 size
paper, 64g /m2 weight ) and moves vertically, while maintaining the position of the paper upper surface to
the Scraper roller on the main body side.
The vertical movement of the paper tray is based on the "rack and pinion", a self-propelled mechanism,
in which the motor and pinion on the paper feed tray are moved with respect to the rack on the frame on
the main body.
Frame guide hole Elevator motor unit fixing shaft Frame guide hole
Elevation
Scraper roller
Descend
Elevator motor
Spur gear
(Pinion)
Elevator shaft E rack
Spur gear
Elevator motor gear train (Pinion)
Pickup roller
E rack
4-3
1-3. Paper Feed Tray Upper Limit Position Control
Upper limit Upper limit

sensor B sensor A Paper feed tray button Elevator motor
Upper limit detecting plate

(normal)
Upper limit detecting plate (card)
Pickup unit frame body
Lower limit sensor
1) The role of paper feed tray upper limit position control

The role of paper feed tray upper limit position control is to maintain an applicable paper feed
pressure.
Paper feed pressure is a pressure applied to paper by scraper roller and pickup roller, and
determined by the following 3 elements.
a Weight of pickup unit frame body, b Paper feed pressure adjust lever spring (manual switching),
c Paper feed tray upper limit position,
The applicable paper feed pressure differ depending on the paper type (normal, card, custom
paper). Because Paper feed tray upper limit position can be high-accuracy controlled, it is used in
the paper feed pressure maintenance.
2) Mechanism and operation

There are A and B (2 pcs) of paper feed upper limit sensors. Upper limit detecting plate (normal)
correspond to the Paper feed upper limit sensor B, upper limit detecting plate (card) correspond to
the Paper feed upper limit sensor A. The light blocking and reception combinations specified in the
two sensors determine the paper feed tray upper limit position for normal, card, and custom papers.
The paper feed tray loaded with paper moves upward and stops at the specified upper limit position.
4-4
Upper limit
Feed tray down position
Blocked
Upper limit sensor A
Open
Blocked
Upper limit sensor B
Open
Custom Normal Card
Selection of paper feed tray upper limit position
Paper feed tray upper limit position can be selected by paper feed adjustment, test mode, and paper
feed pressure lever.
* Refer to section 1-7 within this Chapter for the detailed information on the [paper feed adjustment].
paper feed
Priority Function Setting Paper type pressure
Normal Card
Test mode No.740 setting

Auto (Example 1)
< Default >
1 Paper feed adjustment 0 Normal ← ←

Manual +1 Card ← ← (Example 2)
-1 Custom ← ←
Auto
0 (paper feed pressure lever) Normal Card (Example 3)
Test mode No.740 < Default >
2 (Selection of paper feed upper
limit position) 1 Normal ← ←
2 Card ← ←
3 Custom ← ←
Example 1: “Paper feed adjustment” default is “auto”, the function is selected by the parameter set by
test mode No.740.
Example 2: When the "Paper feed adjustment" is selected to any one of the three settings under,
"Manual", that becomes the top priority setting and overrides the test mode No. 740
setting.
Example 3: To change the upper limit position of paper feed tray by the position of “paper feed
pressure lever”, set the “paper feed adjustment” to auto and it is also necessary for the
test mode No.740 to be set to "auto".
4-5
1-4. Paper Feed Tray Elevation Set Mechanism
When Paper feed tray is being elevated up or down, or even in the stationary state, the safety is
confirmed by the Paper feed tray upper limit set switch and Paper feed tray lower limit set switch.
When the Paper feed cover is lifted up, the Paper feed tray upper limit set switch is released. When the
Paper feed lower limit frame is pressed down, the Paper feed tray lower limit set switch is released. If
either the Paper feed tray upper or lower limit set switch is released, the 24V system will be blocked and
the elevator motor is stopped.
In addition, the Stripper set switch prevents the elevator motor from going up or down when the stripper
unit is not set.
Stripper set switch Paper feed cover
Paper feed tray upper limit set switch
Lower limit frame
Paper feed tray lower limit set switch
4-6
1-5. Paper Feed Pressure Adjustment Mechanism
The user is able to select the paper feed pressure depending on his or her paper type, depending on the
relationship between the paper feed adjustment and test mode setting as described on the relationship
diagram given on [section 1-3 "Paper Feed Tray Upper Limit Position Control"] in this Chapter.
There is a Paper feed pressure adjust lever on the right side of the First paper feed stay assembly. Paper
feed pressure of the scraper roller (scraper pressure) can be switched to “Standard” (weak) or “Card”
(hard) by the Paper feed pressure adjust lever.
Paper feed pressure (scraper pressure) becomes stronger when the Paper feed pressure adjust lever
is switched to the right “Card”. The Paper feed pressure sensor checks the position of the Paper feed
pressure adjust lever. If it is set to "Card", the following control will be performed.
• Upper limit position of the Paper feed tray.
Upper limit is at the high position. (High paper feed pressure.)
• Timing of paper feed clutch ON/OFF (In relation to the print drum angle.)
Delays the OFF timing of the clutch. (Increases the first paper feed amount)
• Suction volume of the suction fan.
The Suction fan operates at the maximum power. (Setting 4)
First paper feed stay assembly
Paper feed pressure spring Paper feed pressure sensor
Paper feed
pressure adjust
lever
Pickup frame assembly

(The scraper roller is mounted on this assembly.)
4-7
1-6. First Paper Feed Operation
This mechanism is intended to feed the topmost paper on the paper feed tray one at a time.
Paper feed operation is performed by the Scraper roller and Pickup roller, and the timing is adjusted by
the Paper feed clutch. The driving source is main motor. When printing starts, the Main motor is turned
ON and the print drum is rotated via the timing belt. When the Main motor is turned ON, the gear on the
paper feed clutch rotates all the time. When the Print drum rotates to a certain angle from Position-A,
the Paper feed clutch is turned ON, the Scraper roller and pickup roller rotates to feed paper on the
paper feed tray to the internal machine. When the Paper sensor gets in the light blocking status due to
the paper fed to the internal machine, the Print drum rotates to a certain angle, the Paper feed clutch is
turned OFF, which completes the first paper feed operation. When the paper edge reaches the Guide
roller and Timing roller, it stops where it has paper buckle.
• When the Print drum rotates to the paper feed jam detection angle (paper IN jam) after the Paper feed
clutch switches ON, the machine checks with the Paper sensor for any no-paper-feed jam.
• The Scraper and Pickup rollers are equipped with one-way clutch to enable free rotation and to keep
the first paper feed section from halting or slowing down the paper speed after the paper is fed to the
second paper feed section.
Pickup roller
Main belt
Scraper roller
Paper feed clutch
Main motor
Paper sensor (receive) Pickup roller
Scraper roller
Guide roller
Timing roller Stripper pad
Paper sensor (send)
4-8
1-7. Paper Feed Adjustment Function
The following functions can be set on the operation panel in the paper feed adjustment function.
• Paper feed upper limit position
• Paper buckle amount
• Paper feed ON timing
• Paper feed OFF timing (paper buckle amount)
Operation method:
• Go to the adjustment screen: Normal screen→“Function” tab→“Paper feed adjustment” button
→“Paper feed adjustment” screen→“Manual adjustment” button→ figure-1 screen →“Detail” button→
figure-2 screen
• Save adjusted value: “Login/Call” button→ figure-3 screen→“Login” button →log in each button
• Call adjusted value: Login/Call” button→ figure-3 screen→“Call” button →call each button
• Apply manual adjusted value: “Paper feed adjustment” screen→“Manual adjustment” button→ push
“OK” button
* Regardless of the adjusted value changed/called or not, adjusted value on figure-1, 2 are reflected
on the machine until the printer is switched OFF.
Adjustments made by the Fig. 1 Screen
« Paper feed tray upper limit position »
Selects the stop position of the Paper feed tray.
Adjustable range: +1 (Card paper position)
0 (Standard paper position)
-1 (Custom paper position)
« Paper buckle amount »
Selects the Paper feed clutch OFF timing in
regard to the pre-programmed print drum angle.
Adjustable range: - 8 degrees to + 8 degrees.
(Adjustable by unit of 2
« Fig. 1 » degrees.)
Adjustments made by the Fig.2 Screen

« Paper feed clutch ON Timing »
Selects the Paper feed clutch ON timing in
(Adjustable by unit of 1
degree.)
« Paper feed clutch OFF Timing »
Selects the Paper feed clutch OFF timing in
« Fig. 2 » (Adjustable by unit of 1
degree.)
4-9
« Notes of adjusted value »

When the setting value of test mode No.741
(Paper feed clutch ON angle adjustment) is
changed, the “paper feed ON timing” standard
value of paper feed adjustment is also changed.
When the setting value of test mode No.742
(Paper feed clutch OFF angle adjustment) is
changed, the standard value of “paper buckle
amount” and "paper feed OFF timing (paper
buckle amount)" on paper feed adjustment are
also changed.
« Fig.3 »
1-8. Paper Stripping Mechanism
Paper loaded on the paper feed tray is fed between the Pickup roller and Stripper pad, scraped by the
rotation of the scraper roller. Then the paper is stripped by the Pickup roller and Stripper pad to feed the
topmost paper to the internal machine one at a time.
The Stripper pad uses the force of Stripper spring that is pressed against the Pickup roller when paper is
fed, in order to separate the paper.
Users can adjust the Stripper pad angle and stripper pressure using the Stripper pad angle adjustment
dial and stripper pressure adjuster respectively.
Pickup roller
Stripper pad
Stripper pad angle adjustment dial
Stripper spring
«Adjustment of Stripper pad angle»
4 - 10
Stripping force varying due to the stripper pad angle
Stripper pad angle Large (Stripper pad is in the standing position)

The paper edge contacts the Stripper pad in a sharp, sticking angle, to generate a strong stripping force.
Pickup roller
Paper
Stripper pad
Stripper pad angle Normal
Stripper pad angle Small (Stripper pad is in the lying position)

The paper edge contacts the Stripper pad in a small, light scraping angle, to generate a weak stripping
force.
4 - 11
2. Disassembly
2-1. Removing the Paper Feed Tray Unit
1) Lower the Paper feed tray all the way down and switch OFF the machine power.
2) Close the Paper feed tray and remove the Hinge cover by removing screw. (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc)
3) Open the Paper feed tray and remove the FFC cover. (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc)
4) Remove the Connector cover by removing screw (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc).
5) Pull the FFC off from connector and remove the FFC holder from Paper feed tray mount.
6) Remove E-rings (1pc each) on the front and rear of the Paper feed tray unit, and remove the Paper
feed tray unit from the machine.
* FFC is an abbreviation for flexible flat cable, meaning the thin tape-shaped wire.
FFC cover
Connector cover
Paper feed tray unit
FFC holder
FFC
Hinge cover
Paper feed tray mount

4 - 12
FFC holder
FFC Connector
<Precaution in assembly>
Insert in a direction which the contact point of FFC can
be seen.
E-ring E-ring
Paper feed tray

retaining plate
Paper feed tray

retaining plate
Paper feed tray frame (rear)
4 - 13
2-2. Removing the Paper Detection Sensor/Paper Size Detection Sensor/Paper Width Potentiometer
1) Lower the Paper feed tray all the way down and switch OFF the machine power. Remove the Paper
feed tray unit from the machine. (Refer to the previous section.)
2) Remove screws (3 x 8 screw; 7 pcs) and remove the Paper feed tray bottom frame together with
Paper feed tray mount.
Paper feed tray mount Paper feed tray bottom frame
4 - 14
Removing the Paper Detection Sensor and Paper Size Detection Sensor
3)-1 Unplug connectors from each sensor and unhook the craws of the sensors to remove them.
Removing the Paper Width Potentiometer

3)-2 Remove screws (M3 x 8 screw; 2 pcs), unplug the connector, and remove the Paper width
potentiometer.
Paper width potentiometer

• Align the eye mark line on the Fence racks and Spur gear in a straight line and insert the Potentiometer
shaft through the Spur gear. Face the Paper width potentiometer with the flat cut on the shaft hole
towards the eye mark line on the Spur gear and insert and fix it. (M3 x 8 screw; 1 pc)
Fence rack
Spur gear
Paper width potentiometer Potentiometer shaft
4 - 15
2-3. Removing the Scraper Roller/Pickup Roller
Removing the scraper roller

1) Lower the Paper feed tray all the way down, and switch OFF the machine power.
2) Remove the Snap ring from the Scraper shaft, and remove the Bearing metal in the front side.
3) Slide the Scraper shaft towards the rear of the printer and remove the Bearing metal on the rear
of the pickup unit frame body. Remove scraper roller with the whole Scraper shaft in downward
direction.
4) Pull the Scraper roller off from Scraper shaft.
* The only expendable part is the Paper feed roller. Remove and replace it from the core assembly.
This is the same with the Pickup roller.
(Paper feed roller)
Pickup unit frame body Snap ring (Core assembly)
Scraper shaft Pickup roller

Scraper roller
Scraper roller Bearing metal

Scraper shaft Snap ring
4 - 16
Removing the Pickup Roller

2) Remove the Snap ring off from the Pickup shaft.
3) Pull the Pickup roller out from the Pickup shaft.
Pickup roller Snap ring
Pickup shaft
Since there are one-way clutches in the scraper roller and pickup roller, if the attaching direction is
wrong, even if the pickup shaft rotates, the roller does not rotate. Slide the roller on the shaft and rotate
the roller in the direction shown by the arrow mark on the above photograph. If the roller is mounted
correctly, the roller will rotate freely in the direction of the arrow mark.
4 - 17
2-4. Removing the Paper Feed Roller Assembly
2) Remove the Paper feed cover by removing screws (M4×8 screw; 2 pcs)
3) Remove the Paper feed roller assembly by removing the fixing screw (M4×8 screw; 1 pc).
Paper feed cover
Paper feed roller assembly
4 - 18
2-5. Removing the Paper Feed Tray Upper Limit Set Switch
1) Lower the Paper feed tray all the way down and turn OFF the machine power.
2) Remove the Paper feed roller assembly. (Refer to 2-4)
3) Remove the G-roller cover. (Round tip IT3C3×6 screw; 2 pcs)
4) Unplug the Connector (4 pcs).
5) Remove the Upper limit set switch spring.
6) Remove the First paper feed stay assembly. (Round tip IT3C3 screw×6; 3 pcs)
G-roller cover
Upper limit set switch spring
Connector
< First paper feed stay assembly >
4 - 19
7) Unplug the connector and remove the Paper feed tray upper limit set switch. (M3×14 screw; 2 pcs)
Paper feed Upper limit set switch
Paper feed tray button
4 - 20
2-6. Removing the Paper Feed Tray Upper Limit Sensor and Paper Feed Pressure Sensor
1) Lower the Paper feed tray all the way down and switch OFF the machine power.
2) Remove the First paper feed stay assembly. (Refer to 2-5, 1) to 5).)
Removing the Paper feed upper limit sensor

3)-1 Unplug the connector and remove each sensor.
Removing the Paper feed pressure sensor

3)-2 Set the Paper feed pressure lever to “NORMAL”.
4) Unplug the connector and remove the Paper feed pressure sensor.
Upper limit sensor B Upper limit sensor A “Normal” side

Paper feed pressure lever Paper feed pressure sensor
4 - 21
2-7. Removing the Paper Feed Clutch
1) Switch OFF the machine power and remove the Rear cover. (Refer to Chapter 1.)
2) Open the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB assembly. (Refer to Chapter 1.)
3) Remove the Paper feed clutch bracket. (Round tip IT3C4×8 screw; 2 pcs)
4) Unplug the connector and remove the Paper feed clutch.
Set the Paper feed clutch stopper into the bent portion on Paper feed clutch bracket.
Paper feed
clutch bracket
Paper feed
clutch stopper
Concave on Pickup shaft Projection on paper feed clutch
<Precaution in assembly> « Paper Feed Clutch »

Fit the projection on the Paper feed clutch into
the slit in the concave portion on the pickup
shaft. Paper feed clutch stopper
4 - 22
2-8. Removing the Elevator Motor
1) Remove the front door. (Refer to Chapter 1)

2) Remove the front cover (left). (M4×8 screw; 5 pcs) (Refer to Chapter 1)
3) Remove Elevator spring on the front side.
4) Remove the Ground wire. (M3×8 screw; 1 pc) (Arrow A on photo)
5) Unplug connector and remove the reuse band.
6) Remove the Elevator motor unit. (E-ring 6mm-diameter; 1 pc) (Round tip IT3C4×8 screw; 1 pc)
Caution: When removing the Elevator motor unit, grasp the Paper feed tray to prevent the Paper
feed tray from rising abruptly, as the Elevator spring on the rear of the machine is still
attached.
7) Remove the Elevator motor cover. (M3×6 screw; 1 pc) (Arrow B on photo)
8) Remove the Motor cover. (M3×5 screw; 4 pcs) (Arrow C on photo)
9) Remove the Helical spur gear.
10) Unplug the connector and remove the Elevator motor. (M3×5 screw; 2 pcs)
Elevator spring
Ground wire
Reuse band
B Elevator motor cover
C
C
Elevator motor
C
C
Elevator motor unit Motor cover
Helical spur gear
4 - 23
2-9. Removing the Paper Feed Lower Limit Sensor and Paper Feed Tray Lower Limit Set Switch
1) Raise the Paper feed tray all the way up, then switch OFF the machine power.
2) Remove the rear cover and open the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB assembly. (Refer to Chapter 1)
Removing the paper feed lower limit sensor

3) Unplug the connector and remove the Paper feed lower limit sensor together with the Spring bracket;
rear. (Round tip IT3C4×8 screw; 1 pc)
Removing the paper feed lower limit set switch

3) Unplug the connector and remove the Paper feed tray lower limit set switch together with the spring
bracket. (Round tip IT3C4×8 screw; 1 pc)
4) Remove the Paper feed lower limit set switch. (M3×14 screw; 2 pcs)
Lower limit set switch
Spring bracket; rear
Lower limit sensor
Paper feed tray lower limit set switch
4 - 24
2-10. Removing the Stripper Unit
1) Lower the Paper feed tray all the way down, then switch OFF the machine power.
2) Side down the Lock knob and release the lock for the Stripper unit.
3) Press the Stripper unit release lever and remove the Stripper unit.
Lock knob Stripper unit Stripper unit release lever
4 - 25
2-11. Removing the Stripper Pad Assembly
1) Lower the Paper feed tray all the way down, switch OFF the machine power, and remove the
Stripper unit.
2) Lift the Stripper pad assembly by hand and remove.
< Precautions for installation >

• Position the edge of the Stripper pad (indicated by the arrows) against the Stripper pad base (indicated
by the arrows) when attaching the Stripper pad. <Refer to the figure below.>
Stripper pad assembly
Stripper pad
Stripper base
Stripper cover
Stripper unit
Stripper pad
Stripper base
4 - 26
2-12. Removing the Elevator Shaft Assembly
1) Remove the Elevator motor. (Refer to 2-8)

2) Remove the Elevator spring on the rear side.
3) Remove the Paper feed tray unit. (Refer to 2-1)
Paper feed tray unit
4) Remove the Paper feed roller assembly. (Refer to 2-4)

5) Remove the Paper feed lower limit sensor. (This is to prevent the sensor from breaking) (Round tip
IT3C4×8 screw; 1 pc) (Arrow A on photo)
6) Remove the Spring hook R 2. (E-ring; 1 pc, round tip IT3C4×8 screw; 1 pc)
Spring hook R 2
A
Lower limit sensor
4 - 27
7) Remove the E reinforcing plate. (M4×8 screw; 2 pcs)
E reinforcing plate
8) Remove the E side plate (front and rear)
E side plate (rear)
Elevator shaft assembly E side plate (front)
9) Remove the Elevator shaft assembly. Since the top of guide groove of machine frame is wide,
remove from there.
Elevator shaft assembly
The flange of the ball bearing should be on the outside of the side plate. (Front and rear)
Bearing
4 - 28
3. Adjustment
3-1. Upper Limit Sensor Position Adjustment

Checks and adjustment procedures
1) Remove paper from the Paper feed tray and set the Paper feed pressure lever to the <Normal>
position.
2) Run test mode No. 681 (paper feed tray upper limit positioning), let the Paper feed tray elevate until
it gets in the complete stop state.
3) After the Paper feed tray comes to a complete stop, confirm that the gap between the Pickup roller
and the Paper feed tray is within the range from 1.5 to 2.5 mm.
Pickup roller
1.5 to 2.5mm
Paper feed tray
4) In the case of a non-standard value, insert a Phillips screwdriver from the hole of paper feed
cover, rotate the upper limit adjustment shaft and adjust it by moving paper feed upper limit sensor
assembly up or down.
Caution: Turning the Upper limit adjustment shaft clockwise lowers the Upper limit sensor assembly
and increases the gap.
One rotation of the screw moves the upper limit hight approximately 0.5mm.
Symptoms
(1) Setting the Upper limit sensor position too high increases the paper feed pressure and may result in
multiple paper feeds.
(2) Setting the Upper limit sensor position too low decreases paper feed pressure and may result in
paper feed failure.
Paper feed
Upper limit adjustment shaft
Paper feed cover pressure lever
Upper limit sensor assembly

4 - 29
3-2. Stripper Pad Adjustment
Adjustment procedure
1) Switch the Paper feed pressure lever position to suit the paper type and begin printing.
2) If a multiple paper feed or paper feed failure occurs, adjust the Stripper pad angle or Stripper pad
pressure.
Countermeasure
1) When multiple paper feeds occur:
• Turn the Stripper pad angle adjustment dial clockwise to increase the Stripper pad angle (increase the
angle).
2) When paper feed failures occur:

• Turn the Stripper pad angle adjustment dial counterclockwise to decrease the Stripper pad angle
(decrease the angle).
Increases the Stripper pad angle
Stripper pad angle adjustment dial
Normal
Decreases the Stripper pad angle
4 - 30
3-3. Paper Feed Clutch ON Angle Adjustment

1) Print and confirm that the paper feeds reliably and smoothly.
2) If the first paper feed is not performed smoothly in a timely manner, run the test mode No. 741 (Paper
feed clutch ON angle adjustment) to make adjustment according to the paper type selection setting
in the user mode.
3) Repeat the steps from 1).
Symptoms
If first paper feed is not performed in a timely manner, paper jams or print position deviations may occur.
3-4. Paper Feed Clutch OFF Angle Adjustment

1) Print and confirm that printing goes smoothly.
2) If paper buckle amount is too large or small and that prevents smooth printing operation, run the test
mode No. 742 (Paper feed clutch ON angle adjustment) to make adjustment according to the paper
type selection setting in the user mode.
3) Repeat the steps from 1).
Symptoms
If paper buckle amount is not appropriate, paper cannot be fed to the second paper feed, and paper jam
may result.
4 - 31
3-5. Paper Width Potentiometer Adjustment
Checks and adjustment procedures (3 points correction)

1) Enter "9874" to enable the test mode in the protected area, and then press the start key.
2) Adjust the paper feed fence width to 297mm (A3 paper width).
3) Activate Test Mode No. 1103: Perform the paper width potentiometer adjustment (long).
5) Activate Test Mode No. 1101: Perform the paper width potentiometer adjustment (middle).
7) Activate Test Mode No. 1102: Perform the paper width potentiometer adjustment (short).
8) Activate Test Mode No. 0721: Perform paper width (mm), and confirm that the numbers displayed
are in the following range.
A3 paper width 2940~3000 (2970±30) : 297±3mm
A4 paper width 2070~2130 (2100±30): 210±3mm
A6 paper width 1020~1080 (1050±30): 105±3mm
* When adjusting the paper fence to the specified width, always slide the paper fence from the wide
position to the narrow. (Do not open, but close the fence.)
* There are engraved mark for adjustment 105mm and 297mm line on the paper feed tray.
Symptoms
If the paper feed fence width adjustment does not perform properly, the print may become smaller or
larger by detecting the paper size loaded on the paper feed tray as a wrong paper size, and it may cause
ink stain on the Pressure roller.
4 - 32
CHAPTER 6: Second Paper Feed Section
Contents
1. Mechanism.............................................................................................2
1-1. Second Paper Feed Mechanism...................................................2
1-2. Vertical Print Position Control.......................................................4
1-3. Paper Feed Operation of the Extra-long Paper............................6
2. Disassembly...........................................................................................6
2-1. Removing the Guide Roller...........................................................6
2-2. Removing the Paper Sensor.........................................................7
2-3. Removing the Timing Roller..........................................................9
2-4. Removing the Print Positioning Intermediate Gear.....................11
2-5. Removing the Idler Gear.............................................................12
2-6. Removing the Paper Feed Drive Unit.........................................13
2-7. Removing the Print Positioning Pulse Motor...............................15
3. Adjustment...........................................................................................16
3-1. G-lever Assembly Mounting Position Adjustment.......................16
3-2. Paper Feed Skew Adjustment....................................................17
3-3. Paper Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment..........................................18
6-1
1. Mechanism
1-1. Second Paper Feed Mechanism
The second paper feed mechanism stops the paper received from the first paper feed temporarily,
in order to send the paper to print drum section and pressure section in exact timing. Paper feed
is performed by Timing roller and guide roller, and the sending timing of the second paper feed is
determined by Sector gear cam. The driving source is main motor.
Sector gear cam

Guide roller
Timing cam
Sector gear assembly
Load spring
Timing roller
Sector gear spring

Timing gear
G lever assembly
Guide roller pressure spring
• The accuracy of print positon is bad if the stop timing of the Timing roller is unstable. In order to
prevent that, load spring always apply brake on the Timing roller rotation.
• The guide roller is pressed against the timing roller by the Guide roller pressure spring. Therefore,
when the Timing roller rotates, the Guide roller rotates. However, the pressure to the Timing roller is
released when the rotated timing cam presses the G lever assembly and the Guide roller is raised up.
6-2
Operation flow
Position-B
↓
Start printing Guide roller Timing cam
When the main motor is turned
ON, the Sector gear cam and
Timing cam are rotated in a
counterclockwise direction as
viewed from the rear.
↓
<At print drum Position-A>
When the Print drum comes to its
position-A, the G-lever assembly
is pushed down by the Timing cam
and the Guide roller is raised up. G lever assembly
Release the pressure bonding
↓
<First paper feed starts>
The Paper feed clutch is turned
ON and the first paper feed
starts, feeding the paper. The
Timing cam rotates further in the
counterclockwise direction and that
makes the G lever assembly rotate
in the counterclockwise direction as
well. Then the Guide roller is pulled
down and is pressed against the Timing roller
timing roller.
↓
The first paper feed is finished Sector gear cam
↓
Second paper feed starts
Timing roller and guide roller are in
a state of pressure bonding. When
Sector gear cam is rotated, Sector
gear assembly is pushed back by the
Sector gear spring and Timing gear
is rotated. There is a one-way clutch
in the Timing gear. When Sector
gear assembly rotats in a clockwise
direction, the rotation is transmitted
to the Timing roller. When it rotats
in a counterclockwise direction, the
rotation is not transmitted.
Paper transport is performed only

when the Guide roller is pressed
against the Timing roller and when
the Sector gear is giving rotation on
the Timing gear.
6-3
1-2. Vertical Print Position Control
In order to change the vertical print position, change the phase of the Sector gear cam and print drum
that determines the timing of second paper feed. The Vertical print positioning pulse motor is the source
of the drive for making this vertical print position change.
By pressing the <←> or <→> key of print positon on the operation panel, the Vertical print positioning
pulse motor is turned ON to control the vertical printing position. The center of the vertical printing
position is confirmed by the Vertical print positioning HP sensor.
Vertical print positioning pulse motor

Planetary gear
Vertical print positioning assembly
Outer vertical positioning gear
Cam shaft
Inner vertical positioning gear Vertical print positioning

HP sensor
Main pulley (connect to print drum)
Sector gear cam
Timing cam
Main motor
6-4
Pressing the < → > key on the Operation panel (print image up)
Pressing the <→> key moves the "Outer vertical positioning gear" and "Sector gear cam" in a clockwise
direction (red arrow).
When “Sector gear cam” moves in a clockwise direction, the operation of the “Sector gear cam” is
delayed during the printing (the second paper feed timing is delayed), resulting in the print position to
move up.

Sector gear cam
Rotating direction during printing
Pressing the < ← > key on the Operation panel (print image down)
Pressing the <←> key moves the “Outer vertical positioning gear” and “Sector gear cam” in a
counterclockwise direction (red arrow).
When “Sector gear cam” moves in a counterclockwise direction, the operation of the “Sector gear cam”
becomes faster during printing (the second paper feed timing becomes faster), resulting in the print
position to move down.
Rotating direction during printing
6-5
1-3. Paper Feed Operation of the Extra-long Paper
• The extra-long paper mode is used when printing on a paper which is longer than the standard
maximum length paper.
• To use extra-long paper, register a paper size with a length between 436mm and 555mm, and specify
the registered paper size.
• The extra long paper mode is a single print in 2 rotations of Print drum. Normal print operation is
perfomed at the first rotation, and the second rotation is for ejecting paper that is longer than a
standard size of paper.
• Paper feed clutch is not operated during the second rotation of the Print drum.(The next paper is not
fed.)
The operation that the Guide roller is pressed against the Timing roller is still performed.
• The Pressure solenoid is kept turned OFF on the second Print drum rotation to keep the Pressure
roller down and not press against the Print drum.
• If printing on an extra-long paper is made without activating the extra long paper mode, the printing
stops (paper ejection jam). On the other hand, if printing on a standard size paper is made with
the extra long paper mode activated, the printing continues. (A single print in every two Print drum
rotations.)
2. Disassembly
2-1. Removing the Guide Roller
1) Pull out the Print drum and switch off the machine power.
2) Remove the Snap ring and Bearing meta, then remove the Guide roller out of the machine.
[ Precaution in assembly ]
• Make sure that the Snap ring fits in the groove on the Guide roller, otherwise the Snap ring may
deform and will require replacement
Guide roller
Snap ring
Metal bushing
6-6
2-2. Removing the Paper Sensor
Removing the Paper Sensor (Receive)
1) Remove the Print drum out of the machine and switch OFF the machine power.
2) Remove the Guide roller. (Refer to 2-1)
3) Remove the mounting screws (M3×8 screw; 2 pcs) and unplug the connector (1 pc), and then
remove the Guide plate (upper).
Connector of the Paper

sensor (receive)
Guide plate (upper)
Paper sensor (receive)
Connectors of the Paper sensor (receive)
This picture shows the connector

unplugged and the Guide plate (upper)
already taken off from the above
photograph.
6-7
Guide plate (upper)
Removing the Paper Sensor (Send)
1) Lower the Paper feed tray all the way down, pull out the Print drum and switch OFF the machine
power.
2) Slide down the Lock knob to release the lock on the Stripper unit.
3) Push the Stripper release lever and remove the Stripper unit from the machine.
4) Remove Screws (M4 x 8 screw; 2 pcs) and remove the Stripper rear cover.
5) From the hole on the Guide plate, remove a screw (M3 x 8 screw; 1 pc), unplug the connector and
remove the Paper sensor (send) together with its bracket.
Stripper rear cover
6-8
2-3. Removing the Timing Roller
1) Pull out the Print drum and switch OFF the machine power.
2) Remove the Rear cover.
<Working on the rear of the machine>

3) Open the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB bracket assembly.
4) Remove the Sector gear spring and the Guide roller pressure spring.
5) Remove the Paper feed drive cover. (M4 x 8 screw; 5 pcs)
6) Remove the Sector gear assembly by removing the E-ring.
Caution:
* Attach and tighten the two screws, A and B (referring to the photograph below), the very first when
attaching the paper feed drive cover back on the printer.
* Do not remove the Timing roller bearing plate. If it is removed by mistake, at the very end of the
assembly make sure to give enough backlash between the Timing gear and Sector gear by pulling
the Timing roller bearing plate diagonally down in left-lower direction when mounting back the
Timing roller bearing plate, which was removed by mistake.
Paper feed drive cover
Timing roller bearing plate

B
Sector gear spring

Guide roller pressure spring
E-ring
6-9
<Working on the front of the machine>

7) Remove the Screw (M3 x 8 screw; 1 pc) from the Load spring collar. Then remove Load spring and
Load spring collar.
8) Remove the washer and bearing from the Timing roller adjustment plate.

To mount the Load spring plate, rotate the Load spring plate in the arrow direction for a tight fit.
Make sure that there is no looseness between the standing section and rolling section of Load spring
plate for the timing roller stop position stability.
Timing roller
Load spring Load spring collar adjusting plate Washer Bearing
Approach stopper
<Working on the rear of the machine>

9) Remove the E-ring, and disengage the Timing roller bearing assembly from the machine rear frame.
Then pull the bearing assembly out until it almost touches the Timing gear.
10) Pull out the Timing roller from the opening on the rear frame of the machine.
Timing roller bearing assembly Timing gear
Timing roller
• Perform the attachment of sector gear spring after the Timing roller bearing assembly is attached to
the Paper feed drive cover on the printer.
6 - 10
2-4. Removing the Print Positioning Intermediate Gear

• Insert 8mm-diameter jig in the phase alignment hole of Vertical positioning gear, for attaching or
detaching work, keeping the phase aligned.
1) Switch OFF the machine power and remove the Rear cover. (Refer to the Chapter 1)
2) Open the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB bracket assembly. (Refer to the Chapter 1)
3) Remove the E-ring and remove the Print positioning intermediate gear.
Print positioning intermediate gear
Insert the 8mm diameter Jig shaft

into the Position-B phase alignment
hole on the paper feed area.
6 - 11
2-5. Removing the Idler Gear

• Insert 8mm-diameter jig in the phase alignment hole of Vertical positioning gear for attaching or
detaching work, keeping the phase aligned.
1) Switch OFF the machine power and remove the Rear cover. (Refer to the Chapter 1)
2) Open the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB bracket assembly. (Refer to the Chapter 1)
3) Remove the Print positioning intermediate gear. (Refer to 2-4) Idler gear
4) Remove E-ring and remove the Idler gear together with the Idler
spring by unhooking the spring from the Vertical print positioning
base.

• Insert the shorter end of the Idler spring into the Idler gear, and then
rotate the Vertical print positioning assembly in the counterclockwise
direction until it stops. Mount the Idler spring parallel to the line
connecting the hole for the Idler gear and the center position of the
Vertical positioning gear, and then hook the Idler spring into the hole
on the Vertical print positioning base.
Idler spring
Idler spring
Vertical print positioning
Vertical print positioning base
pulse motor
Idler gear
Vertical positioning gear
6 - 12
2-6. Removing the Paper Feed Drive Unit
1) Switch OFF the power, remove the rear cover and open the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB bracket assembly.
(Refer to Chapter 1)
2) Insert 8mm-diameter jig into the phase alignment hole of Main drive assembly in the Main body drive
mechanism.
8mm diameter jig inserted into

the phase alignment hole on
the Main driver assembly.
3) Remove the following parts :

• Sector gear spring
• Guide roller pressure spring
• Paper feed drive cover (Refer to steps 1 to 5 on the instruction 2-3 of this Chapter.)
• Sector gear assembly (Refer to steps 1 to 6 on the instruction 2-3 of this Chapter.)
Paper feed drive cover Sector gear assembly
Guide roller pressure spring Sector gear spring

4) Remove screws (M4 x 8 screw; 2 pcs), and remove the G-lever assembly.
5) Unplug the connector of the Vertical print positioning pulse motor.
6) Unplug the connector of the Vertical print positioning HP sensor, and unhook the Reuse band.
7) Remove screws (M4 x 8 screw; 5 pcs) of the Paper feed drive unit. Remove the Paper feed drive unit
by unhooking the Vertical print positioning base unit from the machine.

6 - 13
Catch of Vertical print positioning base unit

Paper feed drive unit
Vertical print positioning

HP sensor
Connector of Vertical print

positioning HP sensor
G lever assembly
Inner vertical positioning gear

8mm dia. x 160mm jig Paper feed drive unit
8mm dia. x 160mm jig
Alignment marks
Main Gear
<Precaution on assembly>
• Before mounting the Paper feed drive unit back on the machine, align the Phase Alignment holes on
both the Inner and Outer vertical positioning gears and insert 8mm dia. x 160mm jig shaft through the
two gears. (Refer to the photograph on the next page.)
• Then mount the Paper feed drive unit back on the machine while aligning the Alignment marks (two
round dots) on the Inner vertical positioning gear against the Alignment mark (one round dot) on the
Main gear.
6 - 14
2-7. Removing the Print Positioning Pulse Motor
1) Switch OFF the power, remove the rear cover, and open the Power supply unit and MAIN-SYSTEM-
PCB bracket assembly.
2) Remove the Paper feed drive unit from the machine. (Refer to 2-6)
3) To prevent the Vertical print positioning assembly from rotating by the power of the Idler spring, align
the phase alignment holes of the Inner/Outer vertical positioning gears and insert the 8mm dia. x
160mm jig shaft through the two gears.
4) Remove the Vertical print positioning pulse motor. (M3×6 screw; 2 pcs)
vertical positioning sector gear Idler spring
Vertical print positioning assembly Vertical print positioning

pulse motor
8mm dia. x 160mm jig
Inner vertical positioning gear
< Paper feed drive unit >
6 - 15
3. Adjustment
3-1. G-lever Assembly Mounting Position Adjustment

1) Run Test mode No.889 (G-lever mounting position) and then switch OFF the machine power.
2) Remove the Rear cover. (Refer to Chapter 1)
3) Open the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB bracket assembly. (Refer to Chapter 1)
4) Confirm that the gap between the bearing and timing cam of the G-lever assembly is in a range
between 0 to 0.3mm.
5) If this gap is out of the specification range, adjust the position of the G-lever assembly as described
in the next steps (6) and (7).
6) Loosen the two screws on the G-lever assembly which mounts the G-lever onto the Release base.
7) Push the G-lever cam follower against the Timing cam and retighten the two screws on the G-lever
assembly, making sure that the G-lever cam follower is touching against the Timing cam.
Less than 0.3mm
Timing Cam
Bearing of G-lever assembly
G-lever assembly
Release base
6 - 16
3-2. Paper Feed Skew Adjustment

1) Set A3/Ledger size paper on Paper feed tray, run test mode No.81 (printing test B crossed line), and
perform printing.
2) Measure the distance (A) from the left edge of the paper to the first vertical line at the top of the
sheet.
3) Measure the distance (B) from the left edge of the paper to the first vertical line at the bottom of the
sheet.
4) Measure the total distance (C) from the top horizontal line to the bottom line on the left side of the
sheet.
5) Confirm the value of (A-B)/C×100 is less than 0.5(%).
(If 350mm line is measured from the top of the paper, A-B should be less than 1.8mm.)
6) If the skew is more than 0.5%, loosen one screw on the Guide roller adjusting plate and two screws
on the Timing roller adjusting plate, and slide the two plates in the same direction in the same
amount.
* Moving the plates one graduation on the scale changes the paper skew by 0.25%.
Moving the plates in the F imprint direction moves the image at the bottom of the sheet to the right,
and moving in the R imprint direction moves the image at the bottom of the sheet to the left.
A
TOP
Guide roller adjusting plate
F R
Timing roller adjusting plate
F R
B BOTTOM
6 - 17
3-3. Paper Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
When the Paper sensor is replaced, be sure to make the Paper sensor sensitivity adjustment by
activating Test Mode as given in the following steps.
The light emission electrical current of paper sensor is automatically adjusted.
1) Set clean white normal thickness paper on the paper feed tray.
2) Run test mode No.0705 (auto paper sensor automatic adjustment).
3) Confirm “Completion” displayed on the panel and press the “C” key on numeric key.
4) Run test mode No.0722 and confirm the value displayed on panel is in a range as follows: With the
paper fed from the paper feed tray is in between the sensor, the number displayed should be in
between 230 and 266 (248±18)
5) If correct number is achieved, the adjustment is finished. Remove the paper out from the machine.
6 - 18
MEMO
6 - 19
MEMO
6 - 20
CHAPTER 7: Press Section
Contents
1. Mechanism.............................................................................................2
1-1. Press Mechanism.........................................................................2
1-2. Pressure Control Mechanism........................................................5
2. Disassembly...........................................................................................6
2-1. Removing the Pressure Roller......................................................6
2-2. Removing the Pressure Lever Assembly......................................6
2-3. Removing the Pressure Lever Buffer Assembly...........................7
2-4. Removing the Pressure Control Pulse Motor................................8
3. Adjustment.............................................................................................9
3-1. Assembly Procedure of the Pressure Lever Assembly.................9
7-1
1. Mechanism
1-1. Press Mechanism
The function of the press mechanism is to apply proper pressure on the paper against the Print drum
during the printing.
The printing is performed by the Print drum, paper and the Pressure roller, while the printing pressure is
determined by the Pressure spring and the Print pressure control pulse motor. Executing the print or not
is switched by ON/OFF of the pressure solenoid.
Unlike the seamless print drum on a copier machine, the Print drum on a digital duplicator has a clamp
plate holding the leading edge of a Master material which the Pressure roller needs to clear away during
the printing process. The convex portion of the Pressure cam determines the timing for pressure roller to
clear away from the clamp plate portion of the Print drum.
The drive source of the Print drum rotation is the Main motor.
The numbers in circle on the sketches correspond to the explanation which follows for the next several
pages.
a The preparation stage of the pressing action. When printing operation is started and the Main motor
is turned ON, the pressure solenoid is turned ON. However, the "Solenoid lever" is still locked and
the Pressure roller does not yet come in contact with the Print drum.
Print drum
Pressure lever; spring

Convex portion
Pressure spring of pressure cam
Master clamp base
Pressure lever; cam
a Pressure roller
Pressure solenoid
Solenoid lever being locked
Main motor
7-2
b The secondary preparation stage of the pressing action. The Print drum rotates, and the "Convex
portion of pressure cam" pushes the "Pressure lever; cam" to unlock the "solenoid lever". The
Pressure roller is ready to come in contact with the print drum.
Print drum
Convex portion of
Pressure spring pressure cam
b
Master clamp base

b
b
Pressure lever; cam
Pressure solenoid
Pressure roller
Unlock the solenoid lever
b
Main motor
c The pressing action. As the print drum rotates, the "Pressure lever; cam" follows the external shape
of the "Convex portion of the pressure cam" and swings.
The pressure spring pulls up the Pressure roller to contact against the Print drum to make the press
action.
Print drum
c
c
Master clamp base
c
Pressure lever; cam
Pressure solenoid Pressure roller

Solenoid lever unlocked state
c
Main motor
7-3
d During printing. The Pressure roller is still in contact with the Print drum. In order to prevent the
Pressure roller from coming in contact with the Clamp plate base of the Print drum, the “Convex
portion of pressure cam” pushes the “Pressure lever; cam” to end the pressing operation (state b).
The Pressure solenoid remains ON.
Print drum
d
d
d
Pressure lever; cam
Pressure solenoid Pressure roller
Solenoid lever unlocked state

d
Main motor
e After Printing. When the Print drum reaches the specified angle, the Pressure solenoid is turned OFF
and the conditions return to the state a.
Print drum
Pressure spring
Pressure lever; cam
Pressure solenoid
Pressure roller
Solenoid lever being locked
e
Main motor
7-4
1-2. Pressure Control Mechanism
Press <←> or <→> key of the print density on the panel, and press the <START> key to start printing.
The “Print pressure control pulse motor” changes the position of “Pressure spring control plate”, and then
the print pressure is controlled by the length of pressure spring. When the print pressure is large, the
print density becomes higher, and when the print pressure is small, the print density becomes lower.
For the print pressure, an appropriate value is selected according to the setting of print speed or print
density and the information of ink color, time since the Print drum last operated, and Print drum internal
temperature.
“Pressure HP sensor” confirms the standard position of the print pressure.
Pressure control pulse motor Pressure lever; spring
Pressure HP sensor Pressure spring

Pressure spring control plate
7-5
2. Disassembly
2-1. Removing the Pressure Roller
a Pull out the Print drum and switch OFF the machine power.
b Insert a screwdriver through the hole of the Front frame, and remove the Shoulder screw.
c Slide the bearing of the Pressure roller forward until it is released from the roller adjustment plate
and remove the pressure roller upward.
Shoulder screw Pressure roller Bearing Roller adjustment plate
Through the hole of front frame
2-2. Removing the Pressure Lever Assembly

a Remove the Main belt. (Refer to Chapter 3: 2-2.)
b Unhook the Follower spring.
c Loosen Cap screws (M6 x 10 screw; 2 pcs), and remove the Pressure lever; spring and Pressure
lever; cam from the Pressure shaft.
< Precaution in reassembly > Pressure lever; spring Pressure lever; cam
• Make sure to adjust the mounting position of the
Pressure lever assembly. (Refer to this Chapter:
3-1.)
Follower spring Pressure shaft
7-6
2-3. Removing the Pressure Lever Buffer Assembly
a Remove the Main cover assembly. (Refer to Chapter 3: 2-2.)

b Remove the fixing screws (M3×6 screw; 2 pcs) and the pressure lever buffer assembly.
Fixing Screws
The following instruction is to prevent the Pressure lever buffer assembly from touching
against the machine rear sub-frame.
During the attachment, push down on

the area indicated by the arrow mark.
«Pressure lever buffer assembly»
7-7
2-4. Removing the Pressure Control Pulse Motor
a Turn OFF the power, remove the rear cover and open the power supply assembly. (Refer to Chapter
1.)
b Remove the Pressure spring. (Refer to Chapter 3: 2-1.)
c Unplug the connector from the Pressure HP sensor and remove the Reuse band.
d Unplug the connector from the Pressure control pulse motor.
e Remove the pressure control unit. (round tip IT3C4×8 screw; 3 pcs)
f Remove the pressure control pulse motor. (round tip IT3C3×6 screw; 2 pcs) (arrow A on photo)
Pressure control pulse motor

A
Pressure control unit
A
Reuse band
Connector of Pressure HP sensor
«Pressure Control Unit»
7-8
3. Adjustment
3-1. Assembly Procedure of the Pressure Lever Assembly
Confirmation method
* The adjustment must always be carried out in the position-B.
a Turn OFF the power, remove the rear cover and open the power supply assembly and the MAIN-
SYSTEM-PCB assembly. (Refer to Chapter 1.)
b Remove the Main cover assembly. (Refer to Chapter 3: 2-2.)
c Hang the pressure spring on “Pressure lever; spring”.
d Unlock the Solenoid lever, lower the “Pressure lever; spring” by hands, and make the Pressure roller
come in contact with the Print drum.
e When the bearing of “pressure lever; cam” is in contact with the bottom section of the Pressure cam,
make sure that the engraved line on the “Pressure lever; spring” is in between the two engraved lines
on the “Pressure lever; cam”.
Pressure lever; spring Pressure cam Pressure lever; cam
Bearing
Pressure spring
Solenoid lever
Pressure lever; cam
7-9
f If step e is out of the specification range, remove the Pressure spring and loosen the two Cap
screws on the Pressure lever; spring.
g Arrange the phase alignment holes for the Pressure lever;spring and sub-frame on the same line,
and then insert the 8mm-diameter jig.
h Insert 4 mm allen wrench into the hole on the Pressure shaft and rotate in the direction of the arrow
mark (counter clockwise) and tighten the cap screws (2 pcs) of the Pressure lever; spring while
pressing the Pressure roller lightly against the print drum.
While tightening the Cap screws, push the Pressure lever; spring towards the machine frame.
Tighten Cap screws A first and then B.
i Recheck whether the Pressure lever; spring is attached in a correct position or not by repeating
steps c to e on the previous page and if the position is still incorrect, repeat the adjustments listed
from f to h on this page.
8mm dia. x 160mm jig Pressure lever; spring
4 mm Allen wrench Pressure shaft
Symptoms
• If the engraved line on the “Pressure lever; spring” is shifted to the left of the correct position, the print
pressure will become weak and there is a possibility of light print density. Also, due to the Timing shift
of the up/down movement of the Pressure Roller, ink leakage may occur.
• If the engraved line on the “Pressure lever; spring” is shifted to the right of the correct position, the
releasing amount of the Pressure roller to the Clamp base of the Print drum will not be large enough
to prevent the Pressure roller from contacting the Clamp plate base, and damage to the Clamp plate
base may occur. Also, due to the timing shift of the up/down movement of the Pressure Roller, ink
leakage may occur.
7 - 10
[Type of pressure spring and compatible models]

Red mark: RZ3, RZ5
Green mark: RZ4, RZ6, RZ7/9, SD5/6, SE6/9, SF5*3/5*5/9 Series
Black mark: MZ7/9, MD5/6
Mark
The function of the Pressure Spring Silencer:

To reduce the sound and to stop the vibration of the spring.
7 - 11
MEMO
7 - 12
CHAPTER 8: Paper Ejection Section
Contents
1. Mechanism.............................................................................................2
1-1. Paper Ejection Mechanism...........................................................2
1-2. Separator Mechanism...................................................................3
1-3. Paper-Ejection-Wing Mechanism..................................................4
1-4. Inclination Mechanism of the Paper Receiving Tray.....................7
2. Disassembly...........................................................................................8
2-1. Removing the Paper Receiving Tray............................................8
2-2. Removing the Suction Unit...........................................................9
2-3. Removing the Paper Ejection Motor and Paper Ejection Motor
FG Sensor...................................................................................11
2-4. Removing the Paper Ejection Wing HP Sensor..........................12
2-5. Removing the Paper Ejection Wing Pulse Motor........................13
2-6. Removing the Transfer Belts......................................................15
2-7. Removing the Paper Ejection Sensor.........................................17
2-8. Removing the Separation Fan Unit.............................................18
2-9. Removing the Separator.............................................................20
2-10. Removing the Separation Lever.................................................20
3. Adjustment...........................................................................................21
3-1. Separator Mounting Position.......................................................21
3-2. Paper Ejection Setting................................................................23
3-3. “Paper Guide” Position Adjustment ............................................24
8-1
1. Mechanism
1-1. Paper Ejection Mechanism

The printed paper is separated from the Print drum, and then ejected and stacked on the Paper receiving
tray. Paper alignment is important at this part.
The paper is separated from the print drum using the following mechanisms.
(1) Separator
(2) Compressed air ejected out from the separator tip (air blow)
(3) Air from separation fan
• Paper is pressed onto the transfer belt by suction fan which is mounted under the Transfer belt, and is
transported to Paper receiving tray.
• Paper ejection sensor confirms that the paper is ejected correctly.
• The speed of the Transfer belt is made a little bit faster than the peripheral speed of the Print drum to
add a slight pulling force on the paper when the paper is being ejected.
• In order to improve the Paper ejection alignment, the paper shape is controlled by Paper ejection wing
mechanism and Paper alignment plate when the paper is ejected.
Paper ejection sensor

Separator FG sensor disc Paper ejection motor
Direction of Paper Flow
Separation fan
Transfer belt
Paper ejection wing

pulse motor
Suction fan
8-2
1-2. Separator Mechanism
Separator mechanism retracts the Separator to prevent it from coming in contact with the “Clamp plate
base” of the Print drum.
The Separator is positioned close to the Print drum when it separates paper from the Print drum. When
the Print drum rotates and the "Clamp plate base" comes close to the Separator, the convex portion of
the Separation cam lets the Separator retract to avoid contact with the "Clamp plate base".
Also when the Print drum is pulled out, the Release lever is pressed by the Release arm on the slide rail
to rotate the Separator shaft, which lets the Separator retract from the Print drum.
Main gear
Separator lever
assembly
Separator UP Separator DOWN
Separator
Print drum Slide rail
Release arm
Release lever
Separator Separator shaft
8-3
1-3. Paper-Ejection-Wing Mechanism
The paper shape will be changed depending on the paper type for printing. The change in the amount
of the curve applied on the paper being ejected is controlled by the position of the Paper ejection wings
mounted on the left and right of the Paper ejection unit.
Paper-Ejection-Wing position setting:

The wing position is set when the Paper ejection wing pulse motor rotates the MW cam and Switch cam.
The MW cam moves the Connection plate (M) up and down, which makes the left and right M wings
move up and down.
The Switch cam moves the Connection plate (S) up and down, which makes the left and right S wings
move up and down.
The Paper ejection wing HP sensor detects the home position of the ejection wing.
M wing S wing S wing M wing
Connection plate (S) Paper ejection wing pulse motor MW cam

Connection plate (M)
Paper ejection wing HP sensor Switch cam
The Paper ejection wing has four positions, (1) through (4) as explained on the next 2 pages.
The wing position depends on the paper width size and the Paper feed pressure lever (Normal/Card)
position.
The "Special paper feed control" setting has no influence on the Paper ejection wing position.
8-4
Power ejection wing position setting
(1) B4 size paper or larger with standard thickness:

• Paper is ejected as W-shape to make the paper stronger. If the paper is ejected flat, the leading
edge of the paper will hang down before arriving at the end fence of the Paper receiving tray, and
cause either paper jam or paper ejection alignment problem.
• Both the M wing and Belt roller are raised, and S wing is set low positon.
• This wing position is when the Paper feed pressure lever is set to NORMAL and the paper width is
B4/Legal or wider. (Equivalent to 1,434 pulses.)
M wing Belt roller
(2) Smaller than B4 paper with standard thickness:

• Paper is ejected as U-shape instead of W-shape, because the paper width is narrow.
• Both the M wing and Belt roller is at low position, and S wing is raised.
• This wing position is when the Paper feed pressure lever is set to NORMAL and the paper width is
narrower than B4/Legal. (Equivalent to 717 pulses.)
S wing
(3) Card:
• Paper is ejected flat, because the paper is thick and strong enough, so there is no need to change
the paper shape. The role of the paper alignment plate is to delay the fall of the paper by rubbing
against the side edges of the paper and by making the paper ejected as U-shape.
• The M wing, Belt roller and S wing are all at low position.
• This wing position is when the Paper feed pressure lever is set to CARD for any paper size.
(Equivalent to 0 pulse: Home Position.)
8-5
(4) Custom paper size:

The parameter setting on test mode No.780 (paper ejection wing position selection) is performed by
serviceman. When the serviceman inputs a value on this Test Mode No. 780, the machine operator
will be able to select this fixed wing position from the Operation panel of the printer through the [Jump
Wing Control] key.
935 525
× ○
Paper ejection wing adjustment on model SF525 is a manual type. The position of the paper ejection
wing is set by turning the Paper ejection wing knob. The wing position settings are the same as
above (1)~(3).
Paper ejection wing knob
8-6
1-4. Inclination Mechanism of the Paper Receiving Tray
The standard equipped Paper receiving tray (excludes the optional Auto Control Stacking tray) has
a feature to adjust the inclination angle of the Tray depending on the paper receiving condition of the
ejected papers.
• When the mounting position of the Paper receiving tray support plate is at a standard position, the
operator is able to choose the inclination of either “3.5 degrees” or “10.5 degrees”.
Stopper
Stopper
3.5 degrees
10.5 degrees
• When the mounting position of the Paper receiving tray support plate is changed to another position,
the operator is able to choose the inclination of either “0 degrees” or “7 degrees”.
Changing the mounting position of the

Paper receiving tray support plate to
the 3.5 degrees inclined position from
the standard 0 degrees position, the
inclination angle of the Paper receiving
tray becomes smaller by 3.5 degrees.
10.5 degrees → 7 degrees
3.5 degrees → 0 degrees
Reduces the angle by 3.5 degrees.
8-7
2. Disassembly
2-1. Removing the Paper Receiving Tray
(1) Open the Paper receiving tray to an angle of about 45 degrees and lift it vertically upwards to remove
from the machine.
Paper receiving tray
8-8
2-2. Removing the Suction Unit
(1) Pull out the Print drum from the machine.

(2) Switch OFF the machine power and remove the Paper receiving tray. (Refer to 2-1)
For Model SF525, remove the mounting screw and paper ejection wing knob.
(3) Remove the Paper ejection cover by removing screws (M4×8 screw; 4 pcs)
(4) Disconnect the connector, remove the mounting screws (M4×8 screw; 2 pcs), and remove the
Suction unit by pulling it out towards you while lifting.
Connector
socket of the
Suction unit
Suction Unit
8-9
Cutout Cutout
< Precaution in reassembly >

• To mount the Suction unit back on the machine, insert the cutouts on the Suction unit (Right and Left)
into the shafts on the Front and Rear of the Machine frame.
Machine frame; Front Machine frame; Rear
Machine frame shaft Machine frame shaft
8 - 10
2-3. Removing the Paper Ejection Motor and Paper Ejection Motor FG Sensor
(1) Switch off the machine power and remove following components.
• Paper receiving tray (Refer to 2-1)
• Suction unit (Refer to 2-2)
(2) Remove the Timing belt.
(3) Remove screws (M4 x 5 screw; 2pcs), disconnect the connector and remove the Paper ejection
motor.
(4) Disconnect the connector and remove the Paper ejection motor FG sensor.
< Precaution in reassembly >

When mounting the Paper ejection motor, adjust the tension on the Timing belt.
<Rear view of the Suction Unit>

Timing belt
Paper ejection motor Paper ejection motor FG sensor
8 - 11
2-4. Removing the Paper Ejection Wing HP Sensor
(1) Switch OFF the machine power and remove following components.
(2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the Paper ejection wing HP sensor.
Connector Paper ejection wing HP sensor
8 - 12
2-5. Removing the Paper Ejection Wing Pulse Motor
(1) Switch OFF the machine power and remove following components.
935 525
○ ×
(2) Remove both the Connection plate (M) and Connection plate (S) by removing
screws. (M3×10 screw; 2 pcs each)
Connection plate (M) Connection plate (S)
(3) Remove E-ring and remove the W cam shaft.

(4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the Paper ejection wing pulse motor by removing screws (M3
x 8 screw; 2 pcs). (Remove the screw indicated by arrow, because it interferes with the screw driver
when trying to access to the mounting screw of the Pulse motor. --(Refer to the photograph on the
next page.)
Connector E-ring W cam shaft
Paper ejection wing pulse motor

8 - 13
8 - 14
2-6. Removing the Transfer Belts
(1) Switch off the machine power and remove the following components.
(2) Remove the Timing belt.
(3) Remove both the Connection plate (M) and Connection plate (S) by removing screws (M3 x 8 screw;
2 pcs each).
(4) Remove screws (M4 x 8 screw; 4 pcs), disconnect the connector and remove the Suction upper
assembly.
Paper guide
Timing belt
Connection plate (M)
Connection plate (S)
Connector
< Suction Upper Assembly >
8 - 15
(5) Remove the Suction box by removing screws (M3 x 8 screw; 4 pcs).
Suction box
(6) Lift the Driven shaft assembly with a finger, unhook it from the Suction upper assembly and remove
the Driven shaft assembly.
Transport base
Driven shaft assembly Hook portion
(7) Remove the paper guide (M3×6 screw; 2 pcs), put transfer belts in the crevice between S wing and
transport base temporarily and remove the Transfer belts.
* Adjust the mounting position of the paper guide after mounting the Suction unit back on the
machine. (Refer to 3-3)
* Caution: In attaching the transfer belts, the shiny side of the belt should face outside.
Transport base
Transfer belts S wing

8 - 16
2-7. Removing the Paper Ejection Sensor
1) Switch OFF the machine power and remove the following components.
• Paper ejection cover
2) Remove the Suction fan by removing screws (M4 x 40 screw; 3 pcs).
3) Remove the mounting screw (M3×6 screw; 1 pc), disconnect the connector and remove Paper
ejection sensor together with the Paper ejection sensor bracket.
Suction fan
Paper ejection sensor bracket
8 - 17
2-8. Removing the Separation Fan Unit
(1) Switch OFF the machine power and remove the Paper receiving tray. (Refer to 2-1)
(2) Remove the mounting screws (M4×8 screw; 2 pcs), disconnect the connector and remove the
Separation fan unit.
Separation fan unit
Connector
<Separation Fan Unit>
< Precautions in Reassembly >

• Insert the cutouts on the Separation fan unit into the shafts on the left and right side of the Machine
frame. (Refer to the next page.)
• Fit the flat pins on the Machine frame into the small rectangular holes on the far right and left of the
Separation fan unit to mount the Separation fan unit on the machine. (Refer to the next page.)
8 - 18
Machine frame: front shaft Machine frame: rear shaft
Cutout Cutout
< Cutout hooked on the shaft.>
<Separation Fan Unit>
Flat pins on the machine frame are inserted through

the rectangular holes on the Separation fan unit.
8 - 19
2-9. Removing the Separator
(1) Switch OFF the machine power and remove the following components.
• Separation fan unit (Refer to 2-9)
(2) Slide the power band away from the Separator, and pull the Air hose off the Separator.
(3) Remove the mounting screws (M3×6 screw; 2 pcs) and remove the Separator.
<Precautions in Reassembly>
• The knobs on the Power Separator
band should face towards
you, as shown on the
photograph when mounting it
on the Air hose.
Power band Air hose

2-10. Removing the Separation Lever
(1) Remove the Main drive assembly. (Refer to Chapter 3: 2-3)

(2) Remove the mounting screw (M3×10 screw; 1 pc) and then remove the Separator lever.
Separator lever Pressure lever; spring
8 - 20
3. Adjustment
3-1. Separator Mounting Position

(1) Using Test Chart No.15, create a Master and make prints. Confirm that no paper jamming occur
on the Print drum nor black thin line appear on the prints. (5mm white margin is given on top of the
prints to check the paper jamming on the drum).
(2) If paper jams on the Print drum or a thin black line appears on the prints, remove the Print drum
from the machine and remove the Front cover of the Print drum. Return the Print drum back in the
machine and switch OFF the machine power.
(3) Loosen the two mounting screws on the Separator adjusting plate (one located at the right of the
Print drum and the other on the Machine frame inside the machine on the paper receiving side).
Master making unit
Mounting screw
Print drum
Separator adjusting plate
Mounting screw
8 - 21
(4) Move the Separator adjusting plate up or down to adjust the position of the Separator against the
Print drum, looking at the gap between the Print drum and the tip of the Separator through the hole
on the front frame of the Print drum. The gap between the Separator and Print drum should be
adjusted to the range of 0.5 mm to 1.5 mm. Tighten the two mounting screws.
NOTE:
1. Make the adjustment when the Print drum is at Position-B.
2. One scale marking on the Separator adjusting plate changes the Separator position by 1 mm.
Drum front frame

Print drum
Separator
Separator adjusting plate

Print drum Retracting
1m
m±
Separator
0.5
mm
Closing
Symptoms
• If the tip of the Separator touches the Print drum surface, the surface of the master is scratched,
causing a black line in the center of the prints.
• If the gap is too wide, the Separator does not lift the paper off the Print drum and causes paper jam on
the Print drum.
8 - 22
3-2. Paper Ejection Setting
How to set the Paper ejection adjustments
Select the [Paper Ejection Adjustment] button on the "Special Paper Control" display in the Functions tab
screen.
Change the settings accordingly.
How to look at the display

Small Large
Effect level
Default
■Separation fan Paper jam on

Print Drum
(Thin paper)
Paper ejection
alignment
Ghost Image on
TOP
Default
■Suction fan
Paper ejection
(This adjustment is not
alignment
frequently used.)
(Card,etc.)
Ghost Image on
BOTTOM
8 - 23
3-3. “Paper Guide” Position Adjustment
Checks and Adjustment
Purpose: Aligning the gap between the Pressure roller and the Paper guide in a parallel position to
achieve stability in the separation of the paper from the Print drum.
* Adjust the Paper guide mounting position parallel to the Pressure roller.
* If the Pressure roller adjustment plate is moved, for instance one line on the scale (1mm), the
Paper guide should also be moved one line on the scale (1 mm).
«When the front of the Pressure roller adjustment plate is moved.»

(1) Loosen the mounting screws (M3×6 screw; 2 pcs) of the Paper guide.
(2) Change the position of the Paper guide on the front of the machine only, in the same amount the
Pressure roller was moved. The Paper guide mounting position at the rear of the machine should not
change.
(3) Tighten the mounting screws.
«When the rear of the Pressure roller adjustment plate is moved.»

(1) Loosen the mounting screws (M3×6 screw; 2 pcs) of the Paper guide.
(2) Change the position of the Paper guide on the rear of the machine only, in the same amount the
Pressure roller was moved. The Paper guide mounting position at the front of the machine should
not change.
(3) Tighten the mounting screws.
Roller adjustment plate The gap must be kept

parallel and equal. Pressure roller
Paper guide
Transport plate (front) Transport plate (rear)
8 - 24
CHAPTER 9: Print Drum Section
Contents
1. Mechanism.............................................................................................2
1-1. Master on the Drum Check Mechanism (Before Printing)............2
1-2. Print Drum Set Check Mechanism................................................3
1-3. Print Drum Lock Mechanism.........................................................4
1-4. Inking Mechanism.........................................................................5
1-5. Print Drum Rotation Mechanism...................................................6
1-6. RFID..............................................................................................7
2. Disassembly...........................................................................................8
2-1. Removing the Print Drum Lock Sensor, Print Drum Lock
Solenoid, and Print Drum Set Switch............................................8
2-2. Removing the Screen Assembly.................................................10
2-3. Removing the Master Clamp Base Assembly.............................12
2-4. Removing the Print Drum Body..................................................13
2-5. Removing the Ink Scraper F & R................................................17
2-6. Removing the Ink Pump Assembly.............................................18
2-7. Removing the Ink Bottle Guide Assembly...................................19
2-8. Removing the Ink Bottle Lock Assembly/RFID...........................20
2-9. Removing the Ink Sensor PCB...................................................21
2-10. Removing the Print Drum PCB...................................................22
2-11. Removing the Print Drum Drive Joint..........................................23
2-12. Removing the Flange R..............................................................24
2-13. Removing the Flange F...............................................................25
2-14. Removing the Squeegee Roller..................................................26
3. Adjustment...........................................................................................31
3-1. Squeegee Gap Adjustment.........................................................31
3-2. Squeegee Pressure Adjustment.................................................34
3-3. Master Skew Adjustment............................................................36
9-1
1. Mechanism
1-1. Master on the Drum Check Mechanism (Before Printing)
The machine checks for the presence of the Master on the Print drum at the start of a print job.
Pressing the <START> key makes the Print drum start to rotate, and then the Master loading sensor
starts the detection of the Master on the Print drum (on the Reflection preventing cloth) at the Print drum
angle of 56.5 degrees.
Once the Master is detected on the Print drum, the information is memorized on the machine and Master
loading sensor no longer checks for the Master on the Print drum from the next printing job until the Print
drum is pulled out of the machine, or the power to the machine is turned OFF.
If the machine already knows that there is a Master on the Print drum, the machine goes immediately to
printing without looking for the master on the Print drum.
If the Master loading sensor does not detect master on the Print drum at the drum angle of 56.5 degrees,
the printing job does not start.
* The Master loading sensor is a reflection type sensor which is located on the Master removal unit.
Print drum at 56.5 degrees

Reflection preventing cloth
Master loading sensor (Master removal unit)
9-2
1-2. Print Drum Set Check Mechanism
Print drum is removed and inserted at Position-B, and the Drawer connector, Print drum set switch, and
Print drum lock sensor check if the Print drum is set to the machine body. The following motors are not
turned ON when the Print drum set switch is OFF.
• Main motor
• Clamp motor
• Master removal motor
• Master compression motor
• Separation fan motor
Drum safety switch
Drawer connector Print drum lock sensor
9-3
1-3. Print Drum Lock Mechanism
To prevent removal and insertion of Print drum during rotation, Print drum lock/unlock mechanism is
implemented.
When the Lock lever is released by the Print drum lock solenoid, the Print drum can be pulled out.
Print drum locked condition:

When the Print drum lock plate on the Print drum engages with the Print drum lock base on the machine,
the Print drum is locked. The Lock lever goes into the Print drum lock plate operating space to prevent
the Print drum lock plate to move, preventing the Print drum to unlock even though the Drum handle
lever is pulled.
Print drum unlocked condition:
When the Front door is opened and the Print drum release button is pressed, the print drum rotation to
the Position-B action is performed.The Print drum lock solenoid is turned ON, and then the Lock lever
moves to the lock release position. Therefore, the Print drum lock plate goes down, enabling the Print
drum removal.
Print drum in the locked
condition
Drum handle lever
The Lock lever prevents the Print drum

lock plate from going down.
→ Print drum is locked
Print drum lock base

Print drum lock plate
Lock lever Print drum lock solenoid
Print drum lock sensor

(sensor light received)
Print drum in the unlocked

condition
Print drum lock solenoid unlocks

the Lock lever.
→ Print drum is unlocked.

(sensor light blocked)
9-4
1-4. Inking Mechanism
Ink supply from the Ink bottle to the internal of the Print drum is performed by a pump driven by the Inking
motor. The amount of ink is controlled according to the status of the Ink sensor and Overflow sensor.
1) When the bead of ink separates away from the Ink sensor, the Inking motor is turned ON to take
in the ink from the Ink bottle, and supplies the ink through the holes on the Ink distributor onto the
Squeegee roller.
2) The ink distributed on the Squeegee roller is made into ink bead between the Squeegee roller and
Doctor roller.
(The ink driving shaft is rotated so that the ink bead is made nice and straight.)
* Remove the Inspection cap of the Ink bottle guide to check the ink bead.
3) Once the bead of ink touches the Ink sensor the Inking motor deactivates to stop the inking action.
• There is a small gap made between the Doctor roller and Squeegee roller. From this gap, the ink from
the bead transfers onto the inner surface of the Print drum via the squeegee roller.
• The Overflow sensor is located in the Print drum to stop the machine to prevent ink overflow in the
case the bead of ink for some reasons becomes too large.
Inking motor
Ink sensor
Overflow sensor Doctor roller
Ink distributor
Squeegee roller
Ink sensor Ink driving shaft

Antenna
Doctor roller
Inspection cap on
the Ink bottle guide
Ink driving shaft
Squeegee roller
9-5
1-5. Print Drum Rotation Mechanism
• The rotation drive of the Print drum is from the drive of the Main motor.
• When the Main motor rotates, the drive transfers to the Flange R.
• Flange R transfers the drive to rotate the Squeegee roller.
• The Squeegee roller rotates the Ink driving shaft via the Ink driving shaft gear.
The Squeegee drive gear is equipped with one way clutch to prevent the Squeegee roller from rotating
in the reverse direction when the Print drum is manually rotated in reverse.This is to prevent the ink bead
from dripping down.
Flange R
Drum joint
Flange R
Flange gear
Drive joint
Doctor roller
Ink driving shaft
Squeegee idle gear
Squeegee drive gear
Squeegee roller
Ink driving shaft gear
Squeegee gear
9-6
1-6. RFID
Communication is performed with the RFID tag implemented on the Master roll and Ink bottle, to manage
the master, type of ink, remaining amount, etc.
Wireless communication that conforms to the Standard ISO15693 is executed to read and write the tags.
Wired communication Wireless communication
Command
Machine Control RF Attached to ink

Antenna (ISO15693) Tag or master
main body PCB Response Module
RF is abbreviation for Radio Frequency, which uses the frequency for wireless communication.
Tag
Antenna surface
Center axis
Communication range
RFID PCB unit
Master making unit RFID Print drum unit RFID
9-7
2. Disassembly
* Confidential master should be made on the Print drum prior to the removal of the Print drum for the
Print drum disassembly.
2-1. Removing the Print Drum Lock Sensor, Print Drum Lock Solenoid, and Print Drum Set Switch
1) Remove the Print drum from the machine, switch OFF the machine power and remove the Front
cover.
2) Remove screws (M4 x 8 screws; 3 pcs), unplug connectors (3 locations), and remove the Drum lock
unit.
Drum lock unit
Removing the Print drum lock sensor

3) Remove a Screw (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc) and remove the Print drum lock sensor from the Drum lock
unit together with the sensor bracket.
< Drum lock unit > < Rear view of A >
9-8
Removing the Print drum lock solenoid

3) Remove screws (M3 x 6 screws; 2 pcs) and remove the Print drum lock solenoid.
Removing the Print drum set switch

3) Remove the hook section of the Torsion spring and then remove the E-ring, to remove the Print drum
set switch together with the bracket.
Print drum lock solenoid
Torsion spring E-ring
9-9
2-2. Removing the Screen Assembly
1) Make a confidential master on the Print drum and remove the Print drum out from the machine.
2) Remove the mounting screws (3 x 6 binding screw; 2 pcs.) on the End hanger.
3) Remove the mounting screws (3 x 6 binding screw; 4 pcs.) on the Top hanger, and then remove the
Screen assembly.
< CAUTION: Do not fold or bend the Screen assembly during the removal or installation >
Screen assembly
End hanger
Top hanger
9 - 10

* Make sure that the screen is not lifted, folded, or bent when attached.
1) Mount and tightly screw the Top hanger on the Print drum and wrap the Screen around the Print
drum, confirming that no wrinkles exist on the screen surface. Then tentatively mount the screws on
the End hanger, very lightly to let the End hanger to move.
2) Hook the Screen jigs through the holes on the left and right of the End hanger, pull the Screen jig
and hook the loop end of the jigs on the short pillars on the left and right Drum flanges, located close
to where the Top hanger is. This is to tension the Screen assembly tightly and evenly around the
Print drum.
3) With the Screen assembly tightly wrapped around the Print drum by the Screen jig, tighten the
screws on the End hanger.
4) Remove the two Screen jigs from the Print drum once the screws on the End hanger are tightened.
< Screen jig >
End hanger Screen jig Top hanger
Screen assembly
< Rear side >
End hanger Screen jig Top hanger
Screen assembly
< Front side >
9 - 11
2-3. Removing the Master Clamp Base Assembly
2) Remove the mounting screws (3 x 6 binding screw; 4 pcs.), and then remove the Master clamp base
assembly from the print drum.
< CAUTION: To attach the Master clamp base assembly, put screws in numerical order (refer to
figures shown below>
Master clamp base assembly
d c
b a
< Master Clamp Base Assembly >
9 - 12
2-4. Removing the Print Drum Body
2) Remove the following components.
• Screen assembly (Refer to 2-2.)
• Master clamp base assembly (Refer to 2-3.)
3) Loosen the mounting screws (3 x 6 binding screw; 2 pcs.) at the Potbelly-shaped holes on the Print
drum body rear edge side, indicated by arrows in the picture, and then remove the other mounting
screws. (3 x 6 binding screw; 10 pcs.)
* Make sure that the screws at the Potbelly-shaped holes are not removed as they are to be used as
marks for reassembly.
4) While holding the joint section to keep the Drum body from spreading suddenly, peel off the Print
drum joint section sheet. (The Print drum joint section sheet will be reused in reassembly.)
5) Slide the Print drum body and unhook the Potbelly-shaped holes from the two loosened screws, and
remove the Print drum body.
Print drum body
Print drum joint section sheet
Joint section of the Print drum body
< Front Area: Enlarged >

9 - 13
< Precaution in Reassembly >

* During the assembly, make sure that there is no space between the edge of the two flanges and the
Print drum body side edges.
1) On the outskirts of the tail end of the Print drum body, close to the Print drum flanges, are marked
with arrow marks and F & R imprints. The F imprint should face the Flange F, and R imprint should
face the Flange R. With the Print drum body in this direction, hook the potbelly shaped holes of the
Print drum body onto the two existing lightly mounted screws on the Drum flanges F and R.
2) Tentatively place one screw each on the screw holes which the arrow marks point to.
3) Hook the Screen jigs into the holes on the Print drum body located at the inner edge of the top of the
Print drum body, and hook the loop ends of the jig on the pillars on the Drum flanges F and R.
4) Press the Flange F and Flange R tightly against the Print drum body, and tighten the two screws at
the arrow marks which were previously tentatively mounted by step 2).
5) Likewise, press the Flange F and Flange R tightly against the Print drum body and tighten the
two loose screws at the potbelly holes of the Print drum body, and then mount and tighten eight
remaining screws on the Drum body towards its tail edge while keep pressing the Flanges tightly
against the Drum body.
Screen jig Drum body Screen jig
Flange R Flange F
9 - 14
6) Attach the screws (3 x 6 binding screw; use the mounting screws for other parts) to the second screw
holes from the Print drum body edges (both rear and front).
7) Remove the Screen jig, and then attach the Print drum joint section sheet on the joint section of the
Print drum body.
* If the joint is not held firmly by the tape (Print drum joint section sheet), that will cause the Master
to wrinkle during the Master loading on the Print and/or generate noise during the Print drum
rotation in printing.
8) Remove the two screws used by above step 6).
< Holes to hook the Screen jigs on the Print drum body >
Print drum joint section sheet
9 - 15
Blocking sheet attachment position

Print drum body
Place the edge surface of The entire circle Place the edge surface of
the Ink blocking sheet in should be visible. the Ink blocking sheet in
between the engraved lines. between the engraved lines.
Ink blocking sheet
The seal tape mounting position
Seal tape
Print drum body

6±
1
m
m
Ink blocking sheet
9 - 16
2-5. Removing the Ink Scraper F & R
1) Make a confidential master on the Print drum and remove the Print drum out from the machine
• Print drum body (Refer to 2-4 .)
3) Remove Screws (M3 x 8 screws; 1pc each), and remove the Ink scraper F & R.
< Ink Scraper R >

Ink scraper R
< Ink Scraper F > Ink scraper F

• Attach the Ink scrapers to the attachment positions for Metal plate in the internal Print drum where
marks for different sizes are engraved. For A3 machines, to the position of engraved mark “A3”. For
A4 machines, to the position of engraved mark “A4”.
9 - 17
2-6. Removing the Ink Pump Assembly
• Screen assembly (Refer to 2-2 .)
• Print drum body (Refer to 2-4.)
3) Disconnect the Inking motor FG sensor connector and the Inking motor connector. Then remove
screws (M4 x 8 screws; 2 pcs) and remove the Ink pump assembly.
Inking motor connector
Inking motor FG sensor connector Ink pump assembly
9 - 18
2-7. Removing the Ink Bottle Guide Assembly
• Ink pump assembly (Refer to 2-6.)
3) Remove the Inspection cap from the inside of the Ink bottle guide.
4) Disconnect the RFID connector and Ink bottle set switch connector, and then remove the Reuse
bands (2 pcs.).
5) Remove screws (M3 x 8 screws; 4 pcs), and lift out the Ink bottle guide assembly from the Print drum
after sliding it towards the center of the drum.
RFID connector
Inspection cap
Ink bottle guide assembly
Reuse bands
Ink bottle set switch connector
9 - 19
2-8. Removing the Ink Bottle Lock Assembly/RFID
• Ink pump assembly (Refer to 2-6.)
• Ink bottle guide assembly (Refer to 2-7.)
Removing the Ink Bottle Lock Assembly
3) Remove screws (M3 x 8 screws; 2 pcs) and remove the Ink bottle lock assembly from the Ink bottle
guide assembly.
Ink bottle guide assembly Ink bottle lock assembly
Removing the RFID

3) Unhook the claw of the Upper ink bottle guide to remove it from the Lower ink bottle guide.
4) Unhook the claw of the RFID to remove it from the Antenna holder.
Ink bottle guide (Lower) Antenna holder

Ink bottle guide (Lower) Ink bottle guide (Upper)
RFID
9 - 20
2-9. Removing the Ink Sensor PCB
• Print drum body. (Refer to 2-4.)
• Ink pump assembly. (Refer to 2-6.)
• Ink bottle guide assembly. (Refer to 2-7.)
3) Disconnect the Ink sensor PCB connector, remove screws (M3 x 8 screws; 2 pcs) and remove the
Ink sensor PCB.

• Keep the gap in between Ink sensor antenna and Ink driving shaft at 4 ± 0.5 mm.
• Be sure not to bend the sensor antenna.
Ink sensor PCB connector Ink sensor PCB
Ink sensor
Antenna
For A3/Ledger Print drum

Doctor roller
Ink driving shaft
Squeegee roller
For A4/B4/Legal & Letter Print drum
< Ink Sensor PCB >
9 - 21
2-10. Removing the Print Drum PCB
1) Remove the Front frame cover. (3 x 6 screws; 4 pcs.)

2) Disconnect connectors (4 locations), remove screws (M3 x 8 screws; 2 pcs) and remove the Print
drum PCB.
* For replacement of the Print drum PCB, refer to Chapter 19 “Other Precautions”.
Front frame cover Print drum PCB
9 - 22
2-11. Removing the Print Drum Drive Joint
1) Remove both the left and right Print drum side frames by removing screws (M4 x 8 screws; 2 pcs
each).
2) Remove the Drum rear frame assembly.
3) Remove screws (M4 x 8 screws; 3 pcs) and remove the Print drum drive joint.
Print drum side frame

Print drum side frame
Drum rear frame assembly
Print drum side frame Print drum side frame
< Rear side > < Front side >
Print drum drive joint
Flange R
9 - 23
2-12. Removing the Flange R
• Print drum drive joint (Refer to 2-11.)
3) Remove the C-ring (20 mm diameter; 1 pc) and remove the Flange R.
C-ring
Flange R
9 - 24
2-13. Removing the Flange F
• Print drum side frames (2 pcs.) (4 x 8 pan head double-washer screws; 2 pcs. each)
3) Disconnect two connectors from the Print drum PCB, remove one Reusable band from the Drum
front frame assembly and remove the Drum front frame assembly by removing screws (M4 x 8
screws; 5 pcs).
4) Remove the Snap ring on the Flange support roller found at the bottom of the Print drum, and
remove the Flange support roller.
5) Remove the Flange F.
< NOTE: Remaining two Flange support rollers can be removed after removing the Flange-F >
Position-B lock lever

Front frame assembly
Flange support roller

Snap ring Flange F

• When attaching the Drum front frame assembly, push down on the Position-B lock lever to prevent the
tip of the Postion-B lock lever from going into any of the wrong holes on the Flange F.
9 - 25
2-14. Removing the Squeegee Roller
• Print drum drive joint (Refer to 2-11.)
• Flange R (Refer to 2-12.)
• Flange F (Refer to 2-13.)
• Print drum side frames (2 pcs.) (4 x 8 pan head double-washer screws; 2 pcs. each)
• Front frame cover (3 x 6 binding screws; 4 pcs.)
• Doctor roller spring (2 pcs)
3) Remove the Drive shaft lock plate by removing a Screw. (M4 x 8 screw; 1 pc)
4) Remove the Ink driving shaft gear.
5) Remove the Squeegee gear by removing an E-ring.
< Front side > Doctor roller spring
Ink driving shaft gear
Squeegee gear Drive shaft lock plate
6) Remove the Squeegee idle gear by removing an E-ring. (6 mm diameter; 1 pc)

7) Remove the Squeegee drive gear by removing an E-ring. (6 mm diameter; 1 pc)
< Rear side >
Squeegee idle gear Squeegee drive gear

9 - 26
Inc. Technical Operations
RISO US.RISO.COM
< NOTE >

For A3/Ledger Print drum, remove the Packing stopper plate, Washer and Rubber packing by removing
a screw (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc). Make sure that these parts are removed in the Front side and the Rear
side.
Bearing
Rubber packing
Washer
Packing stopper plate
9 - 27
7) Remove screws (M4 x 8 screws; 3 pcs) and also the Shoulder screw from the front of the Print drum.
Shoulder screw
8) Remove screws (M4 x 8 screws; 2 pcs) and also the Shoulder screw from the rear of the Print drum.
Shoulder screw
9 - 28
9) Remove the Squeegee unit from the Print drum by unhooking the hook portion on the Squeegee unit
from the Squeegee gap cam in the front and rear of the Print drum.
Squeegee gap cam
Squeegee side frame-F
<Front side>
Squeegee gap cam
Squeegee side frame-R
<Rear side>
<Squeegee unit>
9 - 29
10) Pull out the Ink drive shaft from the Squeegee unit.
* Be sure not to lose the Bearing metal and O-ring, which also can be removed.
11) Pull the Squeegee side frames F & R off from the ends of the Squeegee unit to free the Squeegee
roller.
* The Doctor roller, pressed tightly fit into the Ink block F & R, will also come loose.
Ink block-R
Doctor roller
Squeegee roller
Ink block-F
Ink drive shaft
9 - 30
3. Adjustment
3-1. Squeegee Gap Adjustment
Checks and adjustments

1) Remove the Print drum from the machine and remove following components.
Front frame cover
Print drum lever Print drum handle cover
9 - 31
• Print drum handle cover (3 x 8 pan head double-washer screws; 2 pcs.)

• Print drum lever
2) Clean out the ink on the Squeegee unit.
3) Use a Feeler gauge to check the gap between the Squeegee roller and Doctor roller.
A3/A4-R Drum : 0.06 mm ± 0.02 mm
Other than the above : 0.08 mm ± 0.02 mm
4) If the gap is out of the specified range, loosen the Securing screw on the Doctor gap adjustment
plate.
5) Insert a flat-head screw driver in the groove on the Doctor gap adjustment plate and move the plate
to adjust the Doctor gap.
6) Tighten the Securing screw on the Doctor gap adjustment plate to end the adjustment.
Doctor gap adjustment plate

Narrower
Wider
< Front View >
Securing screw on the Doctor gap adjustment plate
9 - 32
< Rear View >
Flange R
Securing screw on the Doctor gap

adjustment plate
Symptoms:
• If the doctor gap is too wide, too much ink is transferred onto the inner surface of the Print drum and
may result in ink leakage from the Print drum. Other problems, such as the master slipping out from
the Clamp plate and horizontal line images may start to rip on the master.
• If the doctor gap is too narrow, not enough ink is transferred onto the inner surface of the Print drum
and may cause the images on the prints to be too light or images missing from the prints due to lack of
ink on the drum surface, and more than necessary quantity of prints may have to be printed before the
image transfers completely on the printing paper.
9 - 33
3-2. Squeegee Pressure Adjustment

1) Create a master using Test chart No.14 and make prints. Check the left and right of the prints to
compare the print density and confirm that the density is even between the two sides.
2) Also check the squeegee pressure by pressing the Drum body by fingers against the Pressure roller.
The gap between the Drum body and the Squeegee roller by the feel of the fingers should be equal
throughout the length of the Print drum. The gap should be within the following range.
A3/A4-R Drum : 0.2 mm ± 0.05 mm
B4 Drum : 0.3 mm ± 0.05 mm
If the gap is not within the above mentioned range, make the following adjustment.
Adjustment in the FRONT
3) Remove the Print drum from the machine, pull out the Ink bottle and remove following components.
• Print drum handle cover (3 x 8 pan head double-washer screws; 2 pcs.)
• Print drum lever
4) Loosen the three securing screws (indicated by three arrow marks on the photograph) on the
Squeegee side frame F found through the holes on the Drum front frame assembly.
5) Also from the hole on the Drum front frame assembly, using a flat-head screwdriver, rotate the
Squeegee gap cam until correct gap is obtained between the Squeegee roller and Drum body.
6) Tighten the three securing screws on the Squeegee side frame F to finish the adjustment on the front
side of the Print drum.
Squeegee gap cam
Wider
Narrower
< Front View >

Squeegee gap cam
9 - 34
Adjustment in the REAR

3) Remove the Print drum from the machine.
4) Looking at the rear of the Print drum, find two securing screws of the Squeegee side frame R (indicated
by the arrow marks on the photograph) and loosen the two screws.
5) Insert the tip of a Phillips screwdriver from the hole of Flange R of Print drum rear frame and screw
the Squeegee gap cam to adjust the gap between the Drum body and Squeegee roller to be the
standard value.
6) Tighten the two securing screws on the Squeegee side frame R to finish the adjustment on the rear
side of the Print drum.
Squeegee gap cam

< Rear side >
< CAUTION -- For both FRONT & REAR >

• Make sure to loosen the two securing screws before rotating the Squeegee gap cam, if not, the
Squeegee gap cam will be damaged.
Symptoms
• Difference in the squeegee pressure between the right and left of the Print drum will result in uneven
density between the right and left of the prints.
• If the squeegee pressure is too strong (the gap too small), too much ink is transferred onto the inner
surface of the Print drum and may result in ink leakage from the Print drum. Other problems, such as
the master slipping out from the Clamp plate and horizontal line images may start to rip on the master.
• If the squeegee pressure is too weak (the gap too large), not enough ink is transferred onto the inner
surface of the Print drum and may cause the images on the prints to be too light or images missing
from the prints due to lack of ink on the drum surface, and more than necessary quantity of prints may
have to be printed before the image transfers completely on the paper.
9 - 35
3-3. Master Skew Adjustment
This adjustment is made on the machine itself and not on the Print drum. The adjustment becomes
necessary if the Master on the Print drum starts to skew sideways after the printing starts.
* Clean the Pressure roller before making the adjustment.

<To slide the tail of the Master to the front.> - Adjustment if the tail of the master skews to the rear during
the printing.
1) Remove the Print drum out of the printer, remove the printer Front cover, and then remove the Print
drum drawer connector assembly together with the large metal bracket of the drawer connector.
2) Loosen the Securing Screw on the roller adjustment plate on the front of the printer.
3) Adjust the scale mark on the left surface of the roller adjustment plate to align with the left surface of
the Pressure roller bracket.
* Moving the scale mark one line to the left slides the tail to the Master 1 mm toward the front. The
master tail can be moved up to 2 mm (two scales). (The Master tail normally starts sliding after
approximately 20 sheets of printing.)
<To slide the tail of the Master to the rear.> - Adjustment if the tail of the master skews to the front during
the printing.
1) Remove the Print drum out of the printer and remove the Pressure roller. (Refer to 2-1 in Chapter 7.)
2) Loosen the Securing Screw on the roller adjustment plate on the rear.
3) Adjust the scale mark on the left surface of the roller adjustment plate to align with the left surface of
the Pressure roller bracket.
* Moving the scale mark one line to the left slides the tail to the Master 1 mm toward the rear. The
master tail can be moved up to 2 mm (two scales). (The Master tail normally starts sliding after
approximately 20 sheets of printing.)
To adjust the rear side, remove this Shoulder

screw, and then remove the Pressure roller.
Loosen this screw and move the

roller adjustment plate to the left.
Roller adjustment plate
Align this stepped part with the left surface of the The default position is where the
Pressure roller bracket. It allows three position roller adjustment plate is pressed
alignment in which moving the roller adjustment plate against this Reset plate.
one step to the left slides the tail of the Master in the
horizontal direction in 1mm.
9 - 36
CHAPTER 10: Clamp Unit Section
Contents
1. Mechanism.............................................................................................2
1-1. Clamp Initializing Action................................................................2
1-2. Clamp Plate Opening Action.........................................................3
1-3. Drum Position-A Compensation....................................................4
1-4. Clamp Plate Closing Action..........................................................5
2. Disassembly...........................................................................................6
2-1. Removing the Clamp Unit.............................................................6
2-2. Removing the Clamp Motor..........................................................7
2-3. Removing Clamp sensors A and B...............................................8
10 - 1
1. Mechanism
1-1. Clamp Initializing Action
The master material is held on the print drum by the clamping action of the Clamp plate. The open &
close action of the Clamp plate is made by the Clamp unit, and the clamp action is required in the Master
removal and Master loading process.
The clamp initialization movement (the home positioning movement) is made each time the printer power
is switched ON.
The home position of the Clamp unit is detected by the position of the Clamp opening cam and
Position-A compensation plate. (The light path of the Clamp sensor A is blocked and the light path of the
Clamp sensor B is open.)
When the printer power is turned ON, if the Clamp unit is not in the home position, the Clamp motor is
activated until the unit comes to the home position as described on the above.
Clamp sensor A
Position-A compensation plate
Clamp opening cam
Clamp motor Clamp sensor B
10 - 2
1-2. Clamp Plate Opening Action
1) When the START key is pressed for the master making or confidential master making, the Print drum
starts to rotate from its Position-B.
2) After the presence of the master on the Print drum is checked and as the Print drum returns to the
Position-B, the Print drum stops once and starts the Clamp plate opening action.
3) The Clamp motor activates and rotates the Clamp cam until the light path of the Clamp sensor B is
blocked by the disc. This action brings the Clamp opening cam down.
4) The Print drum then rotates to start the master removal action. The Clamp opening cam, at its
lowered position, opens the Clamp plate first, and then lifts the Master release bar to eject the
leading edge of the master out from the Clamp plate.
Clamp sensor A
Clamp sensor B
Clamp cam
Clamp opening cam

Clamp roller
Master ejection roller
Clamp plate
Master release bar
Master
10 - 3
1-3. Drum Position-A Compensation
1) As the Print drum rotates to remove the master and comes back to Position-A, the Clamp
opening cam at its lowered position opens the Clamp plate.
2) As the Print drum stops at Position-A, the Clamp motor turns ON to rotate the Clamp cam until the
light path of the Clamp sensor B becomes unblocked by the disc. This action brings the Position-A
compensation plate down to catch the plastic compensator shaft on the Print drum to hold the Print
drum at Position-A.
Clamp sensor A
Clamp sensor B
Clamp cam
Clamp opening cam
Clamp plate
Master release bar
10 - 4
1-4. Clamp Plate Closing Action
Once the Load pulse motor on the master making area feeds a set length of the master material towards
the Print drum, the Clamp motor activates to rotate the Clamp cam until the light path of the Clamp
sensor A is blocked by the disc and the light path of the Clamp sensor B becomes unblocked. This action
brings the Clamp opening cam up and closes both the Master release bar and the Clamp plate down to
clamp the master material under the Clamp plate. At this stage the Clamp opening cam and Position-A
compensation plate are both brought back to their home position.
Clamp sensor A
Clamp sensor B
Clamp cam
Clamp opening cam
Clamp plate
Master release bar
Master material
10 - 5
2. Disassembly
2-1. Removing the Clamp Unit
1) Switch OFF the machine power, and remove the rear cover to open the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB
Assembly. (Refer to Chapter 1)
2) Disconnect the connector of Clamp motor and Relay connector, and then remove the Clamp unit. (M4
x 8 screw; 3 pcs)
< Clamp unit >
10 - 6
2-2. Removing the Clamp Motor
2) Remove the Clamp unit. (Refer to 2-1)
3) Remove the Flat pinion gear and Spur gear by removing an E-ring on the Flat pinion gear.
4) Remove the Clamp motor by disconnecting the Clamp motor connector and removing the screws (M3
x 5 screws; 2 pcs).
Clamp motor Flat pinion gear

Clamp motor connector Spur gear
10 - 7
2-3. Removing Clamp sensors A and B
2) Remove the Clamp unit. (Refer to 2-1)
3) Remove the Reuse band (1 pc) from the Clamp unit.
4) Remove a screw (M3 x 8 screw; 1 pc) and remove the Clamp sensor plate with the two sensors
attached.
5) Disconnect the connectors and remove each sensor from the Clamp sensor plate.
Reuse band
Clamp sensor A
Clamp sensor plate
Clamp sensor B
10 - 8
CHAPTER 11: Master Removal Section
Contents
1. Mechanism.............................................................................................2
1-1. Master Removal Mechanism........................................................2
1-2. Master on the Print Drum Check Mechanism (Before Master
Removal).......................................................................................3
1-3. Removed Master Vertical Transport Mechanism..........................4
1-4. Disposed Master Compression Mechanism.................................5
1-5. Master Disposal Box Set Switch...................................................8
1-6. Release Lever and Push-in Lever.................................................8
1-7. Protect Function............................................................................9
2. Disassembly.........................................................................................10
2-1. Removing the Master Disposal Box............................................10
2-2. Removing the Compression FG Sensor.....................................11
2-3. Removing the Master Compression Motor.................................12
2-4. Removing the Master Removal Unit...........................................14
2-5. Removing the Master removal Sensor & Master Loading
Sensor.........................................................................................15
2-6. Removing the Master Removal Motor & FG sensor...................16
2-7. Removing the Master Compression HP Sensor.........................18
2-8. Removing the Master Disposal Box Set Switch..........................19
2-9. Removing the Master Disposal Box Set Sensor.........................20
2-10. Removing the Master Removal Roller (Lower)...........................21
2-11. Removing the Master Removal Roller (Upper)...........................23
2-12. Removing the Pulley Shaft..........................................................24
2-13. Removing the Round Belts.........................................................24
2-14. Removing the Master Removal Housing Assembly....................25
2-15. Removing the Master Compression Plate..................................27
11 - 1
1. Mechanism
1-1. Master Removal Mechanism

The master material on the print drum is released for master removal according to the following steps:
(1) At the start of master removal, the Master loading sensor checks for the removal master on the Print
drum.
(2) Clamp plate opening action at the print drum B sensing position -> Print drum rotation -> Release of
leading edge of the master -> Lift-up by the master ejection plate.
(3) The removed master vertical transport action peels off the removed master from the print drum and
sends it to the master disposal box.
(4) The disposed master compression action compresses the removed master inside the master
disposal box.
* Above step-(1) is made only when the machine does not have the memory of the master on the
Print drum.
* Even with no master is found on the drum, the master removal action takes place steps (2 to 4),
but the Master disposal jam sensor detection is not performed in the removed master vertical
transport action mode.
* The master removal guide protects the tailing end of the master from getting dirty by coming into
contact with the master removal rollers when the master is loaded.
Master ejection sensor
Master ejection bar
Master disposal box

Master compression plate
Master guiding plate
Tail edge of the master material.
Master disposal box
11 - 2
1-2. Master on the Print Drum Check Mechanism (Before Master Removal)
Before creating a confidential or normal master, the Print drum makes one rotation from its Position-B
only when the presence of the master is uncertain. During this rotation, the Master loading sensor checks
for the presence of the master on the Print drum at 56.5 degrees turn from position A. If a master has
been found on the Drum, the above confirmation is not made. If a master material is found on the print
drum, the master disposal jam sensor confirms whether a master is sent to the master disposal box in
the subsequent removed master vertical transport action.
Print drum at
56.5 degrees
Reflection preventing cloth
Master loading sensor (Master removal unit)
11 - 3
1-3. Removed Master Vertical Transport Mechanism
The master removal action sends a master, peeled off from print drum, to inside the master removal
unit. When the clamp opening operation starts, the master removal motor starts rotating at the same
time. After the clamp opening operation is completed, the main motor turns on, and the print drum starts
rotating. The clamp transport cam, lowered in the clamp opening operation, opens the clamp plate. Then
the master ejection plate rises, which removes the master from the clamp plate. The tip is released,
and the master that is raised by the master ejection plate is sent to the master disposal box through the
Master removal rollers.
Here, the master removal sensor confirms that the master has been correctly transported to the master
disposal box when the print drum angle is either 120 or 180 degrees, and the master removal motor
FG sensor is used to check the rotation speed of the master removal motor. The Master removal motor
speed for drum rotation speed when removing master can be adjusted by test mode No. 578.
Master removal roller (upper)

Master removal Master removal sensor
pulley
Pulley shaft
Master removal roller (lower)

Master removal motor FG sensor
Master removal motor
Pulley shaft
Master removal roller

(upper)
Master removal pulley

Master removal sensor
Master compression HP sensor
Master loading sensor
11 - 4
1-4. Disposed Master Compression Mechanism
The disposed master compression action compresses a master, peeled off from the print drum, with the
master compression plate in order to increase the number of disposed masters storable in the master
disposal box. The pulse count from the compression FG sensor represents the position of the master
compression plate (angle), and the pulse width indicates the rotation speed of the master compression
motor. The increased number of removed masters increases the resistance on the master compression
plate; hence this slows down the motor rotation speed and extends the pulse width. These two values
are used in compression control.
(1) Initializing movement

• As the initial position, the master compression plate HP sensor is in a state where the light path is
blocked.
• If the master compression plate HP sensor is receiving light when the power is on, the master
compression motor rotates in the reverse direction until the master compression plate HP sensor is
in a state where the light path is blocked. The initializing operation is not performed when the master
compression plate HP sensor is sensing the light path being blocked.
• If the master compression plate HP sensor is receiving light at the start of the disposed master
compression action, the master compression motor rotates in the reverse direction until the master
compression plate HP sensor is in a state where the light path is blocked. The initializing operation is
not performed when the master compression plate HP sensor is sensing the light path being blocked
at the time of starting master removal.
Master compression plate HP sensor (light path is blocked)
Master compression HP sensor

Master compression HP position
Master compression end position
11 - 5
2) Master compressing movement

When the amount of master is low -> Master compressing operation completion condition: When
pulse count reaches the master compression pulse count
• When the amount of master in the master disposal box is low, the pulse width is unchanged due to
limited resistance on the master compression plate, and the timing to end the master compressing
operation is determined by the position of the master compression plate (i.e. master compression
pulse count).
• The master compression motor rotates in the compression direction. When the master compression
plate HP sensor receives light, the counting of master compression FG sensor pulses starts. When the
pulse count reaches the specified count (*1), the master compression motor stops. After the master
compression plate stops for about 6 seconds, the master compression motor rotates in the reverse
direction. When the master compression plate HP sensor senses that the light path is blocked, the
master compression motor stops, ending the master compressing operation.
Master compression
*1 Default
HP position
A3: 155 pulses,
Other: 147 pulses
(Master compression pulse count: Removal Master
Pulse count specified in Test
mode No.573)
Master compression
pulse
Master compression
end position
Increasing number of masters -> Master compressing operation end condition: FG sensor detects
pulse width over the specified value before the pulse count reaches the master compression
pulse count
• When the amount of master increases inside the master disposal box, the resistance on the master
compression plate becomes greater, which slows down the rotation speed of the master compression
motor and extends pulse width. Therefore, the timing to end the master compressing operation
depends on the pulse width. Master compression
• If the compression plate FG HP position
sensor senses a pulse width of
over 40 ms
(Master compression end
position adjustment: Pulse width
specified in Test mode No.575) Master compression
before the pulse count reaches pulse count
the master compression pulse
count, the master compression
motor stops for 6 seconds and h
w idt e
then rotates in the reverse
l s e ing puls
s
direction. When the master pu es en
Master compression s or mpr wh s)
compression plate HP sensor n s m
end position se r co end 40
senses that the light path is G t e
F as ion ed s
t
blocked, the master compression (M era xce
p e
motor stops, ending the master o dth
w i
compressing operation.
11 - 6
Master disposal box is full -> Detection condition: FG sensor senses pulse width that exceeds the
limit before the pulse count reaches the value indicating that the master disposal box is full. This
has priority over the software count .
• If the amount of Removal master increases even more, master disposal box is determined to be
full when the pulse width reaches 40 ms (master compression end position adjustment) before the
pulse count by the compression FG sensor counts up to the specified count (*2) after the master
compression plate HP sensor receives light. In such a case, the panel displays an indication of the
master disposal box being full after the completion of the master compressing operation. Normally,
master disposal box being full is indicated when reaching the software count setting value (*3).
• The indication of master disposal box being full is reset after the master disposal box set switch stays
turned off (master disposal box is removed) for 5 seconds.
• After reset, because the user may place back the master disposal box without removing the disposed
masters, the pulse width from the compression FG sensor has priority over the software count in terms
of the detection of full box.
* Test mode default value varies depending on the model.
*2 Default: A3, 80 pulses; B4/A4: 146 pulses

(Master disposal box full pulse count: Pulse count specified in Test mode No.576)
*3 Default: 100 masters
(Master removal software count master disposal box full setting: Master count specified in Test mode
No.584)
Master compression
HP position
Master disposal box

'full' pulse count
ith
w
op ste ull'
er ress fter l bo th
ds
d
ing ma x 'f
wi n en
wi
pu era r
isp lse
)
lse tio
dth
a
u
os
ind ster or p
Master compression
s
end position
d
(M sen
a
mp ted
ms
FG
a
a
c
40
co i
ov
About the Master Removal Software Count

1) Software counter can be enabled or disabled by the master removal software count master disposal
box full enable/disable switch in Test mode No.585.
2) The remaining amount of master detected is indicated by the remaining volume display in 4 levels
based on the software counter value. This can be checked from “Information” on the operation panel.
(The value set in the master removal software count master disposal box full setting in Test mode
No.0584 is 100%.)
3) The software counter is set to 0 at the same time the “Master disposal box is full” error is cleared.
4) If the masters are removed from the master disposal box before the box is full, the software counter
is not cleared to 0.
(The machine cannot be detected the removal master.)
11 - 7
1-5. Master Disposal Box Set Switch
Whether the master disposal box is properly placed is checked by the master disposal box set switch
and sensor. When the master disposal box set switch is off, the main motor, clamp motor, master
compression motor, master removal motor, and separation fan motor do not turn on.
[Master removal box compulsory set-motion]

This function fixes the position of the master disposal box when it is set incorrectly (not inserted all the
way). After the master disposal box is set, it is forcibly moved to the given position by the operation of the
master compression plate in the compression direction.
Test mode No.572 “Master removal box compulsory set-motion setting”
0: OFF (disable) <default> / 1: ON (enable)
1-6. Release Lever and Push-in Lever
• The release lever allows the user to release the nip of the master removal roller. Lowering the lever
makes it easier to remove the master when it gets entangled in the master removal roller (top/bottom).
• The push-in lever restores the lowered master removal roller (bottom) to its original position. The push-
in lever slides forward when the release lever is lowered. To restore the master removal roller (bottom)
to its original position, slide the push-in lever back.
Release lever
Push-in lever
Front Side
Master disposal
box set switch
Master disposal box set sensor
Master disposal box guide (Rear)
Rear Side
11 - 8
1-7. Protect Function
The protection mode is a function that restricts printing using master that contain confidential information
to authorized users only. Specifically, disposal of masters and lock of the master disposal box.
ON/OFF selection of the protect function

• The activation and deactivation of the protect function is done by the Admin Mode.
Only administrator can release the protect function. As certification screen appears, perform the
certification operation.
• When the protection mode is activated, the duration of auto sleep or auto shutoff is fixed to 1 minute;
additional printing is prevented by having the masters disposed of upon returning from sleep or upon
power-on.
Automatic confidential master making

• When the protection mode is activated, a confirmation message appears, prompting whether to
proceed with confidential operation after printing is completed. Selecting “Run now” starts the
confidential operation.
Master disposal box lock mechanism

• After running the master removal action in protection mode, the master compression plate stops at a
slightly lower position, which locks the master disposal box, preventing it from being removed.
• When an error which requires removal of the master disposal box, (such as Master Disposal Box Full,
Master Disposal Jam Error) occurs, the master compression plate goes back to its HP position, and
the master disposal box becomes to be removed.
• Even with the protect function OFF, the Master disposal box can be locked in position by using a
padlock on the slide lever on the Master disposal box handle [refer to the photograph below].
Lock
11 - 9
2. Disassembly
2-1. Removing the Master Disposal Box
When the Master disposal box is locked in the machine, either by a padlock or by the user mode protect
function, the Master disposal box cannot be removed unless the following steps are taken.
In either case, a permission from the customer is needed in order to remove the Master disposal box.
When a padlock is used

If a Padlock is used, a key for that Padlock is needed to unlock the key to remove the Master disposal
box. If the key is lost, the only way to get the Master disposal box is to break the box handle.
When the Master compression plate is lowered at look position

If the test mode can be activated
(1) Perform test mode No. 0490 to place the Master compression plate back to the home position, and
then remove the Master disposal box out.
If the test mode can not be activated

(1) Turn power OFF and remove the Front cover. (Refer to Chapter 1)
(2) Remove the Flat pinion gear by removing an E-ring (4mm diameter E-ring; 1 pc).
(3) Rotate the Compression gear all the way in the counterclockwise direction to raise the Master
compression plate, and remove the Master disposal box out of the machine.
Flat pinion gear
Compression gear
Master disposal box
11 - 10
2-2. Removing the Compression FG Sensor
(2) Disconnect the connector and remove the Reuse band.
(3) Remove the screw (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc) and remove the Compression FG sensor together with the
bracket.
Reuse band
Compression FG sensor
Connector
11 - 11
2-3. Removing the Master Compression Motor
(2) Remove the Flat pinion gear by removing an E-ring. (4mm diameter E-ring; 1 pc)
(3) Let the Master compression plate swings down by its own weight.
(4) Remove the Lock boss bracket assembly by removing the screw. (M3 x 8 screw; 1 pc)
(5) Remove the Compression gear cover by removing the screw. (M3 x 6 screws; 2 pc)
Flat pinion gear

Master compression motor
Compression FG sensor
assembly
Compression gear cover
Lock boss bracket assembly
Compression gear
(6) Remove the two spur gears.

(7) Remove the Compression FG sensor assembly. (Refer to 2-2.)
(8) Remove the Encoder disc by removing an E-ring (4mm diameter E-ring; 1 pc).
Master compression
motor bracket
Encoder disc
Spur gear
11 - 12
(9) Remove screws (M3 x 6 screws; 3 pcs) and remove the Master compression motor, together with
the motor bracket.
(10) Remove the master compression motor from the master compression motor bracket by removing
screws (M3 x 5 screws; 2 pcs).
Master compression motor bracket Master compression motor
11 - 13
2-4. Removing the Master Removal Unit
(1) Turn power OFF, remove the master disposal box, and then the front cover. (Refer to Chapter 1)
(2) Remove the Master removal covers F & R by removing screws. (Bind 3 x 8: 1 pc each)
Master removal cover F
Master removal cover R Master disposal box
(3) Remove the screws (M4 x 8 screw; 1 pc each) found after removing the Master removal covers F & R.
(4) On the front side of the machine, disconnect three connectors and remove the screw (M4 x 8 screw;
1 pc), and slide the Master removal unit out toward the front side of the machine to remove.
Master removal unit
Connector Connector Connector
11 - 14
2-5. Removing the Master removal Sensor & Master Loading Sensor
(1) Turn power OFF and remove the Master removal unit from the machine. (Refer to 2-4)
Removing the Master removal sensor

(2) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc), and remove the Master removal
sensor together with the sensor bracket.
Removing the Master loading sensor

(2) Disconnect the sensor connector, remove the screw (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc) , and remove the master
loading sensor together with the sensor bracket.
(3) Remove the mounting screw (Bind 3 x 6: 1 pc) and then remove the master loading sensor.
Connector Master removal housing Master removal sensor Connector

Master loading sensor
Front Side
< Master removal unit >
11 - 15
2-6. Removing the Master Removal Motor & FG sensor
Removing the Master removal motor

(1) Turn power OFF and remove the Master removal unit. (Refer to 2-4)
(2) Remove the Master compression motor. (Refer to 2-3)
(3) Disconnect the connector, remove screws (M3 x 5 screws; 2 pcs), and remove the Master removal
motor.
Removing the Master removal motor FG sensor

Compression motor
Timing belt
11 - 16
(2) Disconnect the connector and remove the master removal motor FG sensor together with the bracket
by removing the screw (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc).
(3) Remove the Master removal motor FG sensor from the bracket.
Front Side
Master removal motor
Master removal motor FG sensor
Connector
11 - 17
2-7. Removing the Master Compression HP Sensor
(2) Disconnect the connector and remove the Master compression HP sensor together with the bracket
by removing the screw (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc).
(3) Remove the Master compression HP sensor from the bracket.

Mount the Master compression plate at its home position during the assembly.
Front Side
Connector
Master compression
HP sensor
11 - 18
2-8. Removing the Master Disposal Box Set Switch
(2) Remove the Master disposal box lock lever by removing the screw. (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc)
(3) Remove the Master disposal box guide plate by removing the screws. (M3 x 8 screws; 3 pcs)
(4) Remove the Switch spring.
(5) Disconnect the two connectors, remove the shoulder screw, and then remove the master disposal
box set switch together with the bracket.
(6) Remove the master disposal box set switch from the bracket. (Panhead sems screw 3 x 14: 2 pcs)
FRONT
Master disposal box lock lever Master disposal box guide plate
Switch spring Master disposal box set switch
Shoulder screw
Connectors Switch bracket

< View from outside of the unit >
11 - 19
2-9. Removing the Master Disposal Box Set Sensor
(2) Remove the Master disposal box guide (Rear) by removing the screw (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc).
(3) Disconnect the connector and remove the Master disposal box set sensor.
Rear Side
Master disposal box

guide (Rear)
Note: Master disposal box set sensor should be installed closer to the front side (direction of the arrow).
Master disposal box

set sensor
Connector When attaching, approach to the

front side and keep it.
Master disposal box set sensor
View from outside
Box guide R (tab)
11 - 20
2-10. Removing the Master Removal Roller (Lower)
(2) Remove the Master removal gear mount bracket by removing the screws. (Round-end IT3C3 x 6: 2
pcs)
(3) Remove the Spur gear.
(4) Push the release lever to lower the master removal roller (lower).
(5) Remove the Master removal roller (lower) gear.
Master removal gear mount bracket
Spur gear
«< Master removal roller (lower) in dropped position>»
Front Side
Gear
Push the release lever to lower the master removal roller (lower).
(6) Remove the Master removal guide assembly by removing the screws (M3 x 6 screws; 2 pcs).
11 - 21
Master removal guide assembly
Master removal guide assembly

<Roller removed>
(7) Remove E-rings (6mm diameter E-rings; 2 pcs) and Metal bushings, and remove the Master removal
roller (lower).
Front Side Rear Side
Pulley shaft

(upper)

(lower)
11 - 22
2-11. Removing the Master Removal Roller (Upper)
(1) Switch power OFF and remove the Master removal unit. (Refer to 2-4)
(3) Remove the flanged spur gear by removing the E-ring from the front side (4mm diameter E-ring:
1 pc).
(4) Remove the master removal roller springs AF and AR.
(5) Remove the master loading sensor assembly. (Refer to 2-5) (To avoid catching during the roller
removal)
(6) Unhook the Round belts from the pulleys on the Master removal roller (upper).
(7) Remove the snap ring from the rear side of the master removal roller (top), slide the roller toward the
rear side, and pull the front side out of the slotted hole in the metal plate.
(8) Next, slide the master removal roller (top) toward the front side and remove it through the round belt.
(9) Remove two Sliding shaft holders from the Master removal roller (upper).
The numbers used with the pictures correspond to the steps in the assembly/disassembly procedure.
<< FRONT>>
(4) Master removal

roller (top) spring AF
(3) Flanged spur gear
(3) E-ring
(9) Sliding shaft holder Master removal roller (upper) (6) Round belt
(upper)
<< Rear Side>>
(4) Master removal roller (top) spring AR
(7) Snap ring
Master removal roller (upper) (7) Slide toward rear side
(9) Sliding shaft holder
11 - 23
2-12. Removing the Pulley Shaft
(2) Unhook the Round belts from the pulleys on the Pulley shaft.
(3) Also on the front side of the unit, remove a snap ring and unhook the Metal bushings from the frame
and slide the Bearing metal inward. Remove the pulley shaft from the unit by pulling it out though the
Round belts.
Snap ring
Front Side
Pulley shaft
Metal bushings
Round belt
2-13. Removing the Round Belts
(3) Removing the following two components enable the Round belts to be removed.
• Master removal roller (upper) (Refer to 2-11 and 2-12)
• Pulley shaft (Refer to 2-13)
11 - 24
2-14. Removing the Master Removal Housing Assembly
(3) Remove both Roller hook springs F & R.
(4) Disconnect the master removal side frame F connector, remove the mounting screws (round-end
IT3C3 x 6: 2 pcs on front side, 1 pc on rear side) from the front and rear sides, and remove the
master removal housing assembly.

Make sure to position the boss of the Release lever in the hook portion of the Master removal
roller hook F. (Refer to the three photographs on the next page.)
Front Side
Roller hook spring F Master removal housing assembly Roller hook spring R
11 - 25
< Master removal housing assembly >
Hook portion of the

Master removal roller hook F
Master removal side frame F
Boss of the Release lever
Make sure to position the boss of the

Release lever in the hook portion of the
Master removal roller hook F.
11 - 26
2-15. Removing the Master Compression Plate
(2) Remove the Flat pinion gear by removing the E-ring (4mm diameter E-ring; 1 pc).
(3) Let the Master compression plate swings down by its own weight.
(4) Remove the following components.
• Compression FG sensor (Refer to 2-2)
• Master compression motor (Refer to 2-3 (1) through (8) in this chapter)
• Master removal gear mount bracket. (round-end IT3C3 x 6: 2 pcs)
• Master removal housing assembly (Refer to 2-15)
• Master disposal box guide (Rear) (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc) (Refer to 2-9)
• Master removal roller assembly (6 mm diameter E-rings; 2 pcs and Metal bushings; 2 pcs).
Flat pinion gear
Master removal housing

assembly
Master removal gear

Compression gear mount bracket
11 - 27
< Master removal housing assembly >
Master disposal box guide (Rear)
Rear Side Metal bushings Front Side Metal bushings
Master removal roller assembly

< The photograph shows the shaft removed. >
11 - 28
(5) Remove the Compression gear by removing the screw (M4 x 8 screw; 1 pc) from the front of the unit.
Compression gear
(6) Remove the E-ring (8mm diameter E-ring; 1 pc) and Metal bushings from the rear side.
(7) Remove the Master compression plate by removing the E-ring (8mm diameter E-ring; 1 pc) and
Metal bushings from the front side.

• Mount the Master compression plate at its home position during the assembly.
Front Side Metal bushings Rear Side Metal bushings
Master compression plate Master compression plate
11 - 29
< View of the Master removal unit after removing the Master compression plate >
11 - 30
MEMO
11 - 31
MEMO
11 - 32
CHAPTER 12. FB (FLAT BED) SECTION
CHAPTER 12. FB (Flat Bed) Section
Contents
1. Mechanism..............................................................................................2
1-1. Scanner Mechanism.......................................................................2
1-2. FB Initializing Movement.................................................................2
1-3. Stage Glass Original Detection Mechanism...................................2
1-4. FB Auto-Base-Control (ABC operation)..........................................2
2. Disassembly............................................................................................3
2-1. Removing the Scanner Unit............................................................3
2-2. Removing the Stage Glass............................................................5
2-3. Removing Angle Sensor.................................................................6
2-4. Removing the Print Head Carriage.................................................7
2-5. Removing the HP Sensor...............................................................8
2-6. Removing the FB Driving Motor......................................................9
12 - 1
1. Mechanism
1-1. Scanner Mechanism
This section describes the structure of “scanner” equipment that reads original.
主要部品配置図
The scanner is an equipment that reads the whole page of the original by moving the FB carriage
continuously.
Carriage HP Sensor Stage Glass Timing belt
FB Carriage Drive wire FB driving motor
1-2. FB Initializing Movement

When the power is ON, the FB carriage moves to the HP sensor position if the FB carriage position is out
of fixed length.
1-3. Stage Glass Original Detection Mechanism

The FB carriage checks whether an original has been placed on the Stage glass.
When the Stage cover is closed, and the angle sensor 3 is blocked, FB carriage lights the LED to check
whether the original is on or not, and measures width of the original. Information from other angle
sensors is not used.
1-4. FB Auto-Base-Control (ABC operation)

The ABC is an abbreviation for Auto-Base-Control, which controls original background density
automatically.
Remove original background density with image processing.
The "Auto-Base-Control function" is inactive in the photo, Duo, pencil, and dot screen mode.
Image Processing Operation

(1) Scans the original with the lamp turned off to measure density and creates data (black shading
compensation).
(2) Scans the shading compensation board (white original) to measure density and create data (white
shading compensation).
(3) Scans original background density to create data.
(4) Determine removal density data from the procedure (1) to (3). (ABC operation)
12 - 2
2. Disassembly
2-1. Removing the Scanner Unit
(1) Switch power OFF, and remove the following covers. (Refer to Chapter 1)
・ Stage cover
・ Scanner cover (paper feed)
・ Scanner cover (rear)
・ Scanner cover (paper ejection)
・ Side cover (paper feed)
・ Operation panel
・ Rear cover
Caution: Unlock the FB carriage.
Unlock the FB carriage
Scanner cover (paper feed) Operation panel Scanner cover (paper ejection)
(2) Remove the Relay PCB cover. (M3 x 8 screw; 1pc)

(3) Remove the Flat cable.
(4) Remove the Relay PCB. (M3 x 6 screw; 4 pcs)
(5) Remove the Relay PCB bracket. (M3 x 8 screw; 1pc)
12 - 3
Relay PCB
Flat cable
Relay PCB
bracket

Relay PCB cover
(6) Remove the rear connector.
Motor System
Sensor System
(7) Remove screws of the Scanner mounting bracket (M3 x 8 screw; 5pcs), and lift and remove the
Scanner unit.
View from rear side
View from ejection side View from feeder side
12 - 4
2-2. Removing the Stage Glass

When removing and installing the Stage glass, be careful with the dirt on the glass and entry of dust into
the unit. Image malfunction occurs such as black line.
(1) Switch power OFF, and remove the following covers. (Refer to Chapter 1)
・ Stage cover
・ Scanner cover (paper feed)
・ Scanner cover (rear)
・ Scanner cover (paper ejection)
・ Operation panel
(2) Remove screws, and lift and remove the Stage glass with the cover.
12 - 5
2-3. Removing Angle Sensor

(1) Switch power OFF, and remove the Stage glass. (Refer to 2-2)
(2) Remove the sensor rod by removing the screw.
(3) Remove the angle sensor 3.
Sensor rod
Angle sensor 3 (open or close detection)
Connector (Yellow)
Connector (Blue)
12 - 6
2-4. Removing the Print Head Carriage

(1) Switch power OFF, and remove the following part.
・ Stage glass (Refer to 2-2)
(2) Remove the print head carriage by removing the screws.
The rear side is fixed. The front side can be adjusted angle, and there is the scale marking.
Rear side Front side
Angle adjusting
mechanism (scale Print head carriage
marking)
Cover
(3) After removing the cover, remove the Flat cable from the connector.
12 - 7
2-5. Removing the HP Sensor

(2) Remove the HP sensor together with the Sensor bracket by removing the screws.
HP sensor
12 - 8
2-6. Removing the FB Driving Motor

(2) Remove the right hinge base.
Hinge base; right
View from rear side Hinge base; right
Wire Pulley
Timing belt
(3) Remove screws, the tension spring, and then the FB driving motor Assy.
Bracket FB driving motor
View from rear side
Tension spring
(4) Remove the FB driving motor from the bracket by removing the screws and connector.
View from rear side
Bracket FB driving motor
Installing procedure
(1) Install the FB driving motor to the bracket.
(2) Fasten them to the frame temporarily, attach the timing belt. Install the tension spring.
(3) Fix the Bracket with FB driving motor, while adding the tension.
12 - 9
MEMO
12 - 10
MEMO
12 - 11
MEMO
12 - 12
CHAPTER 13. AF SCANNING SECTION
Contents
1. Mechanism..............................................................................................2
1-1. Whole Structure..............................................................................2
1-2. Main Electrical Components and Functions....................................6
2. Disassembly............................................................................................7
2-1. Removing the Cover.......................................................................7
2-2. Removing Original Detection Sensor and Original Registration
Sensor.............................................................................................7
2-3. Removing Pickup Roller and Feed Roller.......................................8
2-4. Removing the Rear Cover..............................................................8
2-5. Removing the Front Cover..............................................................9
2-6. Removing Original Width Sensor 1 to 3 and Original Length
Sensor 1 and 2................................................................................9
2-7. Removing the Mechanical Unit.....................................................11
2-8. Removing the Original Ejection Sensor........................................12
2-9. Removing the Original Leading Edge Sensor...............................12
2-10. Removing the Cover Open/Close Sensor ..................................13
13 - 1
1. Mechanism
1-1. Whole Structure
Original fence Original length sensor
Original width
Cover sensor
Original
feeding tray
AF unit
Cover opening status
Original length sensor Cover

Original fence Original width sensor
AF unit
Cover opening status
13 - 2
Opening the AF unit
• The AF is an abbreviation for Automatic Feeder that scans original automatically.

• The FB is an abbreviation for Flat Bed scanner.
• Installing the AF to the FB, the FB can scan many originals automatically and continuously.
For the printer, the feature of the FB is efficient for scanning because it can scan many originals
automatically and continuously.
For the efficiency printing work, the FB is very useful equipment.
• The AF consists of the following functions.

(1) Detects the width of originals.
(2) Detects the length of originals.
(3) Sends original to the FB and ejects the originals.
(1) Detects the width of originals.

The width of original is detected by the original guide fence and three interrupt type sensors. The
plate of the original guide fence changes the position as the original size changes. The original width
can be detected by the combination of three sensors.
(2) Detects the length of originals.

The original length is detected by the original guide and the two interrupt type sensors and actuator.
The Original length can be detected by the combination of two sensors.
The combination of original width and length information detects the paper size.
(3) Sends original to the FB and ejects the originals.

• The AF driving motor and feeding clutch start by the operation signal.
• Pickup roller and feeding roller sends original to the Original registration sensor. The feeding roller
and separation roller deliver the top of the originals. This mechanism is the stripper mechanism.
• The original, which sends to the Original registration sensor, passes the Original leading edge
sensor with the Registration clutch and the Registration roller.
• The original passes on the FB stage glass at the specified speed with the Feed roller 1 and driven
roller, and reaches to the Feed roller 2, and then passes the Original ejection sensor.
• The original is ejected with the Ejection roller.
13 - 3
Original registration sensor
Registration clutch Feed roller Pickup roller

Registration roller Feed clutch
Original detection sensor
FB stage glass
Orignal leading edge sensor Feed roller 2 Separation roller

Ejection roller
Feed roller 1 Original ejection sensor (Switch back clutch)
AF cross section (Front View)
Pickup roller
Registration clutch Feed roller
Registration roller Feed clutch
FB stage glass
Orignal leading edge sensor Feed roller 2 Separation roller

Ejection roller
Feed roller 1 Original ejection sensor (Switch back clutch)
AF cross section (Original transfaring status)
13 - 4
Orignal width sensor 1 Orignal width sensor 2 Orignal length sensor 2

Cover Open/Close Orignal width sensor 3 Orignal length sensor 1
Sensor

AF layout (from above)
Original size detection matrix
Width Length Width Width Width

Original Size Length sensor 1 Length sensor2
(mm) (mm) sensor 1 sensor 2 sensor 3
Postal card 100 148 0 0 1 1 1
A6 105 148 0 0 1 1 1
B6 128 182 1 0 1 1 1
A5 148 210 0 1 1 1 1
B5 182 257 1 1 1 0 1
A5 Landscape 210 148 1 1 0 1 1
A4 210 297 1 1 0 0 1
B5 Landscape 257 182 1 1 1 1 1
B4 257 364 1 1 1 0 0
A4 Landscape 297 210 0 0 0 1 1
A3 297 420 0 0 0 0 0
Logical value of the sensor

0 Light not Light not Light not Detecting the paper Detecting the paper
blocked blocked blocked (Light not blocked) (Light not blocked)
1 No paper (Light No paper (Light
Light blocked Light blocked Light blocked
blocked) blocked)
13 - 5
1-2. Main Electrical Components and Functions
(1) AF driving motor

Rotate each roller.
(2) Cover open/close sensor

Detect that the cover is set correctly.
(3) Angle sensor 1-3 (FB side)

Check whether the AF unit is opened or closed. The Angle sensor 3 is used to check open/close.
(4) Paper feed clutch, Registration clutch, Switch back clutch

The power of the AF driving motor drives each roller.
(5) Original length sensor 1-2

Detect the length of originals.
(6) Original width sensor 1-3

Detect the width of originals.
(7) Original registration sensor, Original leading edge sensor, Original ejection sensor
Check the current status of original conveyance.
(8) Original detection sensor

Check whether the original has been set.
13 - 6
2. Disassembly
• Describes how to remove sensor and roller mainly.

• Take reversal procedure of removing to assemble.
• The cautions of working are written in red letters.
2-1. Removing the Cover

(1) Open the cover.
(2) Remove the cover by removing the screws (2 pcs).
Pickup roller Paper feed roller Cover
Paper feed clutch
Front side Rear side
Stripper roller
2-2. Removing Original Detection Sensor and Original Registration Sensor

(1) Remove the cover. (Refer to 2-1)
(2) Remove the Original detection sensor, and then disconnect the connector.
(3) Remove the Original registration sensor, and then disconnect connector.
When the cover is removed.
Original detection Paper feed roller

sensor
Pickup roller Paper feed clutch
13 - 7
2-3. Removing Pickup Roller and Feed Roller

(1) Remove the cover. (Refer to 2-1)
(2) Remove the Paper feed clutch. (Rear side: 6mm diameter E-ring; 1 pc)
(3) Remove the Pickup roller and the Paper feed roller together with the assembly. (Front side: 6mm
diameter E-ring; 1 pc, metal; 1 pc) (Rear side: 6mm diameter E-ring; 1 pc, one-way clutch; 1 pc)
One way clutch

Front side Paper feed clutch
Paper feed roller Rear side
Pickup roller
When assembling, the seal is inside.
2-4. Removing the Rear Cover

(1) Open the cover.
(2) Remove the rear cover by removing the screws (3 pcs).
Rear side
13 - 8
2-5. Removing the Front Cover

(1) Open the cover.
(2) Remove the front cover by removing the screws (3 pcs).
Front side
2-6. Removing Original Width Sensor 1 to 3 and Original Length Sensor 1 and 2
(1) Remove the rear cover. (Refer to 2-4)
(2) Remove the front cover. (Refer to 2-5)
(3) Disconnect the Connector, and then remove the Original feeding tray.
Front side
Original feeding tray
Connector Rear side
13 - 9
(4) Remove the cover of the Original feed tray. (M3 x 8 screws; 3 pcs)
Original feeding tray (front side) Original feeding tray (rear side)
(5) Release the sensor claw from the base bracket, and then remove the Original width sensor or
Original length sensor.
Original width sensor 3 Original width sensor 2
Original width
sensor 1
Original feeding tray (inside)

Original length sensor 1
Original length sensor 2
13 - 10
2-7. Removing the Mechanical Unit

(3) Disconnect the connector, and then remove the Original feeding tray.
(4) Remove the Mechanical unit by removing the screws (6 pcs).
Rear side
Mechanical unit
Front side
13 - 11
2-8. Removing the Original Ejection Sensor

(1) Remove the Mechanical unit. (Refer to 2-6)
(2) Release the sensor claw from the base bracket, and then remove the Original ejection sensor.
Rear side
Original ejection
sensor
Front side
2-9. Removing the Original Leading Edge Sensor

(3) Remove screws (2pcs) that fix the Mechanical unit.
Rear side
Mechanical unit
Front side
13 - 12
(4) Remove the screws (5pcs), open the AF unit.

Tapped holes by step (3)

Reinforcing plate
(5) Remove the Reinforcing plate.

(6) Remove the Original leading edge sensor together with the bracket by removing the screw.
Original leading edge sensor
(7) Disconnect the connector, and then remove the Original leading edge sensor.
2-10. Removing the Cover Open/Close Sensor

(1) Remove the rear cover.
(2) Release the sensor claw, and then remove the Cover open/close sensor.
(3) Disconnect the connector.
Rear side
Mechanical unit
Front side Cover open / close sensor
13 - 13
MEMO
13 - 14
MEMO
13 - 15
MEMO
13 - 16
CHAPTER 16: Master Making Section
Contents
1. Mechanism.............................................................................................2
1-1. Master Making Mechanism...........................................................2
1-2. Set Detection Mechanism.............................................................3
1-3. Master Cutting Mechanism (Besides SF5030, SF5130)...............4
1-4. Master Cutting Mechanism (Shuttle Cutter)
(Only SF5030, SF5130)................................................................5
1-5. Mechanism of Thermal Print Head (TPH) Pressure Bonding and
Releasing......................................................................................6
1-6. Master Set Mechanism.................................................................7
1-7. Master Making Movement.............................................................8
1-8. RFID..............................................................................................9
2. Disassembly.........................................................................................10
2-1. Removing the Master Making Unit Lock Sensor.........................10
2-2. Removing the Eject Button, Lock Solenoid, and Set Switch.......11
2-3. Removing the TPH (Thermal Print Head) Assembly..................13
2-4. Removing the Thermal Pressure Motor Assembly.....................15
2-5. Removing the Thermal Pressure Sensor....................................17
2-6. Removing the Master End Sensor (receive) Assembly..............18
2-7. Removing the Master Detection Sensor and Master End
Sensor (send).............................................................................19
2-8. Removing the RFID....................................................................21
2-9. Removing the Write Pulse Motor Assembly................................22
2-10. Removing the Write Roller..........................................................23
2-11. Removing the Load Pulse Motor Assembly................................24
2-12. Removing the Cutter Cover Assembly........................................25
2-13. Removing the Master Making Unit Upper Cover Set Switch......26
2-14. Removing the Master Positioning Sensor...................................27
2-15. Removing the Master Loading Roller..........................................28
2-16. Removing the Cutter Guide Assembly........................................29
2-17. Removing the Cutter Unit............................................................30
2-18. Removing the Load Roller (Bottom)............................................31
2-19. Removing the Master Stocker Roller (Bottom)...........................32
2-20. Removing the Master Making Unit..............................................33
3. Adjustment...........................................................................................36
3-1. Thermal Power of Thermal Print Head.......................................36
3-2. Master Cut Length Adjustment...................................................36
3-3. Master Making Length Adjustment.............................................36
3-4. Master Positioning Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment......................36
16 - 1
1. Mechanism
1-1. Master Making Mechanism
The objective of Master making unit is making the Master by the Thermal print head (TPH), sending it to
the Print drum, and cutting it.
Thermal print head (TPH):

Thermal pressure sensor: Pushes the Master material on the write roller and make a hole
Detects pressure bonding and by the heat. It includes TPH thermistor thermometer.
releasing the TPH, controls
thermal pressure motor. Master end sensor (receive):
The sensor detects the master roll
end mark.
Load roller (top): Thermal pressure motor:
Drives Master material with the Drives the pressure bonding and
bottom load roller. (following side) releasing of the TPH. (The arrow
indicates pressure bonding)
Load roller (bottom):
Drives Master material with the
top load roller. (driving side)
Master positioning sensor:
Controls waiting position of the
Master material and checks Master stocker roller (top):
whether to cut the Master Drives the Master material with
material. The sensor controls the Master stocker roller (bottom).
the write pulse motor (Revolving (following side)
reflection type sensor).
Master loading roller: Master stocker roller (bottom):
Drives the Master material Drives the Master material with
after making the Master unit. the Master stocker roller (top).
(driving side)
Master making unit upper
cover setting switch: Write roller:
Checks whether to set the Bonds pressure and transfers
stage cover. the master material with the
TPH.
Cutter HP switch:
Checks the position of HP.
When it is waiting, the position
is OFF.
s ter
Ma
Load pulse motor:

Drives the Load roller
and Master loading Master end sensor
roller. (light emitter):
Detects Master roll end mark.
Cutter (Rotary):
Cuts the tailing end of the Master
and removes from the Master roll. Master detection sensor:
Checks whether to set the Master
Cutter motor: material. (Reflection type sensor)
Drives the cutter action.
Write pulse motor: Master roll:

Drives the Write roller and Object that the paper sleeve is wrapped
Master stocker roller. by the screen master material.
16 - 2
1-2. Set Detection Mechanism
Master making unit set detection mechanism

Removing and inserting of the Master making unit are checked by the position B. The master making
unit switch and the Master making unit lock sensor checks whether the Master making unit has been set.
When the Master making unit switch is OFF, the following devices switch is OFF: Main motor, Clamp
motor, Master compression motor, Master removal motor (CW), Horizontal movement motor, Separation
fan motor, and Separation pump solenoid.
Master making unit switch
Master making unit lock sensor
Master making unit
Mechanism to check the master making unit cover setting

The Master making unit upper cover set switch checks the Master making unit cover setting. When the
Master material is set, Master material set action is performed. When the Master making unit upper cover
set switch is OFF, the Thermal pressure motor does not turn ON.
16 - 3
1-3. Master Cutting Mechanism (Besides SF5030, SF5130)
This is a mechanism to cut the Master material. The mechanism and action are as follows.
1) The Cutter motor drives the Rotary blade of Cutter unit. Rotary blade cuts the Master material at the
contact point with Fixing blade.
2) Rotary blade rotates counterclockwise from the front view, and the Plate blade embedded in the
Rotary blade get into touch with the Fixing blade. The principle is the same as the sissor. The cutting
starts rear side to front side.
3) The Cutter HP switch checks the position of the Rotary blade. The position that the actuator is not
pressed is a Cutter HP position.The Cutter motor stops when the actuator is not pressed again after
the Cutter motor starts rotating.
Cutter HP switch
Front view
Direction of rotating
Fixing blade rotary blade
Pressing to rotary blade
with the spring
Master material path
Rotary blade
Cutter HP switch
Rotary blade
Cutter motor
16 - 4
1-4. Master Cutting Mechanism (Shuttle Cutter)

(Only SF5030, SF5130)
The master is cut by the shuttle (rotary blade include in the unit) of the Cutter unit back and forth motion
driven by the Cutter motor.
The Cutter HP switch and the Cutter stop position switch both confirm the shuttle position of the Cutter
unit.
The Cutter is at the home position when the Cutter HP switch is pressed. As the Cutter motor activates,
the Shuttle moves in cutting direction. When the shuttle presses the Cutter stop position switch, the
Cutter motor stops. After that the Cutter motor rotates in reverse and the Shuttle moves to the cutter
home position. The Cutter HP switch depressed, stops the Cutter motor.
Shuttle
Rotary blade
Cutter stop position switch

1672
Cu
ttin
gd
ire Cutter HP switch
cti
on
1673
Cutter motor
16 - 5
1-5. Mechanism of Thermal Print Head (TPH) Pressure Bonding and Releasing
Thermal print head (TPH) pressure bonding is for Master making, and releasing is to protect deforming
of write roller and skewing adjustment of Master material. It is performed by rotating the Eccentric cam
(Eccentric pressure cam) with the Thermal pressure motor, and moving upward and downward the TPH
bracket which is pressed by Thermal pressure spring. The Thermal print head (TPH) and Write roller
pressure bonding are performed at the Master material writing and driving. The Thermal print head (TPH)
and Write roller detaching are performed at waiting the machine and initializing operation when the
Power is ON.
Thermal print head (TPH) pressure bonding status

Eccentric pressure cam
leaves from the TPH bracket
TPH pressure sensor
ON → OFF → ON
(as shown)
Thermal pressure motor

Thermal pressure spring nomal rotation
Thermal print head (TPH) pressure releasing status

Eccentric pressure cam
Sensor disc pushes up the TPH bracket
TPH pressure sensor

ON → OFF → ON
(as shown)
TPH bracket
Thermal pressure
TPH (Thermal print head) reversal rotation
Write roller
16 - 6
1-6. Master Set Mechanism
When the upper cover opens/closes, and Master making unit upper cover switch is ON, the following
master set action is performed.
1) Pushes down the Thermal print head (TPH) against the Write roller, and rotates Write pulse motor to
sending direction. Write roller and Master stocker roller (bottom) transfers the Master material, and
then the Master positioning sensor switches ON and stops.
2) Elevates up the Thermal print head (TPH) away from the Write roller, and rotates Write pulse motor
to sending direction again. Sends the Master material for 20mm and stops.
3) Pushes down the Thermal print head (TPH) against the Write roller again, and rotates the Write
pulse motor to revarsal direction. Master positioning sensor turns ON/OFF, and rotates 5mm reversal
and stops (Master front-end position adjustment: that set by the test mode No.540), and Thermal
print head (TPH) elevates up away from the Write roller.
Master positioning sensor TPH (Thermal print head) Master roll
Master stocker Write roller

roller (bottom)
Master positioning sensor is a transmissive

View master waiting sensor
type revolution sensor that has both sending
from under the machine.
and recieving functions. Emitted light is brought
back to the Sensor by the plastic optical "Prism"
that is equipped with the Cutter cover assembly,
and enters in light received area. If the Master
is in the Master unit transfar route, the light Optical sensor light
is blocked off and the luminous energy has
declined. The mechanism detects the existance
of the Master material in this way.
Master material
Prism
16 - 7
1-7. Master Making Movement
The action from Master making to the Master loading on the Print drum is explained in sequence below.
1) At the start of the Master making, the TPH

comes down to pinch the Master material
between the TPH and the Write roller. The
Write pulse motor activates to rotate the Write
roller and Master stocker roller in the forward
direction to feed the Master material to the
Master positioning sensor.
2) The Write pulse motor rotates in the reverse

direction to bring the Master material back
away from the Master positioning sensor for a
given distance and waits for the scanning to
proceed.
3) With the Master making start signal, both the

Load pulse motor and Write pulse motor rotate
in the forward direction to transfer the Master
to the Master loading standby position and the
Master making starts.
4) Just before the leading edge of the Master

reaches the Master loading standby position,
the Separation fan is activated. The Load pulse
motor stops when the leading edge of the
master arrives to the Master loading standby
position. The Write pulse motor continues to
advance the Master with the Separation fan
pulling the Master into the Stocker room.
5) When the Print drum is ready to clamp the

Master, the Load pulse motor rotates to send
the leading edge of the Master to the Clamp
plate base, and then the Print drum starts
clamping the Master.
6) As the master making ends, the TPH elevates

up and the Print drum starts to rotate to wrap
the Master material around the Print drum.
16 - 8
1-8. RFID
This feature manages Master material, types of ink and remaining amount of ink by communicating with
the RIFD tag which is equipped on the Master roll or Ink bottle. The communication standard conforms
ISO15693, and read and write the tag wirelessly.
Wired communication Wireless communication
Command
Control
PCB RF Attached in the
Printing (Printed Antenna Tag ink and master
Module (ISO15693)
machine Circuit Response material
Board) 㼆㍈
䠇
㻌 ᪉ྥ 㼄㍈
RF is an abbreviation for Radio Frequency which is used wireless communication.
Tag䠄䠅
㼅㍈
Antenna surface
center axis 䠇
㻌 ᪉ྥ 䞊᪉ྥ
䞊᪉ྥ
Communication distance
RFID PCB Unit
Master making section RFID Print drum section RFID
16 - 9
2. Disassembly
2-1. Removing the Master Making Unit Lock Sensor
1) Pull out the Master making unit and switch OFF the machine power.
Set switch cover
2) Remove the set switch cover. (IT3C4 x 8 screw; 1 pc)

3) Disconnect the Connector and remove the Master making unit lock sensor.

Connector
16 - 10
2-2. Removing the Eject Button, Lock Solenoid, and Set Switch
1) Remove the Front cover. (Refer to Chapter 1)

2) Pull out the Master making unit and switch OFF the power.
3) Remove the Set switch cover. (IT3C4 x 8 screw; 1 pc)
4) Disconnect the connector (3 points) and remove the mounting screw (IT3C4 x 8 screw; 3 pcs), and
then remove the Master making unit locking unit.
Set switch cover
Master making unit

locking unit
Removing the print drum ejection button and the master making unit ejection button
5)-1. Release two hooks on each button from the Master making unit lock unit and remove the buttons.
Removing the master making unit locking solenoid

5)-2. Remove the mounting screws (M3 x 6 screws; 2 pcs) and remove the Master making unit locking
solenoid.
Master making unit release button Master making unit locking solenoid Print drum release button
16 - 11
Removing the master making unit set switch

5)-3 Disconnect the connector (2 points) and remove the mounting screw (IT3C4 x 8 screws; 1pc), and
then remove the Master making unit set switch assembly.
6) Release the Torsion spring hook, and remove the E-ring, and then remove the Master making unit
set switch together with the bracket.
Master making unit set switch assembly
E-ring Master making unit set switch
Torsion spring
16 - 12
2-3. Removing the TPH (Thermal Print Head) Assembly
2) Open the Master making unit upper cover.
3) Remove the Master making unit upper cover bracket by removing a screw (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc).
4) Disconnect the Ground wire by removing a screw (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc).
Master making unit upper cover
Master making unit upper cover bracket
Ground wire
5) Remove the Master making unit bottom cover by removing screws (bind M3 x 6 screw; 2 pcs).
Master making unit bottom cover
6) Remove the Connector cover by removing a screw (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc).
Connector cover
16 - 13
7) Unplug the connectors (2 points), and remove the Snap ring and Metal bushing.
Snap ring
Metal bushing (Front side) Spring
8) Slide off the Metal bushing from the TPH bracket and remove the TPH assembly.
* While removing the unit, be careful not to make static electricity.
Metal bushing (rear side)
TPH bracket
<TPH (Thermal Print Head) Assembly>
16 - 14
2-4. Removing the Thermal Pressure Motor Assembly

2) Remove the Thermal print head assembly. (Refer to 2-3)
3) Remove the Thermal pressure gear cover by removing screws (M3 x 6 screws; 4 pcs).
4) Remove the two Thermal pressure springs.
Thermal pressure gear cover
5) Remove E-rings (8mm-diameter E-rings; 2pcs) from both ends of the TPH support shaft, and remove
the shaft.
Thermal pressure spring TPH support shaft Thermal pressure spring
16 - 15
6) Disconnecting the connectors of the motor and sensor, remove screws (M3 x 6 screws; 2 pcs), and
then remove the Thermal pressure motor assembly.
Thermal pressure motor assembly
Thermal pressure motor assembly
16 - 16
2-5. Removing the Thermal Pressure Sensor
1) Remove the Thermal pressure motor assembly. (Refer to 2-4)

2) Remove the Cam shaft assembly screws (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc) to rotate the Sensor disc.
3) Rotate the Sensor disc and set the notched position to remove or attach the Thermal pressure
sensor easily.
4) Remove the Thermal pressure sensor.
Cam shaft assembly
Thermal pressure sensor
Cam shaft assembly screw
16 - 17
2-6. Removing the Master End Sensor (receive) Assembly
2) Open the Master making unit upper cover.
3) Remove a screw (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc), unplug the sensor connector and remove the Master end
sensor (receive) assembly.
Master end sensor (receive) assembly
Master end sensor (receive) assembly
Set guide plate B
Master end sensor(send)
16 - 18
2-7. Removing the Master Detection Sensor and Master End Sensor (send)
2) Open the Master making unit upper cover and remove the Master roll.
3) Remove the Stopper plate (rear) by removing a screw (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc).
<CAUTION: Since the Set guide plate B is forced up by Set guide spring B (front), press down the
Set guide plate B when removing the Stopper plate (rear).>
4) Remove the Master detection sensor together with the bracket by removing a screw (M3 x 6 screw;
1 pc) while lifting up the Set guide plate B after pushing the Set guide stopper to the rear by finger.
Set guide stopper

Set guide plate B
Master detection sensor and Master end sensor (send)
Stopper plate (rear)

Set guide stopper
REAR
16 - 19
Set guide plate B Set guide stopper
FRONT REAR
Set guide spring B (front) Master Detection Sensor Stopper plate (rear)
Master end sensor (send)
5) Disconnect the connector and remove Master detection sensor and Master end sensor (send) by
removing the mounting screw (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc).
16 - 20
2-8. Removing the RFID
2) Remove the Master making unit front cover by removing screws (M4 x 8 screw; 4 pcs). (Refer to
Chapter 1)
3) Remove the Master making PCB by removing screws (M3 x 6 screw; 2 pcs).
Master making PCB
4) Disconnect the connector, and then remove the RFID by releasing three craws of the front master
flange (G).
Front master flange (G)
RFID
16 - 21
2-9. Removing the Write Pulse Motor Assembly
2) Remove the Master making unit front cover by removing screws. (M4 x 8 screws; 4 pcs) (Refer to
Chapter 1)
3) Unhook wire harness from the Wire saddle on the bracket of the Write pulse motor.
4) Remove the Reuse band from the bracket of the Write pulse motor and unplug the connector from
the Write pulse motor.
5) Remove the Write pulse motor assembly together with the Timing belt by removing screws (M3 x 6
screws; 2 pcs).
Timing belt Write pulse motor assembly
Reuse band
«Precautions for installing the write pulse motor assembly»

• Fasten the Write Pulse motor assembly temporarily, and then rotates them clockwise on the attaching
screw 1 as the center. Adjust the tension of the timing belt appropriately and tighten the screw firmly.
Attaching screw 2
Timing belt
Attaching screw 1
Write Pulse Motor Assembly
16 - 22
2-10. Removing the Write Roller
2) Open the Master making unit upper cover and remove following items.
• Master roll
• Master making unit front cover (M4 x 8 screws; 4 pcs) (Refer to Chapter 1)
• Write pulse motor assembly (Refer to 2-9)
3) Remove the Write roller pulley by removing a screw (M3 x 8 screw; 1 pc).
4) Remove the Bearing support bracket (front) by removing screws (M3 x 6 screws; 2 pcs).
5) Be careful not to fall the rear side metal, pull out and remove the Write roller from the side plate hole.
Write roller
Bearing support bracket (front)
Pulley
< Write Roller >
16 - 23
2-11. Removing the Load Pulse Motor Assembly
• Master roll
3) Remove the reuse bands (3 positions) from the bracket of the Load pulse motor and unplug the Load
pulse motor connector.
4) Remove the Load pulse motor assembly by removing screws (M3 x 6 screws; 2 pcs).
Reuse band Load pulse motor assembly
Reuse band
16 - 24
2-12. Removing the Cutter Cover Assembly
• Master roll
• Load pulse motor assembly (Refer to 2-11)
3) Unplug the sensor connector, remove screws (M3 x 6 screws; 2 pcs), and remove the Cutter cover
assembly while pulling out the wire harness from the hole on the machine side frame.
Cutter cover assembly
< Cutter Cover Assembly >

Master making unit upper
Master positioning sensor cover set switch
< Cutter Cover Assembly Back side view >
16 - 25
2-13. Removing the Master Making Unit Upper Cover Set Switch
• Master roll
• Cutter cover assembly (Refer to 2-12)
3) Unplug the connector, and remove the master making unit upper cover interlock switch together with
the bracket by removing screws (IT3C3 x 6 screw;1 pc ).
Master making unit upper cover set switch
16 - 26
2-14. Removing the Master Positioning Sensor
• Master roll
3) Remove the Master Positioning sensor cover by removing a screw (M3 x 6 screw; 1 pc).
4) Unplug the connector and remove the Master positioning sensor.
Master positioning sensor cover
Master positioning sensor
16 - 27
2-15. Removing the Master Loading Roller
2) Remove the Master making unit front cover by removing screws. (M4 x 8 screws; 4 pcs) (Refer to
Chapter 1)
3) Remove the Master loading guide by removing screws (M3 x 8 screws; 2 pcs).
4) Remove the Spur gear by removing a screw (M3 x 8 screw; 1 pc).
5) Remove the Snap ring on the rear, unhook the Bearing metal from the rear frame and slide it inward.
Slide the Master loading roller towards the rear and unhook the Bearing metal from the front frame.
Remove the Master loading roller from the machine.
Master loading guide Master loading roller
Snap ring Master loading roller Spur gear
< REAR > < FRONT >
16 - 28
2-16. Removing the Cutter Guide Assembly
1) Pull out the master making unit and switch OFF the machine power.
• Master roll
• Master loading guide (Refer to 2-15)
• Master loading roller (Refer to 2-15)
3) Remove the Cutter guide assembly by removing screws (M3 x 6 screws; 2 pcs).
Cutter guide assembly
< Cutter Guide Assembly (TOP VIEW)>
< Cutter Guide Assembly (BOTTOM VIEW)>
16 - 29
2-17. Removing the Cutter Unit
• Master roll
• Cutter guide assembly (Refer to 2-16)
• Write roller pulley (M3 x 8 screw; 1 pc).
• Master stocker roller pulley (4mm-diameter E-ring; 1pc)
3) Unplug the connector (2 points), and remove the cutter unit by removing the shoulder screw.
(Shuttle Cutter is same procedure as Rotary type.)
Connector Connector
Cutter unit
Master stocker roller pulley Write roller pulley
The rear side of the cutter unit is hooking type.
< Cutter Unit (Rotary) >
16 - 30
2-18. Removing the Load Roller (Bottom)
• Master roll
3) Remove the Spur gear by removing a screw (M3 x 8 screw; 1 pc).
4) Remove the Load roller (bottom) by removing both side of E-ring (6mm-diameter E-ring; 2pcs),
waving washer and Bearing metal.
Bearing metal Load roller (bottom) Bearing metal Spur gear
16 - 31
2-19. Removing the Master Stocker Roller (Bottom)
2) Remove the Master making unit.
3) Remove the following items.
• Master stocker roller pulley (4mm-diameter E-ring; 1pc)
4) Remove the Master stocker roller (bottom) by removing an E-ring (4mm diameter; 1 pc) and the
Bearing metal from the rear, and two E-rings (4mm diameter; 2 pcs) and the Bearing metal from the
front.
Master stocker roller (bottom) Master stocker roller pulley
Master stocker roller (bottom) Master stocker roller (bottom)
16 - 32
2-20. Removing the Master Making Unit
1) Pull out the Master making unit and switch OFF the machine power
• Master roll
3) Unplug the Master making unit flat cable from the Master making PCB.
4) Remove a screw (M3 x 8 screw; 1 pc), and let Flat cable bracket and Flat cable support plate hang
down by removing them from the Master making unit side frame (front).
Master making PCB
Master making unit side frame (front)
Flat cable bracket Master making unit

flat cable
Flat cable support plate
16 - 33
5) Slide the Flat cable guiding box in the direction indicated by an arrow mark on the photograph below,
just enough to unhook from the Master making unit, and disengage it from the Master making unit.
6) Push both the Flat cable guiding box and Flat cable support plate back into the machine.
7) Remove the four Shoulder screws and remove the Master making unit from the machine by lifting it.
Master making unit

Flat cable support plate Flat cable guiding box
Flat cable guiding box
< Master Making Unit >
16 - 34

• Insert the flanged portion of the Flat cable guiding box into the U-shaped point of the Master making
unit and engage the Damper gear into the rack gear molded on the Flat cable guiding box.
Rack gear molded on the Flat cable guiding box
Damper
the U-shaped point of the Master making unit

Flanged portion on the Flat cable guiding box
• Insert the cap portion of the Flat cable bracket into left and right hooks at the tip of the Flat cable
support plate and hook the flanged portion on the Flat cable bracket on the rectangular hole on the
Master making unit front frame to attach.
Flanged portion on the Flat cable bracket
Cap portion on the Flat cable bracket

Gasket
Hooks at the tip of the Flat cable support plate

Rectangular hole to hook the catch
on the Flat cable bracket
16 - 35
3. Adjustment
3-1. Thermal Power of Thermal Print Head
The thermal power must always be adjusted each time a TPH (Thermal print head) is replaced.
1) Activate test mode.

2) Input “9874” (protected area) with the numeric key and then press the <START> key.
3) Run test mode No. 1234 (TPH resistance input) and enter the resistance value imprinted on a sticker
attached on each TPH. Press START key to enter the value.
4) Press the <RESET> key to return back to the normal operation mode.
3-2. Master Cut Length Adjustment

1) Make a Master and measure the length of the Master margin at the tail end of the Master on the Print
drum (length from where the ink ends on the Master material to the tail edge of the Master). The
length should be 9 mm, plus or minus 1.5 mm.
2) If the measured length is out of the specified range, make an adjustment using test mode No.544
(master cut length adjustment).
* Increasing the parameter setting by the test mode increases length of the margin at the tail of the
Master, making the total length of each Master longer.
3-3. Master Making Length Adjustment

1) Run the Test mode No.80 (Test print A ) to make a Master.
2) Remove the Master from the print drum, and measure the master making area. Confirm the length
of the Master making area. When the machine is A3, the ensured length is over 413 mm. When the
machine is B4, the ensured length is over 357 mm.
3) If the measured length is out of the specified range, make an adjustment using test mode No.542
(Master making length adjustment).
* Increasing the parameter setting by the test mode increases the Master making length.
3-4. Master Positioning Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
Make following adjustment after replacing Master positioning sensor.

Confirming procedure
1) Pull out the Master making unit. If Master material is set in the unit, rewind the Master material back
on the Master roll, so no Master is under the Master positioning sensor.
2) Remove the Master-making unit front cover by removing screws. (M4 x 8 screws; 4 pcs) (Refer to
Chapter 1)
3) Measure the voltage by connecting the tester to the CN6 monitor connector of the Master making
PCB.
4) Confirm the voltage is within 1.6 ± 0.6 V. Adjust the voltage if it is out of the range.
5) Attach the Front master making cover.
6) Switch ON the machine and set the Master material again, confirm the Master setting action is
performed.
16 - 36
Adjusting procedure
1) Turn the VR1 (coarse adjustment) and VR2 (fine adjustment) clockwise until they stop.
2) Turn the VR2 counterclockwise while measuring the sensor voltage with the CN6 monitor connector,
and adjust the voltage of the sensor within 1.6 V ± 0.6 V.
* If the adjustment fails, follow the procedure below.
3) Turn the VR1 and VR2 clockwise until they stop, adjust the sensor voltage around 2.0 V by turning
VR1 counterclockwise.
4) Turn the VR2 counterclockwise, and adjust the voltage of the sensor within 1.6 V ± 0.6 V.
Connector (CN6)
GND Monitor output VR1
VR2
Master making PCB
16 - 37
MEMO
16 - 38
MEMO
16 - 39
MEMO
16 - 40
CHAPTER 17: Panel Messages
Contents
Explanation of Panel Messages................................................................2

1. Error-Code Displays...............................................................................2
2. Errors for Which Backup is Created.....................................................4
3. List of Error Types..................................................................................5
4. List According to Error Point.................................................................7
17 - 1
Explanation of Panel Messages

1.1Error-Code
Overview Displays
1.1 Error identification
　An error code consists of an “error type” indicating the type according to the error reset method
(panel indication) and “error point” indicating the number according to the error detection condition.
Error types sorted according to the priority is called “error priority”.
　An error type is determined by one or more error points. An error point code is
indicated by the unit number indicating the mechanical unit and its sequential number within the unit.
　The details of each element are explained in this section.
Example) T01-520 (Main motor lock)
Error type Error point
T01 - 520
17 - 2
Error type
Type Description
“Serviceman-call error”
T This error can be released by the reset operation or by turning the
power OFF then ON (system initialization).
“Jam error”
This error occurs when the machine is in operation, and
A the normal state can be restored by user operation.
The error can be released by following the instruction
displayed on the panel.
“Option error”
This error occurs due to troubles on options (such as paper jam),
disconnection with the machine, power disconnection of optional devices,
B etc.
The error can be released by removing jam, establishing connection to the
machine, turning the optional devices ON, etc.and then pressing the
<RESET> key or switching the power ON again.
Consumable (ink) has run out.
Consumable (master) has run out.

C
Master disposal box is full.
Consumable (paper) has run out.
Set switch of each unit part is OFF.

D If this error occurs while the machine is in operation, the operation will
stop at a proper timing.
Warning: This error has the potential to cause a problem

E
if the operation or action is continued. (Serviceman-call error)
Warning: This error has the potential to cause a problem

F
if the operation or action is continued. (Other than serviceman-call error)
This is the state that requires parameter entry by the user when general
H
consumable is to be set.
“Paper jam error”

J Jam of original that occurs at the scanning section or paper jam
that occurs at the paper feed/ejection section.
17 - 3
Error point
It is identified by the mechanical unit number to indicate the unit number.
Unit Number Error Point Unit

0 0xx, 9xx and 10xx System (hardware, software, communication)
and panel
1 1xx Scanning section (scanner, AF) and image
processor
2 2xx Master making section
3 3xx Master removal section
4 4xx Paper feed/ejection section
5 5xx Print drum and periphery
6 6xx Printing adjustment section (vertical, density)
7 7xx and 8xx Optional equipment (such as card counter)
2.3Errors
Backupforfor Errors
Which Backup is Created
Standard backup
Backup copy will be created when the following errors occur.

(The error is not cleared by turning the power OFF.)
No. Error Type Description

1 C01 Ink cartridge replacement
2 C02 Master roll replacement
3 C03 Master disposal box full
17 - 4
3. List of Error Types
Type Name Type Name
A01 Master feed error D07 Master disposal box not installed
A02 Master loading error D08 Master making unit not installed
A04 Master on print drum check D09 Master making unit not set into position
A05 Master in master removal section check D11 Front cover not set into position
A06 Paper feed tray check D13 Main unit rear cover not set in position
A07 Paper feed error D17 Master incompatibility
A08 Paper jam on print drum D18 Print drum release possible
A09 Paper ejection error D19 Master making unit pull out possible
A10 AF original feed error D22 Print drum release command
A16 Awaiting removal of master from print drum D23 AF paper feed cover not set
A17 Cutter error D50 Scanner carriage lock not released
A34 Awaiting master reset E01 Battery replacement
B01 Card counter: No card E02 Maintenance call
B21 Storage memory: Read/write error F01 No master on the print drum
B22 Job separator: Power OFF F02 Paper/master making size incompatibility 1
B23 Job separator: No-tape error F03 Multi-up: Paper size error
B24 Job separator: Jam error F04 User Control: Reached the maximum print quantity
B29 USB memory: No compatibility (HUB) F05 Minimum print quantity setting error
B30 USB memory: No compatibility F06 N-up - Paper size error
B31 Network cable not connected F07 N-up - Outside original size detection range
B32 NIC: External communication error F10 Paper/master making size incompatibility 2
B33 IP address setup error Paper feed/paper receiving tray: Paper size
F15
incompatibility
B34 RLP (linked printer): No-toner error
F17 Print drum size incompatibility
B35 RLP (linked printer): Service error
Auto size reproduction not possible (outside range
B36 Coin vendor: Insufficient amount of coins F24
of size reproduction)
B37 Card vendor: No card
F28 Card paper feed setting check
B38 USB memory: Folder creation failed
F30 Multiple paper feed check
B39 USB memory: Read/write error
F31 Auto fence operation not possible
C01 Ink cartridge replacement
F32 Storage memory: Capacity is full
C02 Master roll replacement
F33 USB memory: Capacity is full
C03 Master disposal box full
Storage memory: Reached the maximum count of
C04 No paper F34
file
C11 Ink has passed the expiration date F37 Combined use of book mode and AF not possible
C12 Master has passed the expiration date F43 DtoP original/paper incompatibility
C13 Ink & master disabled due to expiration Auto size reproduction not possible (outside original
F44
D01 Print drum not installed size detection range)
D02 Print drum incompatibility F45 Presence of original unknown/no original
D03 Ink cartridge not installed Combined use of AF and postcard size reproduction
F47
not possible
D04 Ink cartridge incompatibility
F48 Multi-up: Outside original size detection range
D05 Master not installed
17 - 5
Type Name Type Name
F51 Expired ink T02 Elevator motor lock
Use of RLP mode not possible (RLP information T03 Clamp motor lock
F52
has not been acquired)
T04 Ink overflow
F56 Expired master
T05 Vertical print positioning pulse motor lock
F57 Expired ink & master
T11 Print pressure control pulse motor lock
F58 Use of RLP mode not possible (NET-D initializing)
T12 Master disposal section motor lock
RLP auto-link: Master making continuation
F60 T13 Cutter motor lock
confirmation (when print quantity is 0)
T14 FB error
F62 RLP auto-link: RLP error
T15 AF error
F64 Specified function disabled at job reception
T19 Thermal pressure motor lock
Scan mode
F65 T20 Paper ejection section motor lock
auto-saving size selection/nonstandard size original
Auto tray selection: T24 Ink motor lock

F73
RLP tray designation disabled T25 No battery error
F74 High speed mode not possible at low temperature T30 Print pressure jig error
F78 Digitizer: Stage cover open T90 Network Error
F79 Digitizer: No original during rescanning T91 RTC data error
F85 Scanning not possible: External CI not connected T92 Print drum EEPROM write error
Supply stock management T93 NET-D hardware error
F90
(ink)
T94 TPH error
Supply stock management
F91 T96 Data not input
(master)
T97 PC card access error
F94 Protect confirmation (compulsory)
T98 Hardware error
F95 Protect confirmation
T99 Software error
F96 User Control: ID counter report
F97 User Control: Counter report
General supply parameter input

H01
(print drum section)

H02
(ink viscosity (normal print pressure))

H03
(ink viscosity (print pressure for proof-print))

H04
(master)

H05
(master support (normal print pressure))

H06
(master support (print pressure for proof-print))
General supply (ink)

H08
expiration month entry
General supply (ink)

H09
expiration year entry
General supply (master)

H10
expiration month entry
General supply (master)

H11
expiration year entry
T01 Main motor lock
17 - 6
4. List According to Error Point
* PF: Power failure, power voltage error ES: Emergency stop, emergency shutdown
* The recovery operation will be initiated after the <START> key is pressed.
Type Point Description SF9 Display SF5 Display Error detection condition Error reset method
No response from the NeoROSA PCB.

!!System Error!! At startup, if the NeoROSA PCB connection
T98 2 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service signal has been detected but NeoROSA PCB Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service does not respond, T98-069 will be detected, to
RISO Inc. Technical Operations

be overridden by this error point.
!!System Error!!
T98 5 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service Hardware error Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
!!System Error!!
T98 6 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service FRAM checksum error Switch the power OFF, then ON.
• Protection mode is set
17 - 7
but the master has not Confidential action will be executed by any of
-- Protect -- The flag for being protected remains when the
been discarded (when the following:
F94 7 power is turned ON, at wake-up, or when the
the power is turned ON) • Press the [OK] button.
Discard Current Master print drum is inserted.
(at wake-up) (when the • Press the <START> key.
print drum is inserted)
Confidential action will be executed by any of

the following:
• Protection mode is • Press the [OK] button.
-- Protect --
set (at job completion) Job completed when [Protect] in [Admin.] is • Press the <START> key.
F95 8
(except when connected ON. The warning display can be cleared by any of
Discard Current Master
to vendor) the following:
• Press the [Cancel] button.
• Press the <STOP> key.
Rear Cover of
• Main unit rear cover is Main unit rear cover not set in position (rear
D13 9 Main Body is Off Call Service Rear cover SW: ON
out of the position. cover set switch is OFF)
Call Service
US.RISO.COM
When the power is turned ON, the remaining

battery is 2.1 V or lower (to be replaced).
* For control, when a value 1.6 V or lower is
set for RTC.
* Precautions on battery replacement:
Be sure to replace the battery when the
The error display can be cleared by any of the
machine power is ON. If the battery is replaced
following:
• The battery is running !!Low Battery!! Maintenance when the machine power is OFF, the following
E01 10 • Touch the [Close] button.
out. Call Service Call two problems will occur.
(1) The internal clock goes wrong.

• Press the <RESET> key.

⇒ Set the clock again.
(2) When the power is turned ON the first time
after the battery replacement, T25-026 No
battery error is indicated again.
⇒ Switch the power OFF, then ON, and
check that the error is no longer indicated.

The master making count exceeded the value
• Reached the following:
!!Maintenance!! Maintenance set in the test mode when the power is turned
E02 11 scheduled maintenance • Touch the [Close] button.
17 - 8
Call Service Call ON or when reset is executed. (Maintenance
time • Press the <STOP> key.
call)

• Reached the The printing count exceeded the value set in following:
!!Maintenance!! Maintenance
E02 12 scheduled maintenance the test mode when the power is turned ON or • Touch the [Close] button.
Call Service Call
time when reset is executed. (Maintenance call) • Press the <STOP> key.
!!System Error!!
• The data acquired from The date and time data acquired from RTC is
T91 13 Press Reset Key Call Service Press the <RESET> key.
RTC is not correct. not correct.
!!System Error!!
Sub microcomputer is detected to be
T99 14 • Software error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service Switch the power OFF, then ON.
physically damaged.
The warning display can be cleared by any of

• No master is detected
No Master on Print Drum Check • No master is detected on the print drum at the following:
F01 15 on the print drum at the
US.RISO.COM
Make a New Master Settings the start of printing. • Press the <STOP> key.
start of printing.

the following:
!! Multi-Up is Not Available
• Custom sized paper • Touch the [Close] button.
with This Paper Size !! Check Attempted uses of custom sized paper with
F03 16 is set for the multi-up • Press the <STOP> key.
Replace with Proper Paper Settings the multi-up function.
setting • Press the <RESET> key.
of Standard Size
(Set standard size paper that can be used with
the multi-up function to cancel the error.)
Printing will be executed by any of the

following:
• Touch the [Continue] button.

The paper size does not match the master • Press the <START> key.
• The master making making size (on the print drum) at the start of • Press the <PROOF> key.
size is larger than the Page Format is Larger printing. The warning display can be cleared by any of
F02 18 paper size (except for than Paper Size Paper size ˂ Master making size (on the print the following:
proof printing) (except !! Possible Ink Smudges on Prints !! drum) (Printing stops.)
for DtoP master making) (Not detected when Paper size ≧ Master • Touch the [Stop] button.
making size) • Press the <STOP> key.
(Released by setting paper with equal or larger
17 - 9
size than the master making size.)
• The number of print Enter Print The set number of print is smaller than the Enter the number of print that is larger than the
Enter Print Quantity Over nn,
F05 19 is smaller than the Quantity minimum print quantity when the <START> value specified as the minimum print quantity
Programed Minimum Value
minimum print quantity. Over nn key is pressed in the master making mode. using the numeric keys.
Printing will be executed by any of the

following:
The paper size does not match the master • Press the <PROOF> key.
making size (on the print drum) at the start of The warning display can be cleared by any of
• The master making Page Format is Larger
proof printing. the following:
size is larger than the than Paper Size
F10 21 Paper size ˂ Master making size (on the print (Printing stops.)
paper size (for proof !! Possible Ink Smudges on Prints !!
drum) • Touch the [Stop] button.
printing) (Continue->PROOF Key)
(Not detected when Paper size ≧ Master • Press the <STOP> key.
making size) • Press the <RESET> key.
(Released by setting paper with equal or larger
size than the master making size.)
US.RISO.COM

The maintenance counter in the print drum
• Reached the following:
!!Maintenance!! Maintenance exceeded the value set in the test mode
E02 22 scheduled maintenance • Touch the [Close] button.
Call Service Call when the power is turned ON or when reset is
time • Press the <STOP> key.
executed. (Maintenance call)
!!System Error!!
RF tag PCB failure (The initial communication
T98 25 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service Switch the power OFF, then ON.
with the RF tag PCB has failed.)
!!Low Battery!! The battery has run out. Press the <RESET> key (and replace the

T25 26 • Battery run out Call Service

Call Service * After resolving the error, set the clock again. battery).
(When inserted)
!!The Print Drum Type
the following:
has been Changed!!
• Select the print drum with the same size as
Select the Current Print Drum Type
• The size of the print that inserted, and press [OK].
The size of the print drum being set differ from
F17 27 drum inserted differ from • Select the print drum with a different size
(When selected) that of the last time.
that of the last time. from that inserted, and press [OK] three times.
"Invalid Print Drum
• Release the print drum (and replace it with
17 - 10
has been Selected
the one with the same size as that previously
Change Drum, or
used).
Reselect Drum Size
!!System Error!!
Test mode No. 103 (storing of machine
settings) has failed.
!!System Error!!
Test mode No. 105 (restoration of machine
T98 29 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Switch the power OFF, then ON.
settings) has failed.
!!System Error!!
Data cannot be rewritten to the EEPROM on
the machine (not accessible to the EEPROM).
!!System Error!!
CRC error of the EEPROM on the machine
(EEPROM data error).
US.RISO.COM
• Touch the [Size Setting] button and then

specify the reproduction size manually.
!! No Auto Reproduction
• The calculated auto The warning display can be cleared by any of
Size Selection with This The reproduction ratio has fallen out of
reproduction ratio is out the following:
F24 37 Combination of Original range at the start of operation with auto size
of range (processing not (Printing stops.)
and Printing Paper !! reproduction.
available). • Touch the [Stop] button.
Select Size Manually
!!System Error!!
T98 39 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service Incorrect EEPROM Switch the power OFF, then ON.

• The same password is

It is already
already used for another At user registration in the user control function,
registered
F38 43 user registration at the the entered password has already been Press the <RESET> key.
Please try
time of user password registered by another user.
another
registration.
Suspension of
use
• Attempted login by a A suspended user has logged in using the
17 - 11
F39 44 Please Contact Press the <RESET> key.
suspended user user control function.
the
administrator
• E-mail transmission Check Press the <RESET> key.

B40 47 E-mail transmission has been failed.
failed Settings

• An original has been !! Book Shadow Editor An original has been set on AF while in book the following:
Check
F37 50 set on AF while in the is Not Available with ADF !! mode at the start of master making operation. • Touch the [Close] button.
Settings
book mode. Place Original on Glass Platen An original was set on AF while in book mode. • Press the <STOP> key.
!!System Error!! Loading of the stored data of memory

T98 53 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service parameters (program, mode, user paper) has Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service failed.
!!System Error!! Writing to the stored data of memory

T98 54 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service parameters (program, mode, user paper) has Switch the power OFF, then ON.
US.RISO.COM
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service failed.
!!System Error!!
The test mode setting data stored in the
memory is out of the adjustment range.
!!System Error!! Communication between NeoROSA and

T99 64 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service mechanical control PCB: An undefined Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service command has been sent
Communication error between NeoROSA and

!!System Error!!
mechanical control PCB (01) on mechanical
control PCB side: Complete number of bytes

is not received
!!System Error!! Communication error between NeoROSA and

T99 67 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service mechanical control PCB (03) on mechanical Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service control PCB side: RNK received

If Recovery has Failed, Call Service control PCB side: NAK received three times

17 - 12
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service control PCB side: ACK not responded

!!System Error!!
control PCB side: Transmission prevented at
NeoROSA

!!System Error!!
control PCB side: Command sent while
awaiting response

!!System Error!!
mechanical control PCB (11) on NeoROSA
T99 75 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service
PCB side: Complete number of bytes is not Switch the power OFF, then ON.
received
US.RISO.COM

Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON mechanical control PCB (12) on NeoROSA
T99 76 • Hardware error Call Service Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service PCB side: ACK not specified in sequence
received

T99 77 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service mechanical control PCB (13) on NeoROSA Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service PCB side: RNK received


If Recovery has Failed, Call Service PCB side: NAK received three times

If Recovery has Failed, Call Service PCB side: ACK not responded

!!System Error!!
PCB side: Transmission prevented at
mechanical control PCB (CTS==1)
17 - 13
Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON mechanical control PCB (17) on NeoROSA
T99 81 • Hardware error Call Service Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service PCB side: Mechanical control download mode
sent by error

!!System Error!!
PCB side: Mechanical CTS state 1 lasted for
two seconds
!!System Error!! The test mode adjustment value stored in the

T98 97 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service print drum memory is out of the adjustment Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service range.
!!System Error!! The machine serial number information of the

T98 98 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service EEPROM on the machine does not match that Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service on FRAM.
US.RISO.COM
• FB does not operate

normally.
• Shading compensation
!!System Error!!
is not processed
T14 114 Press Reset Key Call Service Faulty machine parameters Press the <RESET> key.
normally.
• Offset/gain adjustment
is not performed
normally.

normally.

!!System Error!!
is not processed Scanner operation fails to complete within the
normally. specified period of time.
is not performed
normally.

normally.
17 - 14
!!System Error!! Awaiting black shading time-out (Black
is not processed
T14 116 Press Reset Key Call Service compensation fails to complete within the Press the <RESET> key.
normally.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service specified period of time.)
is not performed
normally.

normally.
!!System Error!! Awaiting white shading time-out (White
is not processed
T14 117 Press Reset Key Call Service compensation fails to complete within the Press the <RESET> key.
normally.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service specified period of time.)
is not performed
normally.
Faulty Image PCB (Image processing IC

!!System Error!!
memory check has failed.)
US.RISO.COM
(Image processing IC check is executed at
initialization.)

normally.
Awaiting offset adjustment time-out
!!System Error!! (When the pixel data of black level is to
is not processed
T14 123 Press Reset Key Call Service be loaded from the scanner GA for offset Press the <RESET> key.
normally.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service adjustment, the scanner GA does not respond
after a lapse of the specified period of time.)
is not performed
normally.

normally.

Awaiting gain adjustment time-out
!!System Error!! (When the pixel data of white level is to
is not processed
T14 124 Press Reset Key Call Service be loaded from the scanner GA for gain Press the <RESET> key.
normally.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service adjustment, the scanner GA does not respond
after a lapse of the specified period of time.)
is not performed
normally.

normally.
17 - 15
!!System Error!! Offset adjustment process fails to complete.
is not processed
T14 125 Press Reset Key Call Service (The process does not complete within the Press the <RESET> key.
normally.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service specifies number of times.)
is not performed
normally.

normally.
!!System Error!! Gain adjustment process fails to complete.
is not processed
T14 126 Press Reset Key Call Service (The process does not complete within the Press the <RESET> key.
normally.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service specifies number of times.)
is not performed
normally.
!!System Error!!
Scanner GA PCB failure (Scanner GA memory
check error has occurred.)
US.RISO.COM
AF command reception time-out error of RG

unit
• AF does not operate This error will be issued in the following
normally. !!System Error!! conditions:
T15 130 • AF is not connected. Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service A command sent from RG to AF that has not Switch the power OFF, then ON.
• Adjustment of AF If Recovery has Failed, Call Service been replied to within the specified period of
sensors has failed. time is resent, but still no reply is received
after a lapse of the specified period of time.
* Common with Duplex AF
• AF does not operate

normally. !!System Error!!

RG unit received an undefined command from
T15 131 • AF is not connected. Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service Switch the power OFF, then ON.
AF.
• Adjustment of AF If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
sensors has failed.

normally. !!System Error!! RG unit detected a communication sequence
T15 132 • AF is not connected. Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service error on the AF unit. Switch the power OFF, then ON.
• Adjustment of AF If Recovery has Failed, Call Service * Issued on the AF side
sensors has failed.
17 - 16
normally. !!System Error!! AF communication error on the RG unit (ACK,
T15 133 • AF is not connected. Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service NAK error has occurred.) Switch the power OFF, then ON.
• Adjustment of AF If Recovery has Failed, Call Service * Common with Duplex AF
sensors has failed.
RG unit failed to send data to AF within the

specified period of time.
• AF does not operate This error will be issued in the following
normally. !!System Error!! conditions:
T15 134 • AF is not connected. Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service A command sent from AF to RG that has not Switch the power OFF, then ON.
• Adjustment of AF If Recovery has Failed, Call Service been replied to within the specified period of
sensors has failed. time is resent, but still no reply is received
after a lapse of the specified period of time.
US.RISO.COM

normally.
!!System Error!!
is not processed
T14 135 Press Reset Key Call Service Device failure at offset adjustment Press the <RESET> key.
normally.
is not performed
normally.

normally.

!!System Error!!
is not processed
T14 136 Press Reset Key Call Service Device failure at gain adjustment Press the <RESET> key.
normally.
is not performed
normally.

normally.
17 - 17
!!System Error!!
is not processed
T14 137 Press Reset Key Call Service Device failure at black shading Press the <RESET> key.
normally.
is not performed
normally.

normally.
!!System Error!!
is not processed
T14 138 Press Reset Key Call Service Device failure at white shading Press the <RESET> key.
normally.
is not performed
normally.
US.RISO.COM
Scanning command or next original scanning

!!System Error!! start command is received from the machine
T99 150 • Software error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service during the occurrence of any of AF cover Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service open, no original, and AF jam.
* Error detection at AF side

normally. !!System Error!! AF setting value writing to the flash ROM
T15 151 • AF is not connected. Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service failed. Switch the power OFF, then ON.
• Adjustment of AF If Recovery has Failed, Call Service * Error detection at AF side
sensors has failed.


normally. !!System Error!! AF setting value reading from the flash ROM
T15 152 • AF is not connected. Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service failed. Switch the power OFF, then ON.
sensors has failed.

normally. !!System Error!! At the time of AF firmware download, AF is not
T15 153 • AF is not connected. Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service ready for downloading. Switch the power OFF, then ON.
17 - 18
sensors has failed.
At the time of AF firmware download, a

!!System Error!!
command outside the range of the regular
sequence has been received.

normally. !!System Error!! At the time of AF firmware download, flash
T15 155 • AF is not connected. Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service ROM erasing has been failed. Switch the power OFF, then ON.
sensors has failed.
At the time of AF firmware download,

!!System Error!! download data that is larger than the capacity
T99 156 • Software error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service of the program writing space has been Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service received.
US.RISO.COM

normally. !!System Error!! At the time of AF firmware download, writing of
T15 157 • AF is not connected. Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service program to flash ROM has been failed. Switch the power OFF, then ON.
sensors has failed.

At the time of AF firmware download, switching
to the area where program is to be executed
has been failed.
sensors has failed.

At the time of AF firmware download,
!!System Error!!
download data checksum error has been
detected.

AF not connected
17 - 19
sensors has failed.
Release the Press the <RESET> key.

Release the Scanner Carriage Lock Scanner
• Scanner carriage lock
Change the Tm7465 Setting to “0” Carriage Lock The machine is powered ON with the scanner (For complete solution)
D50 165 is not released at the
Cover the Carriage Lock with Change the Tm carriage lock not released. Release the scanner carriage lock,
time of unpacking.
Cover Sticker 7465 and then change the value in the test mode
Setting to “0” 7465 to “0”.

normally.
• Shading compensation The logical value of the sensor at the
!!System Error!!
is not processed destination differ from the theoretical value
normally. even after the reading PM operation ended
• Offset/gain adjustment due to the sensor stop mode.
is not performed
normally.
US.RISO.COM
• The information to be
set in the test mode is
not set. !!System Error!!
T96 171 • The relationship Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service TPH resistance not specified Enter parameters in the test mode.
between values set in If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
the test mode are not
correct.

T96 172 • The relationship Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service Scanner adjustment value not specified Enter parameters in the test mode.
correct.
Turn ON the AF paper feeder cover open/

• AF paper feeder cover Check AF paper feeder cover is open.
D23 177 Close the ADF Cover close sensor.
is open. Settings * Duplex AF only
(Close the AF paper feeder cover.)
!!System Error!!
17 - 20
T99 181 • Software error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Image processing time-out Switch the power OFF, then ON.
!!System Error!! AF received an undefined command from the

T99 185 • Software error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service machine during initializing operation. Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service * Error detection at AF side

T99 186 • Software error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service machine during scanning operation. Switch the power OFF, then ON.

T99 187 • Software error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service machine during downloading operation. Switch the power OFF, then ON.
AF received an undefined command from the

!!System Error!!
machine at a time other than during initializing,
scanning, or downloading operation.
US.RISO.COM
Simplex AF:
Turn OFF the AF original detection sensor,
AF original registration sensor, AF original IN
• AF original transport AF paper feed section jam sensor, and AF original ejection sensor, and
has failed (original pulled At original transport in AF, the running sensor press the [Confirm] button.
out, retained, or not Paper Jam is not turned ON after a lapse of the specified
Paper Jam
A10 189 transported, AF paper Remove Paper in Indicated Areas period of time since the Paper feed clutch has Duplex AF:
Remove Paper
feed cover open during and Press [OK] Button been turned ON. Turn OFF the AF original detection sensor, AF
original transportation, * Error detection at AF side end detection sensor, AF original registration
lack of paper interval) sensor, AF switchback sensor, and AF original

ejection sensor, and turn ON the AF paper
feed cover open/close sensor.
(Set the AF paper feed cover again to release.)
Simplex AF:
• AF original transport sensor, and AF original ejection sensor, and
AF original transport section jam 1
has failed (original pulled press the [Confirm] button.
At original transport in AF, the edge sensor is
out, retained, or not Paper Jam
Paper Jam
17 - 21
not turned ON after a lapse of the specified
A10 190 transported, AF paper Remove Paper in Indicated Areas Duplex AF:
Remove Paper period of time since the Registration clutch
feed cover open during and Press [OK] Button Turn OFF the AF original detection sensor, AF
has been turned ON.
original transportation, end detection sensor, AF original registration
US.RISO.COM
Simplex AF:
AF paper jam in switchback section
At original transport in AF, the running sensor
out, retained, or not
Paper Jam is not turned ON after a lapse of the specified
A10 191 transported, AF paper Duplex AF:
Remove Paper period of time since the switchback clutch has
feed cover open during Turn OFF the AF original detection sensor, AF
been turned ON.


Simplex AF:
At original transport in AF, the edge sensor is
Paper Jam
17 - 22
not turned OFF after a lapse of the specified
Remove Paper period of time since the running sensor has
been turned OFF.
US.RISO.COM
Simplex AF:
At original transport in AF, the jam sensor is
Paper Jam not turned ON after a lapse of the specified
Remove Paper period of time since the edge sensor has been
turned ON.

Simplex AF:
AF paper jam in paper ejection unit
At original transport in AF, the jam sensor is
Paper Jam
17 - 23
not turned OFF after a lapse of the specified
Remove Paper period of time since the edge sensor has been
turned OFF.
US.RISO.COM
Simplex AF:
• AF original transport AF scanning section jam (extra-long paper) sensor, and AF original ejection sensor, and
has failed (original pulled At original transport in AF, the edge sensor is press the [Confirm] button.
out, retained, or not Paper Jam not turned OFF after a lapse of the specified
Paper Jam
A10 196 transported, AF paper Remove Paper in Indicated Areas period of time since the edge sensor has been Duplex AF:
Remove Paper
feed cover open during and Press [OK] Button turned ON (due to original paper that is too Turn OFF the AF original detection sensor, AF
original transportation, long). end detection sensor, AF original registration
lack of paper interval) * Error detection at AF side sensor, AF switchback sensor, and AF original


Simplex AF:
AF paper remaining jam
Paper Jam Any of the running sensor, edge sensor, or jam
17 - 24
Remove Paper sensor is ON at the start of AF operation.

normally. !!System Error!! For the sleep command from the machine to
T15 199 • AF is not connected. Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service AF, AF has sent a notification that indicates Switch the power OFF, then ON.
• Adjustment of AF If Recovery has Failed, Call Service sleep preparation failure.
sensors has failed.
Master making unit upper cover set switch:

• The master for the No Master Master end check performed every 10 ms. OFF -> ON
Replace
C02 200 master roll has run out Replace Master Roll during master transfer detected master run out (To cancel the error: Master making unit upper
Master Roll
(or is running out). two consecutive times. cover open -> close)
US.RISO.COM
* For regular products only
Master Mis-Feed Master making unit upper cover set switch:

Master positioning sensor is not turned ON
• Master positioning is Pull Out Master Making Unit and Master Jam OFF -> ON, and
A01 201 at master setting/cutting or at master making
not correct. Rewind Master Roll, then Reset Master Reset Master Master positioning sensor: OFF
even after master has been transferred.
in Place (Reset the master to cancel the error.)
Master Mis-Feed Master positioning sensor is not turned OFF Master making unit upper cover set switch:
• Master positioning is Pull Out Master Making Unit and Master Jam at master setting operation or at the start OFF -> ON, and
A01 202
not correct. Rewind Master Roll, then Reset Master Reset Master of master making even if the master roll is Master positioning sensor: OFF
in Place rewound for the set period of time. (Reset the master to cancel the error.)
• Cutter does not

!!System Error!! When the cutter blade moves from the home

operate normally. Press the <RESET> key. -> Perform the
T13 203 Press Reset Key Call Service position, the Cutter HP switch is not turned
• Master was not cut recovery operation.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service OFF after a lapse of 100 ms. (Rotary)
properly.
• Cutter does not

!!System Error!! When the cutter blade moves, the Cutter HP
T13 204 Press Reset Key Call Service switch is not turned ON after a lapse of 300
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service ms. (Rotary)
properly.
• Cutter does not

!!System Error!! After the master has been cut, the master
17 - 25
T13 205 Press Reset Key Call Service positioning sensor is still ON even when the
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service print drum has rotated by the specified angle.
properly.
• TPH pressurization/
When the TPH pressure motor operates to
depressurization does !!System Error!!
reduce pressure (or during home positioning
T19 207 not operate properly. Press Reset Key Call Service Press the <RESET> key.
action), the TPH pressure sensor is not turned
(TPH pressure sensor If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
OFF after a lapse of two seconds.
remains unaltered.)
depressurization does !!System Error!! When the TPH pressure motor operates to
T19 208 not operate properly. Press Reset Key Call Service reduce pressure, the TPH pressure sensor is Press the <RESET> key.
(TPH pressure sensor If Recovery has Failed, Call Service not turned ON after a lapse of two seconds.
remains unaltered.)
US.RISO.COM

OFF -> ON, and
Remove The Cutter HP switch is OFF when the
System Error in Master Making Unit Master detection sensor: OFF
• Cutter positioning is Master machine has gone into standby, at the start of
A17 209 Take Out Master and then (Close the master making unit cover without
not correct. Close Unit master making operation, or when the master
Close Master Making-Unit Cover setting master to cancel the error.)
Cover is set.
-> Error canceling operation (The cutter
returns to the home position.)

Check OFF
D05 210 • Master is not set. Set Master in Place Master detection sensor is OFF.
Settings (Open the master making unit upper cover to

cancel the error.)

• Master positioning is Pull Out Master Making Unit and Master Jam Master positioning sensor is ON in standby OFF -> ON, and
A01 211
not correct. Rewind Master Roll, then Reset Master Reset Master mode. Master positioning sensor: OFF

• Master making unit Close Master Making Check Master making unit upper cover set switch is ON
D09 212
upper cover is open. Unit Cover Settings OFF. (Close the master making unit upper cover to
17 - 26
cancel the error.)

• Master positioning is Pull Out Master Making Unit and Master Jam The Master positioning sensor is ON at the OFF -> ON, and
A01 214
not correct. Rewind Master Roll, then Reset Master Reset Master start of master making operation. Master positioning sensor: OFF
Master Mis-Feed The logical value of the sensor at the Master making unit upper cover set switch:
• Master positioning is Pull Out Master Making Unit and Master Jam destination differ from the theoretical value OFF -> ON, and
A01 215
not correct. Rewind Master Roll, then Reset Master Reset Master even after the writing PM operation ended due Master positioning sensor: OFF
in Place to the sensor stop mode. (Reset the master to cancel the error.)
When the TPH pressure motor applies a force
to begin compression, the TPH pressure
sensor is not turned OFF after a lapse of two
seconds.
remains unaltered.)
US.RISO.COM
When the TPH pressure motor applies a force
to begin compression, the TPH pressure
sensor is not turned ON after a lapse of two
seconds.
remains unaltered.)
Master Not Set in Place Master making unit upper cover set switch:
• Master is not set Insert Lead Edge of Master into Master Check OFF -> ON, and
A34 218 Master reset command
properly. Entrance and Close Master Making Settings Master positioning sensor: OFF
Unit (Reset the master to cancel the error.)

• Cutter does not
!!System Error!! The Cutter HP switch and cutter stop position
T13 221 Press Reset Key Call Service switch are turned ON at the same time
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service (shuttle).
properly.
• Cutter does not

!!System Error!! When the cutter returns to the home position,
T13 222 Press Reset Key Call Service the Cutter HP switch is not turned ON after a
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service lapse of 450 ms.
properly.
• Master making unit set switch: ON -> OFF,
17 - 27
and
Master making unit lock sensor: ON -> OFF
or
• Notification that the Master Making Unit Master Making
Master making unit pull out possible (Solenoid • Front door set switch: ON
D19 223 Master making unit can has been Unlocked Unit has been
ON) or
be pulled out. Unlocked
• Print drum release button: ON
(Pull out the Master making unit or
close the front door/press the print drum
release button.)
• Master making unit is

not set.
Master making unit set switch: ON, and
Set Master Making Unit Check Master making unit has been pulled out. (Set Master making unit lock sensor: ON
D08 224 not set properly.
in Place Settings switch and lock sensor are OFF.) (Set the Master making unit to the machine to
• Master making unit
cancel the error.)
has not been pulled out
properly.
US.RISO.COM
When the power is turned ON (only in case

• TPH code does not !!System Error!! the Master making unit has been inserted) or
T94 225 match the machine Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service when the Master making unit is inserted, the Switch the power OFF, then ON.
model code. If Recovery has Failed, Call Service TPH code does not match the machine model
code.

not set.
Master making unit set switch: ON, and
Set Master Making Unit Check After the Master making unit has been set, the Master making unit lock sensor: ON
in Place Settings Master making unit set switch is OFF. (Set the Master making unit to the machine to

cancel the error.)

properly.

not set.
After the Master making unit has been set, the Master making unit set switch: ON, and
Set Master Making Unit Check Master making unit lock sensor is OFF. (Time- Master making unit lock sensor: ON
in Place Settings out duration until the Master making unit is (Set the Master making unit to the machine to
inserted: five seconds) cancel the error.)
properly.
17 - 28
not set.
After the Master making unit has been pulled Master making unit set switch: ON, and
Set Master Making Unit Check out (and the Master making unit set switch has Master making unit lock sensor: ON
in Place Settings been turned OFF), the Master making unit lock (Set the Master making unit to the machine to
sensor is ON. cancel the error.)
properly.
• Cutter does not When the cutter blade moves from the home
!!System Error!!
operate normally. position to cut the master, the Cutter HP Press the <RESET> key. -> Perform the
T13 231 Press Reset Key Call Service
• Master was not cut switch is not turned OFF after a lapse of 500 recovery operation.
properly. ms. (Shuttle)
• Cutter does not

!!System Error!! When the operation to cut the master is
T13 232 Press Reset Key Call Service performed, the Cutter stop position switch is
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service not turned ON after a lapse of 2 ms. (Shuttle)
properly.
US.RISO.COM
• Cutter does not When the cutter returns to the home position
!!System Error!!
operate normally. from the cutter stop position, the Cutter stop Press the <RESET> key. -> Perform the
• Master was not cut position switch is not turned OFF after a lapse recovery operation.
properly. of 500 ms. (Shuttle)
• Cutter does not

!!System Error!! When the cutter takes the home positioning
T13 234 Press Reset Key Call Service action, the Cutter HP switch is not turned ON
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service after a lapse of two seconds. (Shuttle)
properly.
Wrong-type Master

Installed Master making unit set switch: ON -> OFF,
• Master tag information
or Cannot Read and
is not correct. Check
D17 236 Master Info The master type is not compatible. Master making unit lock sensor: ON -> OFF
• Communication with Settings
Replace Master Roll (Pull out the Master making unit to cancel the
the master tag failed.
or Contact dealer/Riso error.)
Office
Wrong-type Master
or Cannot Read and
17 - 29
D17 237 Master Info Master error due to missing ink cartridge tag Master making unit lock sensor: ON -> OFF
Office
Wrong-type Master
or Cannot Read Master tag communication error (The and
D17 238 Master Info communication with the tag has failed due to Master making unit lock sensor: ON -> OFF
Replace Master Roll the noise.) (Pull out the Master making unit to cancel the
Office
Wrong-type Master
or Cannot Read Master tag information is not correct. and
D17 239 Master Info Checksum error, verification error, recorded Master making unit lock sensor: ON -> OFF
Replace Master Roll ink information, etc. (Pull out the Master making unit to cancel the
US.RISO.COM
Office

• The master for the No Master OFF -> ON
Replace The master tag volume information has
C02 240 master roll has run out Replace Master Roll (To cancel the error: Master making unit upper
Master Roll reached the maximum value.
(or is running out). cover open -> close)
Wrong-type Master
or Cannot Read and
is not correct. Check The serial numbers does not match at a
D17 241 Master Info Master making unit lock sensor: ON -> OFF
• Communication with Settings regular master tag serial number check.


Office
Master-making Master-making
Parameter entry is required due to the
• The master tag Density Setting Density Setting
unreliability of the master tag information of Enter parameters and press the <START>
H04 242 information is not
sensitivity, normal print pressure, and FP key.
reliable. (Light) (Light)
normal print pressure.
(Dark) (Dark)
Print Density
17 - 30
Fine
• The master tag Parameter entry is required due to the
Adjustment Enter parameters and press the <START>
H05 243 information of support is unreliability of the master tag information of
key.
not reliable. normal print pressure.
(Light)
(Dark)
First Print
Density
• The master tag Parameter entry is required due to the
H06 244 information of FP unreliability of the master tag information of FP
key.
support is not reliable. print pressure.
(Light)
(Dark)
!!System Error!! Master transfer operation time-out error on

T98 245 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service writing PM at the master making action (except Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service for sensor based actions)
!!System Error!! Master transfer operation time-out error on

T98 246 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service loading PM at the master making action Switch the power OFF, then ON.
US.RISO.COM
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service (except for sensor based actions)
No-master error has occurred five times on the

same master. (When the standard detection
method is selected in the test mode NO. 557
(master replacement indication detection Master making unit upper cover set switch:
• The master for the No Master method selection).) OFF -> ON
Replace
C02 253 master roll has run out Replace Master Roll Otherwise, the master usage amount is larger (To cancel the error: Master making unit upper
Master Roll
(or is running out). than the predetermined value at the time no- cover open -> close)
master error occurs. (When the new detection * For regular products only
method is selected in the test mode NO. 557
(master replacement indication detection

method selection).)
Wrong-type Master
• Master tag information Master tag-related software error
or Cannot Read and
is not correct. Check Antenna channel selection error occurred or
D17 256 Master Info Master making unit lock sensor: ON -> OFF
• Communication with Settings an attempted writing to the write protected
the master tag failed. area failed.
Office
Master Mis-Feed The Master end sensor is turned OFF after the Master making unit upper cover set switch:
17 - 31
• Master positioning is Pull Out Master Making Unit and Master Jam master end seal has been detected, and the OFF -> ON, and
A01 258
not correct. Rewind Master Roll, then Reset Master Reset Master Master end sensor responses again while the Master positioning sensor: OFF
in Place master end is being confirmed. (Reset the master to cancel the error.)
Enter two digits

General supply (master) At the occurrence of H04 error, enter the Enter the expiration month and press the
H10 263 of
expiration period setting expiration month of general supply (master). <START> key.
month
General supply (master) Enter last two At the occurrence of H04 error, enter the Enter the expiration year and press the
H11 264
expiration period setting digits of year expiration year of general supply (master). <START> key.
The year and month when the year and month

MASTER
MASTER recorded on the master tag is added to the
• The master has Near expiration • Touch the [Close] button.
F56 265 Near expiration date of production recorded on the master tag
expired. Use or replace • Press the <RESET> key.
Use or replace soon is earlier than the year and month stored on
soon
the machine.
US.RISO.COM
Expired Expired The year and month when the year and month
• Master making unit set switch: OFF,
• The master has Master Master recorded on the master tag is added to the
C12 266 (Open the Master making unit to cancel the
expired. Replace Replace date of production recorded on the master tag
error.)
Master Roll Master Roll have passed the expiration period.

INK&MASTER
INK & MASTER recorded on the ink tag and master tag are
• The ink and master Near expiration • Touch the [Close] button.
F57 267 Near expiration added to the date of production recorded on
have expired. Use or replace • Press the <RESET> key.
Use or replace soon the ink tag and master tag are earlier than the

soon
year and month stored on the machine.

following:

• Print drum interlock switch: OFF, and
Expired Expired recorded on the ink tag and master tag are
• The ink and master Print drum connection signal: OFF
C13 268 Ink & Master Ink & Master added to the date of production recorded on
have expired. (Pull out the print drum to cancel the error.)
Replace them Replace them the master tag have passed the expiration
period set in the test mode.
• Master making unit interlock switch: OFF
17 - 32
(Open the master making unit to cancel the
error.)
• Master compression
motor does not operate Master compression motor lock detected.
!!System Error!!
properly. The RMGA compression detection has been Press the <RESET> key. -> Perform the
• Master removal turned ON during the lifting action of the recovery operation.
motor does not operate compression plate.
properly.
motor does not operate The compression FG width has got larger
!!System Error!!
properly. than the specified value at the preparation Press the <RESET> key. -> Perform the
• Master removal operation before the Master compression plate recovery operation.
motor does not operate home positioning action.
properly.
US.RISO.COM
Print drum connection signal: ON -> OFF, and

Master Disposal Error Print drum set switch: ON -> OFF
• Master removal has
Pull Out Print Drum Master Jam Print drum check when a master removal error Pull out the print drum to cancel the error.
A04 303 failed (when the master
and Discard Master Remove Master or master disposal jam occurs * If this error occurs, print drum lock is
is on the print drum).
automatically released.
(Only when the print drum is at position-B.)

Master Jammed in Master disposal box set switch: OFF, and
failed.
Disposal Unit Pull Out Master removal sensor: OFF
• Master removal has Master Jam Master disposal box check when a master
A05 304 Master Disposal Box (The error is canceled if the disposed master
failed (when the master Remove Master removal error or master disposal jam occurs

and Remove has been removed when the Master disposal
is at the master removal
Jammed Master box is pulled out.)
section).
motor does not operate After the Master compression motor has been
!!System Error!!
properly. turned ON toward the return direction, the Press the <RESET> key. -> Perform the
• Master removal Master compression HP sensor is not turned recovery operation.
motor does not operate ON after a lapse of 7.5 seconds.
properly.
17 - 33
motor does not operate After the Master compression motor has been
!!System Error!!
properly. turned ON toward the compression direction, Press the <RESET> key. -> Perform the
• Master removal the Master compression HP sensor is not recovery operation.
motor does not operate turned OFF after a lapse of 2 seconds.
properly.
(1) After the Master compression motor has

been turned ON toward the compression
direction, the compression detector is not
motor does not operate
!!System Error!! turned ON after a lapse of 7.5 seconds.
properly. Press the <RESET> key. -> Perform the
T12 307 Press Reset Key Call Service (2) After the Master compression motor has
• Master removal recovery operation.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service been turned ON toward the compression
motor does not operate
direction, the Master compression FG sensor
properly.
pulse count does not count 20 pulse after a
lapse of 800 ms.
US.RISO.COM
After the Master compression motor is

Master Disposal Box is
turned ON toward the compression direction, Turn OFF the Master disposal box set sensor,
• Master disposal box is Full Empty
C03 308 compression detector is turned ON before the and turn ON the set sensor after a lapse of
full. Empty Disposal Box
FG sensor pulse count exceeds the specified five seconds or longer.
Master Disposal Box
amount.
motor does not operate Master compression motor lock detected
!!System Error!!
properly. The Master compression motor FG sensor has Press the <RESET> key. -> Perform the
• Master removal been detected unaltered 50 consecutive times recovery operation.


motor does not operate (by 10 ms. interval polling).
properly.
Master disposal box set switch: ON, and

• Master disposal box is Set Master Disposal Check Master disposal box set sensor: ON
D07 310 Master disposal box set switch is OFF.
not set. Box in Place Settings (Set the Master disposal box to cancel the
error.)
Master Disposal Box is

Turn OFF the Master disposal box set sensor,
• Master disposal box is Full Empty The master disposal software counter has
C03 311 and turn ON the set sensor after a lapse of
17 - 34
full. Empty Disposal Box reached the specified value.
five seconds or longer.
Master Disposal Box

failed.
• Master removal has Master Jam The Master disposal jam sensor is ON at the
failed (when the master Remove Master start of the master making operation.
section).

failed.
• Master removal has Master Jam The Master disposal jam sensor is ON at the
failed (when the master Remove Master end of the recovery operation.
section).
US.RISO.COM
• Master compression Master disposal motor lock detected

motor does not operate The Master disposal motor FG sensor pulse
!!System Error!!
properly. count for the specified speed has been Press the <RESET> key. -> Perform the
• Master removal reduced to half. recovery operation.
motor does not operate Not detected for 200 ms. after the motor is
properly. activated.
• The Paper feed tray is

not in proper position. !!System Error!! Elevator upper limit position detection and
T02 400 • Paper feed tray Press Reset Key Call Service Elevator lower limit position detection is ON at Press the <RESET> key.
elevator motor is If Recovery has Failed, Call Service the same time.

overloaded.

Elevator motor overload detected
not in proper position. !!System Error!!
The overcurrent port (1.0A) of the Elevator
T02 401 • Paper feed tray Press Reset Key Call Service Press the <RESET> key.
motor has been ON five consecutive times (by
elevator motor is If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
10 ms. interval polling).
overloaded.
(When Multi-tray paper feed is not set)
17 - 35
• Paper is not set in the
Add Paper
paper feed tray (except Check
C04 402 Paper detection sensor is OFF. Paper detection sensor: ON
when auto tray is Settings
(When Multi-tray paper feed is set)
selected).
Load Paper in Standard Feed Tray
• Paper feed tray is at Set SW on Standard Feed Tray Paper feed tray set switch is OFF. • Paper feed tray upper limit set switch: ON
Check
A06 403 the upper limit position is Activated * Not detected while in the low power mode or
Settings
or lower limit position. Reset paper on Standard Feed Tray (24V OFF). • Paper feed tray lower limit set switch: ON
• The Paper feed tray is After the Elevator motor has been turned ON
not in proper position. !!System Error!! from the paper feed lower limit position to the
T02 404 • Paper feed tray Press Reset Key Call Service upward direction, the paper feed lower limit Press the <RESET> key.
elevator motor is If Recovery has Failed, Call Service position sensor is not turned OFF after a lapse
overloaded. of two seconds.
US.RISO.COM

After the Elevator motor has been turned ON
to the upward direction, the paper feed upper
limit position sensor is not turned ON after a
lapse of 12 seconds.
overloaded.
• The Paper feed tray is After the Elevator motor has been turned ON
not in proper position. !!System Error!! from the paper feed upper limit position to the
T02 406 • Paper feed tray Press Reset Key Call Service downward direction, the paper feed upper limit Press the <RESET> key.

elevator motor is If Recovery has Failed, Call Service position sensor is not turned OFF after a lapse
overloaded. of two seconds.

After the Elevator motor has been turned ON
to the downward direction, the paper feed
lower limit position sensor is not turned ON
after a lapse of 12 seconds.
overloaded.
17 - 36
not in proper position. !!System Error!! The upper limit sensor has been OFF for two
T02 408 • Paper feed tray Press Reset Key Call Service seconds or longer while the elevator servo is Press the <RESET> key.
elevator motor is If Recovery has Failed, Call Service in action.
overloaded.
Paper ejection sensor is OFF at the time when

• Paper feed has failed Paper Jam Turn OFF the Paper sensor,
Paper Jam the paper reaches the Paper ejection sensor,
A07 409 (or no paper has been Remove Paper in Indicated Areas and press the <RESET> key or [Confirm]
Remove Paper and the Paper sensor is ON at the time it
fed). and Press [OK] Button button.
stops. (Paper feed error)
• Paper ejection has Print drum connection signal: ON -> OFF, and
failed. (Paper ejection Paper ejection sensor is OFF at the time when Print drum set switch: ON -> OFF
Paper Jam
sensor is OFF at the Paper Jam the paper reaches the Paper ejection sensor, Pull out the print drum to cancel the error.
A08 410 Remove Paper in Indicated Areas
time when it must be Remove Paper and the Paper sensor is OFF at the time it * If this error occurs, print drum lock is
and Press [OK] Button
ON.) (Paper is stuck on stops. (Paper jam on print drum) automatically released.
US.RISO.COM
the print drum.) (Only when the print drum is at position-B.)
• Paper ejection has

Paper Jam Paper ejection sensor is ON at the time when Turn OFF the Paper ejection sensor,
failed. (Paper ejection Paper Jam
A09 411 Remove Paper in Indicated Areas the paper gets out of the Paper ejection and press the <RESET> key or [Confirm]
sensor is ON at the time Remove Paper
and Press [OK] Button sensor. button.
when it must be OFF.)
• Paper feed has failed Paper Jam Paper sensor has been OFF N times Turn OFF the Paper sensor,
Paper Jam
A07 412 (or no paper has been Remove Paper in Indicated Areas consecutively at the time of first paper feed and press the <RESET> key or [Confirm]
Remove Paper
fed). and Press [OK] Button jam detection. (No-paper feed error) button.
• Paper feed has failed Paper Jam Paper sensor is ON at the time when the Turn OFF the Paper sensor,
Paper Jam
A07 413 (or no paper has been Remove Paper in Indicated Areas paper gets out of the Paper sensor. and press the <RESET> key or [Confirm]
Remove Paper

fed). and Press [OK] Button (Possible extra-long paper error.) button.
• Paper ejection wing

Paper ejection motor overload detected
does not operate !!System Error!!
The overcurrent port (2A) of the Elevator
T20 416 properly. Press Reset Key Call Service Press the <RESET> key.
motor has been ON 12 consecutive times (by
• Paper ejection motor is If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
10 ms. interval polling).
overloaded.

Paper Jam Turn OFF the Paper ejection sensor,
failed. (Paper ejection Paper Jam The Paper ejection sensor is ON at the start of
A09 417 Remove Paper in Indicated Areas and press the <RESET> key or [Confirm]
sensor is ON at the time Remove Paper the operation (note 1).
17 - 37
and Press [OK] Button button.
Paper Jam The Paper sensor is ON at the start of the
Remove Paper operation (note 1).
The DA setting for adjustment of the send part

!!System Error!!
has reached the upper limit value when the
test mode No. 705 (Paper sensor automatic
adjustment) is performed.
The DA setting for adjustment of the send part

!!System Error!!
has reached the lower limit value when the
test mode No. 705 (Paper sensor automatic
adjustment) is performed.
US.RISO.COM
Paper Jam
A07 429 (or no paper has been Remove Paper in Indicated Areas Paper feed error (for recovery) and press the <RESET> key or [Confirm]
Remove Paper
• Paper ejection has Print drum connection signal: ON -> OFF, and
failed. (Paper ejection Print drum set switch: ON -> OFF
Paper Jam
sensor is OFF at the Paper Jam Pull out the print drum to cancel the error.
A08 430 Remove Paper in Indicated Areas Paper jam on print drum (for recovery)
time when it must be Remove Paper * If this error occurs, print drum lock is
and Press [OK] Button
ON.) (Paper is stuck on automatically released.
the print drum.) (Only when the print drum is at position-B.)


Paper Jam Turn OFF the Paper ejection sensor,
failed. (Paper ejection Paper Jam
A09 431 Remove Paper in Indicated Areas Paper ejection error (for recovery) and press the <RESET> key or [Confirm]
sensor is ON at the time Remove Paper
and Press [OK] Button button.
Paper Jam The Paper sensor has already been ON when
Remove Paper the paper feed is retried due to no paper feed.
17 - 38
not set. !!System Error!! Paper width potentiometer is not specified or
T96 433 • The relationship Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service relationship between setting values are not Enter parameters in the test mode.
between values set in If Recovery has Failed, Call Service correct.
correct.

not in proper position. !!System Error!! Printing is attempted when the Elevator upper
T02 434 • Paper feed tray Press Reset Key Call Service limit sensor is OFF in the special paper feed Press the <RESET> key.
elevator motor is If Recovery has Failed, Call Service mode.
overloaded.
US.RISO.COM
(1) At the first start of master making/printing/

Operation (master making/printing/proof
proof printing operation after the power is
The Paper Feed Setting printing) is restarted by any of the following:
turned ON (or after wake-up), the Paper feed
Lever is set to "CARD". • Press the [Continue] button.
pressure adjustment lever has been set to
• Paper feed pressure Check if the setting is Check the Paper • Press the <START> key.
“CARD”.
F28 435 adjustment lever is set consistent with paper feed
(2) When the Paper feed tray starts master
to “CARD”. in the Standard Setting Operation (master making/printing/proof
making/printing/proof printing operation from
Feed Tray. printing) is stopped by any of the following:
other than the upper limit position, the Paper
• Press the [Stop] button.
feed pressure adjustment lever has been set
to “CARD”.

Paper ejection motor lock detected
The Paper ejection motor FG sensor pulse
count for the specified speed is reduced to
T20 437 properly. Press Reset Key Call Service Press the <RESET> key.
half.
Not detected for 200 ms. after the motor has
overloaded.
been activated.

The logical value of the sensor at the
destination differ from the theoretical value
T20 442 properly. Press Reset Key Press the <RESET> key.
17 - 39
even after the Paper ejection wing PM
operation ended due to the sensor stop mode.
overloaded.
The Paper ejection wing PM operation is not

completed after a lapse of the specified period
of time in the counter stop mode.
T20 456 properly. Press Reset Key Press the <RESET> key.
Otherwise, the operation is not completed
after a lapse of the specified period of time in
overloaded.
the sensor stop mode.
• The clamp is not in

proper position.
• The clamp is not in !!System Error!! The Clamp sensor is OFF at the end of
T03 500 proper position when Press Reset Key Call Service the Clamp unit initialize action and home Press the <RESET> key. -> Process PF/ES.
the print drum is in If Recovery has Failed, Call Service positioning action.
operation (except at
master removal).
US.RISO.COM

proper position.
• The clamp is not in !!System Error!! Clamp sensor B is not altered within one
T03 501 proper position when Press Reset Key Call Service second when the clamp MOT rotates in the Press the <RESET> key. -> Process PF/ES.
the print drum is in If Recovery has Failed, Call Service normal direction.
master removal).

proper position.
• The clamp is not in !!System Error!! Clamp sensor B is not altered within one

T03 502 proper position when Press Reset Key Call Service second when the clamp MOT rotates in the Press the <RESET> key. -> Process PF/ES.
the print drum is in If Recovery has Failed, Call Service reverse direction.
master removal).

proper position.
• The clamp is not in !!System Error!!
The Clamp sensor A is not turned ON within
T03 503 proper position when Press Reset Key Call Service Press the <RESET> key. -> Process PF/ES.
three seconds at the Clamp initializing action.
the print drum is in If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
17 - 40
master removal).

proper position.
Clamp sensor A and B have different logic at
the start of the Clamp releasing action.
master removal).

proper position.
• The clamp is not in !!System Error!! Clamp sensor A and B have different logic at
T03 505 proper position when Press Reset Key Call Service the start of print drum position-A compensation Press the <RESET> key. -> Process PF/ES.
the print drum is in If Recovery has Failed, Call Service operation.
US.RISO.COM
master removal).

proper position.
Clamp sensor A and B have different logic at
the start of clamp home positioning action.
master removal).

proper position.

Clamp sensor A is ON at the end of clamp
releasing action.
master removal).

proper position.
Clamp sensor A is ON at the completion of the
print drum position-A compensation operation.
17 - 41
master removal).

Print drum set switch: ON -> OFF
Master Loading Error The Master loading sensor has been OFF
(Pull out the print drum to cancel the error.)
• Master loading has Pull Out Print Drum Master Jam when the master detection check at the
A02 509 -> Perform the recovery operation.
failed. and Discard Master Remove Master specified angle is performed during master
* If this error occurs, print drum lock is
loading operation.
• Ink bottle set switch: ON -> OFF

or
• Print drum set switch: OFF,
• Ink in the ink cartridge Ink sensor is not turned ON even after inking
No Ink Replace Print drum connection signal: OFF, and
C01 512 has run out (or is operation has been performed for the specified
Replace Ink Cartridge Ink Cartridge Print drum lock sensor: OFF
running out). period of time. (No ink)
(Set an ink cartridge or pull out the print drum
US.RISO.COM
to cancel the error.)
• Ink overflow has !!System Error!! The overflow sensor has detected it ON
Press the <RESET> key and
T04 513 occurred in the print Press Reset Key Call Service specified number of consecutive times by 10
Turn OFF the overflow sensor.
drum. If Recovery has Failed, Call Service ms. interval check.
• The print drum is not in

proper position.
• The print drum is not
Main motor lock detected
locked when the print
!!System Error!! The Main motor FG sensor pulse count for the
drum is in operation.
T01 520 Press Reset Key Call Service specified speed is reduced to half. Press the <RESET> key. -> Process PF/ES.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service Not detected for 200 ms. after the motor has
proper position when

been activated.
the print drum is in
master removal).

proper position.
!!System Error!! Clamp sensor B is not altered after the pulse
T01 521 Press Reset Key Call Service has exceeded 3033 while the Main motor is Press the <RESET> key. -> Process PF/ES.
17 - 42
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service ON.
master removal).
• Print drum connection signal: ON -> OFF,

and
or
• Notification that the Print Drum has
Print Drum has been Print drum release possible. (Print drum lock • Front door set switch: ON
D18 522 print drum can be pulled been
Unlocked solenoid is ON.) or
out. Unlocked
• Master making unit release button: ON
(Pull out the print drum or
close the front door/press the Master making
unit release button.)
US.RISO.COM

proper position.
The clamp is not on the home position when
drum is in operation. !!System Error!!
T01 524 Call Service the print drum is in operation (except at master Press the <RESET> key. -> Process PF/ES.
• The clamp is not in Press Reset Key
removal).
proper position when If Recovery has Failed, Call Service
master removal).

Master Remains on Print Drum
• The master remains on Master Remains Pull out the print drum to cancel the error.
A16 525 Pull Out Print Drum and Awaiting removal of master from print drum.
the print drum. Remove Master * If this error occurs, print drum lock is
Remove Master
• Print drum is not set.

Print drum set switch: ON,
• Print drum is not set The print drum has been removed. (Print drum
Check Print drum connection signal: ON, and
D01 526 properly. Set Print Drum in Place connection signal, Print drum set switch, and
17 - 43
Settings Print drum lock sensor: ON
• Print drum has not Print drum lock sensor are OFF.)
(Set the print drum to cancel the error.)
been pulled out properly.

• Print drum is not set
Check Print drum connection signal is OFF after the Print drum connection signal: ON, and
D01 527 properly. Set Print Drum in Place
Settings print drum has been set. Print drum lock sensor: ON
• Print drum has not

Check Print drum set switch is OFF after the print Print drum connection signal: ON, and
Settings drum has been set. Print drum lock sensor: ON

• Print drum is not set Print drum lock sensor is OFF after the print
Check Print drum connection signal: ON, and
D01 529 properly. Set Print Drum in Place drum has been set. (Time-out duration until the
Settings Print drum lock sensor: ON
US.RISO.COM
• Print drum has not Master making unit is inserted: five seconds)

When the print drum is pulled out, print drum Print drum set switch: ON,
Check connection signal is not turned OFF after a Print drum connection signal: ON, and
Settings lapse of five seconds since the Print drum set Print drum lock sensor: ON
switch has been turned OFF. (Set the print drum to cancel the error.)
Print Drum
• Print drum EEPROM
Not Set in Place Print drum lock sensor is ON when the Print
reading/writing has Print drum set switch: OFF,
Press Drum Release Check drum lock solenoid is ON. (Checked 100 ms.
D22 531 failed. Print drum connection signal: OFF, and
Button and Settings after the Print drum lock solenoid is turned
• Print drum EEPROM Print drum lock sensor: OFF
Pull Out Print Drum ON.)

data is not correct.

after the Button Lights
• The print drum code

does not match the
Wrong-Type Print
machine model code. Replace it with a correct type of print drum.
Drum Installed Check Incompatible print drum (print drum code not
D02 532 • The type of the print (So that the print drum code matches the
Replace with Settings correct).
drum does not match machine model code.)
Correct Type
that of the machine
model.
17 - 44
Check
D03 533 • Ink cartridge is not set. Install Ink Cartridge Ink bottle set switch is OFF. Ink bottle set switch: ON
Settings
Wrong-type Ink
• The ink cartridge
Cartridge Installed
tag information is not
or Cannot Read Ink
correct. Check
D04 534 Info Ink cartridge is incompatible. Replace it with the correct type of ink cartridge.
Replace Ink Cartridge
the ink cartridge tag
or Contact dealer/Riso
failed.
Office
• The front cover is Check

D11 535 Close Front Door Front door set sensor is OFF. Front door set sensor: ON
open. Settings
US.RISO.COM

proper position.
!!System Error!!
T01 537 Press Reset Key Call Service Position-B stop operation failed. Press the <RESET> key. -> Process PF/ES.
master removal).

proper position.
!!System Error!!
drum is in operation. The print drum is not locked when the print
T01 538 Press Reset Key Call Service Press the <RESET> key. -> Process PF/ES.
• The clamp is not in drum is in operation.
17 - 45
master removal).
Ink motor lock detected

!!System Error!!
• The ink motor does not Then Ink motor FG sensor is not altered after
operate properly. a lapse of 200 ms. since the inking motor has
been turned ON.
Print Drum
Not Set in Place
reading/writing has Data cannot be rewritten to the EEPROM Print drum set switch: OFF,
Press Drum Release Check
D22 540 failed. in the print drum (not accessible to the Print drum connection signal: OFF, and
Button and Settings
• Print drum EEPROM EEPROM). Print drum lock sensor: OFF
Pull Out Print Drum
US.RISO.COM
Print Drum
Not Set in Place
reading/writing has Print drum set switch: OFF,
Press Drum Release Check CRC error of the EEPROM in the print drum
D22 542 failed. Print drum connection signal: OFF, and
Button and Settings (EEPROM data error).
• Print drum EEPROM Print drum lock sensor: OFF
Pull Out Print Drum

proper position.
• The clamp is not in !!System Error!! The clamp is not on the home position when
T03 545 proper position when Press Reset Key Call Service the print drum is in operation (attributed to the Press the <RESET> key. -> Process PF/ES.

the print drum is in If Recovery has Failed, Call Service Clamp motor).
master removal).
The year and month when the year and

INK
INK month recorded on the ink tag is added to the
Near expiration • Touch the [Close] button.
F51 548 • The ink has expired. Near expiration date of production recorded on the ink tag is
Use or replace • Press the <RESET> key.
Use or replace soon earlier than the year and month stored on the
soon
machine.
17 - 46
Wrong-type Ink
Cartridge Installed
or Cannot Read Ink
correct. Check
D04 560 Info Error due to missing ink cartridge tag. Replace it with the correct type of ink cartridge.
failed.
Office
Wrong-type Ink
Cartridge Installed
or Cannot Read Ink Ink tag communication error (The
correct. Check
D04 561 Info communication with the tag has failed due to Replace it with the correct type of ink cartridge.
Replace Ink Cartridge the noise.)
failed.
Office
US.RISO.COM
Wrong-type Ink
Cartridge Installed
or Cannot Read Ink The ink tag information is not correct.
correct. Check
D04 562 Info Checksum error, verification error, recorded Replace it with the correct type of ink cartridge.
Replace Ink Cartridge master information, etc.
failed.
Office

or

• Ink in the ink cartridge
No Ink Replace The ink tag volume information has reached Print drum connection signal: OFF, and
C01 563 has run out (or is
Replace Ink Cartridge Ink Cartridge the maximum value. Print drum lock sensor: OFF
running out).
Wrong-type Ink
Cartridge Installed
or Cannot Read Ink
correct. Check The serial numbers did not match at a regular
D04 564 Info Replace it with the correct type of ink cartridge.
17 - 47
• Communication with Settings ink tag serial number check.
failed.
Office
Ink Color Setting Ink Color Setting Parameter entry is required due to the
unreliability of the ink tag color information, Enter parameters and press the <START>
H01 566 tag information is not
Black Black normal state viscosity information, and proof- key.
reliable.
Color Color print viscosity information.
Print Density
• The ink cartridge tag Fine
Parameter entry is required due to the
information of normal Adjustment Enter parameters and press the <START>
H02 567 unreliability of the ink tag information of normal
state viscosity is not key.
state viscosity.
reliable. (Light)
(Dark)
US.RISO.COM
First Print
Density
• The ink cartridge tag Parameter entry is required due to the
H03 568 information of proof-print unreliability of the ink tag information of proof-
key.
viscosity is not reliable. print viscosity.
(Light)
(Dark)
Print drum color or ink category is not
T96 569 • The relationship Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service Enter parameters in the test mode.

specified.
correct.
• Access to the print

drum EEPROM has !!System Error!! Access to the print drum EEPROM is
T92 570 been attempted at Press Reset Key Call Service attempted when the print drum lock is Press the <RESET> key.
a time when it is not If Recovery has Failed, Call Service released.
possible.
17 - 48
or
• Ink in the ink cartridge
No Ink Replace No-ink error has occurred five times on the Print drum connection signal: OFF, and
C01 574 has run out (or is
Replace Ink Cartridge Ink Cartridge same ink cartridge. Print drum lock sensor: OFF
running out).
Wrong-type Ink
Cartridge Installed
tag information is not Tag-related software error
or Cannot Read Ink
correct. Check Antenna channel selection error occurred or
D04 575 Info Replace it with the correct type of ink cartridge.
• Communication with Settings an attempted writing to the write protected
the ink cartridge tag area failed.
failed.
Office
Enter two digits

General supply (ink) At the occurrence of H01 error, enter the Enter the expiration month and press the
US.RISO.COM
H08 578 of
expiration period setting expiration month of general supply (ink). <START> key.
month
General supply (ink) Enter last two At the occurrence of H01 error, enter the Enter the expiration year and press the
H09 579
expiration period setting digits of year expiration year of general supply (ink). <START> key.
• The print drum code

does not match the
Wrong-Type Print
machine model code. Replace it with a correct type of print drum.
Drum Installed Check
D02 580 • The type of the print Incompatible print drum (incorrect print drum). (So that the print drum code matches the
Replace with Settings
drum does not match machine model code.)
Correct Type
that of the machine
model.

proper position.
locked when the print Reaching the specified angle is not detected
!!System Error!!
drum is in operation. even after three detection operation have been
T01 582 Press Reset Key Call Service Press the <RESET> key. -> Process PF/ES.
• The clamp is not in performed by the Print drum home position
proper position when sensor.
master removal).
17 - 49
Expired The year and month when the year and month
• Print drum set switch: OFF, and
Expired Ink Ink recorded on the ink tag is added to the date
C11 590 • The ink has expired. Print drum connection signal: OFF
Replace Ink Cartridge Replace of production recorded on the ink tag have
(Pull out the print drum to cancel the error.)
Ink Cartridge passed the expiration period.
The Print pressure HP sensor is not turned ON

• The Print pressure !!System Error!! Press the <RESET> key. -> Perform the
after a lapse of 3.9 seconds when pressure
T11 600 control pulse motor does Press Reset Key Call Service recovery operation (to return to the home
increases during home positioning at pressure
not operate properly. If Recovery has Failed, Call Service position).
control home positioning action.
The Print pressure HP sensor is not turned

OFF after a lapse of 4.6 seconds when
pressure reduces during home positioning at
pressure control home positioning action.
US.RISO.COM
The logical value of the sensor at the

destination differ from the theoretical value
even after the print pressure PM operation
ended due to the sensor stop mode.
• The Vertical print The vertical HP sensor is not turned ON after a

!!System Error!! Press the <RESET> key. -> Perform the
positioning pulse motor lapse of the specified period of time since the
T05 603 Press Reset Key Call Service recovery operation (to return to the home
does not operate motor is turned ON to the downward direction
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service position).
properly. during vertical home positioning action.

• The Vertical print The vertical HP sensor is not turned OFF after
positioning pulse motor a lapse of the specified period of time since
does not operate the motor is turned ON to the upward direction
properly. during vertical home positioning action.
• The Vertical print The logical value of the sensor at the

positioning pulse motor destination differ from the theoretical value
does not operate even after the vertical PM operation ended
17 - 50
properly. due to the sensor stop mode.
• The Vertical print The logical value of the sensor at the

Press the <RESET> key. -> Perform the
positioning pulse motor destination differ from the theoretical value
T05 612 Call Service recovery operation (to return to the home
does not operate even after the vertical PM operation ended
position).
properly. due to the sensor stop mode.
T96 613 • The relationship Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service Print pressure compensation not set. Enter parameters in the test mode.
correct.
US.RISO.COM
Pressure control home positioning action at a

pulse of -1000 is not completed after a lapse
of the specified period of time (1.2 times of the
calculated positioning time). (Time-out)
• The Vertical print

!!System Error!! Vertical home positioning action at a pulse Press the <RESET> key. -> Perform the
positioning pulse motor
T05 619 Press Reset Key of -98 is not completed after a lapse of the recovery operation (to return to the home
does not operate
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service specified period of time. position).
properly.

The Pressure control PM operation is not
completed after a lapse of the specified period
of time in the counter stop mode.
T11 631 control pulse motor does Press Reset Key recovery operation (to return to the home
Otherwise, the operation is not completed
the sensor stop mode.
The vertical PM operation is not completed

• The Vertical print
!!System Error!! the counter stop mode. Press the <RESET> key. -> Perform the
positioning pulse motor
17 - 51
T05 632 Press Reset Key Call Service Otherwise, the operation is not completed after recovery operation (to return to the home
does not operate
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service a lapse of the specified period of time since position).
properly.
the sensor edge detection until the PM stops
in the sensor stop mode.

the following.
• Press the [Close] button.
!! The Data Storage Area The remaining capacity is inadequate at data
• The remaining storage • Press the <RESET> key.
F32 713 has Become Full !! writing to the storage memory or at the start of
memory capacity is low.
Clear Old Storage Data scanning in the scan mode.
• Press the [Storage] button
to clear the warning display,
and then the [Storage Selection] window
appears.
• Reading from/writing !!System Error!!

B21 714 to the storage memory Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON File name error of the storage memory. Switch the power OFF, then ON.
US.RISO.COM
failed. If Recovery has Failed, Call Service

B21 715 to the storage memory Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Storage memory access error. Switch the power OFF, then ON.

B21 716 to the storage memory Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Other storage memory errors. Switch the power OFF, then ON.
!!System Error!!
• Communication with Sorter communication error: Two consecutive
T09 720 Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Switch the power OFF, then ON.
job separator failed retry commands have been received.

!! Job Separator is
The power is OFF when the <START> key
• Job separator is OFF !! Check • Touch the [Confirm] button.
B22 721 is pressed while the function settings “Job
powered OFF. Turn On Power Settings • Press the <RESET> key.
Separation” is set to ON.
Switch of it
When the busy signal status is H (power

No Paper Tape in Job ON), if the <START> key is pressed while the
• The tape in the job Check • Touch the [Confirm] button.
B23 722 Separator function settings “Job Separation” is set to ON,
separator has run out. Settings • Press the <RESET> key.
Replace Tape Roll the tape detection signal indicates H (no tape)
status.
17 - 52
After the tape output command has been
No Paper Tape in Job
• The tape in the job Check issued, the busy signal status changes from • Touch the [Confirm] button.
B23 723 Separator
separator has run out. Settings L to H (operation completed), and the tape • Press the <RESET> key.
Replace Tape Roll
detection signal indicates H (no tape) status.
When the busy signal status is H (power

Paper Tape Jam in Job ON), if the <START> key is pressed while the
• Tape jam occurred on Check • Touch the [Confirm] button.
B24 724 Separator function settings “Job Separation” is set to ON,
the job separator. Settings • Press the <RESET> key.
Remove Paper Tape the tape jam detection signal indicates L (tape
remaining) status.
Tape jam detection signal indicates H (tape

Paper Tape Jam in Job
• Tape jam occurred on Check transport error) status after a lapse of 1200 • Touch the [Confirm] button.
B24 725 Separator
the job separator. Settings ms. since the cluster A signal has been turned • Press the <RESET> key.
Remove Paper Tape
ON.
US.RISO.COM
After the cluster A signal has been turned

ON, at the time when the busy signal status
Paper Tape Jam in Job
• Tape jam occurred on Check changes from L to H (or after a lapse of seven • Touch the [Confirm] button.
B24 726 Separator
the job separator. Settings seconds while it remains in the L status), the • Press the <RESET> key.
Remove Paper Tape
tape jam detection signal indicates L (tape
ejection error) status.
!! Job Separator is After a lapse of seven seconds since the

• Job separator is OFF !! Check cluster A signal has been turned ON, the busy • Touch the [Confirm] button.
B22 727
powered OFF. Turn On Power Settings signal remains in the L status (the power is • Press the <RESET> key.
Switch of it turned OFF during job separation tape output).

• No card is inserted in Insert Card in Key/Card Check
B01 730 Card counter: No card Insert the card.
the Card counter. Counter Settings
Close the stage cover

Close Platen Cover
• The stage cover is to clear the warning window.
The Stage cover is opened during digitizing
F78 731 opened during digitizing
If original moves operation.
operation. Press the [Close] button
you may not get desired result
to clear the warning message.
Press the <START> key to start scanning.
17 - 53
Press the [Close] button (<STOP> or
• No original is set Set Original and Press Start Key
No original is detected when the digitizer starts <RESET> key) to clear the warning window
F79 732 when the digitizer starts Re-scanning will be Started
rescanning. and to return to the original screen (Image
rescanning. to Add Image Processing
processing window).
(Scanning is canceled.)
• The amount of coins Insert coins until the amount reaches

Insert Coins The amount of coins for the coin vendor is
B36 733 for the coin vendor is the sufficient amount for the machine to
into Coin Box insufficient.
insufficient. operate.
• No card is inserted into

the card vendor.
Insert Card Card vendor: No card is inserted or remaining Insert the card that has sufficient remaining
B37 734 • The remaining amount
into the Card Slot amount in the card is insufficient. amount.
in the card is insufficient
to use the card vendor.
!!System Error!!
24V-OP is not turned ON. (Possible blown
fuse at the 24V-OP system)
US.RISO.COM
!!System Error!!
The fuse chip on the Mechanical control PCB
(CP2) has blown.
!!System Error!!
File creation has failed in the test mode No.
103 (storing of machine settings).
!!System Error!!
Directory creation has failed in the test mode
No. 103 (storing of machine settings).

!!System Error!! No file to restore has been found in the

T98 787 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON test mode No. 105 (restoration of machine Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service settings).
!!System Error!! The file to restore has wrong machine type

T98 788 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON information when the test mode No. 105 Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service (restoration of machine settings) is performed.
!!System Error!! The file to restore has wrong serial number

T98 789 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON when the test mode No. 105 (restoration of Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service machine settings) is performed.
17 - 54
!!System Error!! The version of the file to restore is higher
T98 790 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON when the test mode No. 105 (restoration of Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service machine settings) is performed.
!!System Error!! Rebooting error after the test mode No. 105
T98 791 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON (restoration of machine settings) has been Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service performed.
!!System Error!!
No directory has been found in the test mode
No. 105 (restoration of machine settings).
US.RISO.COM

the following.
• Press the [Close] button.
• The number of files in !! The Number of Storage The number of files in the folder of the storage • Press the <STOP> key.
the folder of the storage Data has Become Full !! memory reached the maximum at the time • Press the <RESET> key.
F34 835
memory reached the Clear Old Storage Data when the data is stored in the storage memory
maximum. in the Selected Folder or at the start of scanning in the scan mode. • Press the [Storage] button
and then the [Storage Selection] window
appears.

• Touch the [Size Setting] button and then
specify the reproduction size manually.
!! No Auto Reproduction
• The original size with This Original Original size detection failed. (Original did not
F44 901 the following:
cannot be detected. and Printing Paper !! conform to the detection specification.)
(Printing stops.)
Select Size Manually
• Touch the [Stop] button.
17 - 55
Printing is executed by any of the following:
The paper size and the original size are not
• Press the <START> key.
compatible at the start of DtoP master making
• The master making !! Unmatched Size-- • Press the <PROOF> key.
operation.
size is larger than the Current Page and Printing Paper !! The warning display is cleared by any of the
F43 902 Paper size ˂ Master making size for the job
paper size (at DtoP Check Paper Size following:
(page size)
master making). (Printing stops.)
(Not detected when Paper size ≧ Master
making size)
Master making or RLP output is started when The warning display can be cleared by any of
• An original is set on [A4->Card] Reproduction
[A4->Card] reproduction has been selected the following:
AF when postcard size is Not Available
F47 904 and an original has been set on AF. • Touch the [Close] button.
reproduction has been in combination with ADF
An original is set on AF when [A4->Card] • Press the <STOP> key.
set. Place Original on Glass Platen
reproduction is selected. • Press the <RESET> key.
US.RISO.COM
Reached to the
• The master making
limit
count has reached the The master making count has reached the • Touch the [Close] button.
Reached to the limit count count
F04 905 maximum. setting value for the upper limit count of • Press the <STOP> key.
Contact the administrator Please Contact
• The print quantity has master making. • Press the <RESET> key.
the
reached the maximum.
administrator
Reached to the
• The master making
limit
count has reached the • Touch the [Close] button.
Reached to the limit count count The print quantity has reached the setting
F04 906 maximum. • Press the <STOP> key.
Contact the administrator Please Contact value for the upper limit count of print quantity.

• The print quantity has • Press the <RESET> key.

the
reached the maximum.
administrator
• Touch the [Close] button.

• Incompatible USB
B30 910 Can not identify Can not identify An incompatible USB device has been set. • Press the <RESET> key.
device is connected.
• Disconnect the USB device.

RISO folder creation in
B38 911 Can not identify Can not identify RISO folder creation has failed. • Press the <RESET> key.
the USB memory failed.
17 - 56
Acquiring Linked Printer the following:
• RLP information has Use of RLP mode not possible (RLP
F52 912 Configuration Data • Touch the [Close] button.
not been acquired. information has not been acquired)
Please Wait a Moment • Press the <RESET> key.
• Press the mode switching key.

the following.
The file size is too large • Press the [Close] button.
to store on USB flash drive The remaining capacity is inadequate at the • Press the <STOP> key.
• The remaining USB
F33 913 Change the USB flash drive start of data writing or scanning (in the scan • Press the <RESET> key.
memory capacity is low.
or delete some files mode) to the USB memory.
to make spaces • Press the [USB Job List] button
and then the [USB Job List] window appears.
US.RISO.COM
!! No Linked Printer MIB information request error The error display can be cleared by any of the
Detected !! Transmission not performed in three seconds following:
• Communication with Check Cable (WAK)/No response from the destination/ • Press the <RESET> key or [Close] button.
B32 914
external device failed. Connection Destination disconnected/TCP/IP of NET-D • Press the [Link Switch] button, if displayed,
and Power Supply not functioning/Undefined interruption received to switch the link.
for Linked Printer from the machine, etc. (Clear the printer error to cancel the error.)

!! No Linked Printer The error display can be cleared by any of the
Detected !! following:
No MIB information replied
• Communication with Check Cable • Press the <RESET> key or [Close] button.
B32 915 NET-D (destination of communication) does
external device failed. Connection • Press the [Link Switch] button, if displayed,
not respond in 50 seconds.
and Power Supply to switch the link.
for Linked Printer (Clear the printer error to cancel the error.)
!! No Linked Printer
Detected !! The error display can be cleared by any of the
Check Cable following:
17 - 57
• Network cable is not
B31 916 The network cable is not connected at startup.
connected. Connection • Touch the [Close] button.
and Power Supply • Press the <RESET> key.
for Linked Printer
!! No Linked Printer The error display can be cleared by any of the

Detected !! following:
• Communication with Check Cable Check • Press the <RESET> key or [Close] button.
B32 917 Communication error occurred on network.
external device failed. Connection Settings • Press the [Link Switch] button, if displayed,
and Power Supply to switch the link.
for Linked Printer (Clear the printer error to cancel the error.)
Due date for ID

Please inform this message
counter report • Touch the [Close] button.
• ID counter report due to your administrator The specified ID counter report due date has
F96 918 Please Contact • Press the <STOP> key.
date has been reached. Due date for been reached.
the • Press the <RESET> key.
ID counter report
US.RISO.COM
administrator

following:
• Toner of RLP has run No Toner
B34 919 Toner of Prioa has run out. • Touch the [Close] button.
out. in Linked Printer
• Press the [Link Switch] button, if displayed,
to switch the link.
!!System Error!!
USB controller chip is malfunctioning when PC
and RG is connected via a USB cable.
Firmware version incompatibility

The firmware version for any of the main

!!System Error!! microcomputer, restoration loader, panel
T99 923 • Software error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service microcomputer, and analog microcomputer Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service does not match the version combined in the
downloaded package.
* Compulsory download (TM7052) is required.
AF firmware version incompatibility

!!System Error!! The connected AF has a firmware version that
T99 924 • Software error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service is not compatible with the package version Switch the power OFF, then ON.
17 - 58
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service for the machine. * Compulsory download
(TM7052) is required.

• USB hub has been Can not identify Can not identify
B29 926 USB hub has been connected. • Press the <RESET> key.
connected. (USB hub) (USB hub)

Starting Up the network connection. the following:
• NET-D initialization in Use of RLP mode not possible (NET-D
F58 927 • Touch the [Close] button.
process initializing)
Please Wait a Moment • Press the <RESET> key.
• Press the mode switching key.
Due date for

counter
Please inform this message • Touch the [Close] button.
• Counter report due report The specified counter report due date has
F97 928 to your administrator • Press the <STOP> key.
date has been reached. Please Contact been reached.
Due date for counter report • Press the <RESET> key.
the
administrator
US.RISO.COM
Press the <START> key to start master

making.
• Printing operation has

!! Number of Copies is set to "0"!! The warning display can be cleared by any of
been started at print Auto-link master making continuation
F60 929 Printing Operation will the following:
quantity “0” when RLP confirmation (when print quantity is 0).
Start on this Printer (Printing stops.)
auto-ink is active.
No IP Address

Assigned to This
Check following:
B33 931 • IP address is not set. Printer IP address is not set.
Settings • Touch the [Close] button.
Contact Your Network
Administrator
!!System Error!!
• No response from
T93 932 Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service NIC does not respond when being accessed. Switch the power OFF, then ON.
NET-D
!!System Error!!
• No response from No response in 90 seconds during NET-D
17 - 59
T93 933 Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Switch the power OFF, then ON.
NET-D initialization.
!!System Error!! Communication error between mechanical

T98 934 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service control PCB and RF tag PCB (detection on RF Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service tag PCB side).
!!System Error!! Communication error between mechanical

T98 935 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service control PCB and RF tag PCB (detection on Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service mechanical control PCB side).
!!System Error!!
T98 937 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service Serial number not specified Switch the power OFF, then ON.
!!System Error!!
T98 938 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service Old FRAM program version Switch the power OFF, then ON.
US.RISO.COM
!!System Error!!
• PC card cannot be
T97 939 Press Reset Key Call Service PC card access error: PC card not set Press the <RESET> key.
accessed normally.
!!System Error!!
• PC card cannot be PC card access error: Device error (non-CF
accessed normally. card)
!!System Error!!
• PC card cannot be PC card access error: File creation failed (The
accessed normally. same file already exists.)

!!System Error!!
T97 943 Press Reset Key Call Service PC card access error: Unformatted Press the <RESET> key.
accessed normally.
!!System Error!!
T97 944 Press Reset Key Call Service PC card access error: Media ID error Press the <RESET> key.
accessed normally.
!!System Error!!
• PC card cannot be PC card access error: Media error (CF card
accessed normally. that is not accessible)
17 - 60
!!System Error!!
• PC card cannot be PC card access error: Insufficient disk capacity
accessed normally. (insufficient memory capacity in CF card)
!!System Error!!
24V-A is not turned ON. (Possible blown fuse
at the 24V-A system)
!!System Error!!
24V-B is not turned ON. (Possible blown fuse
at the 24V-B system)
!!System Error!!
T98 949 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service 24V-A is not turned OFF. Switch the power OFF, then ON.
!!System Error!!
T98 950 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service 24V-B is not turned OFF. Switch the power OFF, then ON.
US.RISO.COM
!!System Error!!
Checksum error of NeoROSA PCB flash
memory.
!!System Error!!
Data writing failure to NeoROSA PCB flash
memory.
• The original size is out

of range for the multi-up Original Size Exceeds The original is out of range of possible size or
Reset, Stop
F48 955 setting. (Processing for Limitation of Multi-Up is custom sized paper at the time of multi-up
(Warning display cleared)

the original size is not Specify Original Size setting.
available.)
The warning display is cleared by any of the

following:
!!Auto-Link Operation is
• An error has occurred Not Available!! An error has occurred on the RLP side when
F62 956 • Press the <STOP> key.
on RLP. Specified Linked Printer RLP auto-ink is active.
• If any other Prioa is available, press the [Link
may be in Error or Turned OFF
Switch] button to select another option.
17 - 61
(The [Link Switch] button is not displayed
when no other Prioa is available.)
(When E-mail notification of

consumable stock info is disabled)
Check Stock of
the following:
Required Ink and
• The number of ink Please Order If Needed Number of stocks of ink of applicable color
Check stock of • Press the <RESET> key.
F90 957 stock decreased to the (set value) ≧ Number of stocks (subtracted
ink • Press the <STOP> key.
set value or less. (When E-mail notification of counter value).
• Touch the [No] button.
consumable stock info is enabled)
Check Stock of Required ink Would
Touching the [Yes] button displays the
you like to Send the Consumable
[Sending E-mail] window.
Stocks Info.by E-Mail?
US.RISO.COM
(When E-mail notification of

consumable stock info is enabled)
Check Stock of Required Master and
the following:
Please Order If Needed
• The number of master • Press the <RESET> key.
(When E-mail notification of Check stock of Number of master stock (set value) ≧ Number
F91 958 stock decreased to the • Press the <STOP> key.
consumable stock info is enabled) master of stocks (subtracted counter value).
set value or less. • Touch the [No] button.
Check Stock of
Required Master
Touching the [Yes] button displays the
Would you like to Send

[Sending E-mail] window.

the Consumable Stocks Info.
by E-Mail?

• Original is not detected
Original Undetected Check Master making or RLP output has been started following:
F45 959 successfully.
Reset Original Settings without an original. (Printing stops.)
• Original is not set.
17 - 62
(Set the original again to cancel the error.)
!!System Error!!
Data reading failure from NeoROSA PCB flash
memory
!!System Error!!
T98 961 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON NeoROSA PCB flash memory is not used. Switch the power OFF, then ON.
A command for any of the following functions

• A command for
Processing Print Data from PC is issued:
unavailable function has Touch [Close] or switch modes using the mode
F64 964 This Function is Not Available while DtoP job reception/Data-Map/Exclusive
been issued while DtoP key.
Process-ing Current Data functions (scan mode, overlay, editor, storage)
job is in process.
in awaiting output status
US.RISO.COM
At the start of scanning, auto size (for

saving data) is selected and original size is
nonstandard.
• A nonstandard size [Stop]/Reset, Stop
Auto Page Size Selection
original is set when (Warning display clear)
is Not Available for Irregular-Size * For scan and storage management, only
F65 965 auto size for saving is
Original Select Format Size to Store the first page of the original is the target of
selected (at first page [Saving Format]
and then Restart detection of F65. For second page and later,
scanning of original). (Manual size selection)
F65 warning will not be displayed even if it is
applicable due to a different reproduction ratio
or original size.

following:
• Serviceman-call error • Touch the [Close] button.
B35 970 Linked Printer in Error Service error has occurred on Prioa.
occurred on RLP. • Press the <RESET> key.
• Press the [Link Switch] button, if displayed,
to switch the link.
17 - 63
T96 972 • The relationship Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service REv storage area has not been initialized. Enter parameters in the test mode.
correct.
US.RISO.COM
[Manual Feed]:
Clear the warning and output with [Multi-
Purpose Tray] selected and the output size
fixed to [A3].
• Tray cannot be
At the start of RLP, the specified fixed size
selected among the Paper Size cannot be [Paper Select]:
reproduction and detected original size do not
reproduction ratio and Defined by Specified Clear the warning and display the RLP paper
F73 975 match.
original size at auto Reproduction Size selection screen.
Otherwise, zoom/independent size
tray selection (at RLP Select Paper Size Manually (If paper has been selected before starting the
reproduction has been specified.
output). operation, F18 will not be indicated.)

Press the [Stop] button, <RESET> key,

or<STOP> key
to clear the warning message.
!!System Error!! At a time other than booting and wake-up, an

T98 978 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON erroneous power ON command is received Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service from the mechanical control PCB side.
!!System Error!!
Setting value error in NeoROSA PCB flash
17 - 64
memory settings.
Printing status goes back to standby by any of

the following:
##High Speed
• When high speed (High speed is canceled.)
Print is
printing is set, the Printer Temperature is Low • Press the [Stop] button.
not available High speed printing has been performed under
F74 980 temperature is lower "High Speed" is Not • Press the <STOP> key.
now a temperature below 15°C.
than the predetermined Available High speed is canceled by any of the following,
Please wait a
value. and printing starts in “speed 3”:
moment##
• Press the [Continue] button.
US.RISO.COM

• Original is not detected Original has not been detected when [Next] is
Original Undetected following:
F45 981 successfully. pressed on the multi-up count entry screen of
Reset Original (Printing stops.)
• Original is not set. the multi-up wizard.
(Set the original again to cancel the error.)

!!System Error!!
24V-C is not turned ON. (Possible blown fuse
at the 24V-C system)
!!System Error!!
T98 984 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON 24V-C is not turned OFF. Switch the power OFF, then ON.
!!System Error!!
• PC card cannot be PC card access error: File not found in the
accessed normally. specified drive
17 - 65
!!System Error!!
• PC card cannot be PC card access error: Attempted access to a
accessed normally. file that is not open to public
!!System Error!!
• PC card cannot be PC card access error: File pointer for file
accessed normally. information storage folder already used
!!System Error!! PC card access error: Setting of address to

T97 993 Press Reset Key Call Service be loaded for data transmission to mechanical Press the <RESET> key.
accessed normally.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service control PCB not correct
!!System Error!!
T97 994 Press Reset Key Call Service PC card access error: File deletion failed Press the <RESET> key.
accessed normally.
US.RISO.COM
[Close]:
• Job deletion failed on ! Scanning is Not Possible !
Mode selection screen
external CI. External Controller is not Connected
F85 997 Job deletion has failed on the external CI side.
• Data reception failed or Processing Connection
<START>:
on external CI. Check Cable Connection
Scanning starts.
[Close]:
• Job deletion failed on ! Scanning is Not Possible !
Mode selection screen
external CI. External Controller is not Connected Scan data reception has failed on the external
F85 998
• Data reception failed or Processing Connection CI side.
<START>:
on external CI. Check Cable Connection
Scanning starts.


• Error detected on USB An error has been detected on the USB file
B39 999 Can not identify Can not identify • Press the <RESET> key.
file system system.
• Mac address is not

!!System Error!!
correct. Mac address error occurred when activating
• Network behavior is network communication.
not correct.
!!System Error!! When the power is turned ON, the counter
17 - 66
T98 1005 • Hardware error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service value stored in the FRAM of the main circuit Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service board exceeds the upper limit value.

!!System Error!!
correct.
T90 1006 Press Reset Key Call Service Initializing the network driver has failed. Press the <RESET> key.
• Network behavior is
not correct.

!!System Error!!
correct. Setting of Mac address for the network driver
• Network behavior is has failed.
not correct.

!!System Error!!
correct. Initializing the network processing section has
• Network behavior is failed.
not correct.
US.RISO.COM

!!System Error!!
correct. Saving the memory pooling area for the
• Network behavior is network processing section has failed.
not correct.

!!System Error!!
correct.
T90 1010 Press Reset Key Call Service Making the IP instance has failed. Press the <RESET> key.
not correct.

!!System Error!!

correct.
T90 1011 Press Reset Key Call Service Activating IPv6 has failed. Press the <RESET> key.
not correct.

!!System Error!!
correct.
T90 1012 Press Reset Key Call Service Activating the TCP communication has failed. Press the <RESET> key.
not correct.

!!System Error!!
correct.
17 - 67
T90 1013 Press Reset Key Call Service Activating the UDP communication has failed. Press the <RESET> key.
not correct.

!!System Error!!
correct.
T90 1014 Press Reset Key Call Service Activating the IP packet fragment has failed. Press the <RESET> key.
not correct.

!!System Error!!
correct.
T90 1015 Press Reset Key Call Service Initializing the BSD layer has failed. Press the <RESET> key.
not correct.

!!System Error!!
correct.
T90 1016 Press Reset Key Call Service Setting of IP address has failed. Press the <RESET> key.
not correct.
US.RISO.COM

!!System Error!! Initializing the network processing section has
correct.
T90 1017 Press Reset Key Call Service failed. Press the <RESET> key.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service * Network cannot be used.
not correct.

correct.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service * DtoP with RAW cannot be performed.
not correct.


correct.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service * DtoP with FTP cannot be performed.
not correct.

correct.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service * Cannot output to Prioa.
not correct.

correct.
17 - 68
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service * RISO console cannot be used.
not correct.

correct.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service * DtoP with LPR cannot be performed.
not correct.

correct.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service * DtoP with IPP cannot be performed.
not correct.

correct.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service * Cannot send a message.
not correct.
US.RISO.COM
• Mac address is not Initializing the network processing section has

!!System Error!!
correct. failed.
• Network behavior is * Cannot respond to the MIB acquirement
not correct. command from a PC.

correct.
not correct.


correct.
not correct.
!!System Error!!
T99 1031 • Software error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Initializing the LVDS driver has failed. Switch the power OFF, then ON.
T99 1032 • Software error Call Service Initializing the LCD driver has failed. Switch the power OFF, then ON.

T99 1303 Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Call Service mechanical control PCB (on NeoROSA PCB Switch the power OFF, then ON.
17 - 69
• Software error
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service side): Tag length error
!!System Error!! Getting data from a USB memory has failed.

T99 3001 • Software error Turn Main Power SW OFF Then ON Reduce the number of files saved in each Switch the power OFF, then ON.
If Recovery has Failed, Call Service folder in the USB memory to 250 or less.
!!System Error!!
Replay from the machine has timed out when
entering into the sleep mode.
US.RISO.COM
MEMO
17 - 70
MEMO
17 - 71
MEMO
17 - 72
CHAPTER 18: Test Modes
Contents
1. Using Test Modes...................................................................................2

1-1. Starting Normal Test Mode............................................................2
1-2. Starting Factory-Setting Test Mode...............................................2
1-3. Working with Test Modes...............................................................2
1-3-2. Selecting a Test Mode from the Menu.............................2
1-4. Exiting a Test Mode.......................................................................2
1-5. Test Mode Menu Window..............................................................3
Standard tab...............................................................................3
Option tab...................................................................................3
2. List of Test Modes (Sorted by the Number).........................................4
18 - 1
1. Using Test Modes
1-1. Starting Normal Test Mode

Turn on the machine power while pressing both the top < > and bottom < > keys. This starts test
mode in test mode standby status.
1-2. Starting Factory-Setting Test Mode

To use factory-setting test mode, it is required to enter the key code. After normal test
mode starts in standby status, use the numeric keypad to enter the 4-digit number
(9874), and press the <Start> key. Then, the machine enters factory-setting test mode.
1-3. Working with Test Modes

To select a test mode, you can type the number of the desired test mode or select the test mode from
the menu.
1-3-2. Selecting a Test Mode from the Menu

(1) When the machine is in standby status, from the test mode menu, select a unit that contains the
desired test item.
• Use your finger to tap a unit name on the LCD. (The unit name is highlighted.)
• The test mode sub-menu appears.
(2) From the test mode sub-menu, select the test item to run.
• Use your finger to tap a test item on the LCD. (The item is highlighted.)
(3) Press the <Start> key to start the test mode.
(4) Press the <Stop> or <Start> key to stop the test mode. The status is changed to the In Pause status
or standby status.
* For test modes that change settings, pressing the <Start> key applies changes to the system and
switches the status to standby. Pressing the <Stop> key discards changes and switches the status to
standby.
1-4. Exiting a Test Mode

When the machine is in test mode standby status or the test mode In Pause status, pressing <Reset>
key for one second or more terminates the test mode and enables the machine to enter normal mode.
18 - 2
1-5. Test Mode Menu Window

When test mode is activated, firstly the following window appears that provides two
tabs (Standard and Option).
The lower section of the window shows the model, the serial number, and the revision
of the system and engine firmware.
Standard tab
SYSTEM/CNTRL PANEL
PROCESS/SCANNING
MASTER MAKE/DISPOSAL
PAPER FEED/EJECT
DRUM/PRINTING
The menu items appear
allowing users to select the
type of a test mode.
When factory-setting test mode
is activated, as described
above, the Factory Settings
㻌㻌㻌㻌 item is added in the right of the
㻌㻌㻌㻌 window.
㻌
㻌
䛂䜸䝥䝅䝵䞁䛃䝍䝤⏬㠃㻌
䛂䜸䝥䝅䝵䞁䛃䝍䝤⏬㠃㻌
Option tab
AF (Auto Document Feeder)
Job Separator
Editor
Storage Memory
Telemeter
LBP
Auto Fence
Multi-tray Paper Feed
The menu items appear
allowing users to select a test
mode for options.
18 - 3
2. List of Test Modes (Sorted by the Number)
Abbreviated unit names used in the following Abbreviated model names used in the
tables following tables
Sys/Panel= SYSTEM/CNTRL PANEL SF9 = SF9 series

Proc/Scan = PROCESS/SCANNING SF5*5 = SF5*5 series
Master = MASTER MAKE/DISPOSAL SF5*3 = SF5*3 series
Paper = PAPER FEED/EJECT
Drum/Print = DRUM/PRINTING
Factory = Factory Settings
OP = Option
18 - 4
Model
Unit No. Name Description Setting
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Sys/
0001 Wakeup Key Check ON: The key is pressed - ○ ○ ○
Panel
Sys/ Mechanical Counter

0002 ON: The mechanical counter is connected. - ○ ○ ○
Panel Connection Signal
Sys/
0003 24V A output signal ON: 24V-A is ON (24 volts output). - ○ ○ ○
Panel
Sys/

0004 24V B output signal ON: 24V-B is ON (24 volts output). - ○ ○ ○
Panel
Sys/ Switch ON (The rear cover of the main unit is attached)

0005 Back Cover Interlock SW - ○ ○ ○
Panel Switch OFF (The rear cover is removed)
Sys/
0062 Wakeup LED ON LED illuminates - ○ ○ ○
Panel
Creates Test pattern 1 (Checkered).

The size of the checkered pattern is 128 dots (10.8mm) x 128 dots (5.4mm).
18 - 5
Sys/ * For the printing pressure, the settings from No.1248 (Printing pressure for Test
0080 Test Print A (Checkered) - × ○ ○
Panel Mode) must be applied.
* The printed image must be cut for the paper size (The cut amount is the same as
in normal mode).
Creates Test pattern 1 (Checkered).

The size of the checkered pattern is 128 dots (5.4mm) x 128 dots (5.4mm).
0080 Test Print A (Checkered) - ○ × ×
in normal mode).
Creates Test pattern 2 (Crossed Lines).

The size of the crossed line pattern is 128 dots (10.8mm) × 128 dots
(5.4mm), where the width of a line is 1 dot (0.084mm) × 1dot (0.042mm).
Sys/ Test Print B
0081 * For the printing pressure, the settings from No.1248 (Printing pressure for Test - × ○ ○
Panel (Crossed Lines)
Mode) must be applied.
US.RISO.COM
in normal mode).
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Creates Test pattern 2 (Crossed Lines).

The size of the crossed line pattern is 128 dots (5.4mm) × 128 dots (5.4mm),
where the width of a line is 1 dot (0.042mm) × 1dot (0.042mm).
Sys/ Test Print B (Crossed
0081 * For the printing pressure, the settings from No.1248 (Printing pressure for Test - ○ × ×
Panel Lines)
in normal mode).
Creates Test pattern 4 (Dot 1).

The dot pattern where the size of a black dot is 8 dots (0.68mm) × 8 dots (0.34mm)
0082 Test Print C (Dot1) - × ○ ○
in normal mode).

The dot pattern where the size of a black dot is 8 dots (0.34mm) × 8 dots (0.34mm)
0082 Test Print C (Dot1) - ○ × ×
18 - 6
in normal mode).

The dot pattern where the size of a black dot is 16 dots (1.35mm) × 16dots
(0.68mm)
Sys/
0083 Test Print D (Dot2) * For the printing pressure, the settings from No.1248 (Printing pressure for Test - × ○ ○
Panel
in normal mode).

(0.68mm)
Sys/
0083 Test Print D (Dot2) * For the printing pressure, the settings from No.1248 (Printing pressure for Test - ○ × ×
Panel
US.RISO.COM
in normal mode).
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Creates Test pattern 6 (Dot 1 + Crossed Lines).

where the width of a line is 1 dot (0.084mm) × 1 dot (0.042mm).
+
Sys/ Test Print E (Dot1+Crossed
0084 The dot pattern where the size of a black dot is 8 dots (0.68mm) × 8 dots (0.34mm) - × ○ ○
Panel Lines)
* For the printing pressure, the settings from No.1248 (Printing pressure for Test

in normal mode).

+
Sys/ Test Print E (Dot1+Crossed
0084 The dot pattern where the size of a black dot is 8 dots (0.34mm) × 8 dots (0.34mm) - ○ × ×
Panel Lines)
18 - 7
in normal mode).

+
Sys/ Test Print F (Dot2+Crossed The dot pattern where the size of a black dot is 16 dots (1.35mm) ×
0085 - × ○ ○
Panel Lines) 16 dots (0.68mm)
in normal mode).
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3

+
Sys/ Test Print F (Dot2+Crossed The dot pattern where the size of a black dot is 16 dots (0.68mm) ×
0085 - ○ × ×
Panel Lines) 16 dots (0.68mm)

in normal mode).

(0.084mm)
Sys/
0086 Test Print G (Dot3) * For the printing pressure, the settings from No.1248 (Printing pressure for Test - × ○ ○
Panel
in normal mode).
18 - 8
(0.084mm)
Sys/
0086 Test Print G (Dot3) * For the printing pressure, the settings from No.1248 (Printing pressure for Test - ○ × ×
Panel
in normal mode).
Performs the continuous printing action.

Speed 1: 60rpm, Speed 2: 80rpm, Speed 3: 100rpm, Speed 4: 120rpm, Speed 5:
130rpm, High Speed: 150rpm
Sys/ * The speed key is enabled.
0087 Paper Feed Test (Cycle) - ○ ○ ○
Panel * The vertical print positioning key is enabled.
* The action starts when the rear cover set switch is pressed. When the Start key is
pressed, 10 seconds are waited until the rear cover set switch is pressed (A beep
sounds until the set switch is pressed).
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Performs the continuous printing action at 15rpm.

* The conditions are the same as those of No.0087 (Paper Feed Test), except that
Sys/ Low-speed Printing the printing pressure and speed control is disabled.
0088 - ○ ○ ○
Panel Operation * The action starts when the rear cover set switch is pressed. When the Start key is
pressed, 10 seconds are waited until the rear cover set switch is pressed (A beep
sounds until the set switch is pressed).
Sys/ Firmware Program When the Start key is pressed, the machine firmware program is downloaded into
0090 - ○ ○ ○
Panel Download the printer.

Performs the mechanical initialization.
Sys/
0094 Unit Initialization (scanner, TPH, master compression plate, clamp unit, vertical print position, and - ○ ○ ○
Panel
printing pressure)
Sys/ System Configuration Data

0095 Creates a master for the CI system data and makes a print. - ○ ○ ○
Panel Output
Sys/ System Parameter, Error Creates a master of the list of data setting changes and error history and makes a
0097 - ○ ○ ○
Panel Record Print print.
18 - 9
Applies the time set in Test Modes No.0171 - No.0173 to the RTC and starts the
clock.
Sys/ This test runs when the Start key is pressed and ends automatically after 0.5
0101 Clock Adjustment Confirm - ○ ○ ○
Panel second.
* This test must be run after values are set in Test Modes No.0171 - No.0173. This
test applies values set in Test Modes No.0171 - No.0173 to the RTC.
Sys/ System-parameter Stores information from the flash memory on MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB to the USB
0103 - ○ ○ ○
Panel adjustment store memory.
Stores the test mode settings from the EEPROM on the print drum PCB to the USB
Sys/ Drum-parameter
0104 memory. * This test cannot be run when the style differs between the model and - ○ ○ ○
Panel adjustment store
the print drum PCB.
Writes data stored in No.0103 (System-parameter adjustment upload) into the flash
Sys/ System-parameter
0105 memory on MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB. * The power must be turned off and then on after - ○ ○ ○
Panel adjustment restore
this test mode is run.
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Writes data stored in No.0104 (Drum-parameter adjustment upload) into the

Sys/ Drum-parameter EEPROM on the print drum PCB. * This test cannot be run when the style differs
0106 - ○ ○ ○
Panel adjustment restore between the model and the print drum PCB and the style of the stored data differs
from that of the main unit.
Sys/ Test-mode parameter Stores test mode settings and their test numbers into the USB memory if their
0107 - ○ ○ ○
Panel record settings are changed from the default settings.
Basically, to clear a jam error status, the jam release procedure should be
Sys/

0110 Clear Error Status Data performed to remove the cause of the jam. However, this test mode can clear a jam - ○ ○ ○
Panel
error status forcibly, although consumable errors cannot be cleared.
Clears existing data (or resets it to the default) in the user area. The user area,
Sys/ in which users are allowed to edit data, stores memory functions, programs,
0111 Clear User Memory - ○ ○ ○
Panel properties, user mode settings, and other data. Note that the authentication
settings are cleared with No.118, rather than this test.
Resets all of the test mode settings stored in the machine memory to the default
settings.
Sys/ Clear Test Mode Data
0112 * The test mode settings in the protected area are not cleared. - ○ ○ ○
18 - 10
Panel Setup (Machine)
* This cannot be selected from the menu window.
* No message appears.
Resets the maintenance master counter that triggers maintenance calls.

Sys/ Maintenance-Master
0113 * When this counter is reset, the maintenance calls (for master making) will no - ○ ○ ○
Panel Count Clear
longer appear.
Resets the maintenance printing counter that triggers maintenance calls.

Sys/ Maintenance-Copy Count
0114 * When this counter is reset, the maintenance calls (for printing) will no longer - ○ ○ ○
Panel Clear
appear.
Resets the maintenance-drum meter that triggers maintenance calls.

Sys/ Maintenance-Drum Meter
0115 * When this meter is reset, the maintenance calls (for print drum) will no longer - ○ ○ ○
Panel Clear
appear.
Sys/ Initializes the user category, basic screen settings, and mode-change method
0116 Set-up Wizard Initialize - ○ × ×
Panel selection (No need to set the clock again).
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Resets all of the test mode settings stored in the drum EEPROM to the default
Sys/ Test Mode Data Clear settings.
0117 - ○ ○ ○
Panel (Drum) * The test mode settings in the protected area are not cleared.
Sys/ System Parameter Adjust Displays the check number and value of the setting that is changed from the
0120 - ○ ○ ○
Panel Record program default (No.1200s are not displayed).
Sys/
0121 SW Action Record Displays the codes of errors that caused the machine to stop (up to 64 errors). - ○ × ×

Panel
Sys/ Optional Configuration Lists errors with the types of T, A, and B that occurred in normal mode (up to 64
0122 - ○ ○ ○
Panel Check errors).
Sys/ Displays all values of the maintenance counters (master making, printing, and print
0123 Maintenance Count - ○ × ×
Panel drum).
Sys/ Serial Number Disp (Upper

0124 Displays the first 4 digits of the machine serial number. - ○ ○ ○
Panel 4 Digit)
Sys/ Serial Number Disp (Lower

0125 Displays the last 4 digits of the machine serial number. - ○ ○ ○
18 - 11
Panel 4 Digit)
Displays optional peripherals and devices currently connected.

Sys/ Optional Configuration
0126 * This displays the version of ROMVer, if applicable. - ○ × ×
Panel Check
* The DSP version is also included.
Sys/ Optional Configuration Displays the version of the sub processor program. For example, the seven-
0126 - × ○ ×
Panel Check segment display shows "101" for the version of Ver1.01.
Displays whether the auto document feeder is connected.

Sys/
0127 AF Configuration Check 0: Not connected - × ○ ○
Panel
1: Connected
Displays whether the job separator is connected.

Sys/ Job Separator Connection
0128 0: Not connected - × ○ ○
Panel Signal
1: Connected
Displays whether the NIC is connected.

Sys/ Ethernet PCB Connection
0129 0: Not connected - × ○ ○
Panel Signal
1: Connected
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Sys/ Displays the version of the system program. For example, the seven-segment
0131 System Program Ver. - × ○ ○
Panel display shows "101" for the version of Ver1.01.
[Program file information]

• Program file name
• Firmware type (MECH, ROSA, DSP)
Sys/
0132 Program File Info. Display • Machine model - ○ × ×
Panel
• Firmware version (V99.99)
• File date (yy/mm/dd for Japan, mm/dd/yy for overseas)

• Media type (U = USB, C = CF card)
Displays the paper ID identified based on the information from the paper width
potentiometer and the paper size detection sensor.
The IDs indicate the following:
00: No paper
01: A3
02: B4
03: A4
Sys/
0135 Paper Size ID Display 04: A4 landscape ○ ○ ○
18 - 12
Panel
05: B5
06: B5 landscape
07: A5
09: B6
11: Post card
50: Unknown 1 (The paper size detection sensor is ON)
51: Unknown 2 (The paper size detection sensor is OFF)
Displays the value of the maintenance counter (master making).

Sys/ Maintenance Count
0137 The displayed value "1" means 1000. - × ○ ○
Panel (Master Making)
* For example, the seven-segment display shows "1234" for 1,234,000.
Displays the value of the maintenance counter (printing).

Sys/ Maintenance Count
Panel (Printing)
Displays the value of the maintenance counter (print drum).

US.RISO.COM
Panel Display
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting value:
Sys/ Scan/Master-Making Specifies whether the scanning action and the master removal action are executed
0140 0: In parallel <default> × ○ ○
Panel Independent Mode in series or in parallel.
1: In series
Setting value:
Sys/
0141 Counter Display Control Specifies whether to display the counter display. 0: Not display ○ ○ ○
Panel
1: Display <default>
Setting range:

0 to 999900 masters
(The entered value must be 0 to 9999.)
Sys/ Maintenance-Master
0143 Sets the number of masters ( ≒ MC) that triggers the maintenance-call message. Unit: 1 (The value of 1 means 100 ○ ○ ○
Panel Count Entry
masters.)
Default: 0 (0 master: The maintenance
call is not triggered.)
Setting range:
0 to 9999000 prints
Sys/ Maintenance-Copy Count Sets the number of prints on the machine ( ≒ TC) that triggers the maintenance-
18 - 13
0144 Unit: 1 (The value of 1 means 1000 ○ ○ ○
Panel Entry call message.
prints.)
Default: 0 (0 print: The maintenance
Setting range:
0 to 9999000 prints
0145 Sets the number of print-drum prints that triggers the maintenance-call message. Unit: 1 (The value of 1 means 1000 ○ ○ ○
Panel Entry
prints.)
Default: 0 (0 print: The maintenance
Prevents machine vibration caused by the master removal action from affecting the
scanning quality. By default, the scanning action and the master removal action Setting value:
Sys/
0146 Scan First start at the same time. When this test mode is enabled, firstly the scanning action 0: Disabled <default> ○ × ×
Panel
starts and then the master removal and master making actions start after the 1: Enabled
scanning action is completed.
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Enables/Disables authentication.
Setting value
Sys/ Authentication Enable/ * This setting is effective only until the power is turned off. The setting is reset to
0149 0: Authentication disabled ○ ○ ○
Panel Disable Selection the default when the power is turned off.
1: Authentication enabled <default>
* No message or list is displayed.
Setting value
Sys/ Print Quantity Repeat
0150 Sets whether to retain the last count when the Auto Process function is OFF. 0: Do not retain <default> ○ × ×
Panel Setting
1: Retain

Setting value:
0: Disable gradual print speed
Sys/ Sets whether to enable gradual print speed acceleration after a short interval
0151 Print after Short Interval acceleration <default for Japan> ○ ○ ○
Panel between printing jobs.
1: Enable gradual print speed
acceleration <default for overseas>
Setting value
Sys/ "Lighten print" display
0152 Specifies whether to display "Lighten print" in Functions and Custom Setting Mode. 0: Not display <default> ○ ○ ○
Panel control
1: Display
Setting value
18 - 14
Sys/ Special Paper Ctrl Enable
0153 Specifies whether to display "Properties" - "Special Paper Ctrl". 0: Not display <default> ○ × ×
Panel Control
1: Display
Setting value:
Sys/ Sets whether to allow the "Minimum Print Q'ty" setting in Custom Setting Mode and
0154 Min. Print Quantity Control 0: Uneditable ○ ○ ○
Panel Properties to be edited.
1: Editable <default>
Enables/Disables the copy and master counters (solenoid counter and software Setting value:
Sys/
0155 Counter Action Control counter). 0: Counter disabled ○ ○ ○
Panel
* This setting is reset to the default when the power is turned off. 1: Counter enabled <default>
Setting value:
Sys/ Specifies whether to display a size warning (F02, F10, or F43) at the start of master
0159 "Warning" Display Control 0: Display the warning ○ × ×
Panel making or printing.
1: Not display the warning <default>
Setting value:
Sys/ Specifies whether to reactivate the Multi-Up Print setting after a Multi-Up Print 0: Do not reactivate (The Multi-Up
0160 Auto Multi-Up Recovery ○ × ×
Panel operation is completed while the Auto Process function is OFF. Print setting stays OFF) <default>
1: Reactivate
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting value
Sys/ Program Print Repeat Specifies whether to retain the Single Page Mode setting when the Auto Process
0161 0: Do not retain <default> ○ ○ ○
Panel Setting function is OFF.
1: Retain
When the Master Making mode is selected, the master making standby conditions
(TPH pressure, clamp opening position, and scanner lamp ON) are kept for the
period of time specified here. Setting value: 0 to 180 (0s (= No
Sys/ M-M Standby Period If this is set to 60 seconds or less, the THP, clamp, and scanner standby conditions standby) to 180s)
0162 ○ ○ ○
Panel Setting are cancelled when the specified period of time elapses. Default: 180 (180s)

If this is set to a value greater than 60 seconds, the scanner standby condition is Unit: 1 (1s)
cancelled when 60 seconds elapse and the THP and clamp standby conditions are
cancelled when the specified period of time elapses.
Setting range: -5 to +5 (0s to 2.5s)

Sys/ RLP Mode Switch Timing Sets the display change timing for cases where the RLP auto-selection mode is
0165 Unit: 1 (0.25s) ○ × ×
Panel Control used.
Default: 0 (1.25s)
Setting range:
0 to 9999 prints
18 - 15
Sys/ Enables/Disables the maximum print quantity setting, and also sets the maximum (The entered value must be 0 to 9999.)
0166 Max. Print Quantity Control ○ × ×
Panel print quantity. Unit: 1 (1 print)
Default: 0 (0 print: The maximum print
quantity setting is disabled.)
Setting:
0: Keep the current paper size settings
Sys/ Paper ID Auto-Repeat Specifies whether to reset the paper size settings to the default or keep the current
0167 <default> ○ × ×
Panel Control settings when the power is turned off or the all-reset operation is performed.
1: Reset the paper size settings to the
default
Setting value:
Sys/ "Properties" Display
0169 Specifies whether to display the Properties tab. 0: Not display ○ × ×
Panel Control
Setting value:
Sys/ Consumable Storage
0170 Specifies whether to display the Stock Management item on the Properties tab. 0: Not display <default for overseas> ○ ○ ○
Panel Indication
1: Display <default for Japan>
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting range: 2000 to 2199

Sets the year part of the date in the RTC. * When this test starts, the year of the Unit: 1 (year)
current RTC date appears on the seven-segment display. For example, "2002" Default:
Sys/ appears for the year of 2002. 2000 when the RTC has not yet been
0171 Clock Setting (YEAR) ○ ○ ○
Panel * Test Mode No.0101 (Clock Adjustment Confirm) must be run after values are set set (before No.0101 runs)
in Test Modes No.0171 - No.0173. Test Mode No.0101 applies values set in Test The RTC value at the start of the test
Modes No.0171 - No.0173 to the RTC. when the RTC has already been set
(after No.0101 runs)

Setting range:
First two digits: 1 to 12 (January to
December)
Sets the month and day parts of the date in the RTC. * When this test starts, the
Last two digits: 1 to 31 (1st to 31st)
month and day of the current RTC date appear on the seven-segment display. For
Unit: 1
Sys/ Clock Setting (MONTH & example, "1001" appears for October 1st.
0172 Default: ○ ○ ○
Panel DATE) * Test Mode No.0101 (Clock Adjustment Confirm) must be run after values are set
0101 when the RTC has not yet been
in Test Modes No.0171 - No.0173. Test Mode No.0101 applies values set in Test
set (before No.0101 runs)
Modes No.0171 - No.0173 to the RTC.
The RTC value at the start of the test
18 - 16
when the RTC has already been set
Setting range:
First two digits: 0 to 23 (hour)
Sets the hour and minute parts of the date in the RTC. * When this test starts, the Last two digits: 0 to 59 (minute)
hour and minute of the current RTC date appear on the seven-segment display. Unit: 1
Sys/ Clock Setting For example, "1845" appears for 18:45. Default:
0173 ○ ○ ○
Panel (HOUR & MINUTE) * Test Mode No.0101 (Clock Adjustment Confirm) must be run after values are set 0000 when the RTC has not yet been
in Test Modes No.0171 - No.0173. Test Mode No.0101 applies values set in Test set (before No.0101 runs)
Modes No.0171 - No.0173 to the RTC. The RTC value at the start of the test
when the RTC has already been set
Enables/Disables the maintenance information to be sent via email.

Setting value:
Sys/ Service Info. File Mail [Sending maintenance information via email]
0181 0: Disabled <default> ○ × ×
Panel Control The Maintenance Information email button appears in Functions when this test
1: Enabled
mode is set to be enabled.
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Enables/Disables the stock management information to be sent via email.

Setting value:
Sys/ Counter/Stock Info. Mail [Sending stock management information via email]
0182 0: Disabled <default> ○ ○ ○
Panel Control The Counter/Stock Info. email setting button appears in Properties when this test
1: Enabled
mode is set to be enabled.
Setting value:
Sys/ Counter Report Enable Specifies whether to display "Counter Report" in Custom Setting Mode or
0183 0: Not display <default> ○ ○ ○
Panel Control Functions.
1: Display

Unit: 1
Setting value:
0: No reminder is displayed. <default>
Sys/ Counter Report Reminder 1 to 31: A reminder is displayed on the
0184 Sets the date when to display a reminder for the counter report. ○ ○ ○
Panel Date Setting specified date. * The reminder date is
replaced with the last day of the month
when the specified date is 29, 30, or
31 and the date does not exist in the
18 - 17
month.
Enables/Disables the ID counter report and counter report to be sent via email.
When the ID counter report is enabled to be sent via email, the email button Setting value:
Sys/ Counter Report Mail
0185 appears on the ID Counter Report window in Functions. [Sending the counter 0: Disabled <default> ○ ○ ○
Panel Enable Control
report via email] When this test mode set to "1" and Test Mode No.0183 is set to 1: Enabled
"1", the email button appears on the Counter Report window in Functions.
Setting value:
Sys/
0186 Private MIB Enable Control Enables/Disables RISO Private MIB. 0: Disabled ○ ○ ○
Panel
1: Enabled <default>
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Specifies whether to spool or discard DtoP jobs (LAN/USB) when the RISOGRAPH
cannot receive the jobs. [When this is set to 0 (jobs are spooled)]
Jobs are spooled (not discarded) even when the RISOGRAPH cannot receive the
jobs. That is, jobs sent from the PC never disappear. However, a sent job may
time out on the PC when the RISOGRAPH cannot receive jobs for a long time. In Setting value:
Sys/
0187 Job Spool Setting such a case, the print image can be partially missed even though the RISOGRAPH 0: Spool jobs <default> ○ × ×
Panel
receives the job. [When this is set to 1 (jobs are discarded)] 1: Discard jobs
Jobs are discarded when the RISOGRAPH cannot receive the jobs.

This prevents the print image from being partially missed even when the
RISOGRAPH cannot receive jobs for a long time and the sent job times out on the
PC.
Setting value:
Sys/ High Speed Button on
0190 Specifies whether to display the high speed button. 0: Not display ○ ○ ×
Panel Display
Setting value:
Sys/ Original Undetected
0191 Specifies whether to display a warning indicating that no original is detected. 0: Not display <default> × ○ ○
Panel Warning Display Ctl.
1: Display
18 - 18
Sys/ Software Option Enable Allows users to enter the software editor release code (8-digit number) and press
0199 Unit: 1 ○ × ×
Panel Control the Start key to enable the software editor.
Default: 00000000
Proc/ Image Scanner ADF Light blocked - ON (The carriage is in the home position)
0200 - ○ ○ ○
Scan Shading Sensor Light not blocked - OFF
Proc/
0260 Scanner Lamp Switches ON/OFF the scanner lamp for original scanning. - ○ ○ ○
Scan
Proc/
0281 Scanner Home Action Brings the carriage to the home position. - ○ ○ ○
Scan
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Continuously repeat a cycle of the scanning action including the auto-base-control

(ABC) action.
Home positioning → Shading compensation → Auto base control action → A3

Proc/ Scanner Cycle Continuous scanning → Home positioning
0284 - ○ ○ ○
Scan Action
Pressing the Stop key terminates the scanning action and performs the home
positioning action.

* A speed adjustment (size reproduction) set in No.4904 must be applied.
* The image signal must be output.
Moves the scanner to the scanner lamp removal position.

Proc/ Scanner Lamp Replace
0287 * Pressing the Start key moves the scanner to the position away from the sensor - ○ ○ ○
Scan Positioning
edge by 204mm in the scanning direction.
Moves the scanner to the machine shipping position.

Proc/ Scanner "Shipping"
0289 * Pressing the Start key moves the scanner upward from the FB scanner HP - ○ ○ ○
Scan Positioning
sensor by TBD mm.
18 - 19
Setting range: -16 to 16 (A greater
Proc/ Line-copy Slice Level value results in lighter).
0340 Adjusts the slice level for line mode (Contrast 3). ○ ○ ○
Scan Adjustment Unit: 1
Default: 0
Setting range: -16 to 16 (A greater

Proc/ Base Tone Slice Level value results in lighter).
0341 Adjusts the slice level for line mode (Contrast ABC). ○ ○ ○
Scan Adjustment Unit: 1
Default: 0
Proc/
0342 Shading Frequency Sets the shading frequency. Unit: 1 ○ ○ ○
Scan
Default: 8
Adjusts the threshold to prevent a one-dot fine line from disappearing when the
Setting range: -8 to 8
Proc/ ABC Slice Level Set image size is reduced.
0343 Unit: 1 ○ ○ ○
Scan (Reduction Mode) * This test is available only when the Line mode is selected, the original scanning
Default: -3
density is set to AUTO, and the size is reduced.
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting value:
0: Error diffusion <default>
Proc/ Allows the default setting of image processing for the Photo and Duo modes to be 1: Dot 1
0345 Photo/Duo Default Setting ○ × ×
Scan edited in test mode. 2: Dot 2
3: Dot 3
4: Dot 4
Setting value:
Proc/ Allows the default setting of image processing for the Photo and Duo modes to be 0: Error diffusion <default>

0345 Photo/Duo Default Setting × ○ ○
Scan edited in test mode. 1: Dot 1
2: Dot 2
Selects the matrix forming the halftone-curve base for the Photo mode. *For EZ2/3, Setting range: 0 to 8
Proc/ Halftone Curve Selection
0350 RZ6/EZ5, and RZ2/3/5, selecting a tone curve is not allowed in normal mode. The Unit: 1 ○ ○ ○
Scan (Photo)
center tone curve in the matrix that was selected in test mode is used. Default: 4
Selects the matrix forming the halftone-curve base for the Dot mode. *For EZ2/3, Setting range: 0 to 8
Scan (Dot)
18 - 20
Selects the matrix forming the halftone-curve base for the Duo mode. *For EZ2/3, Setting range: 0 to 8
Scan (Duo)
Selects the matrix forming the halftone-curve base for the Dot + Duo mode. *For Setting range: 0 to 8
0353 EZ2/3, RZ6/EZ5, and RZ2/3/5, selecting a tone curve is not allowed in normal Unit: 1 ○ ○ ○
Scan (Dot+Duo)
mode. The center tone curve in the matrix that was selected in test mode is used. Default: 4

Proc/ Trimming Slice Level Sets the slice level for trimming.
0359 Unit: 1 ○ ○ ○
Scan Adjustment A greater value reduces the center area.
Default: -2
Setting value:
Proc/ Line Edge Stress Level Enables/Disables a mode that lowers the edge enhancement level to prevent dots
Scan Reduction from being printed when the original is coarse paper or other dark paper.
1: Enabled
Setting value:
Proc/ Scanner Standby Position Changes the carriage standby position. * Setting this test mode to 1 disables the
0368 0: HP <default> ○ ○ ○
Scan Control quick start function.
1: Second HP
US.RISO.COM
Proc/ ABC Slice Level (Super A histogram created by prescanning in ABC (Line mode and Auto density) is used Setting range: -16 to 16
0372 ○ ○ ○
Scan Black) to adjust the slice level for super black. Default: 0
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting range: -30 to 30 (±3.0mm from

Adjusts the horizontal position when the original is scanned on the FB.
the home position) (A positive value
Proc/ FB Horizontal Scan For AF, a different setting is provided.
0380 moves the position left.) ○ ○ ○
Scan Position Adjust * For LCD machines, this represents the Image Horizontal Slide of guidance
Unit: 5 (0.5mm)
graphic.
Default: 0 (0mm)

Adjusts the scanning start position (the length to be skipped) when the original is
Proc/ FB Scan Start Position moves the position downward, which

0381 scanned on the FB. ○ ○ ○
Scan Adjust causes the image to move upward.)
* For LCD machines, this represents the Image Vertical Slide of guidance graphic.
Unit: 1 (0.1mm)
Default: 0 (0mm)
Setting range: -50 to 50 (±5.0%

Adjusts the scanning speed (image) when the original is scanned on the FB.→
from the base speed) (A negative
(Adjusts the scanner LST interval.) * For LCD machines, this represents the Image
value results in shrinkage. The logic
Proc/ FB Scanning Speed Vertical Elongation/Shrinkage of guidance graphic.
0382 is reversed with considering the ○ ○ ○
Scan Adjustment * The following values should result in a change by ±1mm:
adjustment of guidance graphic.)
A3: ±0.2%, B4: ±0.3%,
Unit: 1 (0.1%)
18 - 21
A4: ±0.3%, Ledger: ±0.2%, Legal: ±0.3%
Default: 0 (0%)
Adds a black center line on the image data that was scanned from the scanner, Setting value
Proc/ during master making or RLP output. *The black line is added only when the 0: Not add a black center line
0386 Center Black Dot Control ○ ○ ○
Scan original is scanned from the scanner. <default>
* This setting is reset to the default when the power is turned off. 1: Add a black center line
Enables/Disables the black line removal. Setting value:

Proc/ Black Line Removal
0387 Black lines are removed by changing data in the shading memory on the scanner. * 0: Disabled <default> ○ ○ ○
Scan Control
This cannot be selected from the menu window. The name is not displayed. 1: Enabled
Proc/ Line Edge Stress Level
0399 Sets the offset for the edge emphasis threshold. Unit: 1 ○ ○ ○
Scan Offset
Default: 0
Light not blocked - ON (The master is present), Light blocked - OFF (The master is
Master 0400 Master Positioning Sensor - ○ ○ ○
not present)
Light blocked - OFF (The master is present), Light not blocked - ON (The master is
Master 0401 Master Detection Sensor - ○ ○ ○
not present)
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Light blocked - ON (The master end seal is present), Light not blocked - OFF (The
Master 0402 Master End Sensor - ○ ○ ○
master end seal is not present)
Cutter Home Position Switch OFF (The cutter is in the home position), Switch ON (The cutter is not in the
Master 0403 - ○ ○ ○
Switch home position)
Switch OFF (The cutter is in the end position), Switch ON (The cutter is not in the
Master 0404 Cutter Stop Position SW - × ○ ○
end position)
Light blocked - ON (The light block plate is present), Light not blocked - OFF (The
Master 0406 TPH Pressure Switch -

○ ○ ○
light block plate is not present)
Master Making Unit

Master 0407 Light blocked - ON (The master making unit/cover is closed) - ○ ○ ○
Interlock Switch
Master Making Unit Lock Light blocked - ON (The light block plate is present. Locked),
Master 0408 - ○ ○ ○
Sensor Light not blocked - OFF (The light block plate is not present. Unlocked)
Master Making Unit Switch ON (The master making unit is set),

Master 0409 - ○ ○ ○
Interlock SW Switch OFF (Interlock)
Master Making Unit
18 - 22
Master 0410 Switch ON (The button is pressed), Switch OFF (The button is not pressed) - ○ ○ ○
Releasing Button
Master Disposal Jam Light not blocked - ON (The master is present), Light blocked (The master is not
Master 0420 - ○ ○ ○
Sensor present)
Master Compression Light blocked - ON (In the master compression plate home position), Light not
Master 0421 - ○ ○ ○
Sensor blocked - OFF (Not in the master compression plate home position)
Disposal Box Interlock

Master 0423 Switch ON (The master disposal box is set), Switch OFF (Interlock) - ○ ○ ○
Switch
Light blocked - ON (The master disposal box is set), Light not blocked - OFF (The
Master 0424 Disposal Box Set Sensor - ○ ○ ○
master disposal box is not set)
Master Compress Motor Light blocked - ON (The light block plate is present), Light not blocked - OFF (The
Master 0425 - ○ ○ ○
FG Sensor light block plate is not present)
Master Disposal Motor FG Light blocked - ON (The light block plate is present), Light not blocked - OFF (The
Master 0426 - ○ ○ ○
Sensor light block plate is not present)
US.RISO.COM
Thermal Pressure Motor
Master 0460 Rotates in the clockwise (CW) direction. - ○ ○ ○
(CW)
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3

Master 0461 Rotates in the counter clockwise (CCW) direction. - ○ ○ ○
(CCW)
Write Pulse Motor CW

Master 0462 Rotates in the clockwise (CW) direction (master feed direction). - ○ ○ ○
(Feed)
Write Pulse Motor CCW

Master 0463 Rotates in the counter clockwise (CCW) direction (master reverse direction). - ○ ○ ○
(Reverse)
Load Pulse Motor CW

Master 0464 Rotates in the clockwise (CW) direction (master feed direction). - ○ ○ ○
(Feed)
Rotates both the write pulse motor and load pulse motor in the clockwise (CW)
Master 0466 Write & Load Pulse Motors direction. They rotate when the Start key is pressed, and they stop when the Stop - ○ ○ ○
key is pressed.
Master Making Unit

Master 0467 The LED for the master making unit release button illuminates. - ○ ○ ○
Release LED
Rotates in the clockwise (CW) direction (which causes the master to move towards
Master 0470 Master Disposal Motor - ○ ○ ○
the box).
18 - 23
Performs one cutting action. (For a shuttle cutter, the home positioning action is
Master 0480 Cutter Motor Cycle Action - ○ ○ ○
performed 100msec after the cutting action is completed.)
Thermal Press. Motor

Master 0481 Moves the TPH to increase the pressure. - ○ ○ ○
Action (+)
Thermal Press. Motor

Master 0482 Moves the TPH to decrease the pressure. - ○ ○ ○
Action (-)
Master Making Unit Lock Press the Start key to switch ON the solenoid.
Master 0488 - ○ ○ ○
Solenoid It automatically switches OFF after 10 seconds.
Compression Plate Home

Master 0490 Moves the master compression plate to the home position. - ○ ○ ○
Action
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Moves the compression plate to the protection mode position where the master
disposal box is locked while the protection mode is ON.
1. Determine whether the compression plate is in the home position. If not, return
M.-Compress. PROTECT
Master 0491 the plate to the home position. - ○ × ×
Position
2. Move the plate to the protection mode position where the master disposal box is
locked.
(By default, the position is away from the HP by 66 pulses.)
Repeats the master compressing action as follows:

Execute a cycle of the master compressing action → Wait for three seconds →
Execute a cycle of the master compressing action → ...
* If the master compression plate is not in the home position at the beginning
Master 0493 Compression Cycle Action - ○ ○ ○
of the test, the plate must be returned to the home position before the master
compressing action can start.
* The settings from No.0573 (Compression Limit Position Count) and No.0575
(Compress. Load Application Time) must be applied.
Rotates the cutter motor in the cut direction (for up to 10 seconds). Caution: This
test mode is to check the IC driver.
18 - 24
Master 0494 Cutter Motor - ○ ○ ○
Disconnect the connector of the motor before this test mode starts.
Otherwise the machine will be damaged.
Clear Master Disposal

Master 0510 Clears the master disposal count display (Sets the count to 0). - ○ ○ ○
Count
TPH Thermistor Converts an A/D (analog-to-digital) converted 8-bit value to a temperature and
Master 0521 - ○ ○ ○
Temperature Data displays it.
Powers on the TPH and displays the voltage applied to the TPH.
Master 0524 Thermal Power Voltage * The displayed value is 100 times the applied voltage (for example, "1000" - ○ ○ ○
appears for 10V).
Displays the master use start date recorded in the tag on the master.
Master 0527 Master Usage Start Date For LED machines, 2003/2/28 is indicated by displaying "2003" and "0228" - ○ ○ ○
alternately.
Master Disposal Count

Master 0528 Displays the recorded count value. - ○ ○ ○
Display
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting range:
0mm to +10mm (A positive value
Master Front End Position Adjusts the backward movement of the master after the master cutting action, so moves the position backward.)
Master 0540 ○ ○ ○
Adjust the Master positioning sensor is OFF when the master set action is completed. The entered value must be 0 to +100.
Unit: 1 (0.1mm)
Default: 50
Adjusts the write start position. (An adjustment to the master clamp amount is also
Setting range:
applied)

±5.0mm from the home position (A
This adjustment is the amount of the backward movement of the master just
positive value moves the position
Write Start Position before the start of writing. * For LCD machines, this represents the Vertical Slide of
Master 0541 upward.) ○ ○ ○
Adjustment guidance graphic.
The entered value must be -50 to +50.
* This test mode does not affect the master clamp amount but the value set in the
Unit: 1 (0.1mm)
master clamp amount adjustment is added. (The setting value in No.543 (Master
Default: -15 (-1.5mm)
Clamp Range Adjustment) is still 0.)
Setting range:
±10.0mm (A positive value increases
the length.)
18 - 25
Master-Making Length Adjusts the master making area (sub scanning length)
Master 0542 The entered value must be -100 to ○ ○ ○
Adjustment * An adjustment made in this test mode affects the master length.
+100.
Unit: 1 (0.1mm)
Default: 0 (0mm)
Setting range:
Adjusts the master clamp amount during master loading. (This adjustment is positive value increases the clamp
Master Clamp Range independent from Write Start Position Adjustment.) amount.)
Master 0543 ○ ○ ○
Adjustment * An adjustment made in this test mode affects the master clamp amount, which The entered value must be -100 to
causes the write start position to change. +100.
Unit: 1 (0.1mm)
Default: 0 (0mm)
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting range:
±10.0° from the base degree (A
positive value lengthens the master)
Master Cut Length Adjusts the total length of a master by changing the master cut timing. The entered value must be -100 to
Master 0544 ○ ○ ○
Adjustment * 1 degree greater = approximately 1.5mm longer. +100.
Unit: 5 (0.5°)
Default: -10 (-1°) *As an exception, -5

(-0.5°) for M/H-A3, Ledger machines

TPH Thermal Power
Master 0545 Adjusts the TPH heat energy. Unit: 1 ○ ○ ○
Adjustment
Default: 2
Setting range:
±10.0% from the base speed (A
negative value results in shrinkage.
The logic is reversed with considering
the adjustment of guidance graphic.)
The entered value must be -100 to
18 - 26
Master-Making Speed Adjusts the speed of the write pulse motor when writing. * For LCD machines, this
Master 0547 +100. ○ ○ ○
Adjustment represents the Vertical Elongation/Shrinkage of guidance graphic.
Unit: 1 (0.1%)
Default:
B4 machine: 5 (0.5%)
CED-HL (A3 machine): 2 (0.2%)
CED-HL (B4 machine): 5 (0.5%)
Other: 0 (0%)
Setting range:
23.05mm to 23.15mm
W-Roller Diameter Compensates for individual difference in the diameter of the write roller. The entered value must be 2305 to
Master 0548 ○ × ×
Reference Adj. Enter a 100 times value. 2315.
Unit: 1 (0.01mm)
Default: 2310 (23.10mm)
Allows an error in master end detection to depend on the master usage volume. Setting value:
In master end detection, "C02-253" is displayed when the master usage volume 0: Traditional method
Master Replacement
US.RISO.COM
Master 0557 is [Setting value X%] or greater, or "C02-200" is displayed when the master usage 1: New method [X=95%] <default> ○ ○ ○
Display Selection
volume is less than [Setting value X%]. * For overseas machines, this cannot be 2: New method [X=90%]
selected from the menu window and the name is not displayed. 3: New method [X=85%]
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
0: Do not control the positioning action

(a traditional way)
* The master positioning sensor is
not checked when the TPH pressure
For the master positioning action after master setting or master cutting, this setting motor applies a force.
Master Front End Pos specifies whether to check the master positioning sensor when the TPH pressure 1: Control the positioning action
Master 0567 ○ ○ ○
Selection motor applies a force before a backward movement of the master and control the <default>
positioning action depending on the status of the sensor. * The master positioning sensor is

checked when the TPH pressure
motor applies a force and the action
is controlled depending on the status
(ON or OFF) of the sensor.
Specifies a table to determine an adjustment value depending on the master

remaining volume. The adjustment value is automatically added to the value set in
No.0547 (Master-Making Speed Adjustment). <A3/Ledger (including A4-R)>
Master Vol. Default Table 1 Table 2
75 - 100% ±0% ±0% ±0%
18 - 27
50 - 74% ±0% +0.15% +0.3% Setting value:
Master-Making Speed Adj. 25 - 49% +0.05% +0.3% +0.6% 0: Default <default>
Master 0568 ○ × ×
(Master Vol) 0 - 24% +0.10% +0.5% +1.0% 1: Table 1
<B4> 2: Table 2
Master Vol. Default Table 1 Table 2
75 - 100% ±0% ±0% ±0%
50 - 74% ±0% +0.15% +0.3%
25 - 49% +0.10% +0.3% +0.6%
0 - 24% +0.20% +0.5% +1.0%
Setting range: 0 to ±50

M.-Rmv. Roller Stop (0° to ±50°)
Master 0570 Adjusts the print drum angle at which the master removal roller stops. ○ ○ ○
Timing Unit: 1 (1°)
Default: 0
Setting range: 0 to ±50

M.-Rmv. Roller Stop Adjusts the print drum angle at which the master removal motor stops. * Only for (0° to ±50°)
Master 0571 ○ × ×
Timing (A4W) the A4W drum Unit: 1 (1°)
US.RISO.COM
Default: 0
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Specifies whether to perform the compulsory set action of the master removal box Setting value:
Master Removal Box Set-
Master 0572 when the power is turned on, the machine wakes up, or the master removal box is 0: Disabled <default> ○ ○ ○
Motion
reset. * This cannot be selected from the menu window. The name is not displayed. 1: Enabled
Setting range: 106 to 163 pulses

(Master compression plate angle from
the home position:
Compression Limit Position 65° to 100°)

Master 0573 Sets the pulse count for the compression limit position. ○ ○ ○
Count Unit: 1 (1 pulse)

Default:
A3/Ledger: 155 (155 pulses)
Other: 147 (147 pulses)

Sets the period of time until a compression is detected (one FG interval).
Compress. Load (5ms to 70ms)
Master 0575 When the specified period is exceeded, a compression is detected and the ○ ○ ○
Application Time Unit: 25 (0.25ms)
compression action stops.
Default: 4000 (40ms)
18 - 28
the home position:
49° to 99°)
Full Box Compression
Master 0576 Sets the pulse count indicating that the master disposal box is full. Unit: 1 (1 pulse) ○ ○ ○
Count
Default:
A3/Ledger: 80 (49°)
B4/Legal: 146 (90°)
A4/Letter: 146 (90°)
Adjustment range: 0 to ±30 (0 to ±30

pulses)
M.-Compress. PROTECT Adjusts the protection mode position of the compression plate where the master
Master 0577 the home position: 21.6° to 57.6°) ○ × ×
Pos. Adjustment disposal box is locked while the protection mode is ON.
Unit: 5 (5 pulses)
Default: -20 (Master compression plate
angle from the home position: 27.6°)
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting value:
0: 0.9 x Drum speed
1: 1.0 x Drum speed
Disposal Motor Speed Selects the master disposal motor speed in relation to the master disposal drum
Master 0578 2: 1.05 x Drum speed ○ ○ ○
Selection speed.
3: 1.1 x Drum speed <default>
4: 1.2 x Drum speed
5: 1.3 x Drum speed
Setting:

Compress Limit Pos Enables/Disables automatic adjustment to the default value of the compressing
Master 0579 0: Disabled ○ ○ ○
Compensation stop position.
Setting value: 50 to 100

Master Disposal Limiter Sets the number of masters indicating that the master disposal box is full. This (50 to 100 masters)
Master 0584 ○ ○ ○
Setting setting is for cases where whether the box is full is determined by the software. Unit: 10 (10 masters)
Default: 100 (100 masters)
Setting:
Master Disposal Limit Specifies whether to detect a full box by using the software counter or by using a
Master 0585 0: Disabled ○ ○ ○
Setting traditional way (based on the FG interval and compression plate angle).
18 - 29
Paper 0600 Paper Detection Sensor ON: Light received (The paper is present) - ○ ○ ○
Paper Size Detection

Paper 0601 ON: Light received (The paper is present) - ○ ○ ○
Sensor
Elevator Upper Limit ON: Light path blocked (The light block plate is present)
Paper 0602 - ○ ○ ○
Sensor A (The upper limit position depends on the combination of A and B.)
Elevator Upper Limit ON: Light path blocked (The light block plate is present)
Paper 0603 - ○ ○ ○
Sensor B (The upper limit position depends on the combination of A and B.)
Elevator Lower Limit Light blocked - ON (The paper feed tray is in the lower limit position),
Paper 0604 - ○ ○ ○
Sensor Light not blocked - OFF (The paper feed tray is not in the lower limit position)
Paper 0605 Paper Feed Sensor Light blocked - ON (The paper is present) - ○ ○ ○
Paper 0606 Paper Ejection Sensor ON: Light received (The paper is present) - ○ ○ ○
US.RISO.COM
Paper Feed Tray Upper
Paper 0607 Switch ON (The paper feed tray can work), Switch OFF (Interlock) - ○ ○ ○
Interlock SW
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Paper Feed Tray Lower

Interlock SW
Paper 0609 Feed Tray Button Switch ON (The button is pressed) - ○ ○ ○

Light blocked - ON (The light block plate is present), Light not blocked - OFF (The
Paper 0612 Paper Ejection FG Sensor - ○ ○ ○
light block plate is not present)
Special Stripper Unit Light blocked - ON (The special stripper unit is present), Light not blocked - OFF
Paper 0613 - ○ ○ ○
Sensor (The special stripper unit is not present)

Light blocked - ON (The paper feed pressure adjust lever is in the Card position),
Paper Feed Pressure
Paper 0614 Light not blocked - OFF (The paper feed pressure adjust lever is not in the Card - ○ ○ ○
Sensor
position)
Paper Ejection Wing Home Light blocked - ON (The light block plate is present), Light not blocked - OFF (The
Paper 0618 - ○ × ×
Sensor light block plate is not present)
This is either ON or OFF.

Paper 0660 Paper Ejection Motor - ○ ○ ○
Press the Stop key to stop.
18 - 30
Paper 0661 Suction Fan - ○ ○ ○

Paper 0662 Separation Fan - ○ ○ ○
Paper Ejection Wing Motor This is either ON or OFF.

Paper 0666 - ○ × ×
(CW) Press the Stop key to stop.
Paper Ejection Wing Motor This is either ON or OFF.

Paper 0667 - ○ × ×
(CCW) Press the Stop key to stop.
Press the Start key to turn on the separation fan and suction fan at the same time.
Paper 0680 Paper Ejecting Fans Action - ○ × ×
Paper Feed Tray Max. Up Press the Start key to move the elevator to the paper feed position.
Paper 0681 - ○ ○ ○
Positioning The test automatically ends when the paper feed positioning action is completed.
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Raises and lowers the paper feed tray repeatedly.

* This test starts with an upward movement unless the paper feed tray is in the
Paper 0682 Elevator Motor Action upper limit position. - ○ ○ ○
* The paper feed tray stops when the Stop key is pressed. The paper feed tray
stops in the upper and lower limit positions for one second.
Elevator Motor Action Press the Start key to move the elevator to the lower limit position.
Paper 0683 - ○ ○ ○
(down) * The elevator stops when the Stop key is pressed.

Press the Start key to switch ON the solenoid.
Paper 0687 Paper Feed Solenoid - ○ ○ ○
It automatically switches OFF after 10 seconds.
Paper Feed Clutch ON/ Press the Start key to switch ON the clutch.
Paper 0688 - ○ ○ ○
OFF Action The clutch automatically switches OFF after 10 seconds.
Press the Start key to switch ON the clutch.

Paper 0689 Scraper Clutch (Option) - ○ ○ ○
The clutch automatically switches OFF after 10 seconds.
Paper Ejection Wing Home

Paper 0703 Moves the paper ejection wing to the home position. - ○ × ×
Action
18 - 31
Paper Ejection Wing
Paper 0704 Moves the paper ejection wing to the position set in No.780. - ○ × ×
Target Shift
Check the A/D value on the receiver when the D/A value of 127 (8-bit) is applied on
the sender.
When the A/D value does not fall in the range of 248±18, decrease the D/A value
Paper Sensor Auto
Paper 0705 by 1 to decrease the A/D value, or increase the D/A value by 1 to increase the A/ - ○ ○ ○
Adjustment
D value. Identify and record a D/A value that achieves an A/D value in the range of
248±18.
* This test must be run when thin RISO paper is set in the paper feed tray.
Rotates the elevator motor in the upward direction (for up to 10 seconds). Caution:
This test mode is to check the IC driver.
Paper 0708 Elevator Motor Action (up) - ○ ○ ○
Disconnect the connector of the motor before this test mode starts.
Adjusted paper width (mm)

Paper 0721 Paper Width Metric Data - ○ ○ ○
(up to one digit after the decimal point)
US.RISO.COM
Paper Feed Sensor A/D
Paper 0722 The A/D value of the paper sensor - ○ ○ ○
Data
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting value:
0: Auto (depending on the paper feed
Selects the upper limit position of the paper feed tray. When 0 (Auto) is selected,
Elevator Upper Limit pressure adjust lever) <default>
Paper 0740 the upper limit position depends on the paper feed pressure. When 1, 2 or 3 is ○ ○ ×
Selection 1: Standard paper position
selected, the upper limit position is set to a specific position.
2: Card paper position
3: Custom paper position
Specifies an adjustment to be made to the activation angle at which the paper feed
clutch is activated. This setting is for the Paper Quality of Standard.

* For LED machines, the adjustment value set in the Paper Quality setting is added Setting range: 0 to ±200 (±20.0° from
when one of User 1 - 5 is selected for the Paper Quality setting in Custom Setting the base angle) (A positive value
Paper Feed Clutch ON
Paper 0741 Mode. delays ON.) × × ○
Angle
* When the paper feed adjustment is selected, the selected adjustment value is Unit: 5 (0.5°)
added. Default: 0 (0°)
* This setting is applied only when the paper feed pressure adjust lever is set to
Standard.
clutch is activated. This setting is for the Paper Quality of Standard.
18 - 32
Paper Feed Clutch ON
Paper 0741 Mode. delays ON.) ○ ○ ×
Angle
added. Default: -30 (-3°)
Standard.
clutch is deactivated. This setting is for the Paper Quality of Standard.
Paper Feed Clutch OFF
Paper 0742 Mode. delays OFF.) ○ ○ ○
Angle
added. Default: 0 (0°)
Standard.
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting value:
1: One no-paper feed (no retry)
<default>
The first no-paper feed causes a no-
paper feed error to be issued.
Sets the number of no-paper feed retries. For duplex printing machines, no retry is
Paper 0743 Paper Feed Retry 2: Two no-paper feeds (one retry) ○ ○ ○
attempted regardless of this setting when duplex printing is enabled.
The second no-paper feed causes a
no-paper feed error to be issued.

3: Three no-paper feeds (two retries)
The third no-paper feed causes a no-
paper feed error to be issued.
Setting range: 0 to ±200 (±20.0° from
clutch is deactivated. This setting is for the Paper Quality of Card.
the base angle) (A positive value
Paper Feed Clutch OFF * When the paper feed adjustment is selected, the selected adjustment value is
Paper 0744 delays ON.) ○ ○ ×
Angle/Card added.
Unit: 5 (0.5°)
Default: 0 (0°)
Card.
18 - 33
Setting range: 0 to ±200 (±20.0° from
clutch is activated. This setting is for the Paper Quality of Card.
the base angle) (A positive value
Paper Feed Clutch ON * When the paper feed adjustment is selected, the selected adjustment value is
Paper 0745 delays OFF.) ○ ○ ×
Angle/Card added.
Unit: 5 (0.5°)
Default: -30 (-3°)
Card.
Setting range:
±10.0° from the base angle (A positive
value delays OFF.)
Paper 0748 Scraper Clutch OFF Angle Specifies the activation angle at which the scraper clutch is deactivated. ○ ○ ○
The entered value must be 0 to ±100.
Unit: 5 (0.5°)
Default: 0 (0°)
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting value:
0: Disabled (The control with the
paper feed reverse-rotation prevention
Paper Feed Solenoid solenoid is disabled.)
Paper 0750 Enables/Disables the paper feed reverse-rotation prevention solenoid. ○ ○ ○
Enable Control 1: Enabled (The control with the paper
feed reverse-rotation prevention
solenoid is enabled when "Card" is

selected.) <default>

Setting range:
Paper Feed Jam Detection value delays the detection.)
Paper 0751 Adjusts the activation angle for detecting a paper feed IN jam. ○ ○ ○
Angle/IN The entered value must be 0 to ±200.
Unit: 5 (0.5°)
Default: 0 (0°)
Setting range:
Paper Feed Detection value delays the detection.)
18 - 34
Paper 0752 Adjusts the activation angle for detecting a paper feed OUT jam. ○ × ×
Angle Adj. The entered value must be 0 to ±200.
Unit: 5 (0.5°)
Default: 0 (0°)
Setting range:
Paper Eject Jam Det. value delays the detection.)
Paper 0753 Adjusts the activation angle for detecting a paper ejection IN jam. ○ ○ ○
Angle/IN The entered value must be 0 to ±500.
Unit: 5 (0.5°)
Default: 0 (0°)
Setting range:
Paper Eject Jam Det. value delays the detection.)
Paper 0754 Adjusts the activation angle for detecting a paper ejection OUT jam. ○ ○ ○
Angle/OUT The entered value must be 0 to ±500.
Unit: 5 (0.5°)
Default: 0 (0°)
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting value:
0: Drum speed/Transfer belt speed:
3.0 times
3.4 times <default>
Paper Ejection Motor
Paper 0755 Sets the target speed of the paper ejection motor. 2: Drum speed/Transfer belt speed: ○ ○ ○
Speed Adj. PP
3.7 times

4.0 times
4.5 times
Setting value:
1.5 times
1.7 times <default>
Paper 0756 Sets the target speed of the paper ejection motor for Speed 1. 2: Drum speed/Transfer belt speed: ○ ○ ○
Speed Adj. 1
18 - 35
1.8 times
1.9 times
2.0 times
Setting value:
1.3 times
1.5 times <default>
Speed Adj. 2
1.6 times
1.7 times
1.8 times
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting value:
1.1 times
1.3 times <default>
Paper 0758 Sets the target speed of the paper ejection motor for Speed 3. 2: Drum speed/Transfer belt speed: × × ○
Speed Adj. 3
1.4 times

1.5 times
1.6 times
Setting value:
1.1 times
1.3 times
Paper 0758 Sets the target speed of the paper ejection motor for Speed 3. 2: Drum speed/Transfer belt speed: ○ ○ ×
Speed Adj. 3
18 - 36
1.4 times
1.5 times <default>
1.6 times
Setting value:
1.0 times
1.1 times <default>
Paper 0759 Sets the target speed of the paper ejection motor for Speed 4. 2: Drum speed/Transfer belt speed: ○ × ×
Speed Adj. 4
1.2 times
1.3 times
1.4 times
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting value:
1.0 times
1.1 times
Paper 0759 Sets the target speed of the paper ejection motor for Speed 4. 2: Drum speed/Transfer belt speed: × ○ ○
Speed Adj. 4
1.2 times <default>

1.3 times
1.4 times
Setting value:
1.0 times
1.1 times
Speed Adj. 5
18 - 37
1.2 times <default>
1.3 times
1.4 times
Setting range:
Adjusts the activation angle at which the paper feed clutch is activated. This test ±20° from the base angle (A positive
Paper Feed Clutch ON mode is for cases where User 1 is selected for the Paper Quality setting in Custom value delays ON.)
Paper 0761 × ○ ○
Angle 1 Setting Mode. * The value set in this test mode is added to the adjustment value The entered value must be 0 to ±200.
set in No.741 (Paper Feed Clutch ON Angle). Unit: 5 (0.5°)
Default: 0 (0°)
Setting range:
Adjusts the activation angle at which the paper feed clutch is deactivated. This test
±20° from the base angle (A positive
mode is for cases where User 1 is selected for the Paper Quality setting in Custom
Paper Feed Clutch OFF value delays OFF.)
Paper 0762 Setting Mode. × ○ ○
Angle 1 The entered value must be 0 to ±200.
* The value set in this test mode is added to the adjustment value set in No.742
Unit: 5 (0.5°)
(Paper Feed Clutch OFF Angle).
US.RISO.COM
Default: 0 (0°)
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting value:
0: High (Higher paper feeding
Elevator Upper Limit Selects the paper feed tray upper limit position when User 1 is selected for the pressure)
Paper 0763 × ○ ×
Selection 1 Paper Quality setting in Custom Setting Mode. 1: Middle (Middle paper feeding
pressure) <default>
2: Low (Lower paper feeding pressure)
Setting range:
Adjusts the activation angle at which the paper feed clutch is activated. This test

Paper Feed Clutch ON value delays ON.)
Unit: 5 (0.5°)
(Paper Feed Clutch ON Angle).
Default: 0 (0°)
Setting range:
Adjusts the activation angle at which the paper feed clutch is deactivated. This test
Paper Feed Clutch OFF value delays OFF.)
Unit: 5 (0.5°)
18 - 38
(Paper Feed Clutch OFF Angle).
Default: 0 (0°)
Setting value:
Paper 0766 × ○ ×
pressure) <default>
Setting range:
Paper 0767 × ○ ○
Default: 0 (0°)
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting range:
Adjusts the activation angle at which the paper feed clutch is deactivated. This test ±20° from the base angle (A positive
Paper Feed Clutch OFF mode is for cases where User 3 is selected for the Paper Quality setting in Custom value delays OFF.)
Paper 0768 × ○ ○
set in No.742 (Paper Feed Clutch OFF Angle). Unit: 5 (0.5°)
Default: 0 (0°)
Setting value:

Paper 0769 × ○ ×
pressure) <default>
Setting range:
Paper 0770 × ○ ○
18 - 39
Default: 0 (0°)
Setting range:
Paper 0771 × ○ ○
Default: 0 (0°)
Setting value:
Paper 0772 × ○ ×
pressure) <default>
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting range:
Paper 0773 × ○ ○
Default: 0 (0°)
Setting range:

Paper 0774 × ○ ○
Default: 0 (0°)
Setting value:
Paper 0775 × ○ ×
pressure) <default>
18 - 40
Setting range: ±20 (pulses)

Paper Ejection Wing
Paper 0779 Compensates the amount of the paper ejection wing movement. Unit: 1 (1 pulse) ○ × ×
Position Adj.
Default: 0 (0)

Paper Ejection Wing Fixes the paper ejection wing position when custom position is selected by the
Paper 0780 Unit: 1 (1 pulse) ○ × ×
Target Pos. operator. The adjusted position also applies to No.0704.
Default: 1434 (1434 pulses)
When this test mode is enabled, powering on while pressing the feed tray switch Setting value:
Paper Feeder Active/
Paper 0788 allows the master making and printing actions to be executed without moving the 0: Disabled <default> ○ ○ ○
Inactive Selection
paper feed tray. 1: Enabled
Setting value:
Card Feed Warning
Paper 0796 Specifies whether to display a warning for the card feed setting. 0: Not display <default for overseas> ○ ○ ×
Display Control
1: Display <default for Japan>
Light not blocked - ON (The light block plate is present. The print drum is in the B
Drum/
US.RISO.COM
0801 Position B Sensor sensor position), Light not blocked - OFF (The light block plate is not present. The - ○ ○ ○
Print
print drum is not in the B sensor position.)
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Drum/ Light blocked - ON (The light block plate is present), Light not blocked - OFF (The
0802 Main Motor FG Sensor - ○ ○ ○
Print light block plate is not present)
0803 Clamp Sensor A - ○ ○ ○
0804 Clamp Sensor B - ○ ○ ○
Drum/ Light not blocked - ON (The master is present), Light blocked - OFF (The master is

0806 Master Loading Sensor - ○ ○ ○
Print not present)
Drum/ Print Drum Lock Position Light blocked - ON (The print drum lock lever is in the lock position),
0807 - ○ ○ ○
Print Sensor Light not blocked - OFF (The print drum lock lever is not in the lock position)
Drum/
0809 Ink Sensor ON: The sensor contacts with the ink (The ink is present). - ○ ○ ○
Print
Drum/
0810 Overflow Sensor ON: The sensor contacts with the ink (The ink is present). - ○ ○ ○
Print
18 - 41
Drum/
0811 Ink Cartridge Set SW ON: The switch is pressed. - ○ ○ ○
Print
0812 Inking Motor FG Sensor - ○ ○ ○
Drum/
0816 Free Drum Rotation SW ON: The switch is pressed. - ○ ○ ○
Print
Drum/
0817 Front Cover Switch ON: Light blocked (The front door is closed) - ○ ○ ○
Print
Drum/ Print Drum Release SW

0818 ON: The button is pressed. - ○ ○ ○
Print ON
Drum/ Print Drum Connection

0819 ON: The print drum is connected. - ○ ○ ○
Print Signal
Drum/
0820 Print Drum Interlock Switch Switch ON (The print drum is set), Switch OFF (Interlock) - ○ ○ ○
US.RISO.COM
Print
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
0830 Print Pressure Sensor - ○ ○ ○
0831 Vertical Centering Sensor - ○ ○ ○
Drum/ Rotates the print drum at 30rpm. When the Stop key is pressed, the print drum
0861 Main Motor Action (30rpm) - ○ ○ ○
Print stops without speed reduction.
Drum/ Clamp Motor Action

0863 Rotates the motor in the counter clockwise (CCW) direction. - ○ ○ ○
Print (Open)
Drum/ Clamp Motor Action

0864 Rotates the motor in the clockwise (CW) direction. - ○ ○ ○
Print (Close)
Drum/ Print Drum Release SW/

0866 Illuminates the LED. - ○ ○ ○
Print LED ON
Rotates the print drum at the speed selected by the printing speed key (Speed 1 -
Drum/ Variable Print Drum 5). * The speed increases or decreases in the same timing as normal printing.
0880 - ○ ○ ○
Print Rotation Speed 1: 60rpm, Speed 2: 80rpm, Speed 3: 100rpm, Speed 4: 120rpm, Speed 5:
18 - 42
130rpm
Drum/
0881 Print Drum on Position A Moves the print drum and stops it at the position-A. - ○ ○ ○
Print
Rotates the inking motor (for up to 10 seconds). Caution: This test mode is to
Drum/ check the IC driver.
0882 Inking Motor - ○ ○ ○
Print Disconnect the connector of the motor before this test mode starts.
Drum/
0883 Clamp Home Action Returns the clamp to the home position. - ○ ○ ○
Print
Pressing the Start key one time performs the following set of steps:
Step 1: Clamp home position → Clamp open position
Drum/ Clamp Cycle Action (3 Step 2: Clamp open position → Adjusted position-A
0884 - ○ ○ ○
Print Cycles) Step 3: Adjusted position-A → Clamp closed position
* When the clamp is not in the home position, the clamp will be moved to the home
position automatically before Step 1 can start.
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Drum/ Print Drum Locking Press the Start key to switch ON the solenoid.
0885 - ○ ○ ○
Print Solenoid It automatically switches OFF after 10 seconds.
Drum/ Press the Start key to switch ON the solenoid.

0886 Pressure Solenoid Action - ○ ○ ○
Print It automatically switches OFF after 10 seconds.
Performs the following steps:

1. Supplies the ink while the print drum is rotating without pressure (until the ink
Drum/ sensor turns on).
0887 Inking Action - ○ ○ ○

Print 2. Performs the confidential action.
3. Performs idling.
4. Stops the print drum at the position-B.

Drum/ 1. Performs a paper feed test without inking (in the same way as No.0087).
0888 Print Drum Ink Drainage - ○ ○ ○
Print 2. Ignores any error related to ink.
3. Stops the print drum at the position-B when the Stop key is pressed.
Drum/
0889 G-Lever Mounting Position Stops the print drum at the G-Lever mounting position (108.4° from the position-A). - ○ ○ ○
Print
18 - 43
Copies the color and category information from the tag on the ink bottle to the
Drum/ EEPROM on the print drum so that the information can be used to determine the
0890 Print Drum Ink Code Copy - ○ ○ ○
Print compatibility between the ink bottle and print drum.
* This test must be run at least two seconds after the ink bottle is set.
Moves the print drum and stops it at the position-B.

Drum/
0892 Position B (Machine) * This enables the machine to be positioned to the position-B even when the print - ○ ○ ○
Print
drum is not set in the main unit.
Rotates the print drum at 10rpm. The rotation does not start when the rear cover
Drum/ Drum Rotation (Rear safety switch is not turned on. A beep sounds until the switch is turned on.
0896 - ○ ○ ○
Print Cover Safety SW) The print drum stops when the rear cover safety switch is turned off or the Stop key
is pressed.
Drum/ Drum Rotation (Rear Rotates the print drum at 10rpm.

0896 - × ○ ○
Print Cover Safety SW) Press the Stop key to stop.
US.RISO.COM
Drum/
0900 Vertical Centering Action Resets the vertical printing position to the center (home position). - ○ ○ ○
Print
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3

1. Brings the vertical point position to the home position.
2. Moves the vertical point position to the maximum upward position (+16mm), and
Drum/ stops for 1 second.
0901 Vertical Cycle Action - ○ ○ ○
Print 3. Brings the vertical point position to the home position.
4. Moves the vertical point position to the maximum downward position (-16mm),
and stops for 1 second.

5. Brings the vertical point position to the home position.

Drum/ Print Pressure Home
0904 Resets the print pressure position to the center (home position). - ○ ○ ○
Print Positioning

1. Brings the print pressure position to the home position.
2. Moves the print pressure position to the maximum pressure position (+10500
Drum/ Print Pressure Cycle pulses), and stops for 1 second.
0905 - ○ ○ ○
Print Action 3. Brings the print pressure position to the home position.
4. Moves the print pressure position to the minimum pressure position (-9300
pulses), and stops for 1 second.
18 - 44
5. Brings the print pressure position to the home position.
Drum/ Moves the pressure control motor to the position (-8130 pulses) at which the
0908 Maintenance Position - ○ ○ ○
Print pressure spring can be released.
Displays the print drum angle.

Drum/ (For example, "3600" appears for 360°.)
0921 Print Drum Rotation Angle - ○ ○ ○
Print * No.0892 (Position B (Machine)) must be run before this test is run.
(The last print drum angle in normal mode is not saved.)
Drum/ Print Drum Temperature Displays the temperature converted from the A/D value.
0923 - ○ ○ ○
Print Scale (rounded to the nearest whole number)
Displays the amount of ink left in the ink bottle in percentage (%) that is read from
Drum/
0925 Ink Volume Indication (%) the ink bottle tag. The read value is rounded to the nearest whole number (%) to be - ○ ○ ○
Print
displayed.
Drum/ Inking Motor FG Ct Ten Displays the ink motor FG count that is read from the ink bottle tag
0926 - ○ × ×
Print Thousand Digit (1 count = 0.1ml).
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Displays the ten-thousands digit of the ink motor FG count that is read from the ink
Drum/ Inking Motor FG Ct Ten
0926 bottle tag (1 count = 0.1ml). - × ○ ○
Print Thousand Digit
For example, "0002" appears for the count of 23,546.
Displays the last four digits (up to the thousands digit) of the ink motor FG count
Drum/ Inking Motor FG Ct Up to
0927 that is read from the ink bottle tag. (1 count = 0.1ml) - × ○ ○
Print Thousand Digit
For example, "3546" appears for the count of 23,546.
Displays the use start date recorded in the ink bottle tag.
Drum/ Ink Cartridge Use Starting

0928 For LED machines, 2003/2/28 is indicated by displaying "2003" and "0228" - ○ ○ ○
Print Date
alternately.
Setting range:
-20° to +10° from the base angle (A
greater value delays the detection.)
Drum/ Master Det. Print Drum
0940 Adjusts the angle to detect a master loaded on the print drum. The entered value must be -200 to ○ ○ ○
Print Angle
+100.
Unit: 5 (0.5°)
Default: 0 (0°)
18 - 45
Setting range:
-4.0° to +4.0° from the base angle (A
positive value moves the drum in the
Drum/ Print Drum Position A
0941 Adjusts the position-A of the print drum. over-run direction.) ○ ○ ○
Print Adjustment
Unit: 5 (0.5°)
Default: 0 (0°)
Setting range:
value moves the drum in the over-run
Drum/ Print Drum Position B
0942 Adjusts the position-B of the print drum. direction.) ○ ○ ○
Print Adjustment
Unit: 5 (0.5°)
Default: -15 (-1.5°)
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting range:
value moves the drum in the over-run
Drum/ Print Drum Position B
0942 Adjusts the position-B of the print drum. direction.) × ○ ○
Print Adjustment
Unit: 5 (0.5°)
Default: 0 (0°)
Sets the period of time (for which the ink sensor continues to stay OFF) before a

no-ink error is issued. This test mode is for cases where the ink usage amount is
x% or more. Setting range: 5 to 60s
Drum/ Inking Time Adj. (high
0943 This information is stored in the EEPROM on the print drum. Unit: 1 (1s) ○ ○ ○
Print volume)
* x%: The value is set in Test Mode No.948. Default: 10 (10s)
* Actually, the no-ink period is the sum of this value and the value on Iquality
(default + 5sec).
no-ink error is issued. This test mode is for cases where an ink replacement has
been completed. Setting range: 5 to 60s
18 - 46
Drum/
0944 Inking Time (Replacement) This information is stored in the EEPROM on the print drum. Unit: 1 (1s) ○ ○ ○
Print
* Actually, the no-ink period is the sum of this value and the value on Iquality Default: 30 (30s)
(default + 10sec).
* This is also applied during idling after the power turns on.
Setting value: 1 to 200 times

Drum/ Ink Overflow Detection Sets the number of detections on the overflow sensor to determine that an ink
0945 Unit: 1 (1 time) ○ × ×
Print Frequency overflow has occurred in the print drum.
Default: 50 (50 times)
Setting value: 1 to 100 times

Drum/ Ink Overflow Detection Sets the number of detections on the overflow sensor to determine that an ink
0945 Unit: 1 (1 time) × ○ ○
Print Frequency overflow has occurred in the print drum.
Default: 50 (50 times)
no-ink error is issued. This test mode is for cases where the ink usage amount is
less than x%. Setting value: 1 to 60 (1s to 60s)
Drum/ Inking Time Adj. (low
0946 This information is stored in the EEPROM on the print drum. Unit: 1 (1s) ○ ○ ○
Print volume)
* x%: The value is set in Test Mode No.948. Default: 15 (15s)
US.RISO.COM
* Actually, the no-ink period is the sum of this value and the value on Iquality
(default + 5sec).
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Drum/ Sets the number of skip rotations to be executed after the ink bottle is pulled out (0 to 10 times)
0947 Inking Drum Rotation ○ ○ ○
Print and put back. * To apply this setting, the power must be turned off and then on. Unit: 1 (1 time)
Default: 1 (1 time)

Sets the ink usage amount to be used for determine the inking time. * No.943
Drum/ (1 to 100%)
0948 Inking Time Setting Inking Time Adj. (high volume) ○ ○ ○
Print Unit: 1 (1%)
* No.946 Inking Time Adj. (low volume)
Default: 80 (80%)

0: Extra light
1: Light
Drum/ Proof Print Speed (Black 2: Normal <default>
0949 Selects the print pressure setting to determine the first print density (for black ink). ○ ○ ○
Print Drum) 3: Dark
4: Extra dark
5: Maximum print pressure (21kg)
0: Extra light
1: Light
18 - 47
Drum/ Proof Print Speed (Color 2: Normal <default>
0950 Selects the print pressure setting to determine the first print density (for color ink). ○ ○ ○
Print Drum) 3: Dark
4: Extra dark
5: Maximum print pressure (21kg)
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3

Unit: 1
Setting value:
0: Not specified <default>
64: Black1, 65: Blue 1,
66: Blue 2, 67: Blue 3,
68: Blue 4, 69: Red 1,

70: Red 2, 71: Red 3,

72: Red 4, 73: Green 1,
Drum/ 74: Green 2, 75: Green 3,
0951 Ink Color Code Sets the color of the ink set on the inkless print drum. ○ ○ ○
Print 76: Yellow 1, 77: Yellow 2,
78: Brown 1, 79: Brown 2,
80: Purple 1, 81: Purple 2,
82: Gray 1, 83: Gray 2,
84: Light Gray 1,
85: Light Gray 2,
86: Orange 1, 87: Orange 2,
88: Gold 1, 89: Gold 2,
18 - 48
90: Silver 1, 91: Silver 2,
92: Pink 1, 93: Pink 2, 94: Custom
Sets how many times to rotate the print drum without inking at the start of master Setting range: 0 to 10 (0 to 10
Drum/ Drum Rotation Before making or printing when the print drum has not been used for x days or more. rotations)
0954 ○ ○ ○
Print Inking * x days: This is set in Test Mode No.986. Unit: 1 (1 rotation)
* When this setting is set to 0, no free rotation is executed. Default: 5 (5 rotations)
Setting range:
±5mm (A positive value moves the
Drum/ Vertical Print Position HP Adjusts the offset of the vertical print home position. image upward.)
0970 ○ ○ ○
Print Adj. * For LCD machines, this represents the Vertical Slide of guidance graphic. The entered value must be -50 to +50.
Unit: 1 (0.1mm)
Default: 0 (0mm)
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting range:
±5000 pulses from the home position
Sets the offset of the printing pressure position. detected by the sensor (A positive
This setting is used when a cause is related to the print drum. value moves the position to increase
Drum/ Printing Pressure HP
0972 * The printing pressure HP adjustment is calculated by summarizing all values from the pressure.) ○ ○ ○
Print Adjustment
the various printing pressure HP adjustment test modes. The summarized value The entered value must be -500 to
must be greater than -500 and less than +500. +500.
Unit: 1 (10 pulses)

Default: 0 (0 pulse)
Unit: 1
Default: 00: The factor is 1 time. (A
value from the print pressure table is
used directly.)
1: The factor is 1.5 times.
(A calculated value is used.)
2: The factor is 2.0 times.
18 - 49
(A calculated value is used.)
Calculation formula:
• Density 5 = Value from Density 3
Drum/ Pressure Table Table + (Value from Density 5 Table -
0979 Changes the density adjustment range for the Density key. ○ × ×
Print Configuration Value from Density 3 Table) * Factor
Table + (Value from Density 4 Table -
Value from Density 3 Table) * Factor
Table
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Sets the number of days. When the print drum has not been used for the specified
Setting range: 1 to 21 (1 to 21 days)
Drum/ Days Before Inking Action period of time or more, the print drum must be rotated without inking at the start
0986 Unit: 1 (1 day) ○ ○ ○
Print Activates of master making or printing. The number of drum rotations is set in Test Mode
Default: 14 (14 days)
No.954.
Adjustment range: 100 to 300

Factory 1100 Print Pressure Adjustment - ○ ○ ○

* Do not run test modes other than No.1100 (Print Pressure Adjustment) and
No.1225 - 1228 (Print Pressure Adjustment Point A - D) when a jig drum is set.

Paper Size VR Adjust
Factory 1101 Adjusts the VR value for 210mm (A4 width). - ○ ○ ○
(middle)

(short)

(long)
Use the following steps to make an adjustment:
18 - 50
1. Tap the following three points on the panel: upper left, lower left, and lower right.
LCD Base Point
Factory 1104 The system calculates an adjustment amount. - ○ × ×
Compensation
2. Display a window to check the adjustment. Tap the three points to check that an
appropriate adjustment is made.
Copies the REv data from the FRAM or flash memory on the main unit to the USB
memory.
Factory 1140 Error Record The REv data stored in the FRAM or flash memory on the main unit is not deleted - ○ ○ ○
after it is copied.
Scans an original and performs the master making action.

* This test should be run with No.1151 (Printing Action).
Master Making Action * The master making settings are configured with the combination of the following
Factory 1150 - ○ ○ ○
(Scanning) test modes:
No.1250 (Reproduction Size Selection), and No.1253 (Original Image Mode
Selection)
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Performs the printing action with the loaded master.

* This test should be run with No.1150 (Master Making Action (Scanning)).
* The printing settings are configured with the combination of the following test
Factory 1151 Printing Action - ○ × ×
modes:
No.1251 (Horizontal Print Position setting), No.1252 (Vertical Print Position setting),
No.1254 (Print Speed Selection), and No.1255 (Print Quantity Selection)
Performs the printing action with the loaded master.

* This test should be run with No.1150 (Master Making Action (Scanning)).

* The printing settings are configured with the combination of the following test
Factory 1151 Printing Action - × ○ ○
modes:
No.1251 (Horizontal Print Position setting), No.1254 (Print Speed Selection), and
No.1255 (Print Quantity Selection)
Factory 1152 Confidential Action Performs the confidential action. - ○ ○ ○
Stores factory setting data from the E2PROM on SUB-SYSTEM-PCB to the flash
Factory 1160 Store Factory Setting Area - ○ ○ ○
memory on MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB.
Restores factory setting data from the flash memory on MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB to the
18 - 51
Restore Factory Setting E2PROM on SUB-SYSTEM-PCB.
Factory 1161 - ○ ○ ○
Area To restore, the E2PROM must be formatted appropriately for the model and then
the setting data copied.
Clear error history data in the factory.

No setting value
Factory 1190 Error History Data Clear - ○ ○ ○
* The error information stored on the external flash memory must not be cleared.
Initializes the user category, basic screen settings, and mode-change method
selection (No need to set the clock again).
Factory 1192 Initialize Start-up Screen - ○ × ×
* Not applied in the test mode reset.
Factory 1193 REv Data Initialize Initializes the REv storage area. - ○ ○ ○
MCTL Memory Initializes memory on the mechanical control PCB.

Factory 1198 - ○ ○ ○
Initialization * This cannot be selected from the menu window.
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Selects the paper size detection unit from INCH, MILLIMETER or CHINESE.
Setting value:
Factory 1201 Metric/Inch Switch Note that the setting value of 1 is effective only for the paper size detection. The ○ ○ ○
0: Millimeter <default for others>
original size detection is executed in the same way as when 0 is set.
Setting value:
98:B4, 99:A4/Letter, 102:Legal/
Sets the model and size information of the print drum in the EEPROM on the print Foolscap
Factory 1210 Drum Code Entry drum PCB. 113:A3 × × ○

* An error will be issued when an invalid combination of code values is entered. 47: Printing pressure jig
Default: 0
Setting value:
<For Japan>33: A3, 34: B4, 35: A4,
36: A4-R
Sets the model and size information of the print drum in the EEPROM on the print <For overseas>113: A3, 114: B4, 115:
Factory 1210 Drum Code Entry drum PCB. A4/Letter, 116: A4-R/Letter-R, 117: ○ ○ ×
18 - 52
* An error will be issued when an invalid combination of code values is entered. Ledger
47: Printing pressure jig
Default: 0

Factory 1211 Drum Serial Code Entry 1 Sets the first 4 digits of the print drum serial code. Unit: 1 ○ ○ ○
Default: 0

Factory 1212 Drum Serial Code Entry 2 Sets the last 4 digits of the print drum serial code. Unit: 1 ○ ○ ○
Default: 0
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting value:
0: Not specified <default>,
1: Black, 2: Blue, 3: Medium Blue, 4:
Red, 5: Bright Red,
6: Riso Federal Blue, 7: Purple, 8:
Riso Marine Red,
9: Burgundy, 10: Green,

11: Teal, 12: Brown,
Sets the color information of the print drum in the EEPROM on the print drum PCB. 13: Yellow, 14: Light Grey,
Factory 1214 Drum Color Code Entry ○ ○ ○
* An error will be issued when an invalid combination of code values is entered. 15: Grey, 16: Fluorescence Pink, 17:
Fluorescence Orange,
18: Orange, 19: Flat Gold,
20: Hunter Green,
21: Crimson,
30: Custom,
31: Order (with specified paper),
18 - 53
32: Order (without specified paper),
63: Any Color
Setting value:
0: Not specified <default>
1: Normal
2: HD
Sets the ink category code (3-bit) in the EEPROM on the print drum PCB.
Factory 1215 Drum Ink Category Entry 3: HG ○ ○ ○
4: Reserved 1
5: Reserved 2
6: Reserved 3
7: Reserved 4
Setting range: 45 to 255 (-2.87mm to

+4.39mm from the hope position) (A
Scanning Adj. 1 Adjusts the scanning start position (the length to be skipped) for sub scanning. positive value increases the skipped
Factory 1220 ○ ○ ○
(Sub scanning) This is for settings in the factory. length.)
US.RISO.COM
Unit: 1 (for 10 lines) = 0.0346mm
Default: 128
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting range:
0 to 255 (-5.42mm to +5.38mm from
the hope position) (A positive value
Scanning Adj. 2 moves the position to the rear of the
Factory 1221 Adjusts the scanning position for main scanning. This is for settings in the factory. ○ ○ ○
(Main scanning) machine (to the left).)
Unit: 1 (for 1 pixel) = Approximately
0.0423mm
Default: 128

Setting range: 0 to 100 (±5.0% from
the standard speed) (A positive value
Scanning Adj. 3 (Sub Adjusts the scanning ratio for sub scanning.
Factory 1222 shrinks the image.) ○ ○ ○
scanning ratio) This is for settings in the factory.
Unit: 1 (0.1%)
Default: 50
Specifies the standard value for adjusting the offset. Setting range: -255 to 255
Factory 1223 Scanning Adj. 4 (Offset) This is for settings in the factory. * The setting value changes automatically after Unit: 1 ○ ○ ○
the offset is adjusted, and the changed value is used for the next offset adjustment. Default: -255
18 - 54
Specifies the standard value for adjusting the gain. Setting range: 0 to 127
Scanner Adj.
Factory 1224 This is for settings in the factory. * The setting value changes automatically after Unit: 1 ○ ○ ○
(Gain-Green)
the gain is adjusted, and the changed value is used for the next gain adjustment. Default: 0
Setting value:
Factory 1229 RLP Mode Enable Control Enables/Disables the RLP function. 0: Disabled <default> ○ × ×
1: Enabled
Enables/Disables the short paper feed mode.

When this setting is set to enabled, a smaller size can be registered as a paper
size. Setting value:
Factory 1230 Short Paper Feed Mode • Disabled: 100mm or more in width, 148mm or more in length 0: Disabled <default> ○ ○ ○
• Enabled: 44mm or more in width, 128mm or more in length 1: Enabled
* To support the short paper feed mode, special parts must be attached.
Setting range: -120 to +120

Factory 1231 LCD Contrast Adjustment Adjusts the contrast of the LCD. Unit: 1 ○ × ×
Default: 0
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Makes an adjustment to the contrast value from TM7135 (Panel Contrast Value
Check).
When the sum of the value from TM7135 (Panel Contrast Value Check) and the
value from TM1231 (LCD Contrast Adjustment) does not fall in the range of 0x16 - Setting range: -21 to 21
Factory 1231 LCD Contrast Adjustment 0x2B, the contrast value is corrected automatically so that it can fall in the range. Unit: 1 × ○ ○
Example) When TM7135 + TM1231 = 0x10, 0x16 is applied. Default: 0
Example) When TM7135 + TM1231 = 0x2F, 0x2B is applied.
The adjustment value set in this test mode is applied to the contrast of the display

in real time.

Factory 1232 LCD Backlight Adjustment Adjusts the backlight of the panel. Unit: 1 ○ × ×
Default: 85
Setting range:
Adjusts the horizontal printing position of the TPH. ±3.0mm from the home position (A
* The adjustment amount is calculated by summarizing the values from No.0586 positive value moves the position to
TPH Horizontal Write and No.1233. The summarized value must be greater than -30 and less than +30. the left/rear.)
Factory 1233 ○ ○ ○
Position Adjust * For LCD machines, this represents the Horizontal Slide of guidance graphic. The entered value must be 0 to ±30
18 - 55
* A change to this setting is applied even in test mode (applied when the master (Enter "30" for 3.0mm).
making action is executed in test mode). Unit: 1 (0.1mm)
Default: 0 (0mm)
Setting range:
TPH Resistance Value 1200Ω to 5920Ω (600 x 600dpi)
Factory 1234 Sets the TPH resistance. ○ × ×
Entry Unit: 1 (1Ω)
Default: 1200 (1200Ω)
Setting range:
TPH Resistance Value 1200Ω to 2300Ω (300 x 600dpi)
Factory 1234 Sets the TPH resistance. × ○ ○
Entry Unit: 1 (1Ω)
Default: 1200 (1200Ω)
Setting value:
0: Old suction fan
Factory 1244 Suction Fan Selection Specifies whether to use the new or old suction fan. ○ ○ ○
1: Suction fan for MZ <default>
2: Suction fan for CZ
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting value:
ST Operation Mode Specifies whether to execute a high-speed action (firstly executing tape output), or
Factory 1247 0: Traditional action <default> ○ ○ ○
Selection a traditional action (executing tape output after the printing action stops).
1: High-speed action
Setting range: -930 to +1050 from

the home position (away from the
sensor edge by 100 pulses, when no
adjustment is applied) (A positive value

moves the position to increase the

Printing Pressure for Test
Factory 1248 Sets the pressure position for test mode. pressure and a negative value moves ○ × ×
Mode
the position to decrease the pressure)
Unit: 1 (10 pulses)
Default: 0 (0 pulse) (This means
the home position (no adjustment is
applied))
Setting range: -930 to +990 from

the home position (away from the
sensor edge by 100 pulses, when no
18 - 56
adjustment is applied) (A positive value
moves the position to increase the
Printing Pressure for Test
Factory 1248 Sets the pressure position for test mode. pressure and a negative value moves × ○ ○
Mode
the position to decrease the pressure)
Unit: 1 (10 pulses)
Default: 0 (0 pulse) (This means
the home position (no adjustment is
applied))
Setting range: +50 to +200

Reproduction Size Sets the reproduction size to be used when No.1150 (Master Making Action
Factory 1250 Unit: 1 (1%) ○ ○ ○
Selection (Scanning)) runs.
Default: 100

Horizontal Print Position
Factory 1251 Sets the horizontal print position to be used when No.1151 (Printing Action) runs. Unit: 5 (0.5mm) ○ ○ ○
Setting
Default: 0 (0mm)
US.RISO.COM
Vertical Print Position
Factory 1252 Sets the vertical print position to be used when No.1151 (Printing Action) runs. Unit: 5 (0.5mm) ○ ○ ○
Setting
Default: 0 (0mm)
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting value:
1: Line <default>
Original Image Mode Sets the original mode to be used when No.1150 (Master Making Action
Factory 1253 2: Photo ○ ○ ○
Selection (Scanning)) runs.
3: Duo
4: Pencil
Sets the print speed to be used when

No.1151 (Printing Action) runs.
Sets the print speed to be used when No.1151 (Printing Action) runs. When this
Setting value: 1: Speed 1

setting is set to 6 (High speed):
Factory 1254 Print Speed Selection 2: Speed 2 × × ○
The printing action will be executed at Speed 3 if the High speed is not available
3: Speed 3 <default>
for other printing conditions used in No.1151 (Printing Action).
4: Speed 4
5: Speed 5
Setting value: 1: Speed 1

Sets the print speed to be used when No.1151 (Printing Action) runs. When this 2: Speed 2
setting is set to 6 (High speed): 3: Speed 3 <default>
Factory 1254 Print Speed Selection ○ ○ ×
The printing action will be executed at Speed 3 if the High speed is not available 4: Speed 4
for other printing conditions used in No.1151 (Printing Action). 5: Speed 5
18 - 57
6: High speed

Factory 1255 Print Quantity Selection Sets the number of prints when No.1151 (Printing Action) runs. Unit: 1 ○ ○ ○
Default: 1
Setting value:
Scanner White Level
Factory 1260 Sets the white level of the NEC scanner. 0: White level 0 <default> ○ ○ ○
Selection
1: White level 1
Specifies the standard value for adjusting the gain. Setting range: -255 to 255
Factory 1261 Scanner Adj. (Gain-Red) This is for settings in the factory. * The setting value changes automatically after Unit: 1 ○ ○ ○
Specifies the standard value for adjusting the gain. Setting range: -255 to 255
Factory 1262 Scanner Adj. (Gain-Blue) This is for settings in the factory. * The setting value changes automatically after Unit: 1 ○ ○ ○
Displays whether the main unit firmware recognizes a connected USB device.
US.RISO.COM
Factory 1300 USB Configuration Check 0: Not recognized - ○ ○ ○
1: Recognized
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Displays whether to illuminate the "i" indicator when all consumables are set.
Factory 1301 "i" indicator LED Check 0: The "i" indicator is not supported - ○ ○ ○
1: The "i" indicator illuminates
Factory 1302 MAC address Displays the MAC address. - ○ ○ ○

ADF Unit Joint Signal
OP 3000 ON: The ADF is connected, OFF: The ADF is not connected - ○ ○ ○
Check
Original Registration Light blocked - ON (The paper is present), Light blocked - OFF (The paper is not

OP 3001 - ○ ○ ○
Sensor present)
Light blocked - ON (The paper is present), Light blocked - OFF (The paper is not
OP 3002 Original IN Sensor - ○ ○ ○
present)
Light blocked - ON (The paper is present), Light blocked - OFF (The paper is not
OP 3003 Original OUT Sensor - ○ ○ ○
present)
ADF Original Detection Light not blocked - ON (The paper is present), Light blocked - OFF (The paper is
OP 3004 - ○ ○ ○
Sensor not present)
18 - 58
ADF Original Size Sensor Light blocked - ON (The original is present), Light blocked - OFF (The original is
OP 3006 - ○ × ×
1 not present)
ADF Original Size Sensor Light blocked - ON (The original is present), Light blocked - OFF (The original is
OP 3007 - ○ × ×
2 not present)
Performs one cycle of the ADF scanning action:

The original is picked up. → Carriage home action → Shading compensation →
OP 3041 ADF Cycle Action - ○ ○ ○
The scanner unit moves to the scanning position. → ADF scanning and ejection →
Carriage home action * Simplex and Duplex must be selected in No.3077.
Performs the original transport action on the ADF.

OP 3042 ADF Feed Action The original is picked up. → ADF scanning (original transport) * Simplex and - ○ ○ ○
Duplex must be selected in No.3077.
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Displays the code indicating the size of the original set on the ADF. Only the following paper sizes can be
• Duplex ADF identified and displayed:
00: None 01: A3 02: B4 • Japanese metric machines
03: A4 04: A4W 05: B5 00: None 01: A3 02: B4
OP 3061 ADF Original Size Code ○ ○ ○
06: B5W 07: A5 08: A5W 03: A4 04: A4W 05: B5
13: Ledger 14: Legal 15: Letter 06: B5W 07: A5
16: Letter W 17: Statement 18: Statement W 08: A5W (09: B6)
19: foolscap 53: Custom (11: Postcard) (53: Custom)

the home position)
(A positive value moves the position
ADF Scan Mirror Position Adjusts the mirror (carriage) stop position when the ADF scans the original.
OP 3070 downward, which causes the image to ○ ○ ○
Adjust * This represents the Image Vertical Slide of guidance graphic.
move upward.)
Unit: 1 (0.1mm)
Default: 0 (0mm)

Adjusts the horizontal position when the ADF scans the original. the home position)
18 - 59
ADF Horizontal Scan For FB, a different setting is provided. (A positive value moves the position
OP 3072 ○ ○ ○
Position Adjust * For LCD machines, this represents the Image Horizontal Slide of guidance left.)
graphic. Unit: 5 (0.5mm)
Default: 0 (0mm)

moves the image upward.)
Unit: 1 (0.1mm)
Adjusts the scanning start position (the length to be skipped) when the ADF scans
ADF Scan Start Position Default: 0 (0mm)
OP 3073 the original. ○ ○ ○
Adjust * When Duplex ADF is connected,
* For LCD machines, this represents the Image Vertical Slide of guidance graphic.
the adjustment range is limited to ±50
(±5.0mm). Any entered value that
exceeds the range will be rounded to
+50 or -50.
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting range:
-30 to 30 (±3.0% from the base speed)
Adjusts the scanning speed at which the ADF scans the original (Adjusts the speed
(A negative value results in shrinkage.
ADF Scanning Speed of the AF-Read pulse motor) (Adjusts the scanner LST interval).
OP 3074 The logic is reversed with considering ○ ○ ○
Adjustment * For LCD machines, this represents the Image Vertical Elongation/Shrinkage of
the adjustment of guidance graphic.)
guidance graphic.
Unit: 1 (0.1%)
Default: 0 (0%)
Setting range:

positive value moves the position
ADF Scan End Signal Adjusts the scanning end position when the ADF scans the original. downward.)
OP 3076 ○ ○ ○
Output Time The entered value must be 0 to ±20
(Enter "18" for 1.8mm).
Unit: 1 (0.1mm)
Default: 0 (0mm)
Job Separator Tape Jam

OP 3100 Detected when the job separator tape jam sensor is ON. - ○ ○ ○
Sensor
18 - 60
Job Separator Tape
OP 3101 Detected when the tape is present. - ○ ○ ○
Detection Sensor
Job Separator Power

OP 3102 Detected when the job separator power switch is ON. - ○ ○ ○
Switch
Job Separator Connection

OP 3103 Detected when the job separator is connected. - ○ ○ ○
Signal
Outputs one tape.

OP 3140 Tape Output - ○ ○ ○
* The setting from No.3170 (Stamping Quantity) must be applied.
Setting range:
Sets the stamping quantity for No.3140 (Tape Output).
0: No stamping <default>
OP 3170 Stamping Quantity * This setting is reset to the default when the power is turned off or the machine ○ ○ ○
1: Stamping quantity 1
enters sleep mode.
2: Stamping quantity 2
Setting range:
Specifies whether to display a tape jam error message while a job separator tape
OP 3171 Tape Jammed Message 0: Not display ○ ○ ○
US.RISO.COM
output action is executed.
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting range:
Specifies whether to execute free rotations at Print Speed 4 or 5. This test mode
ST Interval Action 0: Do not execute free rotations
OP 3172 is for a high-speed tape output action when the high-speed job separator is ○ ○ ○
Selection 1: Execute free rotations <default>
connected.
2: Execute free rotations at all speeds

ST Tape Cut Timing Adj. Adjusts the tape cut timing for slow start. This test mode is for a high-speed tape
OP 3173 Unit: 10 (1ms) ○ ○ ○
(Slow Start) output action when the high-speed job separator is connected.
Default: 0

ST Tape Cut Timing Adj. Adjusts the tape cut timing for Speed 1. This test mode is for a high-speed tape
OP 3174 Unit: 10 (1ms) ○ ○ ○
(Speed 1) output action when the high-speed job separator is connected.
Default: 0

OP 3175 Unit: 10 (1ms) ○ ○ ○
Default: 0

OP 3176 Unit: 10 (1ms) ○ ○ ○
Default: 0
18 - 61
OP 3177 Unit: 10 (1ms) ○ ○ ○
Default: 0

OP 3178 Unit: 10 (1ms) ○ ○ ○
Default: 0
When this test is run on a RISOGRAPH that can communicate with an external CI,
the main unit information is sent to the external CI.
OP 3341 External CI Status Print - ○ × ×
The external CI uses the received information to generate and output printing data,
and then the main unit executes master making and printing.
The storage memory should be initialized when data in the storage memory wanted
Storage Memory to be erased or an error related to the storage memory cannot be resolved.
OP 3355 - ○ × ×
Initialization * To initialize, only one memory device must be set in the slot.
It is not allowed to initialize two memory devices at once.
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Displays the information of the storage memory, including the volume label,
Storage Memory capacity, used space, and available space.
OP 3361 - ○ × ×
Properties * To display the information, only one memory device must be set in the slot.
It is not allowed to display the information from two memory devices at once.
Setting value:
Storage Memory Files Specifies whether to limit the number of files to be stored in a folder of the storage
OP 3370 0: Limit (to 250 files) <default> ○ × ×
limitation memory.
1: Not limit

Setting range:
Adjusts the RLP printing position horizontally. positive value moves the position left.)
RLP Print Position Adj.
OP 3570 Note: This setting affects all RLPs when there are multiple RLPs. The entered value must be 0 to ±50 ○ × ×
(Main)
* This represents the Horizontal Slide of guidance graphic. (Enter "18" for 1.8mm).
Unit: 1 (0.1mm)
Default: 0 (0mm)
Setting range:
±5.0mm from the home position
18 - 62
(A positive value moves the image
Adjusts the RLP printing position vertically.
RLP Print Position Adj. upward.)
OP 3571 Note: This setting affects all RLPs when there are multiple RLPs. ○ × ×
(Sub) The entered value must be 0 to ±50
* This represents the Vertical Slide of guidance graphic.
(Enter "18" for 1.8mm).
Unit: 1 (0.1mm)
Default: 0 (0mm)
When the printer-auto-selection is enabled, master making is executed even if the Setting value:
Zero Print Master Making
OP 3572 print quantity is 0 in PtoP mode. This setting specifies whether to display a warning 0: Not display the warning <default> ○ × ×
Warning
(F60) in such a case. 1: Display the warning
Setting value:
RLP Duplex Print Auto- Specifies whether to keep or deactivate the duplex setting after the duplex printing
OP 3579 0: Deactivate ○ × ×
Repeat is completed.
1: Keep the setting <default>
Setting value:
OP 3770 Vendor Selection Specifies the type of the connected vendor (coin vendor or card vendor). 0: Coin vendor <default> ○ × ×
1: Card vendor
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Unit: 1
Default: 0 (for Japan), 1 (for overseas)
* Setting value:
0: Display the warning only in normal
Protect Confidential Specifies whether to display a protection warning (F94) when the power turns on, operation
OP 3771 ○ × ×
Operation Ctrl. the machine wakes up, or the authentication is set. 1: Display the warning in normal
operation and when the coin/card

vendor is connected, the card counter
is connected, and the authentication is
set
2: Not display the warning
Sys/ Gets the vendor ID (VID) and the product ID (PID) from the connected IC card
7051 IC Card Reader Get Info. - ○ ○ ○
Panel reader.
Forcibly downloads the program that controls the main unit when the Start key
Sys/ Machine Firmware
7052 is pressed (even if the program to be downloaded has the same version as the - ○ ○ ○
Panel Download 2
existing program).
18 - 63
Sys/ Displays the version of the panel program. For example, the seven-segment
7130 Panel program ver. - ○ ○ ○
Panel display shows "101" for the version of Ver1.01.
Displays the DSP version. For example, the seven-segment display shows "101"
for the version of Ver1.01.
Sys/
7134 DSP ver. * To display the DSP version correctly, a test mode that involves shading (such as - ○ ○ ○
Panel
TM284 (Scanner Cycle Continuous Action)) must be run in advance. To run TM284,
note that shading is executed only when an original is set on the AF.
Sys/ Panel Contrast Value Displays the contrast of the LCD that were set by the LCD manufacturer in its
7135 - × ○ ○
Panel Check factory.
Sys/
7136 DL Package Version Displays the version of the package. - ○ ○ ○
Panel
Sys/
7137 Recovery Loader Version Displays the version of the recovery loader. - ○ ○ ○
Panel
Sys/
US.RISO.COM
7138 Analog Processor Version Displays the version of the analog processor. - ○ ○ ○
Panel
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Sys/
7139 Font Version Displays the font version. - ○ ○ ○
Panel
Sys/
7140 Network Dongle Version Displays the version of the network dongle. - ○ ○ ○
Panel
Sys/
7141 IC Card Dongle Version Displays the version of the IC card dongle. - ○ ○ ○
Panel
Sys/

7142 FPGA Version Displays the FPGA version. - ○ ○ ○
Panel
Sys/
7143 AF Version Displays the AF version. - ○ ○ ○
Panel
Sys/
7144 Sub Micon Version Displays the Sub Micon Version - ○ ○ ○
Panel
Selects the power-saving level for sleep mode.

0: Normal
• The machine can be woken up through USB or LAN. Setting value:
Sys/ Sleep Mode Power
18 - 64
7175 • More energy is consumed than when 1 (Lower) is selected. 0: Normal <default> × ○ ○
Panel Consumption Selection
1: Lower 1: Lower
• The machine cannot be woken up through USB or LAN.
• The consumed energy is very low.

Sys/ Specifies the position (the number of bytes) to start reading data from the IC card.
7176 IC Card Offset Setting Unit: 1 (byte) ○ ○ ○
Panel The number is counted from the beginning of the card including UID.
Default: 1
Specifies the number of bytes to read starting from the position set in TM7176 (IC
Card Offset Setting).
When the area specified by the combination of TM7176 and TM7177 contains an
Sys/ unreadable position, the position is padded with zero.
7177 IC Card Size Setting Unit: 1 (byte) ○ ○ ○
Panel For example, a read value of "12xx" (where, x represents an unreadable position)
Default: 22
is converted to "1200".
* The default is set to 4 bytes, which is the length of a UID specified in the Mifare
standard.
US.RISO.COM
Proc/ Light blocked - ON (The original is present), Light blocked - OFF (The original is
7250 ADF Unit Cover Sensor - ○ ○ ○
Scan not present)
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Proc/ AF Original Top Edge Light blocked - ON (The original is present), Light blocked - OFF (The original is
7251 - ○ × ×
Scan Sensor not present)
Proc/ ADF Original Size Sensor Light blocked - ON (The original is present), Light blocked - OFF (The original is
7252 - ○ × ×
Scan 3 not present)
7253 - ○ × ×
Scan 4 not present)

7254 - ○ × ×
Scan 5 not present)
Proc/ Light blocked - ON (The paper is present), Light blocked - OFF (The paper is not
7255 AF Transfer Sensor - ○ ○ ○
Scan present)
7256 AF Top Edge Sensor - ○ ○ ○
Scan present)
7257 AF JAM Sensor - ○ ○ ○
Scan present)
Proc/
18 - 65
7258 AF Door Sensor ON (The door is closed), OFF (The door is open) - ○ ○ ○
Scan
Proc/ AF Original A6 Size Light blocked - ON (The paper is present), Light blocked - OFF (The paper is not
7259 - ○ ○ ○
Scan Detection Sensor present)
Proc/ AF Original Width Light blocked - ON (The paper is present), Light blocked - OFF (The paper is not
7260 - ○ ○ ○
Scan Detection Sensor 1 present)
Proc/ AF Original Width Light blocked - ON (The paper is present), Light blocked - OFF (The paper is not
7261 - ○ ○ ○
Scan Detection Sensor 2 present)
Proc/ AF Original Size Detection Light blocked - ON (The paper is present), Light blocked - OFF (The paper is not
7262 - ○ ○ ○
Scan Sensor 1 present)
Proc/ AF Original Size Detection Light blocked - ON (The paper is present), Light blocked - OFF (The paper is not
7263 - ○ ○ ○
Scan Sensor 2 present)
Proc/ AF Angle Detection Sensor Light blocked - ON (The paper is present), Light blocked - OFF (The paper is not
7264 - ○ ○ ○
Scan 1 present)
US.RISO.COM
Proc/ AF Angle Detection Sensor Light blocked - ON (The paper is present), Light blocked - OFF (The paper is not
7265 - ○ ○ ○
Scan 2 present)
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Rotates the paper feed roller of the AF.

Proc/ AF Paper Feed Roller
7310 It stops when the Stop key is pressed or 20 seconds elapse from the start of the - ○ ○ ○
Scan Action
action.
Rotates the registration roller of the AF.

Proc/ AF Registration Roller
Scan Action
action.
Rotates the ejection roller of the AF in the clockwise direction.

Proc/ AF Ejection Roller CW

Scan Action
action.
Rotates the ejection roller of the AF in the counter clockwise direction.

Proc/ AF Ejection Roller CCW
Scan Action
action.
Operates the registration clutch of the AF.

Proc/ AF Registration Clutch
Scan ON-OFF Action
action.
18 - 66
Operates the switch-back clutch of the AF.
Proc/ AF Switch-back Clutch
Scan ON-OFF Action
action.
Proc/ AF carriage scan

7316 Move the AF carriage to scanning position. - ○ ○ ○
Scan positioning
When this test mode is set to enabled, powering on in normal mode or test mode
Setting value:
Proc/ Scanner Carriage Lock/ causes the D50-165 error to be issued and a warning to appear. (It is not allowed
Scan Release Select. to switch to normal mode.) When this test mode is set to 0 (disabled), no warning
1: Enabled
appears.
Paper Stripper Unit Set

SW
US.RISO.COM
Model
SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3
Setting value:
1.0 times
1.1 times <default>
Ejection Motor Speed for
Paper 8070 Sets the target speed of the paper ejection motor for High Speed. 2: Drum speed/Transfer belt speed: ○ ○ ○
High Speed
1.2 times

1.3 times
1.4 times
Setting value:
Selects a table for paper feed clutch OFF timing. This test mode is for cases where 0: Paper feed clutch OFF adjustment
Card Feed PF Clutch
Paper 8071 the paper feed clutch included in the card feed attachment is installed. When 1 is table for CED <default> ○ ○ ○
Selection
selected, the clutch OFF table does not depend on the paper size. 1: Paper feed clutch OFF adjustment
table for the card feed attachment
18 - 67
US.RISO.COM
MEMO
18 - 68
CHAPTER 19: Other Precautions
Contents
1. Installation Operations..........................................................................2
1-1. Set-up wizard (input required).......................................................2
1-2. Sales test mode............................................................................4
2. Downloading Program..........................................................................5
2-1. Procedure of downloading program..............................................5
2-2. How to deal with download error...................................................7
3. The replacement procedure of the main PCB.....................................8
3-1. MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB....................................................................8
3-2. SUB-SYSTEM-PCB....................................................................11
3-3. Panel unit (monochrome)............................................................13
3-4. Panel unit (color).........................................................................14
3-5. AF PCB.......................................................................................15
4. Others...................................................................................................17
4-1. Battery replacement....................................................................17
4-2. Replacing the print drum PCB....................................................17
4-3. Print position adjustment.............................................................18
19 - 1
1. Installation Operations
1-1. Set-up wizard (input required)

When installing the machine, configure the display settings for the customer needs. This setting is
essential for effective use of RISO i Quality System. When this setting has been skipped, the Set-up
wizard appears every time when the machine power is turned ON.
(1) Clock/Calendar: Essential settings for effective use of

RISO i Quality System.
(2) User Category: Select the category from "Standard",

"School" and "Print Shop".
(3) Service contact: Enter the phone number of service

contact and select whether to display the phone
number.
(4) Supply contact: Enter the phone number of supply

contact and select whether to display the phone
number.
(5) Display Priority: Select the initial display when the

machine power is turned ON.
19 - 2
CONFIDENTIAL
<Setting items by category>
User Area Machine Master making Printing screen RLP screen Scanning screen
category type screen
Standard Halftone Preview
machine Halftone Renew Page Halftone
POP Reservation Reservation Contrast
Machine with Multi-Up Interval Halftone
Editor Editor Storage Enhancement
SD Card Overlay Book Mode
Job Memory
Confidential Job Memory
Standard Idling Confidential
machine Book Mode Idling
Contrast Editor
Standard Enhancement Job Memory
Program Book Mode
Selections Job Memory Preview
Confidential Contrast
Idling Job Memory Enhancement
Book Mode Confidential
Machine with Contrast Idling
SD Card Enhancement Editor
Program Storage
Storage Overlay
Overlay
Standard Halftone Preview
machine Halftone Renew Page Halftone
POP Reservation Reservation Contrast
Machine with Multi-Up Interval Halftone
Book Mode Editor Storage Enhancement
SD Card Overlay Book Mode
Job Memory
Confidential
Idling Job Memory
Standard Contrast Confidential
machine Enhancement Idling
Program Editor
Editor
School Quick Master
Making Job Memory
Job Memory Book Mode
Selections Confidential Preview
Idling Contrast
Book Mode Job Memory Enhancement
Contrast Confidential
Machine with Enhancement Idling
SD Card Program Editor
Editor Storage
Storage Overlay
Overlay
Quick Master
Making
Halftone
Standard Reservation
machine Contrast Halftone
Enhancement Renew Page Preview
Multi-Up Reservation Halftone
POP Interval Contrast
Halftone Enhancement
Reservation Editor Halftone Book Mode
Machine with Contrast Storage
SD Card Enhancement Overlay
Storage
Job Memory
Confidential Job Memory
Print Idling
Shop Standard Book Mode Confidential
machine Top Margin Adj. Idling
Program Editor Job Memory
Editor Book Mode
Preview
Selections Job Memory Top Margin Adj.
Confidential Job Memory Contrast
Idling Confidential Enhancement
Machine with Multi-Up Print Idling
SD Card Book Mode Editor
Top Margin Adj. Storage
Program Overlay
Overlay
Editor
19 - 3
1-2. Sales test mode

Easy access to change the machine setting by the sales person and field technical person. It is used for
environmental settings and machine settings.
<How to activate>
Turn ON the machine power while pressing the <x> and <+> keys simultaneously.
Then, enter the setting number using numeric keys.
* For P1 to P5, press the <P> key and then press <1> to <5> keys.
Sales test mode list
No. Classification Name Remarks

P001 S Displayed Language
P002 S Link-Free Volume "External Controller" Not displayed when the setting is ON.
If the "External Controller" is enabled, "External Controller
P003 S Network setting (IPv4) setting" is displayed. When the new RISO Network kit is
installed, the dedicated screen is displayed.
P004 S Beep Sound
P005 S Network setting (IPv6) Not displayed when "External Controller" is enabled.
0080 U Test Print A (Checkered)
0095 U System Configuration Data Output
0110 * Clear Error Status Data
0116 * Set-up Wizard Initialize
0126 C Optional Configuration Check
0146 D Scan First
0150 D Print Quantity Repeat Setting
0152 D "Lighten Print" display control
0154 D Min. Print Quantity Control
0159 D "Warning" Display Control
0160 D Auto Multi-Up Recovery
0161 D Program Print Repeat Setting
0166 D Maximum Print Quantity Control
0167 D Paper ID Auto-Repeat Control
0169 D "Properties" Display Control
0170 D Consumable Storage Indication
0199 D Software Option Enable Control
0796 D Card Feed Warning Display Control
0951 D Ink Color Code
1201 D Metric/Inch Switch
1229 D RLP Mode Enable Control
3572 D Zero Print Master Making Warning
3579 D RLP Duplex Print Auto-Repeat
3770 D Vendor Selection
7051 U IC Card Reader Get Info.
Scanner Carriage Lock/Release
7465 D
Select.
19 - 4
2. Downloading Program
Uses a USB memory device to download programs.

The download procedure is as follows.
<Reference> Prior to download operation, the version of the software saved in the USB memory device
can be checked. Perform the test mode No.0132 "Program File Info. Display".
Download file name model version (Vxx.yy.zz) Creation date (yy/mm/dd)

[Program File Info. Display]
2-1. Procedure of downloading program
1) Insert the USB memory device with the firmware

2) [Normal case]
Perform the Test Mode 90
[Special case]
Turn ON the machine power while pressing the <WAKE-UP> key.
3) When the PCB information compatibility check is finished, download operation will start automatically.
4) When the download is completed successfully, the machine makes a beep sound. The Wake-up
LED is changed from lights blinking to lights ON.
5) Turn OFF the machine power
*See the page (Refer to 2-2) in case an download error occurs.
19 - 5
Names of LEDs on the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB
LED1 (MODE): Green
LED2 (STATUS): Green
LED3 (HB/ERROR): Red
Reference (Download time)

Operation Wake Up LED Required time Required time for
for SF9 series SF5*5
series/SF5*3series
When each of the PCB ON 50 sec. 50 sec.
information is compatible
Downloading Blinking Approx. 4 min. Approx. 2 min.
Total － 5 min. or less 3 min. or less
19 - 6
2-2. How to deal with download error
HB/ Wake-up
STATUS MODE Buzzer Status/error information Remedies for errors
ERROR LED
100 ms.
● ○ ○ Continuous * Successfully downloaded
beep
Check the communication

Initial communication error
● ● ○ ON ○ line between the main
of the panel
system and panel (CN2).
Communication error
Replace the main system
● ○ * ON ○ between the main unit and
PCB.
AD
Communication error Check the communication
● ○ ● ON ○ between the main unit and line between the main
ADF system and ADF (CN3).
Activate factor error
● * ○ ON ○ line between the main
(received at Wake-up)
system and panel (CN2).
USB/HOST stack Check the communication
● * * ON ○
initialization error line for USB/HOST (CN27).
line for USB/HOST (CN27).
○ ● ○ ON ○ USB memory access error
Check the setting status of
the USB memory device.
Check if two PCBs have

been replaced at the same
time.
○ ● * ON ○ Machine type detection error
line between the panel and
subsystem PCB (CN2, CN6).
○ ○ ● ON ○ Package data error
○ ○ * ON ○ Firmware data error (main)
Firmware data error
○ * ● ON ○
(downloader) Rewrite the firmware stored
○ * ○ ON ○ Firmware data error (panel) in the USB memory.
○ * * ON ○ Firmware data error (AD)
* ● ● ON ○ Firmware data error (ADF)
* ● ○ ON ○ Firmware data error (font)
Check if the firmware is
* ● * ON ○ No valid data
stored in the USB memory.
Check if the firmware in the
No firmware to be
* ○ ● ON ○ USB memory matches the
downloaded
machine type.
* ○ ○ ON ○ Main download error
* ○ * ON ○ Panel download error
Rewrite the firmware stored
AD microcomputer
* * ● ON ○ in the USB memory.
download error
* * ○ ON ○ ADF download error
Check the setting status of
* * * ON ○ Invalid parameters, etc.
the USB memory device.
● : Lights OFF
Symbol
○ : Lights ON
Descriptions
* : Lights blinking
19 - 7
3. The replacement procedure of the main PCB
3-1. MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB
If the machine power can be turned ON, proceed to step (1). If not, proceed to step (5).
(1) Make a note of the firmware version of the former PCB.
Make a note of the machine model, serial number, and counter value for all functions.
(2) Turn OFF the machine power and insert a USB memory device.
(3) Activate the test mode.
(4) Perform Test mode 103 (System-parameter adjustment upload), and save the setting
value to the USB memory device.
(5) Turn OFF the machine power and remove the USB memory device inserted in step (2),
and store it for recovery.
(6) Remove the drum unit.
(7) Detach the connector from MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB.
Remove the PCB from the bracket. (M3 x 6 screw; 8 pcs.)
(8) Remove the battery from the PCB and attach it to the new MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB.
(9) Attach the PCB to the bracket and insert the connector.
* If necessary, attach the SD Card slot.
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB
Battery
19 - 8
(10) Insert a USB memory device that stores the same version of the firmware as step (1).
And turn ON the machine power while pressing the <WAKE-UP> key.
When each of the PCB information is compatible, download operation will start automatically.
When download is completed successfully, the machine makes a beep sound.
If an error occurs, see "How to deal with download error" (Refer to 2-2).
LED 1 (MODE): Green
LED 2 (STATUS): Green
LED 3 (HB/ERROR): Red
(11) When download is completed successfully, the Wake Up LED lights up and makes a
beep sound. Turn OFF the machine power, detach the USB memory device, and then
turn ON the machine power and activate the test mode.
* When errors are indicated, press the <RESET> key until the error is cleared.
(T98-952, T96-972, C12-266 errors will occur.)
(12) Perform TM9874 to activate protected area TM, and then perform the following TMs to
initialize memory.
a. TM1198 (MCTL Memory Initialization)
b. TM110 (Clear Error Status Data)
c. TM112 (Clear Test Mode Data Setup(Machine))
d. TM111 (Clear User Memory)
e. TM1193 (REvData Initiali ze)
19 - 9
(13) Turn OFF the machine power and set the drum removed in step (5). Insert the USB
memory device removed in step (6), turn ON the machine power, and then activate the
test mode.
* When errors are indicated, press the <RESET> key to clear the error. (F51-548,
F56-265 errors will occur.)
(14) Perform TM105 (System-parameter adjustment download) to restore the data saved in
the USB memory in Step 4.
(15) Perform the following test mode.
Test No. 900 (Vertical Centering Action)
(16) Perform the following test modes to set date and time.
a. TM171 (Clock Setting (YEAR))
b. TM172 (Clock Setting (MONTH & DATE))
c. TM173 (Clock Setting (HOUR & MINUTE))
d. TM101 (Clock Adjustment Confirm)
(17) Perform TM1160 to backup the factory setting data from SUB-SYSTEM-PCB to the
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB. * Note 1
(18) Confirm that the machine model, serial number, and counter value are the same as
those before replacement.
* Compare them to the note in step (1).
(19) Press the <RESET> key to enter the normal mode, and then restart the machine. If
restart is successful, the procedure is completed.
* Note 1: TM1160 (Store factory settings area)
At the production line, TM1160 (Store factory settings area) is performed to backup and
store the data to MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB.
When SUB-SYSTEM-PCB is replaced, perform TM1160 before replacement for backup

to store the latest data from previous SUB-SYSTEM-PCB to MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB.
Then you can restore by performing TM1161 (Restore factory settings area) on the new SUB-SYSTEM-
PCB.
In the field,if you adjust the test mode 12xx,you can keep the latest backup data on the MAIN-SYSTEM-
PCB by performing TM1160.
19 - 10
3-2. SUB-SYSTEM-PCB
If the machine power can be turned ON, go to step (1). If not, go to step (3).
(1) Activate the test mode.
Make a note of the machine model, serial number, and counter value.
(2) Perform TM1160 to backup the factory default setting stored from SUB-SYSTEM-PCB to the
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB.
* Perform if possible.
(3) Turn OFF the machine power.
(4) Remove the connector from SUB-SYSTEM-PCB. Remove the binding screw for fixing,
and then release the hook to remove the PCB from the bracket.
(5) Attach the new SUB-SYSTEM-PCB to the hook and fix it to the bracket with the binding
screw.
(6) Insert the connector.
SUB-SYSTEM-PCB
SUB-SYSTEM bundle wire or

SUB-SYSTEM bundle wire 2
(when IC card authentication is
installed)
Magnified diagram of SUB-SYSTEM Area
Hook
Bind Screw M3-6
Attachment positions for

optional SUB-SYSTEM
SUB-SYSTEM-PCB (3 locations)
19 - 11
(7) Turn ON the machine power and activate the test mode.
(8) Restore the machine data.
a. When backup in step (2) has been succeeded
Perform TM1161 and restore the factory default setting from the MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB.
b. When backup in step (2) has been failed
Perform TM9874 to activate protected area TM, and then perform the following TMs.
1. TM1220 (Scanning Adj. 1(Sub scanning)),
TM1221 (Scanning Adj. 2(Main scanning)),
TM1222 (Scanning Adj. 3(Sub scanning ratio)),
TM1223 (Scanning Adj. 4(Offset)),
TM1224 (Scanner Adj.(Gain-Green))
2. TM1234 (TPH Resistance Value Entry),
TM1233 (TPH Horizontal Write Position Adjust)
3. TM1201 (Metric/Inch Switch)
(9) Adjust Paper width potentiometer.
a. Set A6 paper (105 mm) in the paper feed tray and perform TM1102.
b. Set A4 paper (210 mm) in the paper feed tray and perform TM1101.
c. Set A3 paper (297 mm) in the paper feed tray and perform TM1103.
(10) Adjust paper sensor luminous energy.
Set A3 paper (thin RISO paper) on the paper feed tray and perform TM705.
(11) Confirm that the machine model, serial number, and counter value are the same
before replacement.
* Compare with the note in step (1).
19 - 12
3-3. Panel unit (monochrome)
(1) Make a note of the firmware version of the former PCB. (If the machine power can be
turned ON)
(3) Remove the panel unit. (4 x 8 screws; 3 pcs.)
After removing the screws,

slide the panel unit to the
(4) Remove the wire harness, and then replace the panel unit.
* For the panel unit replacement, remove the reuse band for fixing the Wire harness,
and then reuse it to fix the Wire harness.
(5) Attach the panel unit on the machine. (4 x 8 screws; 3 pcs.)

(6) Insert a USB memory device that stores the same version of the firmware as in step (1).
When each of the PCB information is compatible, download operation will start.
When download is completed successfully, the machine makes a beep sound. If an
error occurs, see "How to deal with download error" (Refer to 2-2).
19 - 13
3-4. Panel unit (color)
(1) Make a note of the firmware version of the former PCB. (If the machine power can be
turned ON)
(3) Remove the panel unit. (4 x 8 screws; 3 pcs.)
After removing the screws,

slide the panel unit to the
(4) Remove the wire harness, and then replace the panel unit.
* For the panel unit replacement, remove the reuse band for fixing the Wire harness,
and then reuse it to fix the Wire harness.
(5) Attach the panel unit on the machine. (4 x 8 screws; 3 pcs.)

(6) Insert a USB memory device that stores the same version of the firmware as in step (1).
When each of the PCB information is compatible, download operation will start.
19 - 14
3-5. AF PCB
(1) Turn OFF the machine power, and remove the cover to replace the PCB.
M3 × 6 S-TITE screw
Top assembly
M3 × 8 P-TITE screw
(2) Detach the connector from ACRZ PKG ASSY.

Remove the screw (M3 x 6 S-TITE; 4 pcs.), replace with the new PCB, and then insert the
connector that has been removed.
(3) Attach the cover.
19 - 15
(4) Insert a USB memory device with the firmware.

And turn ON the machine power while pressing the <WAKE-UP> key.
When each of the PCB information is compatible, download operation will start automatically.
19 - 16
4. Others
4-1. Battery replacement
Before replacing the battery of MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB, make sure to turn ON the machine power.
* If the battery is replaced when the machine power is OFF, the internal clock may lose accuracy.
When the internal clock loses accuracy, T91-013 may be displayed. In this case, perform the following (1)
to (4).
(1) Test mode No. 0171 (Clock Setting (YEAR))
(2) Test mode No. 0172 (Clock Setting (MONTH & DATE))
(3) Test mode No. 0173 (Clock Setting (HOUR & MINUTE))
(4) Test mode No. 0101 (Clock Adjustment Confirm)
4-2. Replacing the print drum PCB

(1) Turn OFF the machine power, and insert the USB memory device.
(2) Perform TM104 (Drum-parameter adjustment upload).
(3) Pull out the print drum, and then replace the print drum PCB.
(4) Set the print drum on the main body.
(5) Perform TM106 (Drum-parameter adjustment download).
(6) Enter "9874" using the numeric key, and then press the <START> key.
(7) In the TM1210 (Drum Code Entry) and TM1215 (Drum Ink Category Entry), enter the print drum unit
serial number.
(8) Turn OFF the machine power, and then remove the USB memory device.
(9) Turn ON the machine power again. If the machine starts up normally, the replacement is completed.
[Special case]
The machine didn’t use Test Mode. Please refer to the following procedure.
(1) Replace the new Drum-PCB and set the drum on the machine.
(2) Turn On the machine power for Test Mode.
(3) Perform TM117. (Test Mode Data Clear (Drum))
- TM117 restores default setting for the following test mode.
(TM 145,544,940,941,942,943,944,946,951,970,972)
(4) Enter “9874” in the Test Mode.
(5) Please input the data for the following Test Mode.
- TM1210 (Drum Code Entry)
- TM1211 (Drum Serial Code Entry1)
- TM1212 (Drum Serial Code Entry 2)
- TM1214 (Drum Color Code Entry)
- TM1215 (Drum Ink Category Entry)
(6) Turn ON the machine power again. If the machine starts up normally, the replacement is completed.
19 - 17
4-3. Print position adjustment
The print position adjustment has following three items. Master loading cover
1. Vertical image position adjustment
2. Horizontal image position adjustment
3. Image Elongation/Shrinkage adjustment
<<1. Vertical image position adjustment>>

(Procedure 1) Print drum position-A
zzTM 941 Print Drum Position A Adjustment main
body (-60 to +40)
Adjust print drum position-A.
<<Confirmation>> : (1) Open the front door.
(2) Remove the mounting
screw (M4 x 8 screw; 1
pc.), and then remove the
master loading cover.
(3) Activate the test mode and Perform No. 881 (Print Drum on Position A).
(4) Activate the test mode and perform No. 884 (Clamp Cycle Action (3 Cycles)),
and in step 2 (Open clamp and adjust position-A), confirm that the value
range of the print drum movement is from +3 mm (the print drum is slightly
overrun and is drawn back) to 0 mm (the print drum does not overrun).
(5) For values out of the standard value range, perform the test No. 941 (Print
Drum Position A Adjustment), and adjust the Print drum position-A.
(6) Repeat from step (3).
<<Setting unit>> : 1
<<Adjustment>> : +10 makes the drum run 1.5 mm counterclockwise.
(Procedure 2) Master loading position against the print drum

zzTM 543 Master Clamp Range Adjustment
Adjust the master feeding amount at master loading.
<<Confirmation>> : Measure the length of the master between the clamp plates (master center).
<<Standard>> : 18 mm ± 1 mm
<<Setting unit>> : 1 ≒ 0.1 mm
<<Adjustment>> : The clamp amount increases as the setting value increases.
(Procedure 3) The length between the leading edge of the master and the write start position.
zzTM 541 Write Start Position Adjustment
Adjust the write start position.
<<Confirmation>> : Perform TM 80 Test Print A (Checkered).
<<Standard>> : 63 mm ± 0.5 mm
<<Adjustment>> : The write start position moves upward as the setting value increases.
19 - 18
(Procedure 4) Print position adjustment (paper feed timing)

zzTM 970 Vertical Print Position HP Adj.
Adjust the vertical print position by the second paper feed timing.
<<Confirmation>> : Perform TM 80 Test Print A (Checkered).
<<Standard>> : 4 ± 1 mm (the length from leading edge of the paper to the print starting margin)
<<Adjustment>> : Increase setting value moves upward as the setting value increases.
<<2. Horizontal (front-rear) image position adjustment>>

(Procedure 1) Adjust horizontal print position.
zzTM 1233 TPH Horizontal Write Position Adjust (protected area)
Adjust horizontal TPH printing position.
<<Adjustment>> : (1) Set TM 386 (Center Black Dot Control) to "1", and then perform master
making and print without setting an original.
(2) Fold the sheet where a center line is printed in half and check that the fold
line overlaps with the printed line.
* Be aware that TM 386 setting returns to "0" (default) at the next master
making.
<<Adjustment>> : If the fold line does not overlap with the printed line, make adjustments using TM
1233. The image moves toward the rear side as the setting value increases.
<<Standard>> : (Reference) The length from the inner rear flange to the center line is 186 mm
± 1 mm.
(Procedure 2) Adjusting horizontal scanning direction (FB factor)

zzTM 380 FB Horizontal Scan Position Adjust
Adjust the horizontal position for reading original on the FB.
<<Confirmation>> : Set the test chart No.14 on the original glass and perform master making in the
original size.
<<Standard>> : Horizontal e image must not be chipped.
<<Setting unit>> : 5 ≒ 0.5 mm (-30 to +30)
<<Adjustment>> : Perform TM 380. The image moves toward the rear side as the setting value
increases.
19 - 19
<<3. Image elongation/shrinkage adjustment>>

(Procedure 1) Image elongation/shrinkage adjustment for master making section
zzTM 547 TPH Thermal Power Adjustment
Adjust the speed of the write pulse motor at the time of master making.
<<Confirmation>> : Perform TM 81 Test Print B (Crossed Lines).
<<Standard>> : Place two sheets of originals to be overlapped at right angle to each other, and
check that the vertical elongation/shrinkage rate of the secondary scanning
direction is within 1% to the horizontal direction.
<<Setting unit>> : 1 ≒ 0.1% (-100 to +100)
<<Adjustment>> : The image elongates as the setting value increases.
(Procedure 2) Image elongation/shrinkage adjustment for scanning section

zzTM 382 FB Scanning Speed Adjustment
Adjust the speed of read pulse motor for scanning of original on the FB.
<<Confirmation>> : Set the test chart No. 11 on the original glass and perform master making and
printing in the original size.
<<Standard>> : Compare the original and printed document, and check that the elongation/
shrinkage rate at the position of the 350 mm line is within ± 1.4%.
<<Setting unit>> : 1 ≒ 0.1% (-50 to +50) (Setting a minus value decreases the size.)
<<Adjustment>> : The target value to change ± 1 mm.
A3: ± 0.2%, B4: ± 0.3%, A4: ± 0.3%
(Procedure 3) FB scanning start position adjustment

zzTM 381 FB Scan Start Position Adjust
Adjust the start position (amount of scan skip) for scanning of original on the FB.
<<Confirmation>> : Set the test chart No. 11 on the original grass and perform master making and
printing in the original size.
<<Standard>> : Check that the amount of scan skip confirmation memory area is skipped by
4 mm ± 2 mm.
<<Adjustment>> : Amount of scan skip increases as the setting value increases.
19 - 20
CHAPTER 20 WIRING DIAGRAMS
Chapter 20 WIRING DIAGRAMS
Contents
1. PCB Placement Diagram (SF9 Series).................................................2

1-1. PCB Placement Viewed from the Rear.........................................2
1-2. PCB Placement Viewed from the Front........................................3
1-3. PCB Placement Viewed from the Side.........................................3
2. Connectors Placed on PCBs................................................................4
2-1. Power Supply Assembly...............................................................4
2-2. MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB....................................................................5
2-5. MASTER-RELAY-PCB.................................................................6
2-6. MASTER-MAKING-PCB...............................................................6
2-7. PFR (Paper Feed Relay)-PCB......................................................7
2-8. SUB-SYSTEM-PCB......................................................................7
2-9. VIDEO-RELAY-PCB.....................................................................8
2-10. PF (Paper Feed)-TRAY-PCB........................................................8
2-11. USB-MEM-PCB............................................................................9
2-12. Operation Panel Unit...................................................................10
(1) SF9 Series.........................................................................10
(2) SF5*5 Series/SF5*3 Series...............................................10
3. Block and Wiring Diagrams................................................................11
(1) Whole Wiring Diagram (SF9 Series)..................................11
(2) Whole Wiring Diagram (SF5*5 Series)..............................12
(3) Whole Wiring Diagram (SF5*3 Series)..............................13
(4) Power Supply Unit (SF9 Series/SF5*5 Series)..................14
(5) Power Supply Unit (SF5*3 Series)....................................15
(6) Master Making Area (SF9 Series).....................................16
(7) Master Making Area (SF5*5 Series/SF5*3 Series)............17
(8) Master Making Area 2.......................................................18
(9) Paper Feed Area (SF9 Series/SF5*5 Series)....................19
(10) Paper Feed Area (SF5*3 Series).......................................20
(11) Scanner Area.....................................................................21
(12) Paper Ejection Area (SF9 Series).....................................22
(13) Paper Ejection Area (SF5*5 Series)..................................23
(14) Paper Ejection Area (SF5*3 Series)..................................24
(15) Main Unit Area...................................................................25
(16) Master Removal Area........................................................26
(17) Panel Area (SF9 Series)....................................................27
(18) Panel Area (SF5*5 Series/SF5*3 Series)..........................28
(19) Print Drum Area.................................................................29
(20) Set Area.............................................................................30
(21) Connection between PCBs................................................31
(22) Options 1...........................................................................32
(23) Options 2...........................................................................33
20 - 1
1. PCB Placement Diagram (SF9 Series)
1-1. PCB Placement Viewed from the Rear
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB
Power Supply
Assembly
SUB-SYSTEM-PCB
Master Making
Relay PCB Paper Feed
Relay PCB
20 - 2
1-2. PCB Placement Viewed from the Front
Master
Making PCB
1-3. PCB Placement Viewed from the Side
Relay PCB
20 - 3
2. Connectors Placed on PCBs

2-1. Power Supply Assembly
CN8 CN9 CN3 CN7 CN10

CN5
CN101
F451
CN1 CN2
CN4
F602
F601
F604
F101
F301
CN6
F1
CN102
20 - 4
2-2. MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB
CN3 CN2 CN1

CN12 CN4
CN35
CN5 CN24
CN27
CN7
CN26
CN8
CN25
CN9
CN23 CN6 CN10
CN11
CN34 CN13
CN15 CN14
CN17
CN20 CN16
CN30
CN22
CN19 CN18
CN21 CN28
20 - 5
2-5. MASTER-RELAY-PCB
CN1
CN2
CN3
2-6. MASTER-MAKING-PCB
CN2 CN1
CN4 CN7
CN5
20 - 6
2-7. PFR (Paper Feed Relay)-PCB
CN2
CN1
CN3
CN4
2-8. SUB-SYSTEM-PCB
CN1
CN2
20 - 7
2-9. VIDEO-RELAY-PCB
CN2
CN1
2-10. PF (Paper Feed)-TRAY-PCB
CN2
CN1
20 - 8
2-11. USB-MEM-PCB
CN2 CN1
20 - 9
2-12. Operation Panel Unit
(1) SF9 Series
(2) SF5*5 Series/SF5*3 Series
20 - 10
PAPER FEED AREA
SCANNER AREA
(HL and L)
Drawing No.059-50029-11
Drawing No.059-50029-09
MAIN UNIT AREA

Drawing No.059-50029-15
CN34 CN7 CN17
Paper Feed, FB, LVDS Power Control,
Vertical Position, (Scanner) Scanner, Clamp
Clamp (Actuator) (Sensor)
Paper Ejection Unit, PAPER EJECTION AREA

Paper Feed, Vertical Position, Print Pressure HP, (HL)

Front Door (Sensor)
CN22
CN15
Main Motor FG (Sensor) Drawing No.059-50029-12
Drum Unit
3. Block and Wiring Diagrams
PRINT DRUM AREA

Drawing No.059-50029-19 (Sensor) to MAIN MOTOR
CN14
059-50001
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB
(1) Whole Wiring Diagram (SF9 Series)
Elevator Motor
CN3
CN28
CN10
MASTER REMOVAL AREA

Drawing No.059-50029-16 Master Removal Unit
(Motor, Sensor) MM-ENA POWER SUPPLY UNIT
CN7
CN18
CN30
(HL and L)
CN2
Drawing No.059-50029-04
C-LCD Power Supply Unit
20 - 11
(Color Panel) (+5V,+24V)
CN1
CN26
CN25
PANEL AREA (HL)
Drawing No.059-50029-17
CN001
PNL
CN2
(Control Signal)
CN5 CN6
Power Switch
Master Making Unit,
Position-B Sensor
CN19
USB Host
CN27L
MASTER MAKING AREA 1 (HL)
TPH MASTER MAKING AREA 1 MASTER MAKING AREA 2
CN4
IC Card (L and LL) Drawing No.059-50029-08
Drawing No.1059-50029-06, -07
OPTIONS 2
CN27U
Drawing No.059-50029-23 Suction Unit, Separation Unit,
Front. Drum (Actuator)
CN16
Card Counter
CN24
CONNECTION
BETWEEN PCBs SUB-SYSTEM-PCB
CN6
Drawing No.059-50029-21
AF
Control Signal, AF Job Coin Vendor
+5V (+24V) Separator Card Vendor SW1 SW2
CN3 CN35 CN5 CN12 CN20 CN21
US.RISO.COM
OPTIONS 1 INTERLOCK AREA
Drawing No.059-50029-22 Drawing No.059-50029-20

PAPER FEED AREA (HL and L)
SCANNER AREA
PAPER FEED AREA (L-C and LL)
Drawing No.059-50029-11
Drawing No.059-50029-09, -10
MAIN UNIT AREA

Drawing No.059-50029-15
CN34 CN7 CN17
Paper Ejection Unit, PAPER EJECTION AREA (L)

Paper Feed, Vertical Position, Print Pressure HP,

Front Door (Sensor) Drawing No.059-50029-13
CN22
CN15
Main Motor FG (Sensor)
PRINT DRUM AREA Drum Unit

CN14
059-50001
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB
Elevator Motor
CN3
CN28
(2) Whole Wiring Diagram (SF5*5 Series)
CN10
MASTER REMOVAL AREA

CN7
CN18
CN30
(HL and L)
CN2
Drawing No.059-50029-04
LCD/EX Power Supply Unit
20 - 12
(Monochrome Panel) (+5V,+24V) CN1
CN23
CN25
PANEL AREA (L and LL)
Drawing No.059-50029-18
CN001
PNL
CN2
(Control Signal)
CN5 CN6
Power Switch
Master Making Unit,
Position-B Sensor
CN19
USB Host
CN27L
MASTER MAKING AREA 1
TPH MASTER MAKING AREA 2
(L and LL)
IC Card CN4 Drawing No.059-50029-07
Drawing No.059-50029-08
CN27U
OPTIONS 2
CN16
Card Counter
CN24
CONNECTION
CN6
Drawing No.059-50029-21
$)
&RQWURO6LJQDO AF Job Coin Vendor
9 (+24V) Separator Card Vendor SW1 SW2
US.RISO.COM
PAPER FEED AREA (L-C and LL) SCANNER AREA
MAIN UNIT AREA

Drawing No.059-50029-15
CN34 CN7 CN17

Paper Ejection Unit, PAPER EJECTION AREA (LL)
Paper Feed, Vertical Position, Print Pressure HP,
Front Door (Sensor) Drawing No.059-50029-14
CN22
CN15
Main Motor FG (Sensor)
PRINT DRUM AREA Drum Unit

CN14
059-50001
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB
(3) Whole Wiring Diagram (SF5*3 Series)
Elevator Motor
CN3
CN28
CN10
MASTER REMOVAL AREA

CN7
CN18
CN30
(LL)
20 - 13
CN2
Drawing No.059-50029-05
LCD/EX Power Supply Unit
(Monochrome Panel) (+5V,+24V)
CN1
CN23
CN25
PANEL AREA (L and LL)
Drawing No.059-50029-18
CN001
PNL
CN2
(Control Signal)
CN5 CN6
Power Switch
Master Making Unit,
Position-B Sensor
CN19
USB Host
CN27L
MASTER MAKING AREA 1
TPH MASTER MAKING AREA 2
(ML/L/LL)
CN4
IC Card Drawing No.059-50029-08

Drawing No.059-50029-07
CN27U
OPTIONS 2
CN16
Card Counter
CN24
CONNECTION
CN6
Drawing No.059-50029-21
$)
&RQWURO6LJQDO AF Job Coin Vendor
9 (+24V) Separator Card Vendor SW1 SW2
US.RISO.COM

059-50001 059-50006
059-53006
Paper Ejection Control Wire Harness
CN3 -V
01 01 01 01 +V
02 02 02 02
VL2P VL2P VL2P VL2P
059-53008
FB (Upper) Wire Harness Main Motor
CN25 CN1 +5VL
01 01 01 01 to PAPER EJECTION AREA
02 02 02 02 HL/ML 03
03 03 03 03 059-50029-12 02
04 04 04 04 01
05 05 05 05 L
059-50029-13 Main Motor Encoder
+24VA 06 06 06 06
07 07 07 07
+24VA
VH7P VH7P 09 09
VH9P VH9P
059-53014
CN30 TPH Drawer H Wire Harness
CN7 CN5
05 05 01 01 01 01

04 04 02 02 02 02
03 03 03 03 03 03
02 02 04 04 04 04
01 01 05 05
PH5P PH5P 06 06
07 07
CN2 to MASTER MAKING AREA 1
CN17 09 09
01 A01 10 10 HL
/PF 02 A02 10 10 059-50029-06
09 09 11 11
03 A03 12 12 ML/L
04 A04 07 07 13 13
05 A05 06 06 059-50029-07
06 A06 14 14
05 05 15 15
07 A07 04 04 16 16
03 03 17 17
09 A09 02 02
10 A10 01 01 19 19
PWM 2 (Paper Ejection Motor) 11 A11 Power Code
PWM 1 (Main Motor) 12 A12 20 20 Destination
Stock Number Product Name
13 A13
Clamp Sensor A 14 A14 Power code; MZ (Japan)
(4) Power Supply Unit (SF9 Series/SF5*5 Series)
+5VL 15 A15 to MAIN UNIT

16 A16 CN101 Power code; Overseas L (U.S.)
20 - 14
059-50029-15
Clamp Sensor B 17 A17
+5VL Power code; Overseas L (Europe)
19
Size Sensor 2 20 C Power code; Overseas L (China)
21 AC-P07CF14
22
Size Sensor 1 23
24
25 059-53027
Cover Angle Sensor 3 26 to SCANNER AREA Power Switch Wire Harness
+5V 27
059-50029-11 CN6
Carriage HP Sensor 29 01 01 01 5 4 2
30 02 02
31 02 03 03
Cover Angle Sensor 2 32 04 RLY+
04
33 03 05 RLY-
01 05
34 06 02 06 6 3 1
Cover Angle Sensor 1 35 04 07 Power Switch (5V Relay)
36
VH7P
+5VM
to MAIN UNIT 02 RLY-
059-50029-15 01
059-53006
to PAPER EJECTION AREA
HL/ML Paper Ejection Motor - CN10
059-50029-12 Paper Ejection Motor + 01 01
02 02
L
US.RISO.COM
059-50029-13
059-50001 046-50529
PS28-NWW 046-53011
CN3 -V
01 01 01 01 +V
02 02 02 02
VL2P VL2P VL2P VL2P
059-53008
FB (Upper) Wire Harness Main Motor
CN25 CN1 +5VL
01 01 01 01
02 02 02 02 03
03 03 03 03 to PAPER EJECTION AREA
02
04 04 04 04 059-50029-14 01
05 05 05 05 Main Motor Encoder
+24VA 06 06 06 06
07 07 07 07
+24VA
VH7P VH7P 09 09
VH9P VH9P
059-53014
CN30 TPH Drawer H Wire Harness
CN7 CN5
05 05 01 01 01 01

04 04 02 02 02 02
03 03 03 03 03 03
02 02 04 04 04 04
01 01 05 05
PH5P PH5P 06 06
07 07
CN17 CN2
01 A01 01 09 09
10 10 10 10 10 to MASTER MAKING AREA 1
/PF 02 A02 09 02 09 09 11 11 059-50029-07
(5) Power Supply Unit (SF5*3 Series)
03 A03 08 03 08 08 12 12
04 A04 07 04 07 07 13 13
05 A05 06 05 06 06
06 A06 14 14
05 06 05 05
Relay
07 A07 07 15 15
04 04 04 16 16
03 08 03 03 17 17
09 A09 02 09 N.C 02 02
10 A10 01 10 01 01 19 19
PWM 2 (Paper Ejection Motor) 11 A11 Power Code
PWM 1 (Main Motor) 12 A12 CT10P XR10P XR10P XR10P 20 20 Destination
Stock Number Product Name
13 A13
Clamp Sensor A 14 A14 Power code; Overseas L (U.S.)
+5VL 15 A15 to MAIN UNIT
16 A16 CN101 Power code; Overseas L (Europe)
20 - 15
059-50029-15
Clamp Sensor B 17 A17
+5VL C Power code; Overseas L (China)
19
Size Sensor 2 20
21 AC-P07CF14
22
Size Sensor 1 23
24
25 059-53027
Cover Angle Sensor 3 26 to SCANNER AREA Power Switch Wire Harness
+5V 27
059-50029-11 CN6
Carriage HP Sensor 29 01 01 01 5 4 2
30 02 02
31 02 03 03
Cover Angle Sensor 2 32 04 RLY+
04
33 03 05 RLY-
01 05
34 06 02 06 6 3 1
Cover Angle Sensor 1 35 04 07 Power Switch (5V Relay)
36
VH7P
+5VM
to MAIN UNIT 02 RLY-
059-50029-15 01
US.RISO.COM
059-50007
CN19 03 03
GND 01 02 02
Position-B Sensor 02 01 01 059-53016
+5VL 03 CT3P Position-B Sensor CN2 Master Making Mechanical Unit Wire Harness
+5VL 04 13 13 +5VL CN3 CN5
N.C 05 12 12 N.C +5VL 01 30 +5VL
CNTSCK 06 11 11 CNTSCK N.C 02 29 N.C
CNTLAT 07 10 10 CNTLAT CNTSCK 03 28 CNTSCK
CNTENB 08 09 09 CNTENB CNTLAT 04 27 CNTLAT
CNTDAT 09 08 08 CNTDAT CNTENB 05 26 CNTENB
SENSCK 10 07 07 SENSCK CNTDAT 06 25 CNTDAT
SENLAT 11 06 06 SENLAT SENSCK 07 24 SENSCK
SENDAT 12 05 05 SENDAT SENLAT 08 23 SENLAT
+5VS 13 04 04 +5VS SENDAT 09 22 SENDAT
+5VS 14 03 03 +5VS +5VS 10 21 +5VS
GND 15 02 02 GND +5VS 11 20 +5VS
GND 16 01 01 GND GND 12 19 GND
N.C 17 N.C CT13P CT13P GND 13 18 GND
HEL_RESET 14 17 HEL_RESET
CN1 HEL_RUN 15 16 HEL_RUN
HEL_RESET 18 B01 17 17 HEL_RESET WRITE A 16 15 WRITE A
HEL_RUN 19 B02 16 16 HEL_RUN WRITE B 17 14 WRITE B
WRITE A 20 B03 15 15 WRITE A WRITE /A 18 13 WRITE /A
WRITE B 21 B04 14 14 WRITE B WRITE /B 19 12 WRITE /B
WRITE /A 22 B05 13 13 WRITE /A WRITE PD 20 11 WRITE PD
WRITE /B 23 B06 12 12 WRITE /B GND 21 10 GND
WRITE PD 24 B07 11 11 WRITE PD GND 22 09 GND
GND 25 B08 10 10 GND GND 23 08 GND

GND 26 B09 09 09 GND GND 24 07 GND
GND 27 B10 08 08 GND +24VA 25 06 +24VA
GND 28 B11 07 07 GND +24VA 26 05 +24VA
+24VA 29 B12 06 06 +24VA +24VA 27 04 +24VA

+24VA 30 B13 05 05 +24VA +24VA 28 03 +24VA
+24VA 31 B14 04 04 +24VA RxD 29 02 RxD
+24VA 32 B15 03 03 +24VA TxD 30 01 TxD
HEL_RxD 33 B16 02 02 HEL_RxD
HEL_TxD 34 B17 01 01 HEL_TxD
(6) Master Making Area (SF9 Series)
059-53014 048-28002 045-28203

TPH Drawer H Wire Harness TPH Drawer U Wire Harness;H Overseas Sub Con PCB Wire Harness;H
QR/P1 Drawer 24P QR/P1 Drawer 24P
Male Housing Female Housing 045-28002 444-80007
SUB-C-PCB TPH-303R16
N.C 01 01 N.C CN1
02 02 01 01 -S 048-28002
CN2 TPH Drawer U Wire Harness;H Overseas
03 03 02 02
04 04 03 03 -S 01 01 01 01 -S
05 05 04 04 TGND 02 02 02 02 TGND Master Making Unit
06 06 05 05 TGND 03 03 03 03 TGND
07 07 06 06 TGND 04 04 04 04 TGND
to POWER TGND 05 05 05 05 TGND
08 08 07 07
SUPPLY UNIT 09 09 08 08 TGND 06 06 06 06 TGND TPH Ground Wire
20 - 16
059- N.C 10 10 N.C TGND 07 07 07 07 TGND 488-90030
N.C 11 11 N.C TGND 08 08 08 08 TGND Ground Wire (U3-55-R3)
50029-04 VTPH 09 09 09 09 VTPH
N.C 12 12 N.C
N.C 13 13 N.C VTPH 10 10 10 10 VTPH
N.C 14 14 N.C N.C 09 09 N.C VTPH 11 11 11 11 VTPH
N.C 15 15 N.C N.C 10 10 N.C VTPH 12 12 12 12 VTPH
16 16 11 11 VTPH 13 13 13 13 VTPH
17 17 12 12 VTPH 14 14 14 14 VTPH
18 18 13 13 VTPH 15 15 15 15 VTPH
19 19 14 14 +S 16 16 16 16 +S
15 15 DF1B16P DF1B16P NRD16P
20 20
21 21 16 16
22 22 17 17
23 23 18 18 Master Making Unit Cover Unit
24 24 DF1B18P DF1B18P
059-53014
TPH Drawer H Wire Harness 059-28002
TPH Drawer U Wire Harness;H Overseas
CN4
TPH_CODE2 01 01 01
TPH_CODE3 02 03 03
TPH_CODE0 03 05 05 Master Making Unit
STB1 04 07 07 STB1
LAT1 05 09 09
GND 06 11 11
GND 07 13 13
+5VM 08 15 15
STB2 09 17 17 STB2
LAT2 10 19 19
STB3 11 21 21 STB3
LAT3 12 23 23
STB4 13 25 25 STB4
LAT4 14 27 27
DI4 15 B01 B16 B01 28 28
CLK4 16 B02 B15 B02 26 26
DI3 17 B03 B14 B03 24 24
CLK3 18 B04 B13 B04 22 22
DI2 19 B05 B12 B05 20 20
CLK2 20 B06 B11 B06 18 18
+5VM 21 B07 B10 B07 16 16
+5VM 22 B08 B09 B08 14 14
GND 23 B09 B08 B09 12 12
DI1 24 B10 B07 B10 10 10
US.RISO.COM
CLK1 25 B11 B06 B11 08 08
TPH_CODE1 26 B12 B05 B12 06 06
THERMISTOR 27 B13 B04 B13 04 04
TPH_CODE4 28 B14 B03 B14 02 02
N.C B02 B15 N.C
059-53016
Master Making Mechanical Unit Wire Harness
02 02
02 Position-B Sensor
Position-B Sensor
02 29
04
05 04
05
25
09 09 24
09
09 22
05 05 20
04 04
02 02
20
20
22
22 09
24
25 24
09 09 25

05
04
29
05 05 29 02
04 04
02 02
059-53014
TPH Drawer H Wire Harness
QR/P1 Drawer 24P QR/P1 Drawer 24P
Male Housing Female Housing 046-28037
TPH Drawer U Wire Harness;Overseas
02 02 A3 : 444-80001
TPH303R11 046-28037
04 04 TPH Drawer U Wire Harness;Overseas
05 05 B4 : 444-80002
TPH260R39 Master Making Unit
TPH Ground Wire
to POWER SUPPLY UNIT 09 09 488-90030
20 - 17
ML/L Ground Wire (U3-55-R3)
059-50029-04 02 02
(7) Master Making Area (SF5*5 Series/SF5*3 Series)
LL 04 04
059-50029-05 05 05
09 09
20 20
22 22
24 24 Master Making Unit Cover Unit
059-53014
TPH Drawer H Wire Harness
02
05 05
04
05 09 09 Master Making Unit
09
25 25
24 24
22 22
20 20
20
22
24
25
US.RISO.COM
04 04
02 02
MiniCT Drawer Receptacle 30P MiniCT Drawer Plug 30P

046-28038
Master Making RF Wire Harness
CN4
01 01 03 03
Master Detection Sensor 02 02 02 02
03 03 01 01
04 04 NC CT3P Master Detection & Master End Sensors (send)
05 05 NC
CN6
Monitor 01 Master Positioning Sensor
02
03 Sensitivity Adjustment
Cutter Motor Assembly
CT3P
050-34903
Antenna Cable Mounted on A4 machines only
(8) Master Making Area 2

050-34902 050-34901 046-28038
Master Making RF Wire Harness
INTERNAL-ANT-PCB RF-PCB;1ch
CN1 Cutter Standby Switch
CN1 CN2 06 06 01 01
05 05 02 02
Antenna (+) 02 02 01 01 Antenna (+) 04 04 03 03 04 01
Antenna (-) 01 01 02 02 03 03 04 04 03 02
02 02 05 05 02 03
Relay
SH2P SH2P SH2P SH2P RESET

01 01 06 06 01 04
SH6P SH6P CT4P CT4P Cutter HP Switch
059-53019
Master Making Side Plate Wire Harness
CN1 02 01 1PIN
2PIN
Relay
01 01 01 02
Cutter Stop Pos. SW 02 02 CT2P CT2P
03 03 Cutter Motor
20 - 18
Cutter HP Switch 04 04
Cutter Motor 1 05 05 046-28026
059-53019 Cutter Motor 2 06 06 Master Positioning Relay Wire Harness
Master Making Side Plate Wire Harness 06 01
06 06 A1 05 02 Prism
Anode 03 03
05 05 B1 Master Pos. Sensor 09 09 04 03 Cathode/Emitter 02 02
04 04 10 10 03 04
Relay
Collector 01 01
03 03 11 11 02 05 CT3P Master Positioning Sensor
02 02 A3 12 12 01 06
01 01 B3 CN2 13 13 CT6P CT6P (blue)
Write Pulse Motor CT6P 01 01 Write Motor A phase Thermal Pressure Sensor 14 14 01
02 02 Write Motor B phase 15 15 02
06 06 A1 03 03 Write Motor /A phase Thermal Pressure Motor 1 16 16 03
05 05 B1 04 04 Write Motor /B phase Thermal Pressure Motor 2 Master Making Upper Unit Set Sensor (Switch)
04 04 05 05 Load Motor A phase 059-53018
03 03 06 06 Load Motor B phase Master End Sensor 19 19 Pressure Board Relay Wire Harness
02 02 A3 20 20
B3 Load Motor /A phase
Load Pulse Motor 01 01 Load Motor /B phase 01 03 03
CT6P 02 02 02
06 03 01 01
05 04 TPH Pressure Sensor
04 05
Relay
03 06 02 01
02
Relay
01 01 02
CT2P
03 03
02 02
01 01
Master End Sensor (receive)
US.RISO.COM
059-50001 046-12700
059-53005 Paper Feed Tray Wire Harness
R-Feed Side Wire Harness
059-53022
Paper Feed Tray Mechanical Unit Wire Harness
GND 01 GND 02 02
Paper Tray Volume Sensor B 02 Paper Tray Volume Sensor B 01 01
+5VL 15 15 +5VL GND 01 05 GND Paper Size Detection Sensor
Paper Tray Volume Sensor A Paper Tray Volume Sensor A Paper Size Detection Sensor 02 Paper Size Detection Sensor GND 01 01
Paper Size Detection Sensor 05 Paper Size Detection Sensor Paper Detection Sensor Paper Detection Sensor Paper Size Detection Sensor 02 02
Paper Detection Sensor 12 12 Paper Detection Sensor Paper Width Potentiometer 02 Paper Width Potentiometer +5VS
Paper Width Potentiometer 11 11 Paper Width Potentiometer +5VS 05 01 +5VS GND
+5VS 10 10 +5VS Paper Detection Sensor 05 05 02 02
Upper Limit Sensor A 09 09 09 Upper Limit Sensor A +5VS 01 01
Upper Limit Sensor B 10 Upper Limit Sensor B GND Paper Detection Sensor
Paper Feed Pressure Sensor 11 Paper Feed Pressure Sensor Paper Width Potentiometer
Paper Sensor (receive) 12 Paper Sensor (receive) +5VS 09 09
+5VS 05 05 +5VS
Paper Sensor (send) Paper Sensor (send) 02

GND 15 LED (-) 01
Feed Tray Down Switch (Sensor) 02 02 GND
Paper Width Potentiometer
GND 01 01 Feed Tray Down Switch (Sensor)
Special Stripper Unit Detection Sensor
+5VL 19
20 059-53005
R-Feed Side Wire Harness 059-53031 Paper Feeder Side Plate
21 Paper Feeder Side Plate Wire Harness 2
22 Option
046-12705
Special Stripper Unit Wire Harness 01 01 01 02 02
25 Feed Tray Down Switch (Sensor) 02 02 02 01 01
to MAIN UNIT 01 Paper Feed Down Button (Sensor)
059- 02 02 02 02 15
Relay
01 01 01 Paper Sensor (send) 05 05 05 046-12704
50029-15 Paper Sensor (Lower) Relay Wire Harness 046-12703
29 XR3P (gray) Special Stripper Unit Paper Sensor (Lower) Wire Harness
Detection Sensor (Optional) 12 Paper Sensor (send)
Paper Sensor (receive) 11
045-12612 09 09 10 09 02 01 02 01
Relay
Relay
10 10 09 10 01 02 01 02 02 02
Relay
Wire Harness (Optional for Japan only)
Paper Feed Pressure Sensor 11 11 11 CT2P (blue) 01 01
(9) Paper Feed Area (SF9 Series/SF5*5 Series)
02 01 01 12 12 12
059-53005
Relay
R-Feed Side Wire Harness 01 02 02 05 046-12702
CT2P (blue) 02 Upper Limit Sensor B Paper Sensor (Upper) Wire Harness
Relay
01 15 15 15
20 - 19
Relay (blue) 01 Emitter
Upper Limit Sensor A 02 02 02 02 02
Scraper Clutch (Optional) 01 Collector
Relay
19 19 01 01 01
Relay (blue) Paper Sensor (receive)
02 01
Relay
01 02 02 02
01 Paper Feed Reverse-Rotation 01 01
Scraper CL - Prevention Solenoid (Optional) Paper Feed Pressure Sensor
02
Paper Feed Solenoid -
Paper Feed CL - 05 01
02 02 02
02
Relay
01 01 01
09 XR3P (gray) Upper Limit Sensor B
10
11 Counter (-) Paper Feed Clutch
12 to SCANNER AREA 05
Counter (+)
059-50029-11 Spare Counter
Counter (-)
15 02 02 02
Counter (+) 01 01 01
to MAIN UNIT XR3P (gray) Upper Limit Sensor A
059-50029-15
19
20 Not mounted on Chinese specification machines
US.RISO.COM
059-50001 046-12700
059-53005 Paper Feed Tray Wire Harness
059-53022
Paper Feed Tray Mechanical Unit Wire Harness
GND 01 GND 02 02
Paper Tray Volume Sensor B 02 Paper Tray Volume Sensor B 01 01
+5VL 15 15 +5VL GND 01 05 GND Paper Size Detection Sensor
Paper Tray Volume Sensor A Paper Tray Volume Sensor A Paper Size Detection Sensor 02 Paper Size Detection Sensor GND 01 01
Paper Size Detection Sensor 05 Paper Size Detection Sensor Paper Detection Sensor Paper Detection Sensor Paper Size Detection Sensor 02 02
Paper Detection Sensor 12 12 Paper Detection Sensor Paper Width Potentiometer 02 Paper Width Potentiometer +5VS
Paper Width Potentiometer 11 11 Paper Width Potentiometer +5VS 05 01 +5VS GND
+5VS 10 10 +5VS Paper Detection Sensor 05 05 02 02
Upper Limit Sensor A 09 09 09 Upper Limit Sensor A +5VS 01 01
Upper Limit Sensor B 10 Upper Limit Sensor B GND Paper Detection Sensor
Paper Feed Pressure Sensor 11 Paper Feed Pressure Sensor Paper Width Potentiometer
Paper Sensor (receive) 12 Paper Sensor (receive) +5VS 09 09
+5VS 05 05 +5VS
Paper Sensor (send) Paper Sensor (send) 02
GND 15 LED (-) 01
Feed Tray Down Switch (Sensor) 02 02 GND
Paper Width Potentiometer
GND 01 01 Feed Tray Down Switch (Sensor)
Special Stripper Unit Detection Sensor
+5VL 19
059-53005

20 R-Feed Side Wire Harness Paper Feeder Side Plate
21 046-12708
Option Paper Feeder Side Plate Wire Harness 2 LL
22
01 01 01 02 02
25 Feed Tray Down Switch (Sensor) 02 02 02 01 01
to MAIN UNIT 01 Paper Feed Down Button (Sensor)
059- 02 02 02 02 15 N.C
Relay
01 01 01 Paper Sensor (send) 05 05 05 046-12704
50029-15 Paper Sensor (Lower) Relay Wire Harness 046-12703
29 XR3P (gray) Special Stripper Unit Paper Sensor (Lower) Wire Harness
(10) Paper Feed Area (SF5*3 Series)
Detection Sensor (Optional) 12 Paper Sensor (send)

Paper Sensor (receive) 11
09 09 10 09 02 01 02 01
Relay
Relay
10 10 09 10 N.C 01 02 01 02 02 02
Relay
Paper Feed Pressure Sensor 11 11 11 N.C CT2P (blue) 01 01
02 01 01 12 12 12 N.C
059-53005
Relay
R-Feed Side Wire Harness 01 02 02 05 046-12702
CT2P (blue) 02 Upper Limit Sensor B Paper Sensor (Upper) Wire Harness
Relay
01 15 15 15
Relay (blue) N.C 01 Emitter
Upper Limit Sensor A 02 N.C 02 02 02 02
Scraper Clutch (Optional) 01 N.C Collector
Relay
19 19 01 01 01
Relay (blue) Paper Sensor (receive)
20 - 20
02 01
Relay
01 02
Scraper CL - 01 Paper Feed Reverse-Rotation

Prevention Solenoid (Optional)
02
Paper Feed Solenoid -
Paper Feed CL - 05 01
02 02 02
02
Relay
01 01 01
09 XR3P (gray) Upper Limit Sensor B
10
11 Counter (-) Paper Feed Clutch
12 to SCANNER AREA 05
Counter (+)
059-50029-11 Spare Counter
Counter (-)
15 02
Counter (+) 01
to MAIN UNIT
059-50029-15
19
20
US.RISO.COM
Scanner Wire Harness
FFC
CCD PCB
01 01 01 01 01
02 02 02 02 02
03 03 03 03 03
04 04 04 04 04
LV00- 05 05 05 05 LVDS 0- 05
06 06 06 06 06
08 08 08 08 08
09 09 09 09 09
10 10 10 10 10
LV01- 11 11 11 11 LVDS 1- 11
12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15
(11) Scanner Area
16 16 16 16 16
LV02- LVDS 2- LVDS0-
18 18 18 18 LVDS0- 18
19 19 19 19 19
20 20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21 LVDS1- 21 LVDS1-
22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23

24 24 24 24 LVDS2- 24 LVDS2-
25 25 25 25 25
26 26 26 26 26
28 28 28 28 28
LV03- 29 29 29 29 LVDS 3- 29
30 30 30 30 LVDS3- 30 LVDS3-
31 31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33 LVDS4- 33 LVDS4-
34 34 34 34 34
LV04- 35 35 35 35 LVDS 4- 35
36 36 36 36 36
38 38 38 38 38
39 39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40 40
DF13 40P DF13 40P
DF13A-40DP DF13A-40DP IMSA-9639S-
-1.25V -1.25V
40Y801
20 - 21
059-53008
FB (Upper) Wire Harness
19 01 03 03
18 02 02 02
03 01 01
Angle Sensor 3
16 04
15 05
14 06 03 03
13 02 02
to POWER SUPPLY UNIT 12 08 01 01
Cover Angle Sensor 3 11 09 Carriage HP Sensor
HL/ML/L
10 10
059-50029-04
Relay
09 11
LL Carriage HP Sensor 08 12 03 03
13 02 02
059-50029-05 01 01
06 14 Angle Sensor 2
Cover Angle Sensor 2 05 15
04 16
03 03 03
Cover Angle Sensor 1 02 18 02 02
01 19 01 01
Angle Sensor 1
059-53005
to PAPER FEED AREA
HL/ML/L FB Motor /B 04 01 04 01 FB Motor A
FB Motor /A 03 02 03 02 FB Motor B
059-50029-09 FB Motor B FB Motor /A
02 03 02 03
Relay
Relay
L-C/LL FB Motor A 01 04 01 04 FB Motor /B

059-50029-10
FB Motor
* Note
US.RISO.COM
The FB motors are connected as
follows to reverse the rotation direction:
A -> /B, B -> /A, /A -> B, /B -> A.
059-53028
Suction Unit Wire Harness
02 02
01 01 04 01
Print Pressure HP Sensor 02
02
Relay
059-53006
059-50001 Paper Ejection Control Wire Harness 01 04
Suction Fan
19 01 19 01
02 02 02 01
Relay
01 02
04 04 XR2P (gray)
15 05 15 05 Paper Ejection Motor
14 14
01 01 12 12 05 05
Print Pressure HP Sensor 02 02 11 09 11 09 04 04
10 10 10 10
Relay
Relay
04 04 09 11 09 11 02 02
Paper Ejection FG Sensor 05 05 12 12 01 01 Wing Pulse Motor
14 14
Paper Ejection Wing HP Sensor 05 15 05 15

09 09 04 04
10 10 02 02
11 11 02 02 01 01
Paper Ejection Sensor

12 12 01 19 01 19 Paper Ejection FG Sensor
Main FG Sensor 14 14
15 15
to POWER 02 02
SUPPLY UNIT 01 01
(12) Paper Ejection Area (SF9 Series)
02 Paper Ejection Wing HP Sensor

Paper Ejection Motor +
Relay
01 059- to POWER SUPPLY UNIT
50029-04 Paper Ejection Motor -
059-50029-04 023-21703
Paper Ejection Sensor Relay Wire Harness
01
02 02 02 02
Relay
01 01 01
XR3P (gray) Paper Ejection Sensor
20 - 22
Suction Fan + 01
02
Suction Fan PWM
04
Paper Ejection Motor - 05
Wing Pulse Motor -A
Wing Pulse Motor -B
Wing Pulse Motor -/A
Wing Pulse Motor -/B 09
10
11
12 Separation Unit
to MAIN UNIT
14 059-50029-15
15 046-21800
Separation Unit Wire Harness
Separation Fan 1A 01 04 01
19 05 02 02
Separation Fan 1A PWM 20 04 02
Relay
Separation Fan 1B 21 04 01 04
Relay
22 02 05 Separation Fan 1
Separation Fan 1B PWM 01
24
Pressure Solenoid - 25
Pressure Control M-A 02 01 04 01
Relay
Pressure Control M-B 01 02 02
Pressure Control M-/A Pressure Solenoid 02
Relay
Pressure Control M-/B 29 01 04

XR4P (gray) Separation Fan 2
04 01
02
02
Relay
01 04
Pressure Control Motor
US.RISO.COM
059-53029
Suction Unit Wire Harness;L/LL
02 02
01 01 04 01
059-53006 02
Relay
059-50001 Paper Ejection Control Wire Harness 01 04
Suction Fan
19 01 19 01
02 02 02 01
Relay
01 02
04 04 XR2P (gray)
15 05 15 05 Paper Ejection Motor
14 14
01 01 12 12
Print Pressure HP Sensor 02 02 11 09 11 09
10 10 10 10
Relay
Relay
04 04 09 11 09 11
Paper Ejection FG Sensor 05 05 12 12

14 14
Paper Ejection Wing HP Sensor 05 15 05 15
09 09 04 04
10 10 02 02
Paper Ejection Sensor 11 11 02 02 01 01
12 12 01 19 01 19 Paper Ejection FG Sensor
15 15
to POWER
SUPPLY UNIT
(13) Paper Ejection Area (SF5*5 Series)
02
Paper Ejection Motor +
Relay
01 059- to POWER SUPPLY UNIT
50029-04 Paper Ejection Motor - 023-21703
059-50029-04
01
02 02 02 02
Relay
01 01 01
20 - 23
Suction Fan + 01
02
Suction Fan PWM
04
Wing Pulse Motor -A
Wing Pulse Motor -B
10
11
12 Separation Unit
to MAIN UNIT
14 059-50029-15
15 046-21800
19 05 02 02
Relay
22 02 Relay 05 Separation Fan 1
24
Relay
Relay

04 01
02
02
Relay
01 04
US.RISO.COM
059-53004
059-53029
Suction Unit Wire Harness;L/LL
02 02
01 01 04 01
02
Relay
059-50001 01 04
Suction Fan
19 01
02 02 01
Relay
01 02
04 XR2P (gray)
15 05 Paper Ejection Motor
14
01 01 12
Print Pressure HP Sensor 02 02 11 09
10 10
Relay
04 04 09 11
Paper Ejection FG Sensor 05 05 12
14
05 15

Paper Ejection Wing HP Sensor
09 09 04
10 10 02 02
Paper Ejection Sensor 11 11 02 01 01

12 12 01 19 Paper Ejection FG Sensor
15 15
to POWER
SUPPLY UNIT
02
Relay
01 059-
(14) Paper Ejection Area (SF5*3 Series)
50029-05 023-21703
01
02 02 02 02
Relay
01 01 01
20 - 24
Suction Fan + 01
02
Suction Fan PWM
04
Wing Pulse Motor -A
Wing Pulse Motor -B
10
11
12 Separation Unit
to MAIN UNIT
14 059-50029-15
15 046-21800
19 05 02 02
Relay
Relay
22 02 05 Separation Fan 1
24
Relay
Relay

04 01
02
02
Relay
01 04
US.RISO.COM
059-53008
FB (Upper) Wire Harness 059-53005
023-26018 R-Feed Side Wire Harness
01 Clamp Wire Harness +5VL
to POWER SUPPLY UNIT
02
03 HL/ML/L 01 03 03 01
04 059-50029-04 Clamp Sensor A 05 02 02 02 02
05 +5VL 04 03 01 01 03
LL
03 04 Clamp Sensor A 04
Relay
059-50029-05 Clamp Sensor B to PAPER FEED AREA
02 05 05
+5VL 01 +5VL HL/ML/L
09 059-50029-09
10 to PAPER FEED AREA 03 03 L-C/LL
11 HL/ML/L 02 02 09
12 01 01 10 059-50029-10
13
059-50029-09 11
Clamp Sensor B 046-53012
14 L-C/LL 12 Vertical Pulse Motor Relay Wire Harness
15 059-50029-10 13
14
059-53005 Vertical Slide Pulse Motor -A 15 01
R-Feed Side Wire Harness +5VL Vertical Slide Pulse Motor -B 05 02 05 05
(15) Main Unit Area
19 Vertical Slide Pulse Motor -/A 04 03 04 04

20 03 03 Vertical Slide Pulse Motor -/B 03 04 03 03
Relay
Vertical HP Sensor 21 02 02 Clamp Motor 1 19 02 05 02 02
+5VL 22 01 01 Clamp Motor 2 20 01 01 01 Vertical Slide Pulse Motor
23 Vertical HP Sensor
Lower Limit Sensor 24
+5VL 25 +5VL

Front Door Sensor 03 03 02 01
Relay
02 02 01 02
29 01 01
30 Lower Limit Sensor Clamp Motor
31 059-53008
32 FB (Upper) Wire Harness to POWER SUPPLY UNIT
059-53015
059-53004 Lower F Wire Harness HL/ML/L
R-Ejection Side Wire Harness 059-50029-04
02
Relay
01 LL
03 01 03 03
02 02 02 02 to PAPER EJECTION AREA 059-50029-05
01
Relay
01 03 01 01 02
Front Door Sensor HL/ML 059-50029-12
03 L
04
059-53004 05 059-50029-13
R-Ejection Side Wire Harness 059-53015 02 01
Lower F Wire Harness LL
Relay
059-50029-14 01 02
Inking Motor FG 01 09 Master Making Lock Solenoid
Ink Bottle Set Switch 02 Auto Power-OFF - 10 01
Print Drum Thermistor 03 +5VM 11 02
Ink Sensor 04 12 03
Overflow Sensor 05 Master Making Lock Solenoid - 13 05 04
20 - 25
14 04 05 02 01
Relay
Relay
Print Drum Lock Solenoid - 15 03 01 02

to PRINT DRUM AREA Inking Motor - 02
09 01 Print Drum Lock Solenoid
059-50029-19 to PRINT DRUM
10
11 19 059-50029-19
12 20 to PAPER EJECTION AREA
13 21
14 22 HL/ML 059-50029-12
15 23 L
03 03 24 059-50029-13
02 02 25
LL
19 01 01
Master Making Lock Sensor 059-50029-14
Print Drum Lock Sensor 20
21 29
Relay
22 30
Master Making Lock Sensor 23
24
Print Drum Release Switch 25
059-53001
Print Drum Release Switch LED - Pushbutton Switch Assembly 1
Master Making Unit Release Switch 29
30 04 01
31 03 02
Master Making Unit Release Switch LED - 32 02 03
Relay
01 04
Print Drum Release Switch
059-53001
Pushbutton Switch Assembly 1
04 01
03 02
02 03
Relay
01 04
Master Making Unit Release Switch
US.RISO.COM
Master Removal Unit
059-53011 059-53010
Master Removal Wire Harness Master Removal Unit Wire Harness
Master Compression HPS

XR3P (gray) Master Compression HP Sensor
Paper Transport FGS
12
Master Disposal Box Set Sensor 11
Master Compression Motor 1
Relay
Master Compression Motor 2 11 11
12 12 Master Disposal Transport FG Sensor
Master Disposal Motor -
Master Compression FGS
(16) Master Removal Area
Master Disposal Jam Sensor

Master Disposal Box Set Sensor
Master Loading Sensor 21

22 B11
Master Compression FG Sensor
Master Disposal Jam Sensor
20 - 26
Relay
Master Loading Sensor
RED(+)
BLK(-)
Relay
Master Compression Motor

Elevator Motor 2
Elevator Motor 1
Elevator Unit RED(+)
BLK(-)
Relay
023-12602
Elevator Motor Wire Harness
Master Disposal Transport Motor
BLK(-)
RED(+) Relay
Relay
Elevator Motor
023-12602
Elevator Motor Wire Harness
Main Unit
* Note
The elevator motors are connected as
US.RISO.COM
follows to reverse the rotation direction:
RED (+) -> Elevator Motor 2,
BLK (-) -> Elevator Motor 1.
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB Color Panel
CLCD-CTL-PCB
059-53020 LCD Module
CN26 LVDS Wire Harness CN10
CN4 GND 01
LVDS_CLK+ 01 01 01 01 CLK+ GND 02
GND 02 02 02 02 GND VDD 03
LVDS_CLK- 03 03 03 03 CLK- VDD 04
LVDS_DAT2+ 04 04 04 04 IN2+ UPDN 05
GND 05 05 05 05 GND SHLR 06
LVDS_DAT2- 06 06 06 06 IN2- GND 07
LVDS_DAT1+ 07 07 07 07 IN1+ R0 08
GND 08 08 08 08 GND R1 09
LVDS_DAT1- 09 09 09 09 IN1- R2 10
LVDS_DAT0+ 10 10 10 10 IN0+ R3 11
GND 11 11 11 11 GND GND 12
LVDS_DAT0- 12 12 12 12 IN0- R4 13
GND 13 13 13 13 GND R5 14
GND 14 14 14 14 GND R6 15
GND 15 15 15 15 GND GND 16
GND 16 16 16 16 R7 17

GND
+3.3V 17 17 17 17 N.C GND 18
(17) Panel Area (SF9 Series)
+3.3V 18 18 18 18 N.C G0 19
LVDS_ON 19 19 19 19 LVDS_ON G1 20
G2 21
10029449-001RLF CAM-F77B/R41- G3 22
059-53012 A019A GND 23
CN2 Panel Wire Harness;HML G4 24
CN2 G5 25
/WAKEUP_SENSOR 01 01 15 15 WKUP-SEN
/DEEP_SLEEP 02 02 14 14 /SLEEP GND 26
GND G6 27
GND 03 03 13 13 G7 28
CONNECT 04 04 12 12 /CONNECT
GND 29
READY 05 05 11 11 /READY
B0 30
TxD 06 06 10 10 RxD
RxD 07 07 09 09 B1 31
TxD B2 32
Model Identification (GND) 08 08 08 08 DETECT B3 33
/WAKEUP_SW 09 09 07 07 /WAKE_UP
GND 10 10 06 06 GND 34
GND 35
+5V 11 11 05 05 B4
5V B5 36
+5V 12 12 04 04 5V
+5V(BACKLIGHT) 13 13 03 03 BL-PWR(5V) GND 37
BACKLIGHT_ON 14 14 02 02 B6 38
ENB-BL B7 39
GND 15 15 01 01 GND GND 40
20 - 27
CZ15P CZ15P MAIN-SW HML-SW CZ15P CZ15P DCLK 41
GND 42
CN1 CN2 DE 43
CN1 CN9 BIST 44
GND 01 01 GND 5V 01 01 5V
LED_PWM0 GND 45
/WKUP_KEY 02 02 /WKUP_KEY 02 02 LED_PWM0
/WKUP_LED /WKUP_LED 3.3V GND 46
03 03 03 03 3.3VSB
/KIN4 /KIN4 LED_SCK LED_PWM 47
04 04 04 04 LED_SCK0
/KIN5 /KIN5 /LED_LATCH LED_EN 48
05 05 05 05 /LED_LATCH
/KOUT3 /KOUT3 /LED_ENB VLED 49
06 06 06 06 /LED_ENB 50
/KOUT2 07 07 /KOUT2 LED_SO0 07 07 VLED
LED_SO0
/KOUT1 08 08 /KOUT1 WAKEUP_LED 08 08 WAKEUP_LED
* Not mounted on /KOUT0 09 09 /KOUT0 /KIN0 09 09 /KIN0
/SEG10 10 10 /SEG10 /KIN1 10 10 /KIN1
/SEG11 11 11 /SEG11 /KIN2 11 11 /KIN2
Chinese specification machines /SEG12 12 12 /SEG12 /KOUT0 12 12 /KOUT0 CN6
/SEG07 13 13 /SEG07 /KOUT1 13 13 /KOUT1 Touch Panel
XR 01
COM2 14 14 COM2 /KOUT2 14 14 /KOUT2
XL 02
059-53021 3.3VSB 15 15 3.3VSB /KOUT3 15 15 /KOUT3
USB Host Wire Harness /KOUT4 YB 03
3.3VSB 16 16 3.3VSB 16 16 /KOUT4
/KOUT5 YT 04
GND 17 17 GND 17 17 /KOUT5
058-50002 /WAKE_UP
GND 18 18 GND 18 18 WKUP
USB-MEM-PCB POW 19 19 POW
GND 20 20 GND
LED_PWM3 21 21 LED_PWM3
CN27 CN1 CN2 /KIN0 N.C 22 22 NC
+5VM L01 01 01 01 +5VM +5VM 01 N.C 23 23 NC
D- L02 02 02 02 D- DATA(-) 02 HOME-SW GND 24 24 GND
D+ L03 03 03 03 D+ DATA(+) 03 /KIN3 25 25 /KIN3
GND L04 04 04 04 GND GND 04 CN1 CN3 /KIN4 26 26 /KIN4
/KOUT5 01 01 01 01 /KOUT5 /KIN5 27 27 /KIN5
UBA-4RS-D14T-4D UBA-R4R- UBA-R4R-
/KIN0 02 02 02 02 /KIN0 BZ 28 28 BZ
D14-4D D14-4D LED_PWM1 29 29 LED_PWM1
LED_PWM2 30 30 LED_PWM2
US.RISO.COM
CN5 LED-PNL-CTL
451-90010 /CS SUB-SW
01 /CS1
LCD Module /RES CN7 CN1
059-50001 02 /RES
D/I GND 01 30 GND
03 D/I
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB RD/ /WR GND 02 29 GND
04 RD//WR
E 3.3VSB 03 28 3.3VSB
05 E
DB0 3.3VSB 04 27 3.3VSB
06 DB0
DB1 N.C 05 26 N.C
07 DB1
DB2 COM0 06 25 COM0
08 DB2
DB3 COM1 07 24 COM1
09 DB3
DB4 COM2 08 23 COM2
10 DB4
DB5 COM3 09 22 COM3
11 DB5
DB6 N.C 10 21 N.C
12 DB6
DB7 /SEG24 11 20 /SEG24
13 DB7
+3.3VS /SEG23 12 19 /SEG23
059-53017 14 VDD
GND /SEG22 13 18 /SEG22
Panel Wire Harness;L/LL 15 GND
VOUT /SEG21 14 17 /SEG21
16 Vout
CAP3+ /SEG20 15 16 /SEG20
CN23 17 CAP3+
CAP1- Sout 16 15 Sout
MLCD_GND 01 A01 18 CAP1-
CAP1+ LED_SCK0 17 14 LED_SCK0
MLCD_D[7] 02 A02 19 CAP1+
CAP2+ LED_LATCH 18 13 LED_LATCH
MLCD_D[6] 03 A03 20 CAP2+
CAP2- N.C 19 12 N.C
MLCD_D[5] 04 A04 21 CAP2-
V1 /Kout4 20 11 /Kout4
MLCD_D[4] 05 A05 22 V1
MLCD_D[3] 06 A06 23 V2
MLCD_D[2] 07 A07 24 V3
MLCD_D[1] 08 A08 25 V4
V0 /KIN0 24 07 /KIN0
MLCD_D[0] 09 A09 26 V0
/KIN1 25 06 /KIN1
/RD 10 A10 N.C
6269(FFC) 26P /KIN2 26 05 /KIN2
MLCD_E 11 A11 /KIN3 27 04 /KIN3

MLCD_R//W 12 A12 /KIN4 28 03 /KIN4
A[8] 13 A13 N.C
CN4 /KIN5 29 02 /KIN5
A[7] 14 A14 N.C GND 30 01 GND
A[6] 15 A15 N.C 14 14 GND
A[5] 16 A16 N.C 13 13 LCD_DB7

A[4] 17 A17 N.C 12 12 LCD_DB6
A[3] 18 A18 N.C 11 11 LCD_DB5
GND 19 A19 10 10 LCD_DB4
Connection Detection 20 A20 09 09 LCD_DB3
A[2] 21 B01 N.C 08 08 LCD_DB2 MAIN-SW
A[1] 22 B02 N.C 07 07 LCD_DB1
MLCD_A[0] 23 B03 06 06 LCD_DB0
/MLCD_RESET 24 B04 05 05 LCD_E CN2 CN1
/MLCD_CS 25 B05 04 04 LCD_R//W GND 18 18 GND
/LOW_POWER_MODE 26 B06 N.C 03 03 LCD_A0 /WKUP_KEY 17 17 /WKUP_KEY
/SLEEP_MODE 27 B07 N.C 02 02 /LCD_RESET /WKUP_LED 16 16 /WKUP_LED
/RMGA2_2_IRQ 28 B08 N.C 01 01 /LCD_CS /KIN5 15 15 /KIN5
EX_GATE 29 B09 N.C /KIN4 14 14 /KIN4
ELE_UPA_SEN_IN 30 B10 N.C
CZ14P CZ14P /Kout3 13 13 /Kout3
(18) Panel Area (SF5*5 Series/SF5*3 Series)
ELE_UPB_SEN_IN 31 B11 N.C /Kout2 12 12 /Kout2

BKEN_SEN_IN 32 B12 N.C CN6 /Kout1 11 11 /Kout1
MAINFG_SEN_IN 33 B13 N.C LCD-BL /Kout0 10 10 /Kout0
INKFG1_SEN_IN 34 B14 N.C +5V
01 01 LCD-BL /SEG10 09 09 /SEG10
Backlight 02 02 +5V
PAPER_SEN_IN 35 B15 N.C /SEG11 08 08 /SEG11
IL_GATE 36 B16 N.C PH2P /SEG12 07 07 /SEG12
DRUM1_HEL_TxD 37 B17 /SEG07 06 06 /SEG07
20 - 28
DRUM1_HEL_RxD 38 B18 COM2 05 05 COM2
DRUM2_HEL_TxD 39 B19 3.3VSB 04 04 3.3VSB
DRUM2_HEL_RxD 40 B20 3.3VSB 03 03 3.3VSB
CZ40P CZ40P GND 02 02 GND
059-53017 GND 01 01 GND
Panel Wire Harness;L/LL
CN2 CN3
/WAKEUP_SENSOR 01 01 15 15 WKUP-SEN
/DEEP_SLEEP 02 02 14 14 /SLEEP
GND 03 03 13 13 GND
CONNECT 04 04 12 12 /CONECT
READY 05 05 11 11 /READY
TxD 06 06 10 10 /RxD
RxD 07 07 09 09 /TxD
Model Identification 08 08 08 08 N.C
/WAKEUP_SW 09 09 07 07 /WAKE_UP
GND 10 10 06 06 GND
+5V 11 11 05 05 Vcc
+5V 12 12 04 04 Vcc
BACKLIGHT_5V 13 13 03 03 Vcc
BACKLIGHT_ON 14 14 02 02 LCD-BL_H
GND 15 15 01 01 GND
CZ15P CZ15P
CZ15P CZ15P
* Not mounted on Chinese specification machines (except for CH machines)
059-53021
USB Host Wire Harness
058-50002
USB-MEM-PCB
CN27 CN1 CN2

+5VM L01 01 01 01 +5VM +5VM 01
D- L02 02 02 02 DATA(-) DATA(-) 02
D+ L03 03 03 03 DATA(+) DATA(+) 03
GND GND
US.RISO.COM
L04 04 04 04 GND 04
UBA-4RS-D14T-4D UBA-R4R- UBA-R4R-
D14-4D D14-4D
Lower F Wire Harness
01
02 to MAIN UNIT
to MAIN UNIT 03 059-
059- 04 50029-15
50029-15 05
06 Inking Motor -
07
(19) Print Drum Area
08 Inking Motor +
059-53007
Print Drum Unit
CZ8P 059-53024
059-53025 046-17178 Print Drum Unit Wire Harness
Print Drum Drawer U Wire Harness
Print Drum Drawer H Wire Harness
CN2 Overflow Sensor 05 05
01 01 04 04
Ink Sensor

02 02 03 03
Thermistor 02 02
CZ16P CZ16P 03 03 CN3 01 01
04 04 01 01 CT5P Ink Sensor
16 01 B16 B01 05 05
15 02 B15 B02
02 02
14 03 B14 B03
03 03
13 04 B13 B04 CN1 04 04
Overflow Sensor 05 05 023-17965
12 05 B12 B05 12 12 Inking Motor - Ink Bottle Set Switch Assembly
11 06 B11 B06 11 11 Ink Sensor 06 06
Inking Motor FG Inking Motor + Print Drum Thermistor 07 07 1 3 2 1 3 2
A01 10 07 B10 B07 10 10 Inking Motor FG
A02 Ink Bottle Set Switch 09 08 B09 B08 09 09 08 08
Print Drum Thermistor Ink Bottle Set Switch 09 09 03 01
A03 08 09 B08 B09 08 08
Relay
A04 Ink Sensor 07 10 B07 B10 07 07
Print Drum Thermistor Ink Bottle Set Switch 10 10 02 02
Relay
Overflow Sensor Ink Sensor 11 11 01 03 Ink Bottle Set Switch
A05 06 11 B06 B11 06 06 Overflow Sensor
A06 05 12 B05 B12 05 05 12 12 CT3P (blue) CT3P (blue)
A07 04 13 B04 B13 04 04 Inking Motor FG Sensor 13 13 Relay (blue)
A08 03 14 B03 B14 03 03 14 14
A09 02 15 B02 B15 02 02 Inking Motor + 15 15
A10 01 16 B01 B16 01 01 Inking Motor - 16 16
A11 CZ16P CZ16P A17 A01
03 03
A12 A16 A02
02 02
A13 A15 A03
01 01
A14 A14 A04
CT3P Inking Motor FG Sensor
A15 A13 A05
A16 A12 A06
20 - 29
B01 A11 A07
B02 A10 A08
to MAIN UNIT B03 A09 A09
02 01
Relay
059- B04 Print Drum Lock Sensor A08 A10 01 02

B05 A07 A11
CT2P CT2P
50029-15 Inking Motor
B06 A06 A12
B07 A05 A13
B08 03 03 A04 A14 059-53007
B09 A03 A15
Print Drum Unit Wire Harness
02 02 050-34903
B10 01 01 A02 A16 Antenna Cable
B11 CT3P Print Drum Lock Sensor A01 A17
B12 RWZ33P RWZ33R 050-34901 050-34902
B13 to MAIN UNIT
B14 059-50029-15 Plug Receptacle RF-PCB;1ch INTERNAL-ANT-PCB
B15
B16
CN5 CN1 CN2 CN1
01 01 06 06 02 02 01 01 Antenna (-)
02 02 05 05 Antenna (+) 01 01 02 02 Antenna (+)
03 03 04 04 SH2P SH2P SH2P SH2P
04 04 03 03
05 05 02 02
06 06 01 01
CZ6P CZ6P SH6P SH6P
US.RISO.COM
059-53008 046-34103
FB (Upper) Wire Harness Main Unit Set Switch Lead Wire
04 01 COM 01
059-50001 03 02 N.C N.C 02
N.C 02 03 N.C 03
Relay
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB NO
01 04 L - Rear Cover Set Switch (Ejection Side)
CT4P CT4P (blue)
Relay (blue) 046-34103
Main Unit Set Switch Lead Wire
COM
04 01 01
03 02 N.C N.C 02
N.C 02 03 N.C 03
Relay
01 04 NO
R - Rear Cover Set Switch (Feeder Side)
CT4P CT4P (blue)
Relay (blue) 058-53011
(20) Set Area
Main Unit Set Switch Lead Wire

059-53011
Master Removal Wire Harness
COM
04 01 04 01 01
CN20 03 02 03 02 N.C N.C 02
+24VA/+5VS 01 01 N.C 02 03 N.C N.C 02 03 N.C 03
Relay
Relay
GND 02 02 04 01 04 NO
03 03 01 Master Disposal Box Set Switch
GND CT4P XR4P XR4P CT4P (blue)
SW 04 04
SW 05 05 Relay (blue)
GND 06 06
GND 07 07 N.C

SW 08 08
09 09 059-53004 059-53015
SW R-Ejection Side Wire Harness Lower F Wire Harness 023-53025
10 10
GND Master Making/Disposal Set Switch Lead Wire

GND 11 11 N.C
SW 12 12
13 13 01 06 01 04 01 COM 01
SW 06
GND 14 14 05 02 05 02 03 02 N.C N.C 02
15 15 N.C 04 03 04 03 N.C 02 03 N.C 03
Relay
GND NO
16 16 03 04 03 04 01 04 Master Making Unit Set Switch
Relay
Relay
SW
SW 17 17 02 05 02 05 CT4P CT4P (blue)
GND 18 18 N.C 01 06 01 06 Relay (blue)
GND 19 19 N.C XR6P CT6P
20 20 CT6P XR6P
SW 023-53024
miniCT20P miniCT20P Print Drum Set Switch Lead Wire
04 01 COM 01
03 02 N.C N.C 02
N.C 02 03 N.C 03
Relay
01 04 NO Print Drum Set Switch
CT4P CT4P (blue)
20 - 30
Relay (blue)
059-53031
HL/ML/L Paper Feeder Side Plate Wire Harness 2
059-53005
R-Feed Side Wire Harness 023-53023
046-12708 Paper Feed Tray Switch Lead Wire
LL Paper Feeder Side Plate Wire Harness 2:LL
CN21
COM
+24VA 01 01 04 01 04 01 01
GND 02 02 03 02 03 02 N.C N.C 02
03 N.C 02 03 N.C N.C 02 03 N.C 03
Relay
GND 03
Relay
04 NO
SW 04 01 04 01 04 Elevator Upper Limit Switch
SW 05 05 CT4P XR4P XR4P CT4P (blue)
GND 06 06 Relay (blue)
GND 07 07 N.C
SW 08 08
CZ8P CZ8P
023-53023
Paper Feed Tray Switch Lead Wire
COM
04 01 01
03 02 N.C N.C 02
N.C 02 03 N.C 03
Relay
NO
01 04 Elevator Lower Limit Switch
CT4P CT4P (blue)
Relay (blue)
059-53004
R-Ejection Side Wire Harness
023-53024
Print Drum Set Switch Lead Wire
US.RISO.COM
04 COM
01 01
03 01 03 02 N.C N.C 02
02 02 N.C 02 03 N.C 03
Relay
NO
Relay
01 03 01 04 Special Stripper Set Switch
CT3P CT3P CT4P CT4P (blue)
Relay (blue)
059-50001 059-50002
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB SUB-SYSTEM-PCB

(21) Connection between PCBs
059-53003
MAINSUB Wire Harness
CN6
SCLK 01 01 N.C.
MOSI (OUT) 02 02 N.C.
MISO (IN) 03 03 N.C.
SS1 04 04 N.C. CN1
SCLK 05 05 08 08 SCK
MOSI (OUT) 06 06 07 07 DI
MISO (IN) 07 07 06 06 DO
SS0 08 08 05 05 /CS
SCL 09 09 04 04 SCL
SDA 10 10 03 03 SDA
20 - 31
+3.3V 11 11 02 02 +3.3V
GND 12 12 01 01 GND
CZ12P CZ12P CZ8P CZ8P
US.RISO.COM
059-50001 CN35 AF
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB GND 01 01 GND
GND 02 02 GND
GND 03 03 GND
+24VA 04 04 +24VA
+24VA 05 05 +24VA
+24VA 06 06 +24VA
PH6P
CN8
SD-CARD
01 CD/DAT3 CN3
GND 01 01 GND
02 CMD 02 GND
03 VSS GND 02 +5V (Normal)
(22) Options 1
04 VDD +5V (Normal) 03 03

AF START 04 04 AF START
05 CLK 05 AF TxD
06 VSS AF TxD 05 AF RxD
AF RxD 06 06
07 DAT0 07 /AF RTS
08 DAT1 /AF RTS 07 AF CTS
AF CTS 08 08
09 DAT2 09 WAKU-UP
SDK-9BNS-K13-GS-TB
WAKU-UP 09 /AF EXIST
/AF EXIST 10 10
+5VS 11 11 +5VS
PH11P

046-91000
Job Separator IV External Relay Wire Assembly

CN5 Job Separator IV;N
GND 01 01 01 01 GND
N.C 02 02 02 02 N.C
/START Signal 03 03 03 03 /START Signal
/Stamp Signal 04 04 04 04 /Stamp Signal
GND 05 05 05 05 GND
+5VS 06 06 06 06 +5VS
PGND 07 07 07 07 PGND
+24V-OP 08 08 08 08 +24V-OP
/BUSY 09 09 09 09 /BUSY
Tape Jam 10 10 10 10 Tape Jam
/Tape Detection 11 11 11 11 /Tape Detection
/Sorter Detection 12 12 12 12 /Sorter Detection
XH12P N.C 13 13
RP13A-12PA-13PC(71)
20 - 32
Vendor Option
Coin vendor (CV-1), CV-2C Risograph,
or Card vendor (CR-1)
CN12
+5VS 01 01 +5VS
/Paper Feed Signal 02 02 /Paper Feed Signal
/Paper Ejection Signal 03 03 /Paper Ejection Signal
/Copying Signal 04 04 /Copying Signal
/Copy Allowance Signal 05 05 /Copy Allowance Signal
/Size Signal 06 06 /Size Signal
/Color Signal 07 07 /Color Signal
/Duplex Signal 08 08 /Duplex Signal
/EXT1 09 09 /EXT1
GND 10 10 GND
N.C 11 11 N.C
N.C 12 12 N.C
Connection Signal (GND) 13 13 Connection Signal (GND)
GND 14 14 GND
DF1B 14P
* The wire harness is included in the option.

The wire harness is the same for CV-1, CV-2C Risograph,
US.RISO.COM
and CR-1.
Supported by HL models only.
* The card counter and IC card are exclusive each other. * Used when the RISO Network kit (LAN) is installed.
059-50001
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB 059-53023
SUB-SYSTEM Relay Wire Harness 1
(23) Options 2
059-50002
SUB-SYSTEM-PCB
112-51001 112-51002
Card Counter IV;N CC Relay Wire Harness A CN1
Key Card Counter Wire Harness N.C 08 08 SCK CN2
CN24 07 07 DI SCL 01
01 01 GND 01 17 01 01 GND 06 06 DO SDA 02
02 02 GND 02 16 02 02 GND N.C 05 05 /CS +3.3V 03
03 03 CARD-CLK 03 15 03 03 CARD-CLK 04 04 SCL GND 04
04 04 /CARD-LST 04 14 04 04 /CARD-LST 03 03 SDA CZ4P
05 05 /CARD-DATA 05 13 05 05 /CARD-DATA 02 02 +3.3V

06 06 /CARD-REQ 06 12 06 06 /CARD-REQ 01 01 GND
07 07 RxD 07 11 07 07 RxD CZ8P CZ8P
08 08 TxD 08 10 08 08 TxD
09 09 /CUNT-OP 09 09 09 09 /CUNT-OP
Relay
10 10 /CUNT-SET 10 08 10 10 /CUNT-SET
11 11 /M Count 11 07 11 11 /M Count
12 12 /P Count 12 06 12 12 /P Count
13 13 /CARD-ACK 13 05 13 13 /CARD-ACK
14 14 +5VS 14 04 14 14 +5VS
15 15 +5VS 15 03 15 15 +5VS
D-SUB15P 16 02 N.C 16 16 /CARD-EXIST
17 01 N.C 17 17 GND
MiniCT17P * The MAINSUB wire harness is removed and
the SUB-SYSTEM Relay Wire Harness 2 is connected,
only when the IC card is installed.
IC Card CN27
+5VM 01 U01 +5VM
20 - 33
D- 02 U02 D- 059-53032
D+ 03 U03 D+ SUB-SYSTEM Relay Wire Harness 2 059-50002
GND 04 U04 GND SUB-SYSTEM-PCB
UBA-4RS-D14T-4D CN1
08 08 SCK CN2
07 07 DI SCL 01 01
06 06 DO SDA 02 02
05 05 /CS +3.3V 03 03
04 04 SCL GND 04 04
03 03 SDA CZ4P CZ4P
02 02 +3.3V
01 01 GND
CZ8P CZ8P
CN6 059-50002
SCLK 01 01 SUB-SYSTEM-PCB
MOSI (OUT) 02 02
MISO (IN) 03 03
SS1 04 04 CN1
SCLK 05 05 08 08 SCK CN2
MOSI (OUT) 06 06 07 07 DI SCL 01 01
MISO (IN) 07 07 06 06 DO SDA 02 02
SS0 08 08 05 05 /CS +3.3V 03 03
SCL 09 09 04 04 SCL GND 04 04
SDA 10 10 03 03 SDA CZ4P CZ4P
+3.3V 11 11 02 02 +3.3V
GND 12 12 01 01 GND
CZ12P CZ12P CZ8P CZ8P
US.RISO.COM
MEMO
20 - 34
MEMO
20 - 35
MEMO
20 - 36
CHAPTER 21: Electrical Components
Contents
1. Electrical Components Placement Diagram.......................................2

1-1. Overall Diagram............................................................................2
1-2. Electrical Components Placement Diagram.................................3
2. Electrical Components List..................................................................5
2-1. Sensors.........................................................................................5
2-2. Switch, Button, VR (potentiometer)...............................................6
2-3. Motor.............................................................................................7
2-4. Solenoid/clutch..............................................................................7
2-5. Fan................................................................................................7
2-6. Others...........................................................................................8
3. Fuse List.................................................................................................9
3-1. Power Assembly (PS30-MWW)
(SF9, SF5*5 series)......................................................................9
3-2. Power Assembly (PS28-NWW)
(SF5*3 series).............................................................................10
3-3. Fuse Position..............................................................................11
21 - 1
1. Electrical Components Placement Diagram
1-1. Overall Diagram
Master
removal
section
Master
making
section
Separation
section
Print drum
section
Paper
Unit placement diagram ejection
(Front side) section
Pressure section
FB section First and second

paper feed sections
Clamp section
Main drive
section
Unit placement diagram

(Back side)
21 - 2
レイアウト図(センサ・アクチュエータ)
SF mahine layout diagram (Sensor /actuator)
Front Side
Master compression motor FG sensor Ink bottle set switch Load pulse motor Master making unit cover
Master removal sensor TPH pressure sensor set switch
Master removal motor Master loading sensor
Master compression motor Master compression Master positioning sensor Cutter HP Switch Cutter standby switch
Master removal motor FG sensor plate HP sensor Thermal pressure motor
Front door set sensor Cutter (rotary)
TPH（R600)
Master disposal box safety switch
Paper feed pressure sensor Light pulse motor
Disposal box set sensor

Paper feed tray upper safety switch
Master end Sensor
Feed tray button sensor Master detection Sensor
MASTER-MAKING-PCB
Elevator upper limit sensor A Master making unit safety switch
Elevator upper limit sensor B Master making unit lock solenoid
1-2. Electrical Components Placement Diagram
Elevator motor
Paper detection sensor Print drum release button
21 - 3
Paper width potentiometer Master making unit drawer cover
safety switch
Separation fan 1, 2
R Inking motor FG sensor

Inking motor

Paper ejection wing home sensor
Paper ejection wing motor
Suction fan
Paper ejection motor
Power switch
Paper stripper unit set switch Print drum lock solenoid Paper ejection motor FG sensor
US.RISO.COM
Paper sensor (receive) DRUM-PCB;LL Print drum lock sensor Print drum set switch
Paper sensor (send) Ink overflow sensor / Print drum Thermistor (A3)
CEDレイアウト.xls
レイアウト図(センサ・アクチュエータ)
Rear Side
Clamp sensor A
Clamp motor Angle sensor 2 Clamp sensor B
Rear cover safety switch (eject side) Rear cover safety switch (feed side)
Read motor Angle sensor 1 Angle sensor 3 Print head carriage HP sensor Symbols description
Motor
VIDEO-RELAY-PCB
Solenoid

Vertical sliding pulse Clutch
motor
Fan motor
MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB
Passing
through sensor
Vertical HP sensor
Reflection type
PF-TRAY-PCB sensor
Cutout sensor
Main motor
Adjustable
21 - 4
Paper feed clutch
R resistor
Switch
SUB-SYSTEM-PCB
Actuator
attached
MASTER-RELAY-PCB
Encoder
Elevator lower limit
Print pressure control sensor Function Description
pulse motor
Base point
sensor control
Paper feed tray lower
Position-B sensor target
safety switch
Motor FG
Print pressure HP sensor sensor
Power
Transmission
US.RISO.COM
Pressure solenoid
CEDレイアウト.xls
2. Electrical Components List
2-1. Sensors
Part Name Section SF9 SF5*5 SF5*3 Remarks
Front door set sensor Main body section O O O

Master making unit lock sensor Main body section O O O
Position-B sensor Main drive section O O O
Vertical print positioning HP sensor Main drive section O O O
Print pressure HP sensor Main drive section O O O
Paper size detection sensor Paper feed section O O O
Paper detection sensor Paper feed section O O O
Feed tray button sensor Paper feed section O O O
Elevator upper limit sensor A Paper feed section O O -
Elevator upper limit sensor B Paper feed section O O O
Elevator lower limit sensor Paper feed section O O O
Paper feed pressure sensor Paper feed section O O -
Paper sensor (send) Paper feed section O O O
Paper sensor (receive) Paper feed section O O O
Paper ejection motor FG sensor Paper ejection section O O O
Paper ejection sensor Paper ejection section O O O
Paper ejection wing HP sensor Paper ejection section O - -
Inking motor FG sensor Print drum section O O O
Print drum lock sensor Print drum section O O O
Ink overflow sensor / Print drum thermistor (A3) Print drum section *1 *1 *1 *1: It attaches to a INK
sensor PCB and depends
Ink overflow sensor / Print drum thermistor (B4) Print drum section *1 *1 *1
on drum size.
Clamp sensor A Clamp section O O O
Clamp sensor B Clamp section O O O
Master removal motor FG sensor Master removal section O O O
Master compression motor FG sensor Master removal section O O O
Master loading sensor Master removal section O O O
Master disposal box set sensor Master removal section O O O
Master compression plate HP sensor Master removal section O O O
Master disposal jam sensor Master removal section O O O
TPH pressure sensor Master making section O O O
Master detection sensor Master making section O O O
Master end sensor Master making section O O O
Master positioning sensor Master making section O O O
Carriage HP sensor Scanning section O O O In the scanner unit
Angle sensor 1 Scanning section O O O In the scanner unit
Angle sensor 2 Scanning section O O O In the scanner unit
In the scanner unit (Cover
Angle sensor 3 Scanning section O O O
Open/Close detection)
21 - 5
Original detection sensor AF section (OP) OP OP OP

Original registration sensor AF section (OP) OP OP OP
Original edge sensor AF section (OP) OP OP OP
Original ejection sensor AF section (OP) OP OP OP
Original size width sensor 1 AF section (OP) OP OP OP
In the AF unit.
Original size length sensor 1 AF section (OP) OP OP OP
Original size length sensor 2 AF section (OP) OP OP OP
Cover open/close sensor AF section (OP) OP OP OP
2-2. Switch, Button, VR (potentiometer)

Rear cover safety switch (feeder side) Main body section O O O
Rear cover safety switch (ejection side) Main body section O O O
Power switch Main body section O O O
Print drum set switch Main body section O O O
Print drum release button Main body section O O O
Master making release button Main body section O O O
Paper feed tray upper safety switch Paper feed section O O O
Paper feed tray lower safety switch Paper feed section O O O
Paper stripper unit set switch Paper feed section O O O
Paper width potentiometer Paper feed section O O O
Ink bottle set switch Print drum section O O O
Master disposal box safety switch Master removal section O O O
In the cutter unit
Cutter standby switch (Shuttle) Master making section - - *2
*2: Only SF5030 SF5130
In the cutter unit
Cutter HP switch (Rotary) Master making section O O *3
*3: Besides SF5030 SF5130
Master making unit safety switch Master making section O O O
Master making unit cover set switch Master making section O O O
21 - 6
2-3. Motor

Main motor Main body section O O - For 150rpm DC motor
Main motor (LL) Main body section - - O For 130rpm DC motor
Vertical pulse motor Main drive section O O O Pulse motor (PM)
Print pressure control pulse motor Main drive section O O O Pulse motor (HB)
Elevator motor Paper feed section O O O DC motor (445)
Paper ejection motor Paper ejection section O O O DC motor (555)
Paper ejection wing pulse motor Paper ejection section O - - Pulse motor (PM)
Inking motor Print drum section O O O
Clamp motor Clamp section O O O DC motor (445)
Master removal motor Master removal section O O O DC motor (555)
Master compression motor Master removal section O O O DC motor (445)
Write pulse motor Master making section O O O Pulse motor (PM)
Load pulse motor Master making section O O O Pulse motor (PM)
Thermal pressure motor Master making section O O O DC motor (445)
In the cutter unit
Cutter (Shuttle) Master making section - - *2
*2: Only SF5030 SF5130
In the cutter unit
Cutter (Rotary) Master making section O O *3
*3: Besides SF5030 SF5130
In the scanner unit (Motor
Read motor Scanning section O O O
ASSY)
Transport motor AF section (OP) OP OP OP In the AF unit
2-4. Solenoid/clutch

Master making unit lock solenoid Main body section O O O
Print drum lock solenoid Main body section O O O
Pressure solenoid Main drive section O O O
Paper feed clutch Paper feed section O O - For 150rpm
Paper feed clutch Paper feed section - - O For 130rpm
Paper feed reverse-rotation prevention solenoid Paper feed section (OP) OP OP OP
Scraper clutch Paper feed section (OP) OP OP OP
Paper feed clutch AF section (OP) OP OP OP It's used in the AF unit
Registration clutch AF section (OP) OP OP OP It's used in the AF unit
Switch-back clutch AF section (OP) OP OP OP It's used in the AF unit
2-5. Fan

Separation Fan 1, 2 Paper ejection section O O O
Suction Fan Paper ejection section O O O
21 - 7
2-6. Others

MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB Main body section O O O
SUB-SYSTEM-PCB Main body section O O O
PS30-MWW Main body section O O - For 150rpm
PS28-MWW Main body section - - O For 130rpm
MASTER-RELAY-PCB Main body section O O O
PFR-PCB Paper feed section O O O
PF-TRAY-PCB Paper feed section O O O
MASTER-MAKING-PCB Master making section O O O
*4: SF9× (R600, A3, B4,
TPH (R600) Master making section *4 * -
Ledger machine)
*5: Only SF54,SF53 (D600,
TPH (D600-A3) Master making section *5 *5 *5
A3, Ledger machine)
*6: Only SF52, SF51, SF50
TPH (D600-B4) Master making section *6 *6 *6 (D600, B4, Ledger, A4
machine)
Master making section,
RF-PCB;1 ch O O O
print drum section
Master making section,
INTERNAL-ANT-PCB O O O
print drum section
DRUM-PCB Print drum section O O O
VIDEO-RELAY-PCB Scanning section O O O
SUB-SYSTEM-PCB; IC Main body section (OP) O O OP
SUB-SYSTEM-PCB; LAN Main body section (OP) O O OP
21 - 8
3. Fuse List
3-1. Power Assembly (PS30-MWW)
(SF9, SF5*5 series)
When turning power OFF,

Fuse No. Section Connected parts
then ON
F001
Primary power Machine power cannot be turned
(100/200 type) Main power supply
system ON.
250V 10A
T20-437
F451
M-OUT2 Paper ejection motor lock is Paper ejection motor
250V 1.6A
detected.
Vertical sliding pulse motor

Power supply unit (standard paper feed tray)
Paper feed clutch
Scraper clutch
Suction fan
Ink motor
Pressure solenoid
F601 T98-947 Elevator motor
24V-A
250V 3.15A 24V-A is not turned ON. Paper feed reverse-rotation prevention solenoid
Scanner motor
Scanner lamp
AF
Light pulse motor
Load pulse motor
Cutter motor
Read pulse motor
Paper wing pulse motor

Print pressure control pulse motor
Copy counter
Master counter
F602 T98-948 Separation fan A
24V-B
250V 6.3A 24V-B is not turned ON. Separation fan B
Master making lock solenoid
Master disposal motor
Clamp motor
F604 T98-735
24V-OP Job separator
250V 3.15A 24V-OP is not turned ON.
21 - 9
3-2. Power Assembly (PS28-NWW)

(SF5*3 series)
When turning power OFF,

Fuse No. Section Connected parts
then ON
F001
Primary power Machine power cannot be turned
(100/200 type) Main power supply
system ON.
250V 10A
Vertical sliding pulse motor

Power supply unit (standard paper feed tray)
Paper feed clutch
Scraper clutch
Suction fan
Ink motor
Pressure solenoid
F601 T98-947 Elevator motor
24V-A
250V 3.15A 24V-A is not turned ON. Paper feed reverse-rotation prevention solenoid
Scanner motor
Scanner lamp
AF
Light pulse motor
Load pulse motor
Cutter motor
Read pulse motor
Paper wing pulse motor

Print pressure control pulse motor
Copy counter
Master counter
Separation fan A
F602 T98-948
24V-B Separation fan B
250V 6.3A 24V-B is not turned ON.
Master making lock solenoid
Paper ejection motor
Master disposal motor
Clamp motor
F604 T98-735
24V-OP Job separator
250V 3.15A 24V-OP is not turned ON.
21 - 10
3-3. Fuse Position
F601
F602 F604 F451
F601
F001
21 - 11
MEMO
21 - 12
SF 9/5x5/5x3
Technical Manual
Reproduction and duplication prohibited.
Edited and published by: Overseas Technical Department,
Riso Kagaku Corporation.
The contents of this manual are subject to change

without notice to permit product improvements.

SF9 5x5 5x3 Series (SM)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SF9 5x5 5x3 Series (SM)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IE-02192-01

Copyright: 2016 RISO KAGAKU CORPORATION

RISO Inc. Technical Operations US.RISO.COM

RISO Inc. Technical Operations US.RISO.COM

CHAPTER 1: Maintenance Notes

1. Never let the battery short-circuited.

[Replacement of the Lithium Battery]

[Remplacement de la batterie au lithium] < French >

[Battery Directive 2006/66/EC]

Important Safety Precautions

1. Always disconnect electrical supply before placing hands in the machine.

II. Protection of the machine:

I. To avoid electrical failure:

II. Protection of the electrical components:

Wire harness connector

Press the ends.

Press the center, firmly.

1-1. General Notes on the Work

 Always unplug the power plug before conducting maintenance work.

1-2. Notes on other inspection and maintenance work

Assembly and Installation

(Protrusions and holes for positioning parts Half pierced section)

Electrical system work Wiring bundle bands (bar lock ties)

1-3. Sensors Being Used

Photoelectric sensor types

Interrupt types Actuator types

Receiver Receiver Prism Lens

[ Standard Tool List ]

No. 2 (250 mm) Steel scale 150 mm

No. 2 (100 mm–150 mm) Feeler gauge

6 mm (100 mm–150 mm) Nipper

Standard screwdriver 3 mm (100 mm–150 mm) Small flashlight

Nut driver 8 mm (100 mm–150 mm) Soldering iron 20 W–30 W

(box driver) 7 mm (100 mm–150 mm) File Flat, round

High frequency driver 2.5 mm

5.0 mm 4.0 mm 3.0 mm

021-16007-005 Screen Spring (2 pieces required) Cut the

Jig: 8mm (diameter) x 160mm (length) Jig: 4 mm (diameter) x 120 mm (length)

4. Exterior Cover Removal

Master making unit front cover

Master making unit front cover

Side cover (paper ejection)

Cover (rear right)

Scanner cover (paper ejection)

Stage cover Side cover (paper ejection)

Side cover (paper feed)

Cover (rear left)

Operation panel Scanner cover (paper feed)

Side cover (paper feed)

Scanner cover (rear)

* The illustration is the appearance of SF5*5 series

Cover (rear right)

Side cover (paper feed)

Rear cover: SF5*5 series/SF5*3 series Cover (rear left)

Around the Scanner

Scanner cover (rear)

Scanner cover (paper feed)

Scanner cover (paper ejection)

Power Supply Unit Assembly

Power Supply Unit Assembly MAIN-SYSTEM-PCB Assembly

List of installation procedure

How to use the installation procedure

6-2. Auto Document Feeder AF-VII

Rear cover: SF55 series/SF53 series Cover (rear left)